Nalanda Non Residential Specifications Part II Services

DEVELOPMENT OF PERMENENT CAMPUS OF NU, RAJGIR
TENDER FOR CONSTRUCTION AND DEVELOPMENT WORKS OF NON

RESIDENTIAL PARCEL WITHIN
PROPOSED PERMANENT CAMPUS (PHASE I) FOR
NALANDA UNIVERSITY, AT RAJGIR, BIHAR.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS PART- II

(SERVICES WORKS)
ARCHITECT AND PLANNERS

VASTUSHILPA CONSULTANTS
“ Sangath” Thaltej Road, Ahmedabad- 380054 Phone: 079 27454537-39
Fax: 079 27452006, Email: [email protected], URL: http://www.sangath.org
Client: NU TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Page 1 of 325

CONTENTS
SR. No. Name of Sub-Head
14 SANITARY FIXTURES & FITTINGS
15 INTERNAL DRAINAGE
16 EXTERNAL PLUMBING WORKS
17 PUMPS TREATMENT SYSTEMS & EQUIPMENTS
18 FIRE FIGHTING WORKS
19 ELECTRICAL WORKS
20 ELEVATORS
21 LANDSCAPING
22 ROAD WORK

14 SANITARY FIXTURES & FITTINGS
SUBHEAD: A, B, C
SANITARY INSTALLATION
DRAINAGE
WATER SUPPLY
FIRE FIGHTING

GENERAL NOTES PLUMBING WORKS
GENERAL NOTES:
1. Detail of sanitary fixtures is for the information of the contractor only. However
model / makes of all sanitary fixtures shall be selected by Architect / Interior
designer / client and the same shall be binding for execution.
2. No additional fixing cost shall be paid for change in type of sanitary fixture or
fitting.
3. Provision of extension piece for final connection of CP fitting shall be supplied
and installed by the contractor accordingly (as required).
4. For make of any item refer list of approved makes as given in technical
specifications.
5. The rate shall include cost of materials, labor, loading and unloading,
transportation, scaffolding and all other incidental charges etc., with all leads
and lifts, complete as per specifications, drawings and as directed by the
Engineer-in-charge.
6. All required civil work shall be measured and paid in relevant civil tender items.
(If not specified in item description)
7. The rate quoted shall be for all floors, all heights and all places. Sample shall
be approved prior to procurement
8. All gaps between wall / floor and sanitary vessels shall be filled with sanitary
grade sealant.
9. CP Brass or SS screws shall be used for fixing sanitary fixtures and accessories
in toilet, bath, and pantry and kitchen area.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:
a. All Fixtures and fittings shall be provided with all such accessories as are
required to complete the item in working condition whether specifically
mentioned or not in the Schedule of Quantities, Specifications and Drawings.
b. All Fixtures and accessories shall be fixed in accordance with a set pattern
matching the tiles or interior finish as per Architectural/Interior designer’s
requirements. Wherever necessary the fittings shall be centered to dimensions
and pattern desired.
c. Fixing screws shall be half round head Chromium Plated brass with C.P.
washers wherever required as per directions of Project Manager.
d. All Fittings and Fixtures shall be fixed in a neat workmanlike manner true to
Levels and Heights shows on the drawings and in accordance with the
manufacturer’s recommendations. Care shall be taken to fix all Inlet and Outlet
Pipes at correct positions. Faulty locations shall be made good and any damage
to the finished floor, tiling or terrace shall be made good at Contractors cost.
e. When directed, Contractor shall install Fixtures and accessories in a mock-up
room for the approval of the Project Manager. Sample room Fixtures may be
reused on the works if undamaged, but no additional payment for fixing or
dismantling shall be admissible.
f. Supporting and fixing devices: The contractor shall provide all supporting and
fixing devices necessary to install the sanitary fixtures and fittings securely in
position. The fixing devices shall be rigidly anchored into the building structure.
The devices shall be rust resistant and shall be so fixed that they do not present
an unsightly look in the final assembly. Where the location demands, the

Architects may instruct the contractor to provide chromium plated or other

similarly finished fixing devices. In such circumstances the contractor shall
arrange to supply fixing devices and install them complete with appropriate
vibration isolating pads, washers and gaskets.
g. Final Installation: The contractor shall install all sanitary fixtures and fittings in
their final position in accordance with approved trial assemblies and as shown
on drawings. The installation shall be complete with all supply and waste
connections. The connection between building piping system and the sanitary
fixtures shall be through proper unions and flanged to facilitate
removal/replacement of sanitary fixtures without disturbing the built in piping
system. All unions and flanges shall match in appearance with other exposed
fittings.
h. Fixtures shall be mounted rigid, plumb and true to alignment. The outlets of
water closet pans and similar appliances shall be examined to ensure that
outlet ends are butting on the receiving pipes before making the joints. It shall
be ensured that the receiving pipes are clear of obstruction. When fixtures are
being mounted, attention shall be paid to the possibility of movement and
settlement by other causes. Overflows shall be arranged as to give visible
warning and discharge. A check shall be made to ensure that necessary
anchoring devices have been provided for supporting water closets, wash
basins, sinks and other appliances.
i. Joints/gaps between all sanitary appliances/fixtures and the floor/walls shall
be caulked with an approved mildew resistant sealant, having antifungal
properties, of color and shade to match that of the appliances/fixture and the
floor/wall to the extent possible.
j. Protection against Damage: The contractor shall take every precaution to
protect all sanitary fixtures against damage, misuse, crazing, staining
breakage and pilferage by providing proper wrapping and locking arrangement
till the completion of the installation. At the time of handing over, the
contractor shall clean, disinfect and polish all fixtures and fittings. Any fixtures
and fittings found damaged, cracked chipped, stained or scratched shall be
removed and new fixtures and fittings free from defects shall be installed at
his own cost to complete the work.
APPROVAL: The materials for water supply, plumbing and sanitary works which
are to be procured by the contractor shall conform to the relevant IS specifications
and on the approved make list of the tender, and shall be approved by the
Architect / Engineer-in-Charge prior to installation of fixture and the approved
samples shall be maintained at site till the completion of work. The approved
makes of main items are, however specified in the list of approved makes of
materials herein before.
PRECAUTIONS: While carrying out pipe line work in case the contractor
encounters any interference with other Services such as cables, conduits etc, he
shall take sufficient precautions in order to prevent any damage to them. If any
damage occurs, it shall be rectified to its original condition at his own cost to the
satisfaction of the officers concerned with such services. The contractor shall
ensure that all inserts, pipe lines embedded in structural members or sleeves are
placed in position in co-ordination with civil work.

All water supply, plumbing and sanitary work services shall be handed over to
Engineer-in-charge complete in all respects on completion of the work. Incomplete
work will not be taken over. Any loss or damage to these services due to any
reasons by anybody whatsoever before handing over will be at contractor’s risk
and cost. Any damage to any structural/finishing work done during the testing or
rectification shall be made good by the contractor at his own cost and risk.
COST TO COVERE THE FOLLOWING: The rates quoted by the renderer under
this contract shall cover the cost of all the Following elements
 CONNECTION TO MECHANICAL EQUIPMENTS BY OTHER

AGENCIES:-All inlets, outlets, valves, piping and other incidental work
connected with installation of all mechanical equipment supplied by other
agencies shall be carried out by the Plumbing contractor in accordance
with the drawings, requirements for proper performance of equipment,
manufacturer’s instructions and the directions of the Project Manager. The
equipment to be supplied by other agencies consists mainly of Kitchen,
Laundry, Air-conditioning, Water Treatment and other similar equipment.
The connections to the various equipment shall be effected through proper
unions and isolating valves. The work of effecting connections shall be
executed in consultation with and according to the requirements of
equipment suppliers, under the directions of the Project Manager. The
various aspects of connection work shall be executed in a manner similar
to the work of respective trades mentioned elsewhere in these
specifications.
 MISCELLANEOUS WORK : The contractor carrying out the construction

work shall take effective measures to carefully open out all existing
channels, culverts, bridges, pipelines, conduits, water courses, sewer,
drains, electrical cables, transmission lines and their supports and all
works buried or otherwise where such services have to be interfered with
the purpose of the construction of the works. He shall provide and arrange
all necessary temporary supports and diversions if necessary
across/under/even through along sides of the trenches and all other parts
of construction work for all such channels, culverts, bridges, pipe lines,
conduits.
 CLEARANCE FOR ROADS AND FOOT PATHS : The contractor shall

arrange to carry out all works with least interference practicable with
public footpath and vehicular traffic and with existing waste water or storm
water drainage arrangements and provide all necessary road barriers,
fences, notices, lights, gangways, access crossings, diversions for traffic,
temporary drains, dewatering channels, chutes pumping or water lifting
arrangements and all other facilities for the proper execution of the works
to the approval and satisfaction in all respects of the Engineer-in-Charge.

Any work carried out by the contractor in this connection shall be deemed
as temporary works incidental to the construction work.
 LOCATION: The rates quoted by the bidder under this contract shall be
applicable for the work at all places, all heights and all levels.
 DEWATERING: The rates quoted by the bidder under this contract shall
include bailing or pumping out all the water which may accumulate during
the progress of the work either through seepage, springs, rain or any other
cause.
 FORMALITIES WITH STATUTORY BODIES: The work shall be carried

out in a manner complying in all respects with requirement of relevant
bye-laws of the Municipal Committee/Municipal Corporation/Development.
Authority/Improvement Trust under the jurisdiction of which the work is
to be executed or as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge and, unless
otherwise mentioned, nothing extra shall be paid on this account. The
contractor has to satisfy all the requirement of fire brigade, drainage and
hydraulic engineering department of Municipal Corporation.
WORKMANSHIP – GENERAL
Workmanship and general finish shall be of first class quality and in accordance
with best workshop practice. All similar items of the Plant and their component
parts shall be completely interchangeable. Spare parts shall be manufactured from
the same materials as the originals and shall fit all similar items. All pipe crossing
shall be provided with sleeves and fire sealant wherever it’s applicable. Machining
fits on renewable parts shall be accurate and to specified tolerances so that
replacements made to may be readily installed. All equipment shall operate
without excessive vibration and with minimum noise. All revolving parts shall be
truly balanced both statically and dynamically so that when running at normal
speeds at any load up to the maximum there shall be no vibration due to lack of
balance. All parts which can be worn or damaged by dust shall be totally enclosed
in dust proof housings. All materials incorporated in the work shall be most
suitable for duty concerned, free from imperfections, selected for long life and
minimum maintenance. All necessary accessories required for satisfactory and
safe operation of the Plant shall be supplied by the Contractor unless it is
specifically excluded from his scope. All valves shall be closing on clockwise
rotation of the hand wheel. The effort required to close / open under all operating
conditions shall be limited to 7 kg. The direction of opening / closing shall be cast
on the hand wheel. All flanges shall be drilled in accordance with requirements of
IS: 1538 All flanges shall be full or spot faces on the back side. The flange
thickness shall be uniform throughout. Flange outside periphery shall be
concentric with the bore. Flanges shall be finished smooth on periphery also
Castings and fabricated materials shall be finished smooth all over.

SCOPE
Work under this section consists of furnishing all labor, materials equipment and
appliances necessary and required to completely install the water supply &
drainage system as required by the drawings, specifications given hereinafter and
given in the bill of quantities.
The scope of this section comprise of the supply, installation testing and
commissioning of piping network for water supply for internal & external services
as follows:
 Internal/External Sewer Drainage
 Internal/External Storm water Drainage
 Internal/External Water Supply
 Bore Well / Municipal water
 Drinking Water Supply Distribution
 Flushing water supply Distribution
 Connection to various mechanical and others equipment to be supplied and
installed by the other specialist vendors.
 Supply installation, testing & commissioning of RO system for drinking
water.
Without restricting to the generality of the foregoing, the water supply system
shall include the following:-
i. All water lines to different parts of building and making connection from
source etc.
ii. Pipe protection and painting.
iii. Providing Hot water supply and return lines and insulation of hot water pipe
lines.
iv. Control valves, masonry chambers and other appurtenances.
v. Connections to all toilets kitchen equipment, tanks and appliances.
vi. Excavation and refilling of pipe trenches, wherever necessary.
vii. Trenches for taking pipe lines for these services if required.

APPLICABLE CODES
AND
STANDARDS – PLUMBING & FIRE FIGHTING
WORKS

1.0 APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS
All equipment, supply, erection, testing and commissioning shall comply with the
requirements of Indian Standards and code of practice given below as amended
up to the date of submission of Tender. All equipment and material being supplied
`shall meet the requirements of BIS and other relevant standard and codes.
i. General
IS: 325 Three phase induction Motors

PVC insulated cables for working voltages unto &
IS: 694
including 1 100 V.
IS: 779 Specification for water meters (domestic type).
Code of Basic requirements for water supply drainage

IS: 1172
and sanitation.
IS: 1726 Specification for cast iron manhole covers and frames.
IS: 1742 Code of practice for building drainage.
Code of practice selection, installation and maintenance

IS: 2064
of sanitary appliance.
IS: 2065 Code of practice for water supply in buildings.
IS: 2104 Specification for water meter for boxes (domestic type)
IS: 2373 Specification for water meter (bulk type)
IS: 2379 Color code for identification of pipelines
Code of practice for fixing rainwater gutters and down

IS: 2527
pipes for roof drainage.
Recommended practice for hot dip galvanizing on iron
IS: 2629
and steel.
IS: 3114 Code of practice for laying of cast iron pipes
Code of Practice for ancillary structures in sewerage

IS: 4111( Part– 1)
system: part 1 manhole.
IS: 4127 Code practice for laying glazed stoneware pipes.
Code of practice for sanitary pipe work above ground

IS: 5329
for buildings.
Recommended practice for design and fabrication of
IS: 6159
material, prior to galvanizing.

IS: 8321 Glossary of terms applicable to plumbing work.
Requirements for water filtration equipment: Part 1

IS: 8419(part- 1)
filtration medium sand and gravel.
Requirements for water filtration equipment: part 2

IS: 8419 (part-2)
under drainage system.
Code of practice for provision and maintenance of water

IS: 9668
supplies and firefighting.
Glossary of terms relating to water supply and
IS: 10446
sanitation.
IS: 11149 Rubber Gaskets.
Code of practice for plumbing in multistoried buildings:
IS: 12183 (part – 1)
part 1 water supply
IS: 12251 Code of practice of drainage of building basements.
IS: 5572 Code of practice for sanitary pipe work.

Specification for design, installation, testing and
BS: 6700 maintenance of services supplying water for domestic
use within buildings and their cartilages.
BS:8301 Code of practice for building drainage.
Sanitary tap ware, waste fittings for basins, bidets and

BSEN: 274
baths. General technical specifications.
ii. PIPES AND FITTINGS:
Specification for pre cast concrete pipes (with and without

IS: 458
reinforcement)
IS: 651 Salt glazed stone ware pipes and fittings
BIS : 1239 Mild steel, tubes, tubular and other wrought steel fittings: Part 1 Mild
(Part 1) Steel tubes.
BIS : 1239 Mild Steel tubes, tubular and other wrought steel fittings: Part 2 Mild
(Part 2) Steel tubular and other wrought steel pipe fittings
BIS : 1879 Malleable cast iron pipe fittings
BIS : 2643 Dimensions for pipe threads for fastening purposes: Part 1 Basic profile
(Part 1) and dimensions
BIS : 2643
Dimensions for pipe threads for fastening purposes: Part 2 Tolerances.
(Part 2)
BIS : 2643 Dimensions for pipe threads for fastening purposes: Part 3 Limits of
(Part 3) sizes.

BIS: 3468 Pipe nuts.

Centrifugally cast (sun) iron spigot and socket soil, waste and ventilating
BIS : 3989
pipes, fittings and accessories
BIS : 4346 Specifications for washers for use with fittings for water services
BIS : 4711 Methods for sampling steel pipes, tubes and fittings
BIS : 6392 Steel pipe flanges
Cast iron and malleable cast iron flanges for general engineering
BIS : 6418
purposes
Specification for horizontally cast iron double flanged pipe for water, gas
BIS : 7181
and sewage
IS: 13592 UPVC Pipes & Fittings - Internal Drainage
IS: 4985 UPVC Pipes and Fittings for Rainwater
IS: 15328 External Sewer Drainage
IS: 4346 Specifications for washers for use with fittings for water services.
iii. VALVES:
Specification for copper alloy gauge, globe and check valves for water
IS: 778
works purposes.
Specification for sluice valves for water works purposed (50 mm to
IS: 780
300 mm size).
Specification copper alloy float valves (horizontal plunger type) for
IS: 1703
water supply fittings.
Specification for surface valves for water works purposes (350 mm to
IS: 2906
1200 mm size)
IS: 3950 Specification for surface boxes for sluice valves.
IS: 12992
Safety relief valves, spring loaded design.
(part - 1)
IS: 13095 Butterfly valves for general purposes.
IS : 15778 CPVC Pipes and Fittings
IS:771(part
to 3) Specification for glazed fire clay sanitary appliances.

Specification for flushing cistern for water closets and urinal (other
IS: 744 than plastic cistern)
Specifications for cast copper alloy screw down bib taps and stop
IS: 781 valves for water services.
IS: 1700 Specification for drinking fountains.
IS:2548 (part Specification for plastic seats and covers for water closets part 1
–2) thermo set seats and covers.
IS:2556 (part Specification for vitreous sanitary appliances (vitreous china) part 1
-1) general requirement.
-2) specific requirements of wash – down water closets.
-3) specific requirements of squatting pans.
-4) specific requirements of washbasins.
IS:2556 (part Specification for vitreous sanitary appliances (vitreous china) part
6 Sec 2) 3specific requirements of urinals, section 2 half stall urinals.
6 Sec 4) specific requirements of urinals, section 4 partition slabs.
6 Sec 5) specific requirements of urinals, section 5waste fittings.
Specification for vitreous sanitary appliances (vitreous china) part 6
IS:2556 (part specific requirements of urinals, section 6 water spreaders for half
6 Sec 6) stall urinals.
-7) specific requirements of half round channels.
-8) specific requirements of siphoning wash down water closets.
Specification for vitreous sanitary appliances (vitreous china) part 11
2556 (part -7) specific requirements of shower rose.
-12) specific requirements of floor traps.
-15) specific requirements of universal water closet.
IS: 2692 Specification for ferrule for water services.

Glossary of terms relating to vitreous enamel ware and ceramic
IS: 2717 metal system.
Specifications for waste plug and its accessories for sinks and wash
IS: 2963 basins.

Specification for waste plug and its accessories for sinks and wash
IS: 3311 basins.
IS: 5961 Specification for cast iron gratings for drainage purposes.
Specification for copper alloy fancy single taps, combination tap
IS: 8931 assembly and stop valves for water services.

iv. WATER QUALITY AND TOLERANCE:
IS:3025
Method of sampling and test (physical and chemical) for water and
(part 1to
waste water.
44)
Tolerance limits for sewages effluents discharged into island surface
IS: 4764
waters.
IS: 10500 Drinking water
v. PUMPS AND VESSELS:
IS: 1520 Specification for horizontal centrifugal pumps for clear cold fresh water.
IS: 2825 Code of unfired pressure vessels.

IS: 5600 Specification for sewage and drainage pumps.
IS: 8034 Specification for submersible pump sets for clear, cold, fresh water.
IS: 8418 Specification for horizontal centrifugal self-priming pumps.
vi. FIRE FIGHTING EQUIPMENT :
NFPA: 14 Installation of Standpipe & Hose System
NFPA: 20 Installation of Stationary pump for Fire Protection

BIS: 636 Non-percolating flexible firefighting delivery hose
BIS: 884 Specification for first aid hose reel for fire fighting
Specification for couplings, double male and double female,
BIS: 901
instantaneous pattern for firefighting.
BIS: 902 Suction hose couplings for firefighting purposes
Specification for fire hose delivery couplings, branch pipe, nozzles and
BIS: 903
nozzle spanner.
Specification for 2-way and 3-way suction collecting heads for
BIS: 904
firefighting purposes
Specification for suction strainers, cylindrical type for
BIS: 907
firefightingpurposes.
BIS: 908 Specification for fire hydrant, stand post type
BIS: 909 Specification for underground fire hydrant, sluice valve type
BIS: 910 Specification for portable chemical foam fire extinguisher
BIS: 933 Specification for portable chemical foam fire extinguisher

Code of practice for fire safety of building (general): Firefighting

BIS: 1648
equipment and its maintenance
BIS: 2171 Specification for portable fire extinguishers dry powder (cartridge type)
Selection, installation and maintenance of first aid fire extinguishers –
BIS: 2190
Code of practice
BIS: 2871 Specification for branch pipe, universal, for fire fighting purposes
Specification for fire extinguishers, carbon dioxide type (portable and
BIS: 2878
trolley mounted).
Code of practice for installation and maintenance of internal fire hydrants
BIS: 3844
and hose reel on premises.
BIS: 5290 Specification for landing valves
Specification for coupling, branch pipe, nozzle, used in hose reel tubing
BIS 5714
for fire fighting
BIS: 8423 Specification for controlled percolation type hose for fire fighting
BIS: Specification for higher capacity dry powder fire extinguisher (trolley
10658 mounted).
BIS:
Code of practice for fire safety of libraries and archives buildings
11460
External hydrant systems – Provision and maintenance – Code of
BIS: 1309
practice
BIS: 5514
(Parts 1 to Reciprocating internal combustion engines: Performance
7)
2.0 MANDATORY TESTS / OPTIONAL TESTS:-
a. All water supply pipes, fittings and valves shall be tested by hydrostatic
pressure of min. 1.5 times, the working pressure and subject to minimum
of 7 kg/cm2 in any case and with the consent of Project Manager.
b. All drainage / Non Pressure pipes shall be either mirror /smoke test for
proper alignment, and should be laid at invert level as mentioned in
approved drawings.
c. Pressure shall be maintained for a period of at least TWELVE hours without

appreciable drop in the pressure after fixing at site. (+10 %). A test register
shall be maintained and all entries shall be signed and dated by
Contractor(s) and Engineer.
d. In addition to the sectional testing carried out during the construction,

Contractor shall test the entire installation after connections to the

overhead tanks or pumping system or mains. He shall rectify all leakages,

and shall replace all defective materials in the system. Any damage done
due to carelessness, open or burst pipes or failure of fittings, to the building,
furniture and Fixtures shall be made good during the defects liability period
without any extra cost.
e. After completion of the water supply system, Plumbing Contractor shall test
each valve by closing and opening it a number of times to observe if it is
working efficiently. Valves which do not effectively operate shall be
replaced by new ones at no extra cost and the same shall be tested as
above
f. Testing charges including incidental charge and cost of sample for testing
shall be borne by the contractors for all mandatory tests.
g. Testing charges for optional tests shall be paid by the Dept. However, the
incidental charges and cost of sample for testing shall be borne by the
contractor.
h. In case of non-I.S. materials, it shall be the responsibility of the contractor

to establish the conformity of material with relevant I.S. specification by
carrying out necessary tests. Testing charges including incidental charge
and cost of sample for testing shall be borne by the contractors for such
tests.
3.0 Testing, tolerances, Acceptance and mode of payment:-
a. The materials should pass all tests and tolerance in dimensional, chemical,
physical properties should be within the limit as stipulated in relevant I.S.
for acceptance. Such materials will be accepted as standard.
b. Payments shall be restricted to standard unit mass, or as specified in the

schedule, without making any cost adjustment towards mass or any other
properties provided the material pass all the tests and tolerance are within
the specified limit.
4.0 MEASUREMENT
a. Pipes: Pipes shall be measured per linear meter (to the nearest cm) and
shall be inclusive of all fittings e.g. couplings, tees, bends, elbows, unions,
deduction for valves shall be made, cutting holes chases and making good
the same and all items mentioned in the specifications and Schedule of
Quantities.

b. Gunmetal and cast iron valves shall be measured by numbers. Single

flanges shall be measured by numbers (per single flange) and shall include
bolts, nuts, washers and 3mm thick rubber gasket complete Pair of flanges
shall be measured by number of pairs and shall include bolts, nuts,
washers, and 3 mm thick rubber gaskets complete.
c. Insulation: Insulation for hot water pipes shall be measured per linear
meter (to the nearest cm) along the center line of pipe and shall be
measured over all fittings and flanges. No separate or additional payment
shall be made for insulation of Bends, Tees, Flanges or Other Fittings and
Valves. The rate shall include all items specified in the Schedule of
Quantities and given in the specifications.
Aluminum cladding/Plaster over the insulated pipes shall be measured by

square meter area of the finished surface. The rate shall be inclusive of all
items given in the Schedule of Quantities.
d. Painting: Painting for Pipes and over insulation shall be measured per
linear meter over finished surface and shall include all valves and fittings
for which no deduction shall be made.
e. Connections to Water Tanks:
The contractor shall provide all inlets, outlets, washouts, vents, ball cocks,
overflow, control valves and all such other piping connections including level
indicator to water storage tanks as called for.
Suitable float controls of an approved make, securely fixed to the tank
independent of the inlet pipe and set in a position so that water inlet into
the tank is cut off when filled up to the water line. The water level in the
tanks shall be adjusted to 25mm below the lip of the overflow pipe. Fullway
gate/ball valves of approved make shall be provided as near the tank as
practicable on every outlet pipe from the storage tank except the overflow
pipe.
The Overflow pipe shall be so placed as to allow the discharge of water
being readily seen. The overflow pipe shall be of size indicated. A stop valve
shall also be provided on the inlet water connection to the tank. The outlet
pipes shall be fixed approximately 75mm above the bottom of the tank
towards which the floor of the tank is sloping to enable the tank to be
emptied for cleaning. The ball valves shall conform to Indian Standard IS:
1703-1968
5.0 DISINFECTION
After completion of the work Contractor shall flush clean the entire system with
the city’s filtered water after connection has been made. After the first flushing,

commercial bleaching powder is to be added to achieve a dosage of 2 to 3 mg/l

of water in the system added and flushed. This operation should be performed
twice to ensure that the system is fully disinfected and usable. The Commissioning
would not be considered complete without performing the Disinfection.
6.0 Post construction Inspection and testing:
After completion of work and during the maintenance liability period of contract,
the work shall be subjected to “Post construction and testing”. In case, if the
materials incorporated in the work are found to be inferior, though the sample
collected from the materials might have been passed at the time of execution, it
shall be the responsibility of the contractor to replace the same without any cost
to the department failing which the department may rectify the same at the risk
and cost of the contractor or the department may accept the same as
substandard, and cost be adjusted from the outstanding security deposit as per
the terms and condition of the contract for the work.
7.0 PRE COMMISSIONING:
Ensure that all pipes are free from debris and obstructions.
8.0 The installation of the sanitary fixtures and fittings shall be as per the shop
drawings approved by the Architect/Consultant. The contractor shall have to
assemble at least one set of each type of sanitary fixtures and fittings in order to
determine precisely the required supply and disposal connections. Relevant
instructions from manufacturers shall be followed as applicable. This trial
assembly shall be developed to determine the location of puncture holes, holding
devices etc. which will be required for final installation of all sanitary fixtures and
fittings. The above assembly shall be subject to final approval by the Architect /
Interior Designer. The fixtures in the trial assembly can be re-used for final
installation without any additional payments for fixing or dismantling of the
fixtures.
9.0 OPERATING INSTRUCTION & MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Upon completion and commissioning of part Plumbing / Sanitary & Fire

Protection system the contractor shall submit a draft copy of comprehensive
operating instructions, maintenance schedule and log sheets for all systems
and equipment included in this contract. This shall be supplementary to
manufacturer’s operating and maintenance manuals. Upon approval of the
draft, the contractor shall submit four (4) complete bound sets of typewritten
operating instructions and maintenance manuals; one each for retention by
Consultant and Owner’s site representative and two for Owners Operating
Personnel. These manuals shall also include basis of design, detailed technical
data for each piece of equipment as installed, spare parts manual and
recommended spares for 4 year period of maintenance of each equipment.

“Preventive Maintenance Schedule for each equipment / panel shall

be submitted along with Operation and Maintenance Manual”.
10.0 ON SITE TRAINING
Upon completion of all work and all tests, the Contractor shall furnish necessary
operators, labour and helpers for operating the entire installation for a period
of fifteen (15) working days of ten (10) hours each, to enable the Owner’s staff
to get acquainted with the operation of the system. During this period, the
contractor shall train the Owner’s personnel in the operation, adjustment and
maintenance of all equipment installed.
11.0 MAINTENANCE DURING DEFECTS LIABILITY PERIOD
23.1 Complaints
The Contractor shall receive calls for any and all problems experienced
in the operation of the system under this contract, attend to these within
10 hours of receiving the complaints and shall take steps to immediately
correct any deficiencies that may exist.
23.2 Repairs
All equipment that require repairing shall be immediately serviced and
repaired. Since the period of Mechanical Maintenance runs concurrently with
the defects liability period, all replacement parts and labour shall be supplied
promptly free-of-charge to the Owner
12.0 UPTIME GUARANTEE
The contractor shall guarantee for the installed system an uptime of 98%. In
case of shortfall in any month during the defects liability period, the Defects
Liability period shall get extended by a month for every month having shortfall.
In case of shortfall beyond the defects liability period, the contract for
Operation and Maintenance shall get extended by a month for every month
having the shortfall and no reimbursement shall be made for the extended
period.
The Contractor shall provide log in the form of diskettes and bound printed
comprehensive log book containing tables for daily record of all pressures,
power consumption, starting and stopping times for various equipment, daily
services rendered for the system alarms, maintenance and record of unusual
observations etc. Contractor shall also submit preventive maintenance
schedule.
Each tenderer shall submit along with the tender, a detailed operation
assistance proposal for the Owner’s site representatives/Consultant’s review.
This shall include the type of service planned to be offered during Defects
Liability Period and beyond. The operation assistance proposal shall give the
details of the proposed monthly reports to the Management.
The tenderer shall include a list of other projects where such an Operation
Assistance has been provided.

13.0 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
Contractor may be required to carry out the operation of the Plumbing /

Sanitary installation for the defects liability period. Further, he may also be
required to carry out operation and all inclusive maintenance of the entire
system for a period of three years beyond the defects liability period.
13.1 Operation contract Plumbing / Sanitary & Fire Protection
i. 24 hours a day, year round.
ii. All stand-by equipment to be operated as per mutually agreed

programme.
iii. Proper entry and unkeep of relevant log books.
iv. Maintain complaints register. Submit weekly report.
v. Proper housekeeping of all areas under the contract.
vi. Prepare daily consumption report and summary of operation.
13.2 All Inclusive Maintenance Contract
a. Routine Preventive Maintenance Schedule to be submitted
i. Schedule to cover manufacturer’s recommendation

and/or common engineering practice (for all plant and
machinery under contract).
ii. Plant and machinery history card giving full details of

equipment and frequency of checks and overhaul.
iii. Monthly status report.
iv. Entire Plumbing / Sanitary & Fire Protection installation to

be painted in fourth year (from commissioning) before the
expiry of operation and maintenance contract.
b. Uptime during maintenance contract
i. 98% uptime of all systems under contract.
ii. Up time shall be assessed every month and in case of shortfall

during any month the contract shall be extended by a month.
iii. There shall be no reimbursement for the extended period.
iv. Break-downs shall be attended to within ten hours of reporting.
v. Spare compressor/motor assembly to be made available within

seven calendar days in case of total breakdown/burnout.
c. Manpower

i. Adequate number of persons to the satisfaction of the Owner’s

site representative shall be provided including relievers.
ii. Statutory requirements of EPF, ESIC and other applicable

labour legislations to be complied with; and monthly
certification to that effect to be submitted.
iii. Duty allocation and Roaster control shall be contractor’s

responsibility.
iv. No overtime shall be payable by Owner for any reason

whatsoever.
d. Shut Downs
i. Routine shut downs shall be permitted on approval of Project

Manager/PMC/Client.
ii. Contractor shall be at liberty to carry out routine maintenance

as and when required but with prior permission of the Owner.
14.0 PARTIAL ORDERING
Owner through the Architect/Consultant/ Owner’s site representative reserves

the right to order equipment and material from any and all alternates, and /or
to order high side and /or low side equipment and materials or parts thereof
from one or more tenderers.

ITEM WISE SPECIFICATIONS

PLUMBING WORKS

A. 14 SANITARY FIXTURES AND FITTINGS
MR 14.001 : Supply, installation , testing & commissioning white

vitreous china extended wall mounting water closet of approved make
including Supply, installation , testing & commissioning of dual plate
concealed cistern with flushing capacity 2 litre/ 4 litre (Low Flow),
cost shall be inclusive of providing and fixing of accesories i.e. wall
plate for flushing cistern ,seat cover, and cistern fittings, nuts, bolts
and gasket, SS rack bolt /anchor bolts / fasteners for EWC hanging,
and providing protection cover over cistern, cutting and making good
the walls wherever required complete as per manufacturer
recommendation
Water closet- Jaquar KUS WHT 35951,Cistern - JCS-WHT-2400 ,
Flushing Cistern Wall Plate JCP-CHR-852415,Rack Bolt - Jaquar ZPS
SNS RB01 OR EQUIVALENT FROM BASKET
1. Materials: European type water closet shall be wash down or

symphonic wash down type floor or wall mounted set, as shown in the
drawings, designed for low volume flushing from 3/6 or 2/4 liters of
water, flushed by means of a porcelain flushing cistern or an exposed
or concealed type (as detailed in the drawings or as directed by the
Owner’s Site Representative) 32 mm size CP brass flush valve with
regulator valve. Flush pipe / bend shall be connected to the WC by
means of a suitable rubber adaptor. Wall hung WC shall be supported
by CI floor mounted chair which shall be fixed in a manner as approved
by the Owners Site Representative. Each WC set shall be provided
with approved quality of seat, rubber buffe s and chromium plated
hinges. Seat shall be so fixed that it remains absolutely stationary in
vertical position without falling down on the WC. Each WC shall be
provided with 110 mm dia. (OD) PVC Pan Connector connecting the
ceramic outlet of WC to CI pipe. Water closet shall be vitreous china
conforming to IS 2556 (Part-I & II). The closet shall have minimum
two hole of 6.5 mm diameter for fixing closet to wall. Closet shall have
an integral flushing rim of self-draining type. Each water closet shall
have an integral `P` trap with water seal not less than 50 mm. with
outlet and trap shall be uniform and smooth in order to enable an
efficient flush. It shall be of approved color and make as mentioned in
the schedule of quantities. The seat and cover shall be of the best
Indian make conforming to I.S. 2548-1980. They shall be made of
molded from PP heavy duty material which shall be tough and hard
with high resistance to solvents and shall be free from blisters and
other surface defects and shall have chromium plated brass hinges
and rubber buffer of suitable size .The Concealed Cistern material
shall be of best of quality conforming to IS 776 -1979. It should be
green building approved with low flow type with dual flush 2/4 liters
capacity.
2. Workmanship: Closet shall be fixed to the wall by means of CI

chair/ WC fasteners as per manufacturer recommendation and and
approved by architect bracket should be 75 mm. long 6.5 mm.
diameter counter sunk bolts and nuts embedded in the wall concrete

using rubber or fiber washers so as not to allow any lateral

displacement. The joint between the W.C. outlets with soil down take
pipe shall be made with rubber seal gasket joint
Installation of seat and cover to water closet- The seat shall be fixed
to the pan by means of two corrosion resistant hinge bolts with a
minimum length of shank of 65 mm and threaded to within 25 mm
of the flange supplied by the manufacturer along with the seat. Each
bolt shall be provided with two suitably shaped washers of rubber or
other similar materials for adjusting the level of the seat while fixing
it to the pans. In addition, one non- ferrous or stainless steel washer
shall be provided with each bolt. The maximum external diameter of
the washer fixed on the underside of the pan shall not be greater
than 25 mm. Alternative hinging devices as supplied by the
manufacturer of the seat can also be used for fixing with the approval
of Engineer-in-Charge
3. Mode of measurements & payment:

i. European type wall mounted water closet with an integral `P`
trap, seat cover, WC connector, concealed dual flush cistern,
wall plate. jointing with soil down take
ii. Cutting hole in wall / slab / beam etc. wherever required. and
making all damages good to original condition after completion
of work
iii. Cost of jointing materials.
iv. Painting all the metallic parts with two coats of flat oil paint over
a coat of primer.
v. Testing the entire system and rectification of defect if any.
vi. All necessary labor, material and use of tools.
vii. MODE OF PAYMENT: The rate shall be for a unit of one number
and include the cost of all labor and material as specified in item
for fixing etc. complete, including testing and commissioning.

concealed cistern with flushing capacity 2 litre/ 4 litre (Low Flow), cost
shall be inclusive of providing and fixing of accesories i.e. wall plate for
flushing cistern ,seat cover, and cistern fittings, nuts, bolts and gasket,
anchor bolts / fasteners for EWC hanging, and providing protection
cover over cistern, cutting and making good the walls wherever
required complete as per manufacturer recommendation
Water closet- Jaquar VGS-WHT-81951,Cistern - JCS-WHT-2400 ,
Flushing Cistern Wall Plate JCP-CHR-852415 ,Rack Bolt - Jaquar ZPS
Please refer specifications under item no 14.1


concealed cistern with flushing capacity 2 litre/ 4 litre (Low Flow), cost
shall be inclusive of providing and fixing of accesories i.e. wall plate for
flushing cistern ,seat cover, and cistern fittings, nuts, bolts and gasket,
anchor bolts / fasteners for EWC hanging, and providing protection
cover over cistern, cutting and making good the walls wherever
required complete as per manufacturer recommendation
Water closet- Jaquar FLC WHT 5951,Cistern - JCS-WHT-2400 ,
Flushing Cistern Wall Plate JCP-CHR-852415 ,Rack Bolt - Jaquar ZPS
Please refer specifications under item no MR 14.0011
MR 14.004 : Supply, installation , testing & commissioning first quality

white vitreous china under rim counter top washbasins, 32 mm CP brass
waste and CP brass cast bottle trap and pipe to wall with CP brass flange
and rubber adopter for waste connection complete including filling gap
between counter and wash basin with approved type poly sulphide
sealant, cutting and making good the walls wherever required as per
manufacturer recommendation
Wash Basin-Jaquar CNS -WHT 701, ALD-705(waste Coupling), ALD-
769L ( Bottle Trap) OR EQUIVALENT FROM BASKET
1. Materials: Wash basin shall be of white porcelain first quality best

Indian make and it shall conform it I.S. 2556 (Part-IV) 1972 and I.S.
771-1979. The bracket shall conform to IS: 775-1962. Approved GI
coated rag bolts shall be used for fixing the wash basin over and above
the brackets.
The type (like over counter, under counter, with/without pedestal etc.)
of the wash basin shall be as specified in the item. Wash basin shall
be of one piece construction with continued over-flow
arrangements. Each basin shall have circular waste
hole or 5 sq.cm slot type over flow. All internal angles shall be
designed so as to facilitate cleaning. Wash basin shall have single tap
hole or two holes as specified. Each basin shall have a circular waste
hole which is either rebated or beveled internally with 65 mm
diameters at top and 10 mm depth to suit the waste fitting. The
necessary stud slot to receive the bracket on the underside of the
basin shall be provided. Basin shall have an internal soap holder recess
which shall fully drain into the bowl. The C. P. brass waste trap and
unions shall be of 32 mm dia. and of best quality, size, color and make
as specified in item and as approved by Architect / EIC. PVC water
inlet connection shall conform to IS specifications and shall be of
standard pattern with braided hose of minimum 450 mm long with CP
brass check nut at both the end and shall be able to withstand the
testing pressure of 1 Mpa (10 kg/sq. cm.)
Waste Coupling shall confirm to IS 3311, and as specified in the item
and of approved make. Waste fittings shall be with thickness of
coating not less than service Grade No.2 of IS 4827 which is capable

of receiving polish and will not easily scale off. The fitting shall conform
in all respect to IS 2963 and shall sound, free from laps below, holes
and fittings and other manufacturing defect. External and internal
surface shall be clean and smooth. They shall be neatly dressed. The
waste fitting for wash basin shall be of nominal size of
32 mm. The bottle trap shall be as specified in the item and of
approved make. The bottle-trap shall be provided with a CP brass
extension piece to the wall flange on one hand and on the other with
a rubber adopter for waste connection.
Bottle trap shall be of thickness of coating not less than service grade
No. 2 of IS 4827 which is capable of receiving polish and will not easily
scale off. The fitting shall conform in all respect of IS 2963 and
shall be sound, free from laps below, holes and fittings and other
manufacturing defects. External and internal surface shall be clean
and smooth. They shall be neatly dressed and be truly machined so
that nut smoothly moves on the body. The Bottle trap for wash basin
shall be of nominal size of 32 mm.
2. Workmanship: The wash basin shall be fixed on the wall as and

where directed. The wash basin shall be supported on a pair of M. S.
or C.I. brackets fixed in C.M. 1:3 (1cement: 3sand). Bracket shall be
fixed in the position before dado work is done. The wall plaster on the
rear shall be cut to rest the top edge of the wash basin. The gap
between counter and wash basin shall be filled with approved sanitary
grade silicone sealant. After fixing the basin, plaster shall be made
good and surface finished matching with the existing one. The bracket
shall be painted with two or three coats of enamel paint of approved
shade over a coat of primer. Oval shape or round shape wash basins
are required to be fixed in RCC platform with stone tapping either fully
sunk in stone top or flush with stone topping. The wall plaster on seat
shall be cut to rest over the top edge of the basin so as not to leave
any gap for water seepage through between wall plaster & skirting of
basin. The gap between counter and wash basin shall be filled with
approved sanitary grade silicone sealant. The trap and union shall be
connected to 32 mm. dia. waste pipe which shall be suitably bent
towards the wall and which shall discharge into an open drain leading
to a gully trap or direct into the gully-trap on the ground floor and
shall be connected to a waste pipe through a floor trap on the upper
floors. C. P. brass trap and union may not be provided where the
surface drain or a floor trap is placed directly under the basin and the
waste is discharged into vertically. The height of the front edge of the
wash basin from the floor level shall be 80 cms. The necessary inlet,
outlet connections and fittings such as sensor operated pillar cock. C.
P. dress waste trap waste pipe, stop cock, chain with rubber plug etc.
shall be fixed.
3. Mode of Measurement:
i. These items shall be measured in numbers and rate quoted

shall be per number only. The quoted rate shall include:
ii. The cost of wash basin with brackets and other items stated.
iii. Jointing and fixing materials.

iv. Painting of brackets.

v. And necessary fittings, hardware, etc. to complete the above.
vi. Cutting hole in wall / slab / beam etc. wherever required and
of work.
vii. The rate shall be for a unit of one number and include cost of all
labor, materials, tools and plant etc., required for satisfactory
completion of this item as specified.

Wash Basin-Jaquar CNS -WHT 703, ALD-705( waste Coupling), ALD-

white vitreous china wall mounted washbasin with 32 mm CP brass
Wash Basin-Jaquar CNS -WB04, ALD-705( waste Coupling), ALD-

Wash Basin-Jaquar CNS -WHT 705, ALD-705( waste Coupling), ALD-
MR 14.008 : Supply, installation , testing & commissioning Stainless

Steel AISI 304 (18/8) kitchen sink as per IS 13983 with C.I. brackets,
bottle trap, waste coupling and stainless steel plug 40 mm, including

painting of fittings and brackets, cutting and making good the walls
wherever required.
Kitchen sink with drain board 510x1040 mm bowl depth 200 mm ,
MODEL NIRALI MAKE OLYMPIA, OR EQUIVALENT FROM BASKET
1. MATERIAL: - The item pertains to provide SS sink, chromium plated

brass waste coupling including fixing. Waste Coupling shall confirm to
IS 3311.Waste fittings shall be of CP with thickness of CP coating not
less than service Grade No.2 of IS 4827 which is capable of receiving
polish and will not easily scale off. The fitting shall conform in all
respect to IS 2963 and shall sound, free from laps below, holes and
fittings and other manufacturing defects. External and internal
surface shall be clean and smooth. They shall be neatly dressed.
Each sink shall be provided with painted MS or CI brackets and clips
and securely fixed. Counter top sinks shall be fixed with suitable
painted angle iron brackets or clips as recommended by the
manufacturer. Each sink shall be provided with 40mm dia CP waste
and rubber plug with CP brass chain as given in the Schedule of
Quantities. The MS angle shall be provided with two coats of red oxide
primer and two coats of synthetic enamel paint of make, brand and
colour as approved by the Owner’s site representative.
Sanitary fittings for sinks shall be deck mounted or wall mounted CP
swivel faucets with or without hot and cold water mixing fittings as
specified in the Schedule of Quantities. Installation of fittings shall be
measured and paid for separately.
The sink waste fitting for wash basin shall be of nominal size of 32
mm and for sink shall be nominal size 50 mm.Each sink shall be
provided with R.S. or C.I. brackets and clips and securely fixed.
Counter top sinks shall be fixed with suitable angle iron clips or
brackets as recommended by the manufacturer. Each sink shall be
provided with 40 mm dia. C.P. waste with chain and plug or P.V.C.
waste. Fixing shall be done as directed by Project Manager.
2. Workmanship:-Waste coupling shall be fixed to, sink as ordered

with necessary specials. Jointing shall be done with white zinc, yarn
etc. A few turns of fine hemp yarn dipped in the linseed oil shall be
taken over the threaded ends to obtain complete water tightness.
Leaky joint shall be remade to make it leak proof. The rate includes
forWaster coupling with necessary specials. All necessary labor,
material and the use of tools.
3. MODE OF MEASUREMENT
i. The rate shall be inclusive of SS sink with waste coupling,

bottle trap, CI brackets, and support for a unit of one number
and include cost of all labor, materials, tools and plant, etc.
complete as required for satisfactory completion of this item
as specified.
ii. These items shall be measured in numbers and rate quoted
iii. The cost of sink with brackets and other items stated.
iv. Jointing and fixing materials.

v. Painting of brackets.
vi. And necessary fittings, hardware, etc. to complete the above.
vii. Cutting hole in wall / slab / beam etc. wherever required and
of work.
viii. The rate shall be for a unit of one number and include cost of
all labor, materials, tools and plant etc., required for
satisfactory completion of this item as specified.
MR 14.009 : Providing, Fixing of CP Brass wall mounted sink tap with

wall flange, extended operating lever, swinging spout complete with
all accessories as per approved specifications and making good the
walls wherever required.
Sink mounted sink tap ARI-CHR-39347 OR EQUIVALENT FROM
BASKET
1. Materials: The item pertains to provide chromium plated brass

combination tap assembly wall or floor mounted hot & cold mixing for
sink, basin etc. including free flanges and fixing. Basin mixer shall be
as specified in item, and as approved by Architect / EIC. The
combination tap assembly shall be 15 mm nominal size or as specified
in the schedule. It shall be of C.P. brass approved and heavy quality,
and shall conform to I.S. 8931. Combination tap assembly shall be
chromium plated-brass and shall conform to IS 8931.The nominal size
of combination tap assembly shall be 15 mm nominal size or as
specified. Casting of combination tap assembly shall be sound and free
from laps, blow hole and pitting. External and internal surface shall be
clean, smooth and free from sand and be neatly dressed. All the parts
fitted to pillar tap shall be axial, parallel and cylindrical with surfaces
smoothly finished. Thickness of C.P coating shall not be less than
service grade no.2 of IS 4827 and plating should be capable of taking
high polish which shall not easily tarnish or scale.
2. Workmanship: Combination tap assembly shall be fixed to the pipe

line as indicated in the drawing with necessary special as required or
as ordered by Engineer-in-charge. Jointing shall be done with teflon
tape, etc. Combination tap assembly shall withstand and internally
applied hydraulic pressure of 1.6Mpa (16 kg/sq. cm) for period of 1
minutes during which, it shall neither leak nor sweat. Leaky joint shall
be remade to make it leak proof. Testing: Combination tap assembly
wall / floor mounted as specified in the item, and in drawings,
including free flanges and fixing
.
i. The rate shall be inclusive of washbasin mixer for a unit of one
number and include cost of all labor, materials, tools and
plant, etc. complete as required for satisfactory completion of
this item as specified.
ii. These items shall be measured in numbers and rate quoted


iv. And necessary fittings, hardware, etc. to complete the
above.
v. Cutting hole in wall / slab / beam etc. wherever required and
making all damages good to original condition after
completion of work.
vi. The rate shall be for a unit of one number and include cost of
MR 14.010 : Providing, Fixing of CP Brass Wall Mounted washbasin

mixer with concealed & wall flange, extended operating lever,
complete with all accessories as per approved specifications and
making good the walls wherever required.
Washbasin Mixer -JAQUAR SOL -CHR-6233K & CONCEALED ALD-
CHR-233 OR EQUIVALENT FROM BASKET
Please refer specification under item no. MR 14.009
MR 14.011 : Providing, Fixing of CP Brass Pressmatic pillar tap to be

fixed on washbasin/counter top complete with all accessories as per
approved specifications and making good the walls wherever required.
Wash basin- JAQUAR PRS-CHR-031L65 OR EQUIVALENT FROM
BASKET
Please refer specification under MR 14.009
MR 14.012 : Supply, installation , testing & commissioning of C.P.

brass dual coat robe hook with all accessories as per approved
specifications and making good the walls wherever required.
JAQUAR ACN-CHR-1161N OR EQUIVALENT FROM BASKET
1. Materials: The Robe Hook shall be of Make as specified and of size

and design as approved by the Architect / Engineer-in-charge. Robe
Hook shall conform as per Manufacturer standard and should have
ISI mark. The chromium plating shall be of grade 'B' type conforming
to I.S. 1068-2958
2. Workmanship: The Robe Hook shall be fixed in position as per

drawings or as directed by Architect / EIC to the wall with C.P brass
or SS screws as approved by Architect / EIC, with the help of PVC
grip of HILTI/Fischer or equivalent.
3. Measurement:
i. The rate includes cost of all labor and materials, tools and
plant etc. required for satisfactory completion of the item.
ii. The rate shall be for a unit of one number.
MR 14.013 : Supply, Supply, installation , testing & commissioning of

C.P Braided Copper connection 450 mm long including nuts and

washers and making connection to fixtures and fittings complete as

per manufacturer recommendation
JAQUAR ALD-805B OR EQUIVALENT FROM BASKET
1. Materials: The CP braided copper connection pipe shall be of Make

as specified / approved by architect/ consultant and of size and
design as approved by the Architect / Engineer-in-charge. Robe Hook
shall conform as per Manufacturer standard and should have ISI
mark. The chromium plating shall be of grade 'B' type conforming to
I.S. 1068-2958
2. Workmanship: The CP braided copper connection pipe shall be fixed

in position as per drawings or as directed by Architect / EIC to the
wall with C.P brass or SS screws as approved by Architect / EIC
3. Measurement:
MR 14.014 : Supply, Installation, testing & commissioning of CP finish

Health Faucet with regulator ( angle valve) of approved quality with
CP braided flexible pipe 1 m long, wall hooked complete as per
manufacturer recommendation.
Jaquar ALD-CHR-579 OR EQUIVALENT FROM BASKET
1. Materials: The C. P. Health faucet shall be of best quality, as

specified in item and of approved make. The chromium plating shall
be of grade 'B' type conforming to I.S. 1068-2958. Each health faucet
provided with 1 mtr. Long flexible PVC tube, and wall hook etc.
2. Workmanship: The health faucet Hook & health faucet shall be fixed
in position as per drawings or as directed by Architect / EIC. The
height shall be approx. 45cm from floor level if not mentioned in the
drawing. The one end of 1.0 meter long pipe shall be connected to
faucet & other end to the angle cock.
MR 14.015 : Supply, installation, testing & commissioning Heavy class

SS grating with Cockroach proof SS strainer of approved design
including setting in floor with cement motor to match with floor finish
as per architect requirement suitable for waster and FT.
a) Size 100 mm x 100 mm, Make – Chilly (CCTL - SMHC-150 )/GMGR

1. Materials: The Heavy class SS grating with cockroach proof SS

strainer shall be of Make as specified and of size and design as
approved by the Architect / Engineer-in-charge. CP brass grating
shall confirm to manufacturer standard and should have ISI mark.
The chromium plating shall be of grade 'B' type conforming to I.S.
1068-2958
2. Workmanship: The Heavy class SS grating with cockroach proof

SS strainer shall be fixed in position as per drawings or as directed
by Architect / EIC to the wall with C.P brass or SS screws as
approved by Architect / EIC, with the help of PVC grip of
HILTI/Fischer or equivalent.
3. Measurement:
MR 14.016 : Supply, Installation, testing & commissioning C.P. brass

angle valve with wall flange of approved quality conforming to IS:
8931complete as per approved specifications.
a) 15mm nominal bore Jaquar ARI 39053 OR EQUIVALENT FROM
BASKET
1. Materials: The item pertains to provide angle valve, free flanges

(if joined to concealed pipe) including fixing 15 mm. dia. brass
screw down with bright polished finish shall conform to I.S. 781-
1977. The bib cock shall be best Indian make and quality as
specified in item and approved by Architect / engineering
consultant. A bib cock (stop tab) is a draw off tap with a
horizontal inlet and free outlet and stop cock (stop tap) is a valve
with a suitable means of connections for insertion in a pipeline for
controlling or stopping the flow. They shall be of specified size and
shall be of screw down type. The closing device should work by
means of shuts against water pressure on a non-metallic washer,
which shuts against water pressure on a seating at right angles to
the exit of the threaded spindle, which operates it. The handle
shall be either crutch or butterfly type securely seated pattern. The
cocks (taps) shall open in anti-clockwise direction. Brass bib taps
and stop cocks and angle stop cocks shall conform to IS 781, they
shall be polished bright. The minimum finished weight of different
sizes of bib tap weight of 15 mm size bib tap and stop cock shall be
as per table given below. They shall be sound and free from taps,
blow hole and fitting. Internal & External surface shall be clean,
smooth and free from sand and neatly dressed. Taps shall be nickel
chromium plated and thickness of coating shall not be less than
service grade No.2 of IS 4827 and plating shall be capable of taking
high polish which shall not be easily tarnished.

MINIMUM FINISHED MASS OF BIB TAPS AND STOP VALVES AS PER IS

781:1984 (Reaffirmed 2001)
Size MINIMUM FINISHED MASS
Bib Taps Stop valves
Internally Externally Mixed
threaded threaded threaded
MM KG KG KG KG
8.0 0.250 0.220 0.250 0.235
10.0 0.330 0.330 0.350 0.325
15.0 0.400 0.330 0.400 0.365
20.0 0.750 0.675 0.750 0.710
25.0 1.250 1.180 1.300 1.250
32.0 - 1.680 1.800 1.750
40.0 - 2.090 2.250 2.170
50.0 - 3.700 3.850 3.750
2. Workmanship: The body of stop cock of 15mm diameter with

adjustable flange shall be as specified above shall be fixed on water
supply line keeping the arrow in the direction of flow as per drawing
or as directed. Transition male /female adopter with shall be used
on either side on PVC pipes. The threaded portion shall be smeared
with white or red lead and around with a few turns of fine spun
yarn round the screwed end of the cock. On completion the tiling
work, the outer part of stop cock shall be fixed to the brass body.
Every tap complete with its component shall with stand an
internally applied hydraulic pressure of 2 MPa (20 kg/sq.cm)
maintained for a period of 2 minutes during the period it shall
neither leak nor sweat. Leaky joint shall be remade to make it leak
proof without any extra cost from contractor.
MR 14.017 : Supply, installation, testing & commissioning of C.P Toilet

paper roll holder with all accessories as required and making good the
walls wherever required. Model Jaquar ACN-1151N OR EQUIVALENT
FROM BASKET
1. Materials: The C.P. Toilet paper roll holder shall be of chrome

plated of specified size and design as approved by the Architect /
Engineer-in-charge. Tissue roll holder shall conform as per IS
standard and should have ISI mark. The chromium plating shall be
of grade 'B' type conforming to I.S. 1068-2958
2. Workmanship: Tissue roll holder shall be fixed in position as per



MR 14.018 : Supply, installation, testing & commissioning of C.P Towel

rack with all accessories as per approved specifications and making
good the walls wherever required.
Model No. JAQUAR AKP-CHR-35781P OR EQUIVALENT FROM
BASKET
1. Materials: The Towel rod shall be of make as specified and of size

and design as approved by the Architect / Engineer-in-charge. Towel
Bar shall conform as per Manufacturers standard and should have
to I.S. 1068-2958.Towel rail shall be fixed with screws/capping
having finish similar to the towel rail in wall with rawl plugs or nylon
sleeves and shall include cutting and making good as required or
directed by the Owner’s Site Representative
2. Workmanship: Towel rod shall be fixed in position as per drawings

or as directed by Architect / EIC to the wall with C.P brass or SS
screws as approved by Architect / EIC, with the help of PVC grip of
3. Measurement
MR 14.019 : Supply, installation, testing & commissioning of Soap

Dish with all accessories as per approved specifications and making
Jaquar CAN-1131N OR EQUIVALENT FROM BASKET
1. Materials: The soap dish shall be of make as specified and of size

and design as approved by the Architect / Engineer-in-charge. Soap
dish shall confirm as per Manufacturers standard and should have
ISI mark. The chromium plating shall be of grade 'B' type
conforming to I.S. 1068-2958
2. Workmanship: Soap dish shall be fixed in position as per drawings

3. Measurement

MR 14.020 : Supply, installation, testing & commissioning of C.P Towel

ring with all accessories as required and making good the walls
wherever required. Model No. Jaquar CAN -1121N OR EQUIVALENT
FROM BASKET
1. Materials: The Towel ring shall be of Make as specified and of size

and design as approved by the Architect / Engineer-in-charge. Towel
Ring shall conform as per Manufacturers standard and should have
to I.S. 1068-2958
2. Workmanship: Towel Ring shall be fixed in position as per drawings

3. Measurement:
MR 14.021 : Supply, installation , testing & commissioning C.P. brass

Two way bib tap with wall flange of approved quality conforming to
IS:8931 with all accessories as per approved specifications and making
a) 15 mm nominal bore.
Jaquar ARI 39041 OR EQUIVALENT FROM BASKET
combination tap assembly wall or floor mounted hot & cold mixing
for sink, basin etc. including free flanges and fixing. Basin mixer shall
be as specified in item, and as approved by Architect / EIC. PVC water
inlet connections compatible for hot and cold water as specified in
item, shall conform to IS specifications and shall be of standard
pattern with braided hose of minimum 450 mm long with CP brass
check nut at both the end and shall be able to withstand the testing
pressure of 1 Mpa (10 kg/sq. cm.)The combination tap assembly
shall be 15 mm nominal size or as specified in the schedule. It shall
be of C.P. brass approved and heavy quality, and shall conform to
I.S. 8931. Combination tap assembly shall be chromium plated-brass
and shall conform to IS 8931.The nominal size of combination tap
assembly shall be 15 mm nominal size or as specified. Casting of
combination tap assembly shall be sound and free from laps, blow
hole and pitting. External and internal surface shall be clean, smooth
and free from sand and be neatly dressed. All the parts fitted to pillar
tap shall be axial, parallel and cylindrical with surfaces smoothly
finished. Thickness of C.P coating shall not be less than service grade

no.2 of IS 4827 and plating should be capable of taking high polish

which shall not easily tarnish or scale.

as ordered by Engineer-in-charge. Jointing shall be done with Teflon
tape, etc. Combination tap assembly shall withstand and internally
applied hydraulic pressure of 1.6Mpa (16 kg/sq. cm) for period of 1
minutes during which, it shall neither leak nor sweat. Leaky joint
shall be remade to make it leak proof. Testing- Combination tap
assembly wall / floor mounted as specified in the item, and in
drawings, including free flanges and fixing
i. These items shall be measured in numbers and rate quoted

ii. Jointing and fixing materials.
iii. And necessary fittings, hardware, etc. to complete the above.
iv. Cutting hole in wall / slab / beam etc. wherever required and
making all damages good to original condition after
completion of work.
v. The rate shall be for a unit of one number and include cost of
MR 14.022 : Supply, installation , testing & commissioning of 15mm CP

brass single lever concealed bath and shower wall mixer with diverter
with 3 way shower head, spout, OH shower with adjustable type arm
with wall flange with slip fit connection & hand shower with flexible
pipe with bracket.
Diverter Jaquar ARI 39079K with ALD -079, OHS-1757 140mm
diameter with Shower arm: Jaquar SHA-477, HANDSHOWER : HSH
5541 , JAQUAR FLEXIBLE TUBE WITH SUPPORT : JAQUAR SHA CHR
549D8, SPOUT - JAQUAR SPJ-CHR-5463 OR EQUIVALENT FROM
BASKET
1. Materials: The item pertains to provide CP brass combination of

overhead shower with arm with all fittings as specified in the item
and approved by Architect / EIC.Shower set shall comprise of two CP
brass concealed stop cocks, four/five way auto-diverter, adjustable
type over-head shower with CP shower arm , all with CP wall flanges
of approved quality all as specified in the Schedule of Quantities.
Bath spout, hand showers and pop up wastes shall also be provided
wherever, specified. Wall flanges shall be kept clear off the finished
wall. Wall flanges embedded in the finishing shall not be accepted.
2. Workmanship: Combination overhead assembly shall be fixed to

the pipe line as indicated in the drawing with necessary special as
required or as ordered by Engineer-in-charge. Jointing shall be done
with Teflon tape, etc. Combination tap assembly shall withstand and

internally applied hydraulic pressure of 1.6Mpa (16 kg/sq.cm) for

period of 1 minutes during which, it shall neither leak nor sweat.
Leaky joint shall be remade to make it leak proof. Testing:
Combination assembly including fixing
ii. The rate shall be for a unit of one number, including shower
arm and shower hose.
MR 14.023 : Supply, installation , testing & commissioning C.P. brass

bib tap with wall flange of approved quality conforming to IS:8931 a)
15 mm nominal bore.
A) 15mm nominal bore
Model Jaquar CON 107KN OR EQUIVALENT FROM BASKET
Please refer specification under item 14.20
MR 14.024 : Providing & fixing white vitreous china large flat back urinal
and sensor battery based infrared sensor operated urinal having pre &
post flushing with water (250 ml & 500 ml consumption), having water
inlet from back side, infrared sensor with necessary concealed box and
cover with cells, in-built solenoid valve, suitable brackets complete as
per manufacturers specification and direction of Engineer-in-charge.
Urinal -JAQUAR CAT NO: URS-WHT-13253 , JAQUAR SENSOR SNR-
STL-51077 OR EQUIVALENT FROM BASKET
1. Materials: The lipped type urinal shall be flat back and shall conform to
I.S. 771-1979.It shall be of best Indian make, size and color as specified
and approved by Architect / EIC. It shall be of the first class quality and
free from any defects. The urinals shall have fixing arrangement 32 mm
dia. CP domicile waste and CP pipes with a wall flange. The urinal shall
be fixed to the wall by one CI bracket and two CI wall clips, as approved
by the manufacture complete as directed. The auto flushing sensor
and closing valve shall be fixed with inlet connection of urinal. The
auto flushing sensor should be low flow green building approved fixture.
Unit automatically serves (the range in about 40 cms.) and flushes in
two steps. The pre flush is for 2 seconds duration and the final flushing
is for 7 seconds duration.
2. Workmanship: The urinals shall be fixed in position by using

fastener/CI brackets and shall be at a height 60 cms from the floor level
to the top of the lip or urinal, unless otherwise directed. The bracket
shall be 50 mm x 50 mm at base lapping to 38 mm x 38 mm at top and
50 mm in length shall be fixed in wall in cement mortar 1 : 3 (1 cement
: 3 coarse sand). The urinal shall be connected to 50MM mm. dia. PVC
waste pipe (through bottle trap) which shall discharge in the floor trap.
The connection between the urinal bottle trap and flush or waste pipe
shall be made by means of putty or white lead mixed with chopped
hemp/rubber gasket of bottle trap.

i. The rate shall be inclusive of auto flushing sensor compatible for

the urinal specified, urinal, and support for a unit of one number
and include cost of all labor, materials, tools and plant, etc.
required for satisfactory completion of this item as specified.
ii. Cutting hole in wall / slab / beam etc. wherever required and
making all damages good to original condition after completion of
work.
iii. Cost of jointing materials.
iv. Painting all the metallic parts with two coats of flat oil paint over
a coat of primer.
v. Testing the entire system and rectification of defect if any.
vi. All necessary labor, material and use of tools.
vii. MODE OF PAYMENT: The rate shall be for a unit of one number and
include the cost of all labor and material as specified in item for
fixing etc. complete, including testing and commissioning.
MR 14.025 : Supply, installation , testing & commissioning of Soap

Dispenser with all accessories as required and making good the walls
wherever required.
Jaquar1137N OR EQUIVALENT FROM BASKET
1. Materials: The Soap Dispenser shall be of Make as specified and of

size and design as approved by the Architect / Engineer-in-charge.
Towel Ring shall conform as per Manufacturers standard and should
have ISI mark. The chromium plating shall be of grade 'B' type
2. Workmanship: Soap Dispenser shall be fixed in position as per

3. Measurement:
i. The rate includes cost of all labor and materials, tools and plant
etc. required for satisfactory completion of the item.
MR 14.026 : Supply, installation , testing & commissioning of Soap

Dispenser with all accessories as required and making good the walls
wherever required.
JAQUAR SDR WHT DJ0010F OR EQUIVALENT FROM BASKET
Please refer specification under item MR 14.025
MR 14.027 : Supply, installation, testing & commissioning of Auto

operated fully hygienic Hand dryer Stainless steel body Satin Finish,
cost inclusive of fasteners and accessories required for fixing on wall,
complete as per manufacturer recommendations.

Jaquar HDR -SAP- M06ACS OR EQUIVALENT FROM BASKET
1. Materials: The Hand drier shall be of Make as specified and of size and
design as approved by the Architect / Engineer-in-charge. Towel Ring
shall conform as per Manufacturers standard and should have ISI mark.
The chromium plating shall be of grade 'B' type conforming to I.S. 1068-
2958
2. Workmanship: Hand Drier shall be fixed in position as per drawings or

as directed by Architect / EIC to the wall with C.P brass or SS screws as
approved by Architect / EIC, with the help of PVC grip of HILTI/Fischer
or equivalent.
3. Measurement:
i. The rate includes cost of all labor and materials, tools and plant etc.
required for satisfactory completion of the item.
MR 14.028 : Supply, installation, testing & commissioning of Paper

Towel Dispenser Stainless steel body Satin Finish with fixing on wall
with fasteners and supports as per manufacturer recommendation and
Model No. Jaquar PTD-SAP- DT0196CS OR EQUIVALENT FROM
BASKET
1. Materials: The Paper Towel Dispenser shall be of Make as specified and

of size and design as approved by the Architect / Engineer-in-charge.
Towel Ring shall conform as per Manufacturers standard and should
have ISI mark. The chromium plating shall be of grade 'B' type
2. Workmanship: Paper Towel Dispenser shall be fixed in position as per

drawings or as directed by Architect / EIC to the wall with C.P brass or
SS screws as approved by Architect / EIC, with the help of PVC grip of
3. Measurement:
i. The rate includes cost of all labor and materials, tools and plant etc.
required for satisfactory completion of the item.
MR 14.029 : Supply, installation, testing & commissioning of Prismatic

tap for drinking water station with all accessories as required and
Model - JAQUAR PRS 061 OR EQUIVALENT FROM BASKET

combination tap assembly wall or floor mounted hot & cold mixing for
drinking. Including free flanges and fixing. Drinking tap shall be as
specified in item, and as approved by Architect / EIC. The combination

tap assembly shall be 15 mm nominal size or as specified in the

schedule. It shall be of C.P. brass approved and heavy quality, and
shall conform to I.S. 8931. Combination tap assembly shall be
chromium plated-brass and shall conform to IS 8931.The nominal size
of combination tap assembly shall be 15 mm nominal size or as
specified. Casting of combination tap assembly shall be sound and free
from laps, blow hole and pitting. External and internal surface shall be
clean, smooth and free from sand and be neatly dressed. All the parts
fitted to pillar tap shall be axial, parallel and cylindrical with surfaces
smoothly finished. Thickness of C.P coating shall not be less than
service grade no.2 of IS 4827 and plating should be capable of taking
high polish which shall not easily tarnish or scale.

as directed by Engineer-in-charge/ Manufacturer recommendation.
Jointing shall be done with Teflon tape, while lead etc. Combination tap
assembly shall withstand and internally applied hydraulic pressure of
1.6Mpa (16 kg/sq. cm) for period of 1 minutes during which, it shall
neither leak nor sweat. Leaky joint shall be remade to make it leak
proof.Testing: Combination tap assembly wall / floor mounted as
specified in the item, and in drawings, including free flanges and fixing
i. The rate shall be inclusive of pillar tap for a unit of one number
and include cost of all labor, materials, tools, etc. complete as
required for satisfactory completion of this item as specified.
ii. These items shall be measured in numbers and rate quoted shall
be per number only. The quoted rate shall include:
iv. And necessary fittings, hardware, etc. to complete the above.
v. Cutting hole in wall / slab / beam etc. wherever required and
of work.
vi. The rate shall be for a unit of one number and include cost of all
labor, materials, tools and plant etc., required for satisfactory
completion of this item as specified.
MR 14.030 : Providing and Fixing 2 Nos. CP support arms and backrest

of 35 mm dia to be mounted on the track (vertically and laterally) for
handicap toilet complete as required. Model : Parryware T6608A1 or
equivalent from Basket
1. Materials: These are wall-fixed rails which run in one direction only.
They can be fixed in a horizontal or a vertical position, or at an incline
/ angle. There are specifications for grab rails in the national
catalogue which operates equipment prescriptions as per drawings
and client requirement.

2. Workmanship: Support arms shall be fixed on wall as indicated in

the drawing with necessary special as required or as ordered by
Engineer-in-charge.
i. These items shall be measured in numbers and rate quoted shall

be per number only.
ii. The quoted rate shall include:
a. Jointing and fixing materials.
b. And necessary fittings, hardware, etc. to complete the
above.
c. Cutting hole in wall / slab / beam etc. wherever required
and making all damages good to original condition after
completion of work.
d. The rate shall be for a unit of one number and include cost
of all labor, materials, tools and plant etc., required for
MR 14.031 : Providing and Fixing Grab Bar 600mm long for handicap
toilet.
Model - JAQUAR AHS-1507 /Parryware T660A1 or Equivalent
from basket
15 INTERNAL DRAINAGE
MR 15.001 : Providing, fixing, Testing and Commissioning of Type B

Ringfit UPVC SWR pipes for vent, soil, waste, confirming to IS
13592 and Fittings confirming IS 14735. Cost shall be inclusive of
providing and fixing of all fittings (plain or door) e.g. bends,
junctions, cowls, offsets, access pieces in pipes, & G.I. clamps
spaced at 1.0 m center to center for wall and roof, jointing with
solvent cement joints including cutting chase or making holes in
walls and floors and making good as per specification and directed
by Engineer In charge
a)75mm Outer Dia.

MR 15.002 : b)110 mm Outer Dia.
1. Materials: The pipes shall be round and shall be supplied in straight

lengths with socketed ends. The internal and external surfaces of pipes
shall be smooth, clean, and free from grooving and other defects. The
ends shall be cleanly cut and square with the axis of the pipe. The pipes
shall be designed by external diameter and shall conform to IS 13592
shall be Type B,6 Kg/sq.cm pressure rating.
Fittings: Fittings shall be of the same make as that of pipes, injection

molded and shall confirm to Indian Standard. The specials and fitting

shall be confirms to IS: 7834 shall be of best quality. The pipe shall be
provided with bends, junctions, inspection doors, offsets, cowl, access
pieces/plugs etc. jointing with Solvent cement (lubricant) including
cutting holes in walls and making good the same. The Access door shall
be secured air and water tight with 3mm thick insertion rubber washer
and white lead. The bolts shall be lubricated with grease or white lead
for easy removal.
Lubricant: Lubricant is available in 100 gms, 250 gms& 500 gms

packing. It is specially formulated for compatibility with rubber seal as
well as PVC. It does not support the growth of bacteriaor fungi. Solvent
joints shall be used as per manufacturer’s recommendations.
2. Workmanship: The P.V.C. Pipes of specified diameter shall be fixed as

directed. Due to thermal expansion of rigid P.V.C. Pipes, due allowance
shall be made particularly in over ground pipe lines for any change in
length of pipe line which may occur during installation or when pipe line
is in service. All pipes shall be fixed in gradient towards the outfalls of
drains. Pipes inside a toilet room shall be in chase unless otherwise
shown on drawings. Where required pipes may be run at ceiling level
in suitable gradient and supported on structural clamps
2.1 Jointing the pipes:

The jointing of the pipes to the fittings shall be done as per the
manufacturer’s instructions / recommendation. The rubber ring socket
fittings and pipes shall be jointed as follows. The pipes and sockets
shall be accurately cut. Clean the outside of the pipes spigot end and
the inside of the ceiling groove of the fitting. Apply the lubricant
uniformly to the spigot end, sealing ring and pass the spigot end into
the socket containing sealing ring until fully home. Since solvent cement
is aggressive to P.V.C., care must be taken to avoid applying excessive
cement to the inside of pipe sockets as any surplus cement cannot be
wiped off after jointing. Mark the position of the socket edge with pencil
or felt open on the pipe, then withdraw the pipe from the socket by
approximately 10 mm to make the pipe fully fitted to the fitting.
If manufacture recommends its own methods of jointing, the same shall
be adopted after necessary approval from the Engineer-in-charge. Fixing
of the pipe with fittings on the sunk and in below ground or in plinth.
In case of fixing of pipes and fittings on the slab & below flooring these
shall run on the surface of the slab Under the floors, the pipe shall be
laid in layer of sand filling &then apply PCC cover of 1:4:8 on the pipe.
2.2 Supports
UPVC pipes require supports at close intervals. Pipes shall be aligned
properly before fixing them on the wooden plugs with clamps. Even if
the wooden plugs are fixed using a plumb line, pipe shall also be
checked for its alignment before clamping, piping shall be properly

supported on, or suspended from clamps, hangers as specified and as

required. The Contractor shall adequately design all the brackets,
saddles, anchors, clamps and hangers and be responsible for their
structural sufficiency. Pipe supports shall be primer coated with rust
preventive paint.
All vertical pipes shall be fixed by galvanized clamps and galvanized

angle brackets truly vertical. Branch pipes shall be connected to the
stack at the same angle as that of the fittings. No collars shall be used
on vertical stacks. Each stack shall be terminated at top with a cowl
(terminal guard).
Horizontal pipes running along ceiling shall be fixed on galvanized

structural adjustable clamps of special design shown on the drawings or
as directed. Horizontal pipes shall be laid to uniform slope and the
clamps adjusted to the proper levels so that the pipes fully reset on
them.
Contractor shall provide all sleeves, openings, hangers, inserts during

the construction. He shall provide all necessary information to the
building contractor for making such provisions in the structure as
necessary. All damages shall be made good to restore the surfaces.
All pipes clamps, supports and hangers shall be galvanized. Factory

made prefabricated clamps shall be preferred. Contractor may fabricate
the clamps of special nature and galvanize them after fabrication but
before installation. All nuts, bolts, washers and other fasteners shall be
factory galvanized.
Clamps shall be of approved design and fabricated from MS flats (which

shall be galvanized after fabrication) of thickness and sizes as per
drawings or contractor’s shop drawings. Clamps shall be fixed in
accordance to manufacturer’s details/shop drawings to be submitted by
the contractors.
When required to be fixed on RCC columns, walls or beam they shall be

fixed with approved type of galvanized expansion anchor fasteners
(Dash fasteners) of approved design and size according to load.
Structural clamps e.g. trapeze or cluster hangers shall be fabricated by

electro-welding from MS structural members e.g. rods, angles, channels
flats as per contractors shop drawings shall be galvanized after
fabrication. All nuts, bolts and washers shall be galvanized.

Galvanized slotted angle/channel of approved sizes supports on walls

shall be provided wherever shown on shop drawings. Angles/channels
shall be fixed to brick walls with bolts embedded in cement concrete
blocks and to RCC walls with anchor fasteners mentioned above. The
spacing of support as specified below:
(mm) Horizontal(m) Vertical (m)
Upto 15 1.00 1.50
20 - 25 1.50 2.00
32 - 125 2.00 3.00
Over 125 3.00 4.00
2.3 Repairs:
While temporary or emergency repairs may be made to the damaged
pipes, permanent repairs should be made by replacement of the
damaged section. If any split or chip out occurs in the wall of the pipe,
a short piece of pipe of sufficient length to cover the damaged portion
of the pipe is cut. The sleeve is cut longitudinally and heated sufficiently
to soften it so that it may be slipped over the damaged hard pipe.
3. Testing
After laying and jointing the pipes and fittings shall be inspected under
working conditions of pressure and flow. PVC pipes and fittings shall be
tested for 1.5 times the maximum working pressure. The openings of
the pipes shall be sealed for the section to be tested. The pipe shall
be slowly and carefully charged with water allowing all air to escape and
avoiding all shock and water hammer. The draw off takes and stop cock
shall then be closed and specified hydraulic pressure shall be applied
gradually. The pressure gauge must be accurate. The pipes and fittings
shall be tested in sections as the work of laying proceeds keeping the
joints exposed for inspection during the testing.The water pressure shall
be maintained for minimum of two hour. The engineer shall examine
carefully all the joints for leakage. Any joint found leaking shall be
redone, and all leaking pipes removed and replaced without extra cost.
4. Mode of measurement:
i. The description of each item shall unless otherwise stated, be

held to include where necessary, conveyance, and delivery,
handling unloading, storing fabrication, hoisting, all labor for
finishing to required shape and size; testing, fitting in
position, straight, cutting and waste, return of packing
ii. The length shall be measured on running meter basis of
finished work. The length shall be taken along the center line
of the pipe and fittings. The pipes fixed to floors etc. shall be
measured and paid under this item.

iii. All measurements of cutting shall unless otherwise stated be

held to include the consequent waste.
iv. In case of fitting of unequal bore, the largest bore shall be
measured for the rest.
v. Connection to down take pipe
vi. Testing of pipe lines fittings and joints include for providing all
plant and appliances necessary for obtaining access to the
work to be tested and carrying out the tests.
vii. The rate shall be for a unit of one running
meter.
MR 15.003 : Supply, installation , testing & commissioning in position

SWR PVC P trap of self cleaning design of following sizes. Making
proper connection with Cutting chase / hole in floors /slabs and
bringing the same in proper condition in cement concrete 1:2:4 mix
complete as per specifications. including cost of cutting and making
good the walls and floors after installation of P traps wherever
required
a) 100mm inlet and 75mm outlet
MR 15.004 : b) 100mm inlet and outlet
1. Materials: Floor traps gratings shall be in two pieces. Outer frame

150mm square with round SS-316 grating with hinge or without hinge
as approved by Architect / EIC shall be used.
2. Workmanship: The grating shall be embedded in white cement sand

mortar 1:2. The joint shall be leakage proof as per drawings and as
directed. Rate shall be inclusive of cutting of floor in best workmanship
manner. Centre of jali and center of the floor trap shall be coinciding.
The trap shall be installed at lowest point to ensure no pending occurs
at perimeters of the drain
i. The rate includes cost of all labor, materials, tools and plants etc.
required for satisfactory of this item.
MR 15.005 : Supply, installation , testing & commissioning PVC

saddle for connecting two or three inlet waste connection of 32/40
and 50mm nominal dia. , including cutting and chasing as required
MR 15.006 : Supply, installation, testing & commissioning100mm x

63mm PVC waste reducing elbow including cutting chases, making
holes in the floor / slab, repairs complete as required and
connection to PVC pipes

MR 15.007 : Supply, installation, testing & commissioning brass

floor/ceiling clean out plug with suitable inlet key for opening
male threaded joint with UPVC pipe& socket. Including socketed
joint complete as required
a) For 75 mm dia. Pipe
MR 15.008 : b) For 110mm dia. pipe

MR 15.009 : Supplying and installation , testing & commissioning of

uPVC pipes and fittings ( For Internal drainage & roof drainage)
confirming to IS 4985 for drain in wall / floor / open, pressure
rating 6 kg/cm2 tested to IS 2556 (XIII), seals to traps as per IS
5329, including all accessories, breaking / chasing walls, making
necessary holes in floor, walls etc. as per approved specifications
and making good etc., Cement mortar encasing under floor within
toilets
a) 32 mm dia. OD waste pipe (8 kg/cm2 )
MR 15.010 : b) 40 mm dia. OD Waste pipe

MR 15.011 : c) 50mm dia. OD waste pipe
MR 15.012 : d) 110mm dia. OD waste pipe
MR 15.013 : e) 160mm dia. OD waste pipe
WASTE PIPE FROM APPLIANCES
1. Waste pipe from appliances e.g. wash basins, sinks, urinals, bathtubs,
water coolers shall be of PVC as given in the Schedule of Quantities or
as shown on the drawings.
2. All pipes shall be fixed in gradient towards the outfalls of drains. Pipes
inside a toilet room shall be in chase unless otherwise shown on
drawings. Where required pipes may be run at ceiling level in suitable
gradient and supported on structural clamps. Spacing for clamps for
such pipes shall be as follows:-
Vertical Horizontal
PVC pipes 300 cms 240 cms
PVC Pipes
Pipes shall be galvanized steel tubes conforming to IS: 4985-2000 (Class -
3) and quality certificates shall be furnished. Pipes shall be provided with
all required fittings e.g. Tees, Couplings, Bends, Elbows, Unions, Reducers,

Nipples, and Plugs. All PVC waste pipes shall be terminated at the point of
connection with the appliance with an outlet of suitable diameter.
Dimension of Pipes as shown under:

WALL THICKNESS FOR WORKING PRESSURE (IS4985:1988(Extract)
SI.No Outer Tolerance Class 3 (6kg/cm2) Class 4

Dia. Outside (10kg/cm2)
mm diameter Minimum Maximum Min. Max
1 20 +0.3 - - 1.1 1.5
2 25 +0.3 - - 1.4 1.8
3 32 +0.3 - - 1.8 2.2
4 40 +0.3 1.4 1.8 2.2 2.7
5 50 +0.3 1.7 2.1 2.8 3.3
6 63 +0.3 2.2 2.7 3.5 4.1
7 75 +0.3 2.6 3.1 4.2 4.9
8 90 +0.3 3.1 3.7 5.0 5.7
9 110 +0.4 3.7 4.3 6.1 7.0
10 140 +0.5 4.8 5.5 7.7 8.7
11 160 +0.5 5.4 6.2 8.8 9.9
12 180 +0.6 6.1 7.0 9.9 11.1
13 200 +0.6 6.8 7.7 11.0 12.3
14 225 +0.7 7.6 8.6 12.4 13.9
15 250 +0.8 8.5 9.6 13.8 15.4
MR 15.014 : Providing, fixing, jointing, testing and

commissioning spun/centri 150 mm Diameter C.I. pipe for soil,
waste & vent pipes installation conforming to IS:3989 cut to
required lengths including all necessary fittings and specials such
as Bends, junctions, offsets, access pieces (plain or door) & vent
cowl. Fixing at wall/ceiling level supported by galvanized steel
clamps & hangers etc. duly epoxy coated. Making proper
connection with drip seal PJS joint of required depth as per
manufacturer’s recommendation and as per approved
specifications
Please refer CPWD specs under 17.35 for jointing and installation
MR 15.015 : Painting of Exposed CI pipes and fittings (after

installation) of following sizes with two coats of synthetic enamel
paint of approved shade over a coat of primer, all as per pipe colour
code including painting of legends with direction arrows are per
the approval of Project Manager / consultant.

Please refer CPWD specs under 17.65
MR 15.016 : Providing and fixing in position CI full bore P / S trap

(IS : 3989) of the following sizes for underslab location including
providing necessary galvanized steel support and as per
Specification and duly epoxy coated. Making proper connection with
drip seal joints, cutting chase / hole in floors / slabs and bringing
the same in proper condition and shape after placing the trap
in right position complete by supporting by GI clamps / hangers
as required. 150x150 mm
MR 15.017 : Providing and fixing Brass floor clean out plug

comprising of GI pipe ( Medium duty), socket, elbow, extension
piece caulked to pipe and cast brass plug with suitable inlet key for
opening male threaded joint with GI class B pipe & socket.
Including lead / drip seal caulked to CI pipes or CI class LA pipes
complete as required.
For 150 mm dia pipe
Mr 15.018 : Providing and fixing GI pipes ( Medium duty) confirming

to IS 1239 Part 1 complete with GI fitting confirming to IS 1879
part I to X, complete with clamps, supports , fastners, cutting in
wall complete as required
Internal work - Exposed on wall
80 m dia. nominal bore
MR 15.019 : 100 mm dia. nominal bore
Mr 15.0120 : 150 mm dia. nominal bore

INTERNAL & EXTERNAL WATER SUPPLY
DSR Item No. 18.8.1 : Supply, installation, testing & commissioning

Chlorinated Polyvinyl Chloride (CPVC) pipes, SDR 11 Grade pipes,
having thermal stability for hot & cold water supply, including all
CPVC plain & brass threaded fittings, i/c fixing the pipe with clamps
at 1.00 m spacing. This includes jointing of pipes & fittings with one
step CPVC solvent cement and the cost of cutting chases and
making good the same including testing of joints complete as per
direction of Engineer in Charge. Concealed work, including cutting
chases and making good the walls etc.

15 m nominal outer dia.
DSR Item No. 18.8.2 : 20mm nominal outer dia.
DSR Item No. 18.8.3 : 25mm nominal outer dia.
MATERIAL:CPVC pipes & fittings used in hot & cold potable water
distribution system shall conform to requirement of IS 15778. The material
from which the pipe is produced shall consist of chlorinated polyvinyl
chlorides. The polymer from which the pipe compounds are to be
manufactured shall have chlorine content not less than 66.5%.
The internal and external surfaces of the pipe shall be smooth, clean and
free from grooving and other defects. The pipes shall not have any
detrimental effect on the composition of the water flowing through it.
Diameter and wall thickness of CPVC pipes are as per given in Table 18.16
below:
TABLE 18.16
Mean Outside Wall

Sl. Nomi- Nominal Outside Diameter thickness
No. nal Outside Diameter at any point Class 1, SDR 11 Class 3, SDR 17
Size Diameter Min Max Min Max Avg. Min Max Avg. Min Max
Max Max
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13)
(i) 15 15.9 15.8 16.0 15.8 16.0 2.2 1.7 2.2 - - -
(ii) 20 22.2 22.1 22.3 22.0 22.4 2.5 2.0 2.5 - - -
(iii) 25 28.6 28.5 28.7 28.4 28.8 3.1 2.6 3.1 - - -
(iv) 32 34.9 34.8 35.0 34.7 35.1 3.7 3.2 3.7 - - -
(v) 40 41.3 41.2 41.4 41.1 41.5 4.3 3.8 4.3 - - -
(vi) 50 54.0 53.9 54.1 53.7 54.3 5.5 4.9 5.5 - - -
(vii) 65 73.0 72.8 73.2 72.2 73.8 - - - 4.8 4.3 4.8
(viii) 80 88.9 88.7 89.1 88.1 89.7 - - - 5.9 5.2 5.9
(ix) 100 114.3 114.1 114.5 113.5 115.1 - - - 7.5 6.7 7.5
(x) 150 168.3 168.0 168.6 166.5 170.1 - - - 11.1 9.9 11.1
Notes
For CPVC pipes SDR is calculated by dividing the average outer diameter of
the pipe in mm by the minimum wall thickness in mm. If the wall thickness
calculated by this formula is less than 1.52 mm, it shall be increased to
1.52 mm. The SDR values shall be rounded to the nearest 0.5.
Dimensions of Pipes
The outside diameter, outside diameter at any point and wall thickness shall be
as given in Table 18.16.

Diameter: The outside diameter and outside diameter at any point as given in
Table 18.16shall be measured according to the method given in IS 12235 (part
1).
Diameter at any point: The difference between the measured maximum outside
diameter and measured minimum outside diameter in the same cross-section of
pipe (also called tolerance on ovality) shall not exceed the greater of the following
two values:
(a) 0.5 mm, and

(b) 0.012 dn rounded off to the next higher 0.1 mm.
Wall Thickness: The wall thickness of the pipes shall be as given in Table 18.16.
Wall thickness shall be measured by any of the three methods given in IS 12235
(part 1). To check the conformity of the wall thickness of the pipe throughout its
entire length, it is necessary to measure the wall thickness of the pipe at any point
along its length. This shall be done by cutting the pipe at any point along its length
and measuring the wall thickness as above. Alternatively, to avoid destruction of
the pipe, nondestructive testing methods such as the use of ultrasonic wall
thickness measurement gauges shall be used at any four points along the length
of the pipe.
Tolerance on Wall Thickness

For pipes of minimum wall thickness 6 mm or less, the permissible variation
between the minimum wall thickness (eMin) and the wall thickness at any point
(e), (e - eMin) shall be positive in the form of +y, where y=0.1 eMin+0.2 mm.
For pipes of minimum wall thickness greater than 6mm, the permissible variation
of wall thickness shall again be positive in the form of +y, where y would be
applied in two parts.
The average wall thickness shall be determined by taking at least six

measurements of wall thickness round the pipe and including both the absolute
minimum and absolute maximum measured values. The tolerance applied to this
average wall thickness from these measurements shall be within the range 0.1
eMin+0.2 mm (see Table 18.16).
The maximum wall thickness at any point shall be within the range 0.15eMin (see
Table 18.16).
The results of these calculations for checking tolerance shall be rounded off to the
next higher 0.1 mm.
Effective Length (Le):If the length of a pipe is specified, the effective length
shall not be less than that specified. The preferred effective length of pipes shall
be 3, 5 or 6 m. The pipes may be supplied in other lengths where so agreed upon
between the manufacturer and the purchaser.

Pipe Ends
The ends of the pipes meant for solvent cementing shall be cleanly cut and shall
be reasonably square to the axis of the pipe or may be chamfered at the plain
end.
Physical and Chemical Characteristics
Visual Appearance: The color of the pipes shall be off-white. Slight variations in
the appearance of the color are permitted.
The internal and external surface of the pipe shall be smooth, clean and free from
grooving and other defects.
Opacity : The wall of the plain pipe shall not transmit more than 0.1 per cent of
the visible light falling on it when tested in accordance with IS 12235 (Part 3).
Effect on Water: The pipes shall not have any determinate effect on the
composition of the water flowing through them, when tested as per 10.3 of IS
4985.
Reversion Test: When tested by the method prescribed in IS 12235 (Part 5/ Sec
1 and Sec 2),a length of pipe 200 ±20 mm long shall not alter in length by more
than 5 per cent.
Vicat Softening Temperature: When tested by the method prescribed in IS

12235 (part 2),the Vicat softening temperature of the specimen shall not be less
than 110°C.
Density: When tested in accordance with IS 12235 (Part 14), the density of the
pipes shall be between 1450kg/m3 and 1650kg/m3.
Mechanical Properties
Hydrostatic Characteristics: When subject to internal hydrostatic pressure test

in accordance with the procedure given in IS 12235 (part 8/Sec 1), the pipe shall
not fail during the prescribed test duration. The temperatures, duration and
hydrostatic (hoop) stress for the test shall conform to the requirements given in
Table 18.17. The test shall be carried out not earlier than 24 h after the pipes
have been manufactured.
TABLE 18.17
Requirements of Pipes for Internal Hydrostatic Pressure Test
Test Temperature (Hoop

Sl. Test Min Test Period Hydrostatic )
No. Stress
°C H MPa
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
(i) Acceptance 20 1 43.0
(ii) Type 95 165 5.6
(iii) Type 95 1000 4.6
(iv) Type 95 8760 3.6 (Test for thermal
stability
)

Thermal Stability by Hydrostatic Pressure Testing : When subject to internal

hydrostatic pressure test in accordance with the procedure given in IS 12235 (Part
8/Sec 1) and as per requirement given in Table 18.17, Sl. No. (iv), the pipe shall
not burst or leak during the prescribed test duration.
Resistance to External Blow at 0°C: When tested by the method prescribed
in IS 4985, with classified striker mass and drop height as given in Table 18.18,
the pipe shall have a true impact rate of not more than 10 per cent.
TABLE 18.18
Classified Striker Mass and Drop Height Conditions for the Falling
Weight Impact Test
(Clause 18.9.5.3)
Sl. Nominal Pipe Size Mass of Falling Falling Height

No. Weight
mm Kg mm
(1) (2) (3) (4)
(i) 15 0.5±0.5% 300±10
(ii) 20 0.5±0.5% 400±10
(iii) 25 0.5±0.5% 500±10
(iv) 32 0.5±0.5% 600±10
(v) 40 0.5±0.5% 800±10
(vi) 50 0.5±0.5% 1000± 10
(vii) 65 0.8±0.5% 1000±10
(viii) 80 0.8±0.5% 1200±10
(ix) 100 1.0±0.5% 1600±10
(x) 150 1.6±0.5% 2000±10
Flattening Test: When tested by the method prescribed in IS 12235 (part 19),
pipe shall show no signs of cracking, splitting and breaking.
Tensile Strength: When tested by the method prescribed in IS 12235 (Part 19),
the tensile strength at yield shall not be less than 50 MPa at 27 ± 2°C.
Sampling and Criteria for Conformity
The sampling procedure and criteria for conformity shall be as given in Annexure
F.
Marking
Each pipe shall be clearly and indelibly marked in ink/paint or hot embossed on
white base at intervals of not more than 3 m. The marking shall show the
following:
Manufacturer’s name or trade-mark
Outside diameter,
Class of pipe and pressure rating, and
Bath or lot number
BIS Certification Marking: Each pipe may also be marked with the Standard
Mark.
Fittings
The fittings shall be as follows:

Plain CPVC solvent cement fittings from size 15 mm to 160 mm.

Brass threaded fittings.
Valve from size 15 mm to 160 mm
Brass Threaded Fittings: All types of one end brass threaded male/female adaptors
in various fittings like coupler, socket, elbow, tee are available for transition to
other plastic/metal piping and for fixing of CP fittings. Ball, Gate valves in CPVC
are available in all dimensions. All fittings shall carry the following information:
1. Manufacturer’s name/trade mark.

2. Size of fitting
Piping Installation Support and Spacing
Concealed Piping: Pipes can be concealed in chases. The pipes and fitting are to
be pressure tested prior to concealing the chases. To maintain alignment of CP
fittings while joining, all alignment of fittings and pipe shall be done correctly. DO
NOT USE NAILS FOR HOLDING OF PIPES IN THE
CHASES.
External Installations: For pipes fixed in the shafts, ducts etc. there should be
sufficient space to work on the pipes. Pipes sleeves shall be fixed at a place the
pipe is passing through a wall or floor so as to allow freedom for expansion and
contraction. Clamping of the pipe is done to support it while allowing the freedom
for movement.
All pipes exposed to sunlight shall be painted with a water based acrylic paint
emulsion to enhance UV protection. Pipes in trenching shall be laid in accordance
to the Good Plumbing practices followed for Metal piping.
Recommended Support Spacing (Distance between Pipe Clamps

Horizontal Support)
Horizontal Support (In

meters)
Pipe Size Temperature
23°C 38°C 60°C 82°C
16 mm (1/2”) 1.22 1.22 1.07 0.92
20 mm (3/4”) 1.53 1.37 1.22 0.92
25 mm (1/0”) 1.68 1.3 1.37 0.92
32 mm (1 1/4”) 1.83 1.68 1.53 1.22
40 mm (1 1/2”) 1.98 1.83 1.68 1.22
50 mm (2”) 2.29 2.14 1.98 1.22
Expansion LOOP: CPVC systems, like all piping materials, expand and contract
with changes in temperatures. CPVC pipes shall expand 7.5 cm per 30 m length
for a 400C temperature change.
Expansion does not vary with Pipe size. Thermal expansion can be generally be
accommodated at changes in direction. On a long straight run, an offset or loop
based on the following chart is required.

Nominal Length of Run (Meter), Loop length in

Pipe cms.
Size 6 metre 12 metre 18 metre 24 metre 30 metre
15 mm 43 56 69 79 86
20 mm 48 66 81 91 104
25 mm 53 74 91 104 117
32 mm 58 81 102 117 130
40 mm 63 89 109 127 142
50 mm 71 102 124 145 63
Testing
All water supply systems shall be tested to hydrostatic pressure test. The pressure
tests are similar to the test pressure used for other plastic/metal pipes. System
may be tested in sections and such section shall be entirely checked on completion
of connection to the overhead tank or pumping system or mains.
PROCEDURE FOR PRESSURE TEST
Each valved section of the pipe shall be slowly filled with water and all air shall be
expelled from the pipe through hydrants and blow-offs. If these are not available
at high places, necessary tapping may be made at points of highest elevation
before the test is made and plugs inserted after the tests have been completed.
If the trench has been partially back-filled the specified pressure based on the
elevation of the lowest point of the line or section under test and corrected to the
elevation of the test gauge, shall be applied by means of a pump connected to the
pipe in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer-in-Charge. The duration of the test
shall not be less than 5 minutes.
Examination under Pressure: All exposed pipes, fittings, valves, hydrants and
joints should be carefully examined during the open-trench test. When the joints
are made with lead, all such joints showing visible leaks shall be re-caulked until
tight. When the joints are made with cement and show seepage or slight leakage,
such joints shall be cut out and replaced as directed by the authority. Any cracked
or defective pipes, fittings, valves or hydrants discovered in consequence of this
pressure test shall be removed and replaced by sound material and the test shall
be repeated until satisfactory to the Engineer-in-Charge.
If the trench has been back-filled to the top, the section shall be first subjected to
water pressure normal to the area and the exposed parts shall be carefully
examined. If any defects are found, they shall be repaired and the pressure test
repeated until no defects are found. The duration of the final pressure tests shall
be at least one hour
Procedure for Leakage Test
Leakage is defined as the quantity of water to be supplied into the newly laid pipe,
or any valved section thereof, necessary to maintain the specified leakage test
pressure after the pipe has been filled with water and the air expelled.

No pipe installation shall be accepted until the leakage is less than the number of
cm3/h determined by the formula:
Ql = ND√p/3.3
Where
Ql = the allowable leakage in cm3/h.
N = number of joints in the length of the pipe line.
D = diameter in mm, and the average test pressure during the leakage testing
kg/cm2.
Variation from Permissible Leakage: Should any test of pipe laid in position
discloses leakage greater than that specified in Para 5 the defective joints shall be
repaired until the leakage is within the specified allowance.
GUIDELINES FOR STORAGE AND INSTALLATION OF CPVC PIPES
STORAGE
CPVC pipes of all sizes are packed in polyethylene packing rolls and both the ends
of the packed roll are sealed with air bubble film cap in order to provide protection
during handling and transportation. After packing, the whole bunch of pipes is
tightened with polypropylene/ HDPE strapping. Each role is then marked with
size/type of the pipe, lot number and quantity. The packed pipe rolls are stored in
their respective racks in properly covered storage area. Apart from providing
protection during handling and transportation, the packing rolls also protect the
pipe from ultra violet rays.
INSTALLATION GUIDELINES
Visually inspect pipe ends before making the joint. Use of a chamfering tool will
help identify and crakes, as it will catch on to any crack.
Pipe may be cut quickly and efficiently by several methods. Wheel type plastic
tubing cutters are preferred. Ratchet type cutter or fine tooth saw are another
options. However, when using the ratchet cutter be certain to score the exterior
wall by rotating the cutter blade in circular motion around the pipe. Do this before
applying significant downward pressure to finalize the cut. This step leads to a
square cut. In addition, make sure ratchet cutter blades are sharp. Cutting tubing
as squarely as possible provides optimal bonding area within a joint.
Burrs and filings can prevent proper contact between the tube and fittings during
the assembly, and should be removed from the outside and inside of the tube. A
chamfering tool is preferred, but a pocket knife or file is also suitable for this
purpose.
Use only CPVC cement jointing. Use CPVC cement, which is fully recommended
by the manufacturer.
When using adhesive solution/solvent cement be certain of proper ventilation.
When making a join, apply a heavy, even coat of cement to the pipe end. Use the
same applicator without additional cement to apply a thin coat inside the fitting
socket. Too much cement can cause clogged waterways. Do not allow excess
cement to puddle in the fitting and pipe assembly. This could result in a weakening
of the pipe wall and possible pipe failure when the system is pressurized.

Rotate pipe one-quarter to one-half turn while inserting it into the fitting socket
and remove the excess adhesive solution/solvent cement from the joint with clean
rag.
When making a transition connection to metal threads, use a special transition
fitting or CPVC male threaded adapter whenever possible. Do not over-torque
plastic threaded connections. Hand tight plus one-half turn should be adequate.
Hang or strap CPVC systems loosely to allow for thermal expansion. Do not use
metal straps with sharp edges that might damage the tubing.
CPVC stub outs for lavatories, closets and sinks are appropriate. However, on
areas where there is a likelihood that movement or impact abuse will occur, metal
pipe nipples may be amore appropriate stub-out material. Showerheads, tub
spouts and outside still cocks are examples.
When connected to a gas water heater, CPVC tubing should not be located within
50 cm of the flue. For water heaters lacking reliable temperature control, this
distance may be increased up to 1 m a metal nipple or flexible appliance connector
should be utilized. This measure eliminates the potential for damage to plastic
piping that might result from excessive radiant heat from the flue.
SAMPLING AND CRITERIA FOR CONFORMITY OF CPVC PIPES

(Clause 18.9.6)
ACCEPTANCE TESTS
Acceptance test are carried out on samples selected from a lot for the purpose of
acceptance of the lot.
Lot
All CPVC pipes in a single consignment of the same class, same size and
manufactured under essentially similar conditions shall constitute a lot.
For ascertaining conformity of the lot to the requirements of the specification,

samples shall be tested from each lot separately.
Visual and Dimensional Requirements

The number of test samples to be taken from a lot shall depend on the size of the
lot and the outside diameter of the pipe, and shall be in accordance with Table F-
1.
TABLE F-1
Scale of Sampling of Visual Appearance and Dimensional
Requirements
(Clause F-1.4.1 and F-1.4.3)
Number of
Sl. pipes Sample Sample Cumulative Acceptance Rejection
No. in the lot number size sample size number number
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
(i) Up to 1000 First 13 13 0 2
Second 13 26 1 2
(ii) 1001 to 3000 First 20 20 0 2
Second 20 40 1 2

(iii) 3001 to 10000 First 32 32 0 3

Second 32 64 3 4
(iv) 10001 & above First 50 50 1 4
Second 50 100 4 5
These pipes shall be selected at random from the lot and in order to ensure the
randomness of selection, a random number table shall be used. For guidance and
use of random number tables, IS-4905 may be referred to. In the absence of a
random number table, the following procedure may be adopted:
Starting from any pipe in the lot, count them as 1, 2, 3, etc, up to r and so on,
where r is the integral part of N/n, N being the number of pipes in the lot, and n
the number of pipes in the sample. Every rth pipe so counted shall be withdrawn
so as to constitute the requires sample size.
The number of pipes given for the first sample in col. 4 of Table F-1, shall be taken
from the lot and examined for visual and dimensional requirements given in Table
18.16 and 18.9.4.1. A pipe failing to satisfy any of these requirements shall be
considered as defective. The lot shall be deemed to have satisfied these
requirements, if the number of defectives found in the firm sample is less than or
equal to the corresponding acceptance number given in col. 6 of Table F-1. The
lot shall be deemed not to have met these requirements, if the number of
defectives found in the first sample is greater than or equal to the corresponding
rejection number given in col. 7 of Table F-1. If, however, the number of defectives
found in the first sample lies between the corresponding acceptance and rejection
numbers given in
cols. 6 and 7, a second sample of the size given in col. 4 shall be taken and
examined for the requirements. The lot shall be considered to have satisfied these
requirements. The lot shall be considered to have satisfied these requirements if
the cumulative sample is less than or equal to the corresponding acceptance
number given in col. 6, otherwise not.
Reversion Test
The lot, having satisfied visual and dimensional requirements, shall be tested for
reversion as given in 18.9.4.4.
For this purpose, the number of pipes given for the first sample in col. 4 of Table
F-2 shall be taken from the lot. The sample pipe failing the reversion test shall be
considered as defective. The lot shall be deemed to have met the requirements
given in this specification for the reversion test, if the number of defectives found
in the first sample is less than or equal to the corresponding acceptance number
given in col. 6. This lot shall be deemed not to have met these requirements, if
the number of defectives found in the first sample is greater than or equal to the
corresponding rejection number given in col. 7 if, however, the number of
defectives in the first sample lies between the corresponding acceptance and
rejection numbers given in col. 6 and col. 7, a second sample of size given in col.
4 shall be taken and examined for the requirements. The lot shall be considered
to have satisfied the requirements, if the number of defectives found in the
cumulative sample is less than or equal to the corresponding acceptance number
given in col. 6, otherwise not.

TABLE F-2
Scale of Sampling for Reversion, Vicat Softening Temperature
and Density Test
(Clause F-1.5.2, F-1.6.2 and F-1.7.2)
Number of
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
(i) Up to 1000 First 5 5 0 2
Second 5 10 1 2
(ii) 1001 to 3000 First 8 8 0 2
Second 8 16 1 2
(iii) 3001 to 10000 First 13 13 0 2
Second 13 26 1 2
(iv) 10001 & above First 20 20 0 3
Second 20 40 3 4
Vicat Softening Test

The lot, having satisfied visual and dimensional requirements shall be tested for
Vicat softening temperature as described above
For this purpose, the procedure adopted for sampling and criteria for conformity
shall be the same as that for reversion as described above
Density
The lot, having satisfied the visual and dimensional requirements, shall be tested
for density as described above
For this purpose, the procedure adopted for sampling and criteria for conformity
shall be the same as that for reversion as described above

TABLE F-3
Scale of Sampling for Resistance to External Blow at 0°C
Number of
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
(i) Up to 3000 First 3 3 0 2
Second 3 6 1 2
(ii) 3001 to 10000 First 3 5 0 2
Second 5 10 1 2
(iii) 10000 & above First 8 8 0 2
Second 8 10 1 2
Internal Hydrostatic Pressure Test (Acceptance Test)

Same as described above
TABLE F-4
Scale of Sampling for Internal Hydrostatic Test
(Clause F-1.9.1 and F-1.9.3)
Sample Acceptance
Sl. No. Number of pipes in the lot size number
(1) (2) (3) (4)
(i) Up to 3000 2 0
(ii) 3001 to 10000 3 0
(iii) 10000 & above 5 0
Verification of Malfunction Temperature Tmal
For this test, the manufacturer to the testing authority one assembly, selected
preferably from a regular production lot.
Opacity
For this test, the manufacturer or the supplier shall furnish to the testing
authority one sample of the pipe of the thinnest wall section, selected preferably
from a regular production lot.
The sample so selected shall be tested for compliance with requirements for
opacity as given in 18.9.4.2.
If the sample passes the requirements of the opacity test, the type of the pipe
under consideration shall be considered to be eligible for approval, which shall be
valid for a period of one year.
In case the sample fails in the test, the testing authority, at its discretion, may
call for a fresh sample and subject the same to the opacity test. If the sample
passes the repeat test, the type of pipe under consideration shall be considered
eligible for approval. If the sample fails in the repeat test, the type of pipe shall
not be approved. The manufacturer or the supplier may be asked to improve the
design and re-submit the product for type approval.

At the end of the validity period (normally one year) or earlier, if necessary, the
testing authority may call for a fresh sample for opacity test for the purpose of
type approval.
Test for Effect on Water

For this type test, the manufacturer or the supplier shall furnish to the testing
authority three samples of the smallest size of pipe taken from each machine
(selected preferably from a regular production lot).
Three samples so selected shall be tested for compliance with the requirements
for effect on water as described above
If all three samples pass the requirements for effect on water, the type test of the
pipe under consideration shall be considered to be eligible for approval, which hall
be normally valid for a period of one year.
In case any of the samples fails in this test, the testing authority, at its discretion,
may call for fresh samples not exceeding the original number, and subject them
to the test for effect on water. If, in the repeat test, no single failure occurs, the
type of pipe under consideration shall be considered eligible for type approval. If
any of the samples fails in the repeat test, the type of pipe shall not be approved.
The manufacturer or the supplier may be asked to improve the design and
resubmit the product for type approval.
At the end of the validity period (normally one year) or earlier, if necessary, the
testing authority may call for fresh samples for effect on water test for the purpose
of type approval.
Internal Hydrostatic Pressure Test (Type Test) and thermal Stability

For this type test, the manufacturer or the supplier shall furnish to the testing
authority, three samples of pipes of different diameters and different classes
(selected preferably from a regular production lot).
Three samples so selected shall be tested for compliance with the requirements of
type test given in Table as described above
If all the three samples pass the requirements of the quality test, the type of pipe
under consideration shall be considered to be eligible for type approval which shall
be normally valid for a period of one year.
In case any of the samples fail in this test, the testing authority, at its discretion,
may call for fresh samples not exceeding the original number and subject them to
the type test. If, in the repeat test, no single failure occurs, the type of pipe shall
be considered for type approval. If any of the samples fails in the repeat tests, the
type of pipe shall not be approved. The manufacturer or the supplier may be asked
to improve the design and resubmit the product for type approval.

2. Measurements
The net length of pipes as laid or fixed shall be measured in running meters
correct to a cm for the finished work, which shall include CPVC pipe and
fittings including plain and Brass threaded fittings and jointing solvent
cement
DSR Item NO. 18.7.1 : Supply, installation, testing & commissioning

Chlorinated Polyvinyl Chloride (CPVC) pipes, SDR 11 Grade pipes, having
thermal stability for hot & cold water supply, including all CPVC plain &
brass threaded fittings, i/c fixing the pipe with clamps at 1.00 m spacing.
This includes jointing of pipes & fittings with one step CPVC solvent
cement and including testing of joints complete as per direction of
Engineer in Charge. Internal work - Exposed on wall.
(a) 15 mm nominal outer dia. Pipes
DSR Item No. 18.7.2 : (b) 20 mm nominal outer dia. pipes

DSR Item No. 18.7.3 : (c) 25 mm nominal outer dia. Pipes
DSR Item No. 18.7.4 : (d) 32mm nominal outer dia. pipes
DSR Item No. 18.7.5 : (e) 40 mm nominal outer dia. pipes
DSR Item No. 18.7.6 : (f) 50 mm nominal outer dia. pipes
MR 15.021 : (g) 65 mm nominal outer dia. Pipes- Sch 80
MR 15.022 : (h) 80 mm nominal outer dia. Pipes- Sch 80
Please refer specifications under para 18.9 of CPWD Civil work specifications
Volume II 2009
MR 15.023 : Supply, installation , testing & commissioning of Nitrile

Rubber Insulation on Hot/ cold water having thermal conductivity
.038 W/mok 0.212 BTU / (Hr-ft2-oF/inch) at an average
temperature of
30oC, temperature range of –40oC to 105oC, Density of material
shall not be less than 0.06 gm/cm3, class O type, complete as
per manufacturer recommendation
MR 15.024 : (b) 20 mm nominal outer dia. Pipes ( 9mm insulation

thickness)
MR 15.025 : (c ) 25 mm nominal outer dia. Pipes ( 9mm

insulation thickness)
MR 15.026 : (d) 32 mm nominal outer dia. Pipes ( 13 mm

MR 15.027 : (e )40 mm nominal outer dia. Pipes ( 13 mm

MR 15.028 : (f) 50 mm nominal outer dia. Pipes ( 13 mm


MR 15.029 : (g) 65 mm nominal outer dia. Pipes ( 13 mm

1 MATERIAL
Insulation material for Pipe insulation shall be Closed Cell Elastomeric Nitrile
Rubber or closed cell cross linked polyethylene foam. Thermal conductivity of
elastomeric nitrile rubber shall not exceed 0.038 W/moK or 0.0313 Kcal /
MhroC or 0.212 BTU / (Hr-ft2-oF/inch) at an average temperature of
30oC. The product shall have temperature range of –40oC to 105oC. Density
of material shall not be less than 0.06 gm/cm3. The insulation shall have fire
performance such that it passes minimum CLASS 1 as per BS476 part 7 for
surface spread of flame. Water vapor permeability shall not exceed 0.024 per
inch (3 x 10-14 Kgs / m.sec.Pa). The material shall have approval from the
Chief Fire Officer. Thickness of the insulation shall be as specified for the
individual application. Each lot of insulation material delivered at site shall be
accompanied with manufacturer test certificate for thermal conductivity values.
Samples of insulation material from each lot delivered at site may be selected
by Owner’s site representative and gotten tested for thermal conductivity and
density at Contractor’s cost All joints shall be sealed properly with adhesive,
which shall provide similar vapor barrier as the original insulating material. All
hot water piping shall be insulated in the manner specified herein. Before
applying insulation, all pipe shall be brushed and cleaned. Thermal insulation
shall be applied as follows or as specified in drawings or schedule of quantity:
Pipe size (mm) Thickness of Nitrile

rubber insulation
15 mm to 25 mm 9 mm
32 mm to 50 mm 13 mm
65 mm and above 19 mm
Insulation for pipes in wall chase and for pipes in shaft / plant room.
Insulating material in tube form shall be sleeved on the pipes. On existing
piping, slit opened tube from insulating material shall be placed over the pipe
and adhesive (as recommended by the manufacturer) shall be applied as
suggested by the manufacturer. Adhesive must be allowed to tack dry and then
press surface firmly together starting from butt end and working towards
center.
Wherever flat sheets shall be used it shall be cut out in correct dimension. All
longitudinal and transverse joints shall be sealed as per manufacturer
recommendations. The insulation shall be continuous over the entire run of
piping, fittings and valves. All valves, fittings, joints, strainers etc. in hot water
piping shall be insulated to the same thickness as specified for the main run of
piping and application shall be same as above. Valves bonnet, yokes and
spindles shall be insulated in such a manner as not to cause damage to
insulation when the valve is used or serviced.

All insulation work shall be carried out by skilled workmen specially trained in
this kind of work. All insulated pipes shall be labeled (HWS / HWR / HWRR)
and provided with 300 mm wide band of paint along circumference at every
1200 mm for color coding. Direction of fluid shall also be marked. All painting
shall be as per relevant BIS codes.
Protective Coating over Insulation

To provide mechanical strength and protection from damage all exposed pipe
insulated with nytril rubber as indicated in BOQ shall be covered with fiberglass
fabric. The fiberglass fabric shall be applied with one coat of fire proof epoxy
or acrylic compound (resin & hardener). The coat shall be allowed to cure to
nonstick state. Subsequently second coat of compound shall be applied to give
a tough and smooth finish to the insulated surface
2 Measurement of Insulation
Unless otherwise specified measurement for pipe insulation for the project shall
be on the basis of center line measurements described herewith Pipe Insulation
shall be measured in units of length along the center line of the installed pipe,
strictly on the same basis as the piping measurements. The linear
measurements shall be taken before the application of the insulation. It may
be noted that for piping measurement, all valves, orifice plates and strainers
shall not be separately measurable by their number and size. It is to be clearly
understood that for the insulation measurements, all these accessories
including valves, orifice plates and strainers etc. shall be considered strictly by
linear measurements along the center line of pipes and no special rate shall be
applicable for insulation of any accessories, fixtures or fittings whatsoever
MR 15.030 : Providing and fixing proprietary polyshield outer

mechanical protection over nitrile rubber insulation comprising of
wrapping with poly glass tape helically wound and subsequently
applying 2 coats of polyshield material (resin &hardner) as per
manufacturers specification
( a) 15 mm nominal outer dia Pipes
MR 15.031 : (b)20 mm nominal outer dia Pipes
MR 15.032 : (c) 25 mm nominal outer dia Pipes
MR 15.033 : (d) 32 mm nominal outer dia Pipes
MR 15.034 : (e) 40 mm nominal outer dia Pipes
MR 15.035 : (f) 50 mm nominal outer dia Pipes
MR 15.036 : (g) 65 mm nominal outer dia Pipes

MR 15.037 : Supplying & fixing full way lever operated forged

brass ball valve of brass body with forged brass hard chrome
plated steel ball tested to a pressure not less than 25 Kg / sq.cm
with threaded joints complete with nuts, bolts, male threaded
adaptor, washers union etc.
MR 15.038 : (b) 20 mm nominal outer dia. Pipes

MR 15.039 : (c) 25mm nominal outer dia. Pipes
MR 15.040 : (d) 32mm nominal outer dia. Pipes
MR 15.041 : (e) 40mm nominal outer dia. Pipes
MR 15.042 : (f) 50mm nominal outer dia. pipes
The ball valve shall be made brass body and suitable for test pressure of
pipe line. The valve shall be internally threaded to receive pipe connections.
The ball shall be made from brass and machined to perfect round shape and
subsequently chrome plated. The seat of the valve body-bonnet gasket and
gland packing shall be of Teflon.
The handle shall be provided with PVC jacket. The handle shall also indicate
the direction of ‘open’ and ‘closed’ situations. The gap between the ball and
the Teflon packing shall be sealed to prevent water seeping.
The handle shall also be provided with a lug to keep the movement of the
ball valve within 90°. The lever shall be operated smoothly and without
application of any unnecessary force.
MR 15.043 : Supply, Installation, Testing and commissioning of

slim seal type C.I. Butterfly valve (Body : Grey Cast Iron, shaft :
SS, Disc : SG Iron (Rilson coated), Liner : HT - EPDM) of approved
make with PN 10 rating flange confirming to IS 6392, washer,
nuts & bolts. Rated to temperature of 85 Deg C and tested to a
pressure not less than 15 Kg/Sq.cm.
(a) 65mm nominal outer dia.
MR 15.044 : (b) 80mm nominal outer dia.
MR 15.045 : (c) 100mm nominal outer dia.
MR 15.046 : (d) 150mm nominal outer dia.
1. Material: The butterfly valve shall be flanged type or as specified

conforming to IS 13095 & BS - 5155. The valve shall be bubble tight,
resilient sealed suitable for flow in either direction with accompanying
flanges and steel handle.The butterfly valve shall be suitable for
waterworks and rated for 150 PSI Pressure requirement as mentioned in
the Schedule of quantities. The body shall be of cast iron to IS: 210 in
circular shape and of high strength to take the water pressure. The disc
shall be heavy duty cast iron with anti-corrosive epoxy or nickel coating.
The valve seat shall be of high grade elastomeric or nitrile rubber. The
valve is closed position shall have complete contact between the seat and
the disc throughout the perimeter. The elastomeric rubber shall have a

long life and shall not give away on continuous applied water pressure.
The shaft shall be EN 8 grade carbon steel. The valve shall be fitted
between two flanges on either side of pipe flanges. The valve edge rubber
shall be projected outside such that they are wedged within the pipe
flanges to prevent leakages
2. Workmanship: The butterfly valve shall be fixed to the pipe line in position
as indicated in the drawing and as directed by the Engineer-In-Charge.
TESTING: The valve and the joints shall be tested to a minimum
hydraulically pressure of 16 kg/sq.cm for a duration of two hours or as
per testing clause of piping work. The testing shall be done along with the
testing of pipe line. The leaky joints shall be rectified to the satisfaction of
the Engineer-in-Charge.
a.) Supplying and fixing Butterfly Valve of specified diameter.
b.) Supplying G.I. pipe and fittings if required.
c.) All necessary labour, material and use of tools.
d.) MODE OF MEASUREMENT: The measurement shall be for each unit of
butterfly Valve fixed. C.I. and G.I. specials, making lead or flange joint
etc. shall be measured under the relevant items
DSR Item No. 18.1.1 : Providing & fixing gun metal / Bronze non –
return valve of approved make with union / flange, washer, nuts
& bolts. Rated to temperature of 85 Deg C and tested to a pressure
not less than 15 Kg/Sq.cm.
(a) 20 mm nominal dia.
DSR Item No. 19.2.2 : (b) 32mm nominal dia.
1. Material: All valves shall be of gun metal suitable for the particular
service as specified. All valves shall be of the particular duty and design as
specified. Valves shall either be of screwed type or flanged type, as
specified, with suitable flanges and non-corrosive bolts and gaskets. Tail
pieces as required shall be supplied along with valves. Check valves shall
conform to Indian Standard IS:776 and non-return valves
2. Workmanship: The non-return valve shall be fixed to the pipe line in

position as indicated in the drawing and as directed by the Engineer-In-
Charge.
TESTING: The valve and the joints shall be tested to a minimum
hydraulically pressure of 16kg/sq.cm for a duration of two hours or as per
testing clause of piping work. The testing shall be done along with the
testing of pipe line. The leaky joints shall be rectified to the satisfaction of
the Engineer-in-Charge.
a.) Supplying and fixing Non Return Valve of specified diameter.

b.) All necessary labour, material and use of tools.

c.) The measurement shall be for each unit of non-return valve fixed.
CPVC MTA, making screw or flange joint etc. shall be measured under
the relevant items
MR 15.047 : Supply, installation, testing & commissioning Gun

metal of float valve with cast brass lever arm plastic ball confirming
to IS 1703 of approved quality complete as per approved
specifications.
(a) 32 mm nominal dia
MR 15.048 : (b) 40 mm nominal dia
Ball valves with floats to be fixed in storage tanks shall consist of cast brass
lever arm having PVC balls screwed to the arm integrally. The ball shall
have bronze welded seams. The closing/opening mechanism incorporating
the piston and cylinder shall be non-corrosive metal and include washers.
The size and construction of ball valves and float shall be suitable for desired
working pressure operating the supply system. Where called for brass
valves shall be supplied with brass hexagonal back nuts to secure them to
the tanks and a socket to connect to supply pipe.
Globe valves on Hot-water line shall be union bonnet with stem/disc and
body seat ring of SS. Suitable for temperature up to 80° C.
SI.No. Type of Valve Size Construction Ends

a. Isolating Valve 15 mm to 50 mm Gun Metal Screwed
65 mm and above Gun Metal Flanged
b. Sluice Valve & Butterfly 65 mm and above Cast Iron Flanged
Valve
c. G.M. non return valve 15 mm to 50 mm Gun Metal Screwed
65 mm above Gun Metal Flanged
All valves shall be suitable for the working pressure involved
16 EXTERNAL PLUMBING WORKS
Please refer to Relevant paras of Specifications for Drainage works

as per Sub head 19.0 of CPWD Civil works Specifications Volume II
2009.
DSR Item No. 2.8.1 : Earth work in excavation by mechanical means

(Hydraulic excavator)/ manual means in foundation trenches or
drains (not exceeding 1.5m in width or 10 sqm on plan), including
dressing of sides and ramming of bottoms, lift upto 1.5 m, including
getting out the excavated soil and disposal of surplus excavated soil
as directed within a lead of 50 m.All kinds of soil.

DSR Item No. 2.10.1.2 : Excavating trenches of required width for

pipes, cables, etc. including excavation for sockets, and dressing of
sides, ramming of bottoms, depth upto 1.5 m, including getting out
the excavated soil, and then returning the soil as required, in layers
not exceeding 20 cm in depth, including compacting each deposited
layer by ramming, watering, etc. and disposing of surplus excavated
soil as directed within a lead of 50 m.
All kinds of soil (a) Pipes, cables etc. exceeding 80 mm dia. but not
exceeding 300 mm dia
DSR Item No. 2.10.1.3 : (b) Pipes, cables etc. exceeding 80 mm dia.
but not exceeding 300 mm dia
19.2 PIPES AND SPECIALS
19.2.1 Glazed Stone Ware Pipes and Fittings
All pipes with spigot and socket ends and fittings shall conform to class SP1
of IS 651. These shall be sound, free from visible defects such as fire cracks or
hair cracks. The glaze of the pipes shall be free from crazing. The pipes shall
give a sharp clear tone when struck with a light hammer. There shall be no
broken blisters. The thickness of pipes shall be as given in the Table 19.2.
TABLE 19.2
Stoneware pipes
Internal Diameter Mean Thickness of the Barrel and Socket

(mm) (mm)
100 12
150 15
200 16
230 19
250 20
300 25
350 30
400 35
450 37
The length of pipes shall be 60, 75, 90 cm exclusive of the internal depth of
the socket. The pipes shall be handled with sufficient care to avoid damage to
them.
19.2.1.1 S.W. Gully Trap (Fig. 19.2): Gully traps shall conform to IS 651. These
shall be sound, free from visible defects such as fire cracks, or hair cracks. The
glaze of the traps shall be free form crazing. They shall give a sharp clear tone
when struck with light hammer. There shall be no broken blisters.
Each gully trap shall have one C.I. grating of square size corresponding to the
dimensions of inlet of gully trap. It will also have a water tight C.I. cover with
frame inside dimensions 300 x 300 mm the cover weighing not less than 4.50 Kg

and the frame not less than 2.70 Kg. The grating, cover and frame shall be of
sound and good casting and shall have truly square machined seating faces.
19.2.1.2 Laying and Jointing Stone Ware Pipes :For all sewers and drains,
glazed stoneware pipes shall be used as far as possible in preference to other
types of pipes. These are suitable, particularly where acid effluents or acid sub-
soil conditions are likely to be encountered.
Trenches: Specifications described in 19.2.2.1 shall apply, as far as possible.
The trench shall be so dug that the pipe can be laid to the required alignment and
at the required depth. When the pipe line is under a roadway, a minimum cover
of 90 cm is recommended for adoption, but it may be modified to suit local
conditions. The trench shall be excavated only so far in advance of pipe laying as
specified by the Engineer-in-Charge. The trench shall be so shored and drained
that the workmen may work therein safely and efficiently. The discharge of the
trench dewatering pumps shall be conveyed either to drainage channels or to
natural drains.
The excavation shall be carried out with manual labor or with suitable mechanical
equipment as approved by the Engineer-in-Charge.
Unless otherwise specified by the Engineer-in-Charge, the width at bottom of

trenches for different diameters of pipes laid at different depths shall be as given
below:—
For all diameters, up to an average depth of 120 cm, width of trench in cm =

diameter of pipe + 30 cm.
For all diameters for depths above 120 cm, width of trench in cm = diameter of
pipe + 40 cm.
Notwithstanding (a) and (b) the total width of trench shall not be less than 75 cm
for depths exceeding 90 cm.
The width of trench in the upper reaches shall be increased as described in sub-
head ‘Earthwork’.
Laying (Fig. 19.11): Where the pipes are laid on soft soil with maximum water
table lying at invert level of the pipe, the pipes shall be bedded in cement concrete
with thickness and mix as specified, projecting on each side of the pipe to the
specified width of the trench (Fig. 19.11(i)). The pipes with their crown level at
1.20 m depth and less from ground shall be covered with 15 cm thick. Concrete
above the crown of the pipe and sloped off to meet the outer edges of the
concrete, to give a minimum thickness of 15 cm all-around the pipe (Fig. 19.11
(iii)). Pipes laid at a depth greater than 1.20 m at crown and maximum water
table level rising above the invert level of pipe, shall be concreted at the sides up
to the level of the center of the pipe and sloped off from the edges to meet the
pipe tangentially (Fig. 19.11(ii)).
The pipe shall be carefully laid to the alignments, levels and gradients shown on
the plans and sections. Great care shall be taken to prevent sand etc. from

entering the pipes. The pipes between two manholes shall be laid truly in a straight
line without vertical or horizontal undulation. The pipes shall be laid with socket
ends facing upstream. The body of the pipe shall for its entire length rest on an
even bed of concrete and places shall be excavated in the concrete to receive the
socket of the pipe.
Where pipes are not bedded on concrete, the trench floor shall be left slightly high
and carefully bottomed up as pipe laying proceeds, so that the pipe barrels rest
on firm and undisturbed ground. If the excavation has been carried too low, the
desired levels shall be made up with concrete 1:5:10 (1 cement: 5 fine sand: 10
graded stone aggregate 40 mm nominal size) for which no extra payment shall
be made.
If the floor of the trench consists of rock or very hard ground that cannot easily
be excavated to smooth surface the pipe shall be laid on a levelling course of
concrete as desired.
When S.W. pipes are used for storm water drainage, no concreting will normally
be necessary. The cement mortar for jointing will be 1:3 (1 cement: 3 fine sand).
Testing of joints will also not be done.
Jointing: Tarred gasket or hemp yarn soaked in thick cement slurry shall first be
placed round the spigot of each pipe and the spigot shall then be slipped home
well into the socket of the pipe previously laid. The pipe shall then be adjusted
and fixed in the correct position and the gasket caulked tightly home so as to fill
not more than 1/4th of the total depth of the socket.
The remainder of the socket shall be filled with stiff mixture of cement mortar in
the proportion of 1:1 (1 cement: 1 fine sand). When the socket is filled, a fillet
shall be formed round the joint with a trowel forming an angle of 45 degree with
the barrel of the pipe.
After a day’s work any extraneous material shall be removed from the inside of
the pipe. The newly made joints shall be cured for at least seven days.
Testing of Joints : Stoneware pipes used for sewers shall be subjected to a test
pressure of 2.5 m head of water at the highest point of the section under test.
Before commencing test, the pipeline shall be filled with water and maintained full
for 24 hours under head of 0.6 m of water. The test shall be carried out by suitably
plugging the lower end of the drain and the ends of the connection if any and
filling the system with water. A knuckle bend shall be temporarily jointed in at the
top end and a sufficient length of vertical pipe jointed to it so as to provide the
required test head, or the top may be plugged with a connection to a hose ending
in a funnel which could be raised or lowered till the required head is obtained and
fixed suitable for observation. The tolerance of two liters per centimeter of
diameter per kilometer may be allowed during a period of 10 minutes.
If any leakage is visible, the defective part of the work shall be cut out and made
good. A slight amount of sweating which is uniform may be overlooked, but
excessive sweating from a particular pipe or joint shall be watched for and taken
as indicating a defect to be made good.

Any joint found leaking or sweating, shall be rectified or embedded into 15 cm

layer of cement concrete (1:2:4) 30 cm in length and the section retested.
Refilling : In cases where pipes are not bedded on concrete special care shall be
taken in refilling trenches to prevent the displacement and subsequent settlement
at the surface resulting in uneven street surfaces and dangers to foundations etc.
The backfilling materials shall be packed by hand under and around the pipe, and
rammed with a shovel and light tamper. This method of filling will be continued
up to the top of pipe. The refilling shall rise evenly on both sides of the pipe
continued up to 60 cm above the top of pipe so as not to disturb the pipe. No
tamping should be done within 15 cm of the top of pipe.
Measurements : The lengths of pipes shall be measured in running meters nearest
to a cm as laid or fixed, from inside of one manhole to the inside of the other
manhole. The length shall be taken along the center line of the pipes over all
fittings such as bends, junctions, etc. which shall not be measured separately.
Excavation, refilling, shoring and timbering in trenches, and cement concreting

wherever required shall be measured separately under relevant items of work.
Rate: The rate shall include the cost of materials and labor involved in all the
operations described above excluding the cost of concrete which shall be paid for
separately.
Fixing S.W. Gully Trap (Fig. 19.2)
Excavation: The excavation for gully traps shall be done true to dimensions and
levels as indicated on plans or as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
Fixing: The gully traps shall be fixed on cement concrete foundation 65 cm square
and not less than 10 cm thick. The mix for the concrete will be 1:5:10 (1 cement:
5 fine sand: 10 graded stone aggregate 40 mm nominal size). The jointing of gully
outlet to the branch drain shall be done similar to jointing of S.W. pipes described
above.
Brick Masonry Chamber : After fixing and testing gully and branch drain, a brick
masonry chamber 300 x 300 mm (inside) in brick work of specified class in cement
mortar 1:4 (1 cement: 4 fine sand) shall be built with a half brick thick brick work
round the gully trap from the top of the bed concrete up to ground level. The space
between the chamber walls and the trap shall be filled in with cement concrete
1:5:10 (1 cement: 5 fine sand: 10 graded stone aggregate 40 mm nominal size).
The upper portion of the chamber i.e. above the top level of the trap shall be plas-
tered inside with cement mortar 1:3 (1 cement: 3 coarse sand), finished with a
floating coat of neat cement. The corners and bottom of the chamber shall be
rounded off so as to slope towards the grating.
C.I. cover with frame 300 × 300 mm (inside) shall then be fixed on the top of the
brick masonry with cement concrete 1:2:4 (1 cement: 2 coarse sand: 4 graded
stone aggregate 20 mm nominal size) and rendered smooth. The finished top of
cover shall be left about 4 cm above the adjoining ground level so as to exclude
the surface water from entering the gully trap.

Measurements: The work shall be enumerated. Excavation shall be measured

separately under relevant item of earth work.
Rate: The rate shall include the cost of materials and labor involved in all the
operations described above, except earth work which shall be paid for separately.
19.2.2 Cement Concrete Pipes (with and without Reinforcement) (Light

Duty, Non-Pressure)
The pipes shall be with or without reinforcement as required and shall be of class
not lesser than NP2. These shall conform to IS 458 and shall be capable of
withstanding a test pressure of 0.07 MPa (7 m head). The reinforced cement
concrete pipes shall be manufactured by centrifugal (or spun) process while un -
reinforced cement concrete pipes by spun or pressure process. All pipes shall be
true to shape, straight, perfectly sound and free from cracks and flaws. The
external and internal surface of the pipes shall be smooth and hard. The pipes
shall be free from defects resulting from imperfect grading of the aggregate mixing
or molding.
Concrete used for the manufacture of un-reinforced and reinforced concrete

pipes and collars shall not be leaner than 1:2:4 (1 cement: 2 coarse sand: 4
graded stone aggregate). The maximum size of aggregate should not exceed one
third of the thickness of the pipe or 20 mm whichever is smaller for pipes above
250 mm internal diameter. But for pipes of internal diameter 80 to 250 mm, the
maximum size of aggregate should be 10mm. The reinforcement in the reinforced
concrete pipes shall extend throughout the length of the pipe. The circumferential
and longitudinal reinforcements shall be adequate to withstand the specified
hydrostatic pressure and further bending stresses due to the weight of water when
running full across a span equal to the length of pipe plus three times its own
weight.
The dimensional requirements of concrete pipes are given in Appendix I.
The minimum clear cover for reinforcement in pipes and collars shall be as given
in Table 19.3.
TABLE 19.3
Precast concrete
Sl. No. pipe/collar Minimum clear cover, mm
(i) Barrel wall thickness
Upto and including 75
(a) mm 8
(b) Over 75 mm 15
(ii) At spigot steps 5
(iii) At end of longitudinal 5
Note :An effective means shall be provided for maintaining the reinforcement
in position and forensuring correct cover during manufacture of the unit.
Spacers for this purpose shall be of rust proof material or of steel
protected against corrosion.

19.2.2.1 Laying and Jointing Cement Concrete Pipes and Specials

Trenches: Trenches shall be as described in 18.4.4. Where the pipes are to be
bedded directlyon soil, the bed shall be suitably rounded to fit the lower part of
the pipe, the cost for this operation being included in the rate for laying the pipe
itself.
Loading, transporting and unloading of concrete pipes shall be done with care.
Handling shall be such as to avoid impact. Gradual unloading by inclined plane
or by chain pulley block is recommended. All pipe sections and connections shall
be inspected carefully before being laid. Broken or defective pipes or connections
shall not be used. Pipes shall be lowered into the trenches carefully. Mechanical
appliances may be used. Pipes shall be laid true to line and grade as specified.
Laying of pipes shall proceed upgrade of a slope.
If the pipes have spigot and socket joints, the socket ends shall face upstream.
In the case of pipes with joints to be made with loose collars, the collars shall be
slipped on before the next pipe is laid. Adequate and proper expansion joints
shall be provided where directed.
In case where foundation conditions are unusual such as in the proximity of trees
or holes, under existing or proposed tracks manholes etc. the pipe shall be
encased all-around in 15 cm thick cement concrete 1:5:10 (1 cement : 5 fine
sand : 10 graded stone aggregate 40 mm nominal size) or compacted sand or
gravel.
In cases where the natural foundation is inadequate the pipes shall be laid either
in concrete cradle supported on proper foundations or on any other suitably
designed structure. If a concrete cradle bedding is used the depth of concrete
below the bottom of the pipe shall be at least 1/4th of the internal dia of the pipe
subject to the min. of 10 cm and a maximum of 30 cm. The concrete shall extend
up the sides of the pipe at least to a distance of 1/4th of the outside diameter of
pipes 300 mm and over in dia. The pipe shall be laid in this concrete bedding
before the concrete has set. Pipes laid in trenches in earth shall be bedded evenly
and firmly and as far up the haunches of the pipe as to safely transmit the load
expected from the backfill through the pipe to the bed. This shall be done either
by excavating the bottom of the trench to fit the curve of the pipe or by compacting
the earth under around the curve of the pipe to form an even bed. Necessary
provision shall be made for joints wherever required.
When the pipe is laid in a trench in rock hard clay, shale or other hard material
the space below the pipe shall be excavated and replaced with an equalising bed
of concrete, sand or compacted earth. In no place shall pipe be laid directly on
such hard material.
The method of bedding and laying the pipes under different conditions are
illustrated in Fig. 19.9.
When the pipes are laid completely above the ground the foundations shall be
made even and sufficiently compacted to support the pipe line without any
material settlement. Alternatively the pipe line shall be supported on rigid
foundations at intervals. Suitable arrangements shall be made to retain the pipe
line in the proper alignment, such as by shaping the top of the supports to fit the

lower part of the pipe. The distance between the supports shall in no case exceed
the length of the pipe. The pipe shall be supported as far as possible close to the
joints. In no case shall the joints come in the center of the span. Care shall be
taken to see that super imposed loads greater than the total load equivalent to
the weight of the pipe when running full shall not be permitted.
Suitably designed anchor blocks at change of direction and grades for pressure
lines shall be provided where required.
Jointing: Joints are generally of rigid type. Where specified flexible type joints
may also be provided.
Rigid Spigot and Socket Joint (Fig. 19.10): The spigot of each pipe shall be slipped
home well into the socket of the pipe previously laid and adjusted in the correct
position. The opening of the joint shall be filled with stiff mixture of cement mortar
in the proportion of 1:2 (1 cement: 2 fine sand) which shall be rammed with
caulking tool. After a day’s work any extraneous material shall be removed from
the inside of the pipe and the newly made joint shall be cured.
Rigid Collar Joint (Fig. 19.10): The two adjoining pipes shall be butted against
each other and adjusted in correct position. The collar shall then be slipped over
the joint, covering equally both the pipes. The annular space shall be filled with
stiff mixture of cement mortar 1:2 (1 cement: 2 fine sand) which shall be rammed
with caulking fool. After a day’s work any extraneous materials shall be removed
from the inside of the pipe and the newly made joint shall be cured.
Semi Flexible Spigot and Socket Joint (Fig. 19.10): The joint is composed of
specially shaped spigot and socket ends on the concrete pipes. A rubber ring shall
be placed on the spigot which shall be forced into the socket of the pipe previously
laid. This compresses the rubber ring as it rolls into the annular space formed
between the two surfaces of the spigot and the socket, stiff mixture of cement
mortar 1:2 (1 cement: 2 fine sand) shall then be filled into the remaining annular
space and rammed with a caulking tool. After day’s work any extraneous
materials shall be removed from the inside of the pipe and the newly made joint
shall be cured.
Semi Flexible Collar Joint: This is made up of a loose collar which covers two
specially shaped pipe ends as shown in the Fig. 19.10. Each end shall be fitted
with a rubber ring which when compressed between the spigot and the collar, seal
the joint. Stiff mixture of cement mortar 1:2 (1 cement: 2 fine sand), shall then
be filled into the remaining annular space and rammed with a caulking tool. After
day’s work, any extraneous material shall be removed from the inside of the pipe
and the newly made joint shall be cured.
Internal Flush Joint (Fig. 19.10): This joint is generally used for culvert pipe of 60
cm dia and over. The ends of the pipe are specially shaped to form a self-centering
joint with an internal jointing space 1.3 cm wide the finished joint is flush with
both inside and outside with the pipe wall as shown in Fig. 19.10. The jointing
space is filled with cement mortar 1:2 (1 cement: 2 fine sand) mixed sufficiently
dry to remain in position when forced with a trowel or rammer. After day’s work,
any extraneous material shall be removed from the inside of the pipe and the
newly made joint shall be cured.

External Flush Joint: This joint is suitable for pipes which are too small for jointing
from inside. This joint is composed of specially shaped pipe ends as shown in Fig.
19.10. Each end shall be butted against each other and adjusted in correct
position. The jointing space shall then be filled with cement mortar 1:2 (1 cement:
2 fine sand) sufficiently dry and finished off flush. Great care shall be taken to
ensure that the projecting ends are not damaged as no repairs can be readily
affected from inside the pipe.
In all pressure pipe lines the recess at the end of the pipe line shall be filled with
jute braiding dipped in hot bitumen or other suitable approved compound. Pipes
shall be so jointed that the bitumen ring of one pipe shall set into the recess of
the next pipe. The ring shall be thoroughly compressed by jacking or by any other
suitable method.
The number of pipes that shall be jacked together at a time shall depend on the
diameter of the pipes and the bearing capacity of the soil, for small pipes up to 25
cm diameter, six pipes can be jacked together at a time.
The quantity of jute and bitumen in the ring shall be just sufficient to fill the recess
in the pipe when pressed hard by jacking or by any other suitable method. Before
and during jacking care shall be taken to see that there is no offset at the joint.
Testing: For pressure pipes, the completed pipeline shall be tested for pressure
(Known as site test pressure) which shall not be less than the maximum pipeline
operating pressure plus the calculated surge pressure, but in no case shall it
exceed the hydrostatic test pressure. For non-pressure pipes the joints shall be
tested as per procedure laid down under Para 19.2.1.2 (iv).
Refilling of Trenches: The specification described in 19.2.1.2 (v) shall apply. In

case where pipes are not bedded on concrete special care shall be taken in refilling,
trenches to prevent the displacement and subsequent settlement at the surface
resulting in uneven street surfaces and dangers to foundations etc. The backfilling
materials shall be packed by hand under and around the pipe and rammed with a
shovel and light tamper. This method of filling will be continued up to the top of
pipe. The refilling shall rise evenly on both sides of the pipe and continued up to
60 cm above the top of pipe so as not to disturb the pipe. No tamping shall be
done within 15 cm of the top of pipe. The tamping shall become progressively
heavier as the depth of the backfill increases.
Measurements : The lengths of pipes shall be measured in running meters nearest

to a cm as laid or fixed, from inside of one manhole to the inside of the other
manhole. The length shall be taken along the center line of the pipes over all
fittings such as bends, collars, junctions, etc. which shall not be measured
separately.
Excavation, refilling, shoring and timbering in trenches, and cement concreting
wherever required shall be measured separately under relevant items of work.
Rate: The rate shall include the cost of materials and labour involved in all the
operations described above.
Cast Iron (Centrifugally Cast) Pipes and Specials

Cast iron (centrifugally cast) pipes and specials shall conform to the
specifications described in 18.3.10.
19.2.4 Road Gully Grating (Fig. 19.13)

Horizontal Gully Grating: The casting of the grating and frames shall be the
same as that of manhole covers described in 19.2.2.1. The gully grating cover
shall be hinged to the frame to facilitate its opening for cleaning and repairs. A
typical grating is shown in Fig. 19.13 & 19.14. The weight of grating shown in
Figure shall be minimum 75 Kg. In case of R.C.C. horizontal gully grating it shall
be in cement concrete 1:1:2 (1 cement: 1 coarse sand: 2 graded stone
aggregate 20 mm nominal size) as shown in Fig. 19.13.
Vertical Gully Grating: The chamber shall be of brick masonry, 12 mm dia,

round bar shall be fixed in cement concrete block at the bottom. The bars at the
top shall be welded or riveted to M.S. flat 40×6 mm as shown in Fig. 19.14.
Horizontal and Vertical Gully Grating: The details of typical road gully
chamber of brick masonry with horizontal and vertical grating shall be as given
in Fig. 19.14.
MANHOLE COVERS & FRAMES
19.3.1 Manhole Covers

The covers and frames shall conform to IS 1726 for cast Iron and IS 12592
for pre-cast concrete covers and shall be of the following grades and types.
Grades Grade Type/shape of cover

Designation
Light Duty LD - 2.5 Rectangular, Square, Circular

Rectangular, Circular and Square (for pre-cast
Medium Duty MD - 10 concrete
manhole covers)
Heavy Duty HD - 20 Circular-Square, Rectangular, (Scrapper Manhole)
Extra Heavy
Duty EHD - 35 Circular, Square, Rectangular, (Scrapper Manhole)
19.3.1.1 Cast Iron Manhole Covers and Frames

Manhole covers and frame shall be manufactured from appropriate grade of grey
cast iron not inferior than FG150 grade of IS 210.
They shall be cleanly cast and shall be free from air and sand holes, cold shuts
and warping.
Covers shall have on its operative top a raised chequered design to provide for
an adequate no-slip grip. The rise of chequers shall be not less than 4mm.
Key holes, keys and lifting devices shall be provided in the manhole covered to
facilitate their placement in the frames and their operative maintenance.
Manhole covers and frames shall be coated with materials having base with a black
bituminous composition. The coating shall be smooth and tenacious. It shall not

flow when exposed to temperature of 63°C and shall not be so brittle as to chip
off at temperature of 0°C.
Size and shape and performance requirement of manhole covers and frames shall
conform to IS 1726.
Each manhole covers and frame shall have cast on them the following information:
Manufacturer’s name or trade-mark
Grade designation
Date of manufacturer
The words SWD or ’Sewer’ to denote ‘storm water drain’ or ‘sewer’ respectively
Identification marks as required by Engineer-in-Charge.
The cover shall be gas tight and water tight.
The sizes of covers specified shall be taken as the clear internal dimensions of the
frame.
The approximate weight of the various type of manhole covers and frames shall
be as per IS 1726.
The cover shall be capable of easy opening and closing and it shall be fitted in the
frame in workmanship like manner.
19.3.2 Pre-Cast Concrete Manhole Covers & Frames

Pre-cast reinforced cement concrete manhole covers intended for use in
sewerage and water works shall generally conform to IS 12592.
19.3.2.1 Materials
Cement: Cement used for the manufacture of pre-cast concrete manhole covers
shall be 43 grade Portland cement conforming to IS-8112.
Aggregates: The aggregates used shall be clean and free from deleterious matter
and shall conform to the requirements of IS -383. The aggregates shall be well
graded and the nominal maximum size of coarse aggregate shall not exceed 20
mm.
Concrete: The mix proportions of concrete shall be determined by the

manufacturer and shall be such as will produce a dense concrete without voids,
honey combing etc. The minimum cement content in the concrete shall be 410
kg/m3 with a maximum water cement ratio of 0.45. Concrete weaker than grade
M-30 (design mix) shall not be used. Compaction of concrete shall be done by
machine vibration.
Reinforcement
The reinforcement steel shall conform to IS 1786. Reinforcement shall be clean
and free from loose mill scale, loose rust, and mud, oil, grease or any other coating
which may reduce or destroy the bond between the concrete and steel. A light film
of rust may not be regarded as harmful but steel shall not be visibly pitted by rust.

Fibers Steel: The diameter/equivalent diameter of steel fibers where used, shall
not be greater than 0.75 mm. The aspect ratio shall be in the range of 50 to 80.
The minimum volume of fibers shall be 0.5 percent of the volume of concrete.
The reinforced concrete manhole cover and frame shall be designed in
accordance with the provisions of IS 456. Clear cover to reinforcement shall not
be less than 15 mm.
19.3.2.2 Shapes and Dimensions: Shape, dimensions and tolerance of pre-

cast concrete manhole covers and frames shall conform to IS 12592. Outside
dimension of cover at top shall match with corresponding frame so that the
maximum clearance at top between the frame and the cover all round the
periphery is not more than 5 mm and the top surface of the frame and covers,
is in level within a tolerance of +5 mm.
For facility of removing the cover from the frame, suitable taper matching
with taper given for the frame shall be provided to the periphery of the cover.
Lifting Device: The minimum diameter of mild steel rod used as lifting device
shall be 12 mm for light and medium duty covers and 16 mm for heavy and extra
heavy duty covers. The lifting device shall be protected from corrosion by hot
galvanizing or epoxy coating or any other suitable treatment.
Finishing & Coating: To prevent any possible damage from corrosion of steel
the underside of the covers shall be treated with anticorrosive paint. The top
surface of the covers shall be given a chequered finish.
In order to protect the edges of the covers from possible damage at the time of
lifting and handling it is necessary that the manhole covers shall be cast with a
protective mild steel sheet of minimum 2.5 mm thickness around the periphery
of the covers. Exposed surface of mild steel sheet shall be given suitable
treatment with anticorrosive paint or coating. To prevent the top outer edge of
frame from possible damages, it shall be protected by 25 mm X 3 mm mild steel
flat as part of the frame.
19.3.2.5 Physical Requirements
General: All units shall be sound and free from cracks and other defects which
interface with the proper placing of the unit or impair the strength or performance
of the units. Minor chipping at the edge/surface resulting from the customary
methods of handling during delivery shall not be deemed for rejecting.
Load Test: The breaking load of individual units when tested in accordance with
the method described in IS 12592 shall be not less than the values specified in
Table 19.4.
TABLE 19.4
Grade of Type Load in Diameter of

Cover Tonnes Blocks in mm
Circular, Square or
EHD - 35 Rectangular 35 300
Circular, Square or
HD - 20 Rectangular 20 300

MD - 10 Circular or Rectangular 10 300

Rectangular, Square or
LD - 2.5 Circular 2.5 300
Fixing: The frames of manhole shall be firmly embedded to correct alignment

and level in RCC slab or plain concrete as the case may be on the top of masonry
which shall be paid as extra unless specified otherwise.
Measurements: The manhole covers shall be enumerated under relevant items.
Rates: The rate shall include the cost of materials and labour involved in all the
operationdescribed above except fixing of frames and covers which shall be paid
as extra unless specified otherwise in the item.
19.3.2.9 Foot Rests: Foot rests shall be of 20 mm M.S. square or round bars
as specified.
19.4 MANHOLES (FIG. 19.3 to 19.8)

At every change of alignment, gradient or diameter of a drain, there shall be a
manhole or inspection chamber. Bends and junctions in the drains shall be
grouped together in manhole as far as possible. The maximum distance between
manholes shall be 30 m.
Manholes of different types and sizes as specified shall be constructed in the

sewer line at such places and to such levels and dimensions as shown in the
drawings or as directed by the Engineer -in-Charge. The size specified shall
indicate the inside dimensions between brick faces of the manholes.
Where the diameter of the drain is increased, the crown of the pipe shall be
fixed at the same level and necessary slope given in the invert of the manhole
chamber. In exceptional cases and where unavoidable, the crown of the branch
sewer may be fixed at lower level but in such cases the peak flow level of the two
sewers shall be kept the same.
Sewers of unequal sectional area shall not be jointed at the same invert in a
manhole. The invert of the smaller sewer at its junction with main shall be at least
2/3 the diameter of the main above the invert of the main. The branch sewers
shall deliver sewage in the manhole in the direction of main flow and the junction
must be made with care so that flow in main is not impeded.
No drain from house fittings, e.g. gully trap or soil pipe, etc. to manhole shall
normally exceed a length of 6 m unless it is unavoidable.
Manholes 90 × 80 cm are generally constructed within compound for house

drainage only and near the buildings for house drainage. Manholes 1.2 m × 90
cm are generally constructed for main drainage work for depths less than 1.5 m.
Manhole 1.4 m × 90 cm is of the arched type and is generally constructed for

main drainage works where depth is 1.50 m or more. The width of manholes shall
be increased more than 90 cm on bends or junctions or pipes with diameter
greater than 450 mm and that the benching width on either side of the channel is
minimum 20 cm.

Manholes 1.4 m internal diameter are generally constructed for main drainage
works where depth is 2.45 m or more as an alternative to manholes of arch type.
The diameter shall be increased suitably, for pipes with diameter greater than 450
mm in the same manner as in the case of rectangular manholes.
Before deciding size of manholes, Local Municipal Bye Laws shall be consulted.
As a general guide some typical type designs of manholes followed in Delhi have
been shown in Fig. 19.4 to 19.7. When manholes are constructed on foot path,
these shall be provided with cover of medium duty casting and when built within
the width of the road under vehicular traffic, these shall be provided with cover of
heavy duty casting.
19.4.1 Excavation
The excavation for manhole shall be true to dimensions and levels shown on
the plans or as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
19.4.2 Bed Concrete

The manhole shall be built on a bed of cement concrete 1:4:8 (1 cement: 4
coarse sand: 8 graded stone aggregate 40 mm nominal size) unless required by
local authorities. The thickness of the bed concrete shall be 20 cm for manholes
up to 4.25 m depth and 30 cm for depths beyond 4.25 m unless otherwise
specified or directed by the Engineer-in-Charge. In bad ground, special
foundations as suitable shall be provided.
19.4.3 Brick Work

The brick work shall be with class 75 bricks in cement mortar 1:4 (1 cement:
4 coarse sand). The external joints of the brick masonry shall be finished smooth,
and the joints of the pipes with the masonry shall be made perfectly leak proof.
For arched type and circular manholes, brick masonry in arches and arching over
the pipes shall be in cement mortar 1.3 (1 cement: 3 fine sand). In the case of
manholes of circular type the excess shaft shall be corbelled inwardly on three
sides at the top to reduce its size to the cover frame to be fitted.
The walls shall be built of one brick thickness for depths up to 4.25 m. Below
a depth of 4.25 m in ordinary subsoil the wall thickness shall be increased to one
and half brick and at 9.75 m below ground two brick thick walls shall be built.
19.4.4 Plaster and Pointing

The walls of the manholes shall be plastered inside with 12 mm thick cement
plaster 1:3 (1 cement: 3 coarse sand) finished smooth. In the case of arched
type manhole the walls of the manhole shall be plastered inside all-around only
up to the crown level, and flush pointed for the shaft with cement mortar 1:2 (1
cement: 2 fine sand). Where the saturated soil is met with, also the external
surface of the walls of the manhole shall be plastered with 12 mm thick cement
plaster 1:3 (1 cement: 3 coarse sand) finished smooth up to 30 cm above the
highest sub-soil water level with the approval of the Engineer-in-Charge. The
plaster shall further be water proofed with addition of approved water proofing
compound in a quantity as per manufacturer’s specifications. In case Local
Authorities/Bye Laws specify richer specifications, the same shall be adopted.
For earth work excavation, bed concrete brick work, plaster and pointing,
R.C.C. work and refilling of earth, respective specifications shall be followed.

19.4.5 Benching
The channels and benching shall be done in cement concrete 1:2:4 (1 cement:
2 coarse sand: 4 graded stone aggregate 20 mm nominal size) and rendered
smooth with neat cement. The depth of channels and benching shall be as given
in Table 19.5.
19.4.6 Foot Rests (Fig. 19.8)

All manholes deeper than 0.8 m shall be provided with M.S. foot rests. These
shall be embedded 20 cm deep in 20 x 20 x 10 cm blocks of cement concrete
1:3:6 (1 cement: 3 coarse sand 6 graded stone aggregate 20 mm nominal size).
The concrete block with M.S. foot rest placed in its centre shall be cast in situ
along with the masonry and surface finished with 12 mm thick cement plaster
1:3 (1 cement: 3 coarse sand) finished smooth.
TABLE 19.5
Sizes of drain Top of channel at the centre Depth of benching at side walls
above bed concrete above bed concrete
mm Cm cm
100 15 20
150 20 30
200 25 35
250 30 40
300 35 45
350 40 50
400 45 55
450 50 60
Foot rests which shall be of 20 × 20 Sq. M.S. bars as shown in Fig. 19.8 shall
be fixed 40 cm apart vertically and staggered laterally and shall project 10 cm
beyond the surface of the wall. The top foot rest shall be 45 cm below the manhole
cover.
Foot rests shall be painted with coal tar, the portion embedded in the cement
concrete block being painted with thick cement slurry before fixing.
19.4.7 Manhole Covers and Frames

The frame of manhole shall be firmly embedded to correct alignment and levels
in R.C.C. slab or plain concrete as the case may be on the top of the masonry.
After completion of the work, manhole covers shall be sealed by means of thick
grease.
19.4.8 Measurements

Manholes shall be enumerated under relevant items. The depth of the manhole
shall be reckoned from the top level of C.I. cover to the invert level of channel.
The depth shall be measured correct to a cm. The extra depth shall be measured
and paid as extra over the specified depth.
19.4.9 Rate
The rate shall include the cost of materials and labour involved in all the
operations described above but excludes the cost of (i) excavation, (ii) M.S. foot
rests and (iii) 12 mm thick cement plaster with water proofing material applied at
the external surface of the manhole if required. These items shall be paid for
separately under relevant items of work.
Payment for extra depths of manholes shall be made separately under

relevant items of work.
DROP CONNECTION (FIG. 19.8)

19.5.0 In cases where branch pipe sewer enters the manhole of main pipe sewer
at a higher level than the main sewer, a drop connection shall be provided. The
work shall be carried out as per Fig. 19.8. S.C.I. pipes and special conforming to
IS 1729 shall be of the same size as that of the branch pipe sewer.
For 150 and 250 mm main line, if the difference in level between the water line
(peak flow level) and the invert level of the branch line is less than 60 cm, a drop
connection may be provided with in the manhole by giving suitable ramp. If the
difference in level is more than 60 cm, the drop shall be provided externally.
The main lines up to 350 mm dia, are designed for half depth of flow, from 350
mm to 900 mm for 2/3 depth of flow and beyond 900 mm for 3/4 depth of flow.
19.5.1 Excavation
The excavation shall be done for the drop connection at the place where the
branch line meets the manhole. The excavation shall be carried up to the bed
concrete of the manhole and to the full width of the branch line.
19.5.2 Laying
At the end of branch sewer line S.C.I. cross shall be fixed to the line which shall
be extended through the wall of the manhole by a horizontal piece of S.C.I. pipe
to form an inspection or cleaning eye. The open end shall be provided with chain
and lid. The S.C.I. drop pipe shall be connected to the cross at the top and to the
S.C.I. bend at the bottom. The bend shall be extended through the wall of the
manhole by a piece of C.I. pipe which shall discharge into the channel. Necessary
channel shall be made with cement concrete 1:2:4 (1 cement: 2 coarse sand: 4
graded stone aggregate 20 mm nominal size) and finished smooth to connect the
main channel. The joint between S.C.I. pipe and fittings shall be lead caulked as
described in 18.5.3. The joint between S.C.I. cross and S.W. branch line shall be
made with cement mortar 1:1 (1 cement: 1 fine sand). The exposed portion of
the drop connection shall
be encased all-around with minimum 15 cm thick concrete 1:5:10 (1 cement: 5
fine sand: 10 graded stone aggregate 40 mm nominal size) and cured. For
encasing the concrete around the drop connection, the necessary centering and
shuttering shall be provided. The holes made in the walls of the manhole shall be
made good with brick work in cement mortar 1:4 (1 cement: 4 coarse sand) and

plastered with cement mortar 1:3 (1 cement: 3 coarse sand) on the inside of the
manhole wall. The excavated earth shall be back filled in the trench in level with
the original ground level.
19.5.3 Measurements
Drop connection shall be enumerated. The depths beyond 60 cm shall be
measured in running meters correct to a cm under relevant items.
19.5.4 Rate
The rate shall include the cost of labour and materials involved in all the
operations described above but excluding the cost of excavations and refilling.
19.6 OPEN SURFACE DRAIN (FIG. 19.12)

The open drains shall be of the size, as specified in the item and laid to such
gradients and in such locations as may be shown in the relevant drawing or as
directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
The size of the drain as specified shall be the width of the drain at the top,
measured between the masonry walls. The drain shall be given, as far as possible,
uniform slope from the starting point to the discharge point.
The average depths of the various sizes of drains shall be as follows:—
Drain size Depth

10 cm 20 cm
15 cm 20 cm
25 cm 30 cm
19.6.1 Measurements
The drains shall be measured in running metres, correct to a cm.
19.6.2 Rate
The rate shall include the cost of labour and materials required for all the
operations described above, suitable deduction or extra payment, per cm basis
shall be made in case there is a variation in average depths from those stated
above.
19.7 ROAD GULLY CHAMBER WITH GRATING

19.7.1 Road Gully Chamber with Horizontal Grating (Fig. 19.14)
The chamber shall be of brick masonry of specified class and shall have a C.I.
grating with frame fixed in 15 cm thick cement concrete 1:2:4 (1 cement: 2 coarse
sand: 4 graded stone aggregate 20 mm nominal size) at the top. The size of the
chamber shall be taken as the clear internal dimensions of the C.I. frame. The
chamber shall have a connection pipe, the length of which in metre between the
road gully chamber and the manhole of the drain shall not be less than one by
forty (1/40) times the nominal diameter of pipe in mm (i.e. for 150 mm connection
pipe, length shall not be less than 3.7 m and for 250 mm connection pipe length
shall not be less than 6.25 m). The chamber shall be built at the location fixed by
the Engineer-in -Charge. Generally the spacing of the chambers shall be 18 to 36
m depending upon the grading of the road channel and the area of the drainage.

R.C.C. gully grating shall be fixed in cement mortar 1:2 (1 cement: 2 coarse sand)
as shown in Fig. 19.13.
19.7.2 Road Gully Chamber with Vertical Grating (Fig. 19.14)
The chamber shall be of brick masonry 12 mm dia round bar shall be fixed in
cement concrete block at the bottom. The bars at the top shall be welded or riveted
to M.S. flat 40 × 6 mm as shown in Fig. 19.14. The specifications shall be same
as described in 19.7.1.
19.7.3 Road Gully Chamber with Horizontal and Vertical Grating

The details of typical road gully chamber of brick masonry shall be same as
shown in Fig. 19.14.
19.7.4 Measurements
Road gully chambers shall be enumerated.
19.7.5 Rate
The rate shall include the cost of materials and labour involved in all the
operations described above except the cost of excavation and connection pipes.
19.8 BRICK MASONRY GULLY TRAP (FIG. 19.2)

The internal size of the trap shall be 80 × 40 × 46 cm. The height shall be
measured from the top of the floor to the top of the cover. 40 mm thick stone
baffles shall be fixed 50 mm deep in masonry with cement mortar 1:4 (1 cement:
4 fine sand), as shown in the Fig. 19.2. The connection of open surface, drain with
a soak pit shall be invariably through a grease trap.
19.8.1 Measurements
Gully traps shall be enumerated.
19.8.2 Rate
The rate shall include the cost of labor and materials required for all the
operations described above.
A: DIMENSIONAL REQUIREMENT OF CLASS NP2-REINFORCED

CONCRETE LIGHT
DUTY, NON PRESSURE PIPES & COLLAR
(Clause 19.2.2)
Nominal Barrel Wall Collar Dimensions Reinforcements in Collar

Internal Thickness Minimum Minimum Minimum Longitudinal, Mild Spiral Hard
steel or Hard
Diameter of pipe Caulking Thickness Length Drawn Drawn
of Pipe Space Steel Steel
Minimum Weight
mm mm mm mm mm Number Kg/Collar Kg/Collar
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)
80 25 13 25 150 6 0.08 0.07
100 25 13 25 150 6 0.08 0.08
150 25 13 25 150 6 0.08 0.10
200 25 13 25 150 6 0.08 0.12
225 25 13 25 150 6 0.08 0.14
250 25 13 25 150 6 0.08 0.16

300 30 16 30 150 8 0.11 0.22

350 32 16 32 150 8 0.11 0.25
400 32 16 32 150 8 0.11 0.27
450 35 19 35 200 8 0.15 0.40
500 35 19 35 200 8 0.15 0.60
600 45 19 40 200 8 0.15 0.70
700 50 19 40 200 8 0.23 1.05
800 50 19 45 200 8 0.23 1.85
900 55 19 50 200 8 0.23 2.05
1000 60 19 55 200 8 0.33 2.25
1100 65 19 60 200 8 0.33 3.09
1200 70 19 65 200 8 0.33 4.11
1400 75 19 75 200 12 0.50 5.08
12 or
1600 80 19 80 200 8+8 0.67 6.55
12 or
1800 90 19 90 200 8+8 0.67 9.00
2000 100 19 100 200 12+12 1.00 12.15
2200 110 19 110 200 12+12 1.00 13.30
Note:
If the mild steel is used for spiral reinforcement, the weight specified under col. 7
shall be increased by a factor 140/25.
Soft grade mild steel wire may be used as reinforcement for collars of pipes of
nominal internal diameter up to 250 mm only, by increasing the weight by a factor
140/84. Where only soft grade mild steel wire is used for making collar cages, the
weight of reinforcement shall be total weight or col. 6 and 7 multiplied by 140/84.
This is allowed as a process requirement.
Internal diameter of collar to suit the actual diameter of pipes with minimum
caulking space as given in col. 2
B : REINFORCED CONCRETE PRESSURE PIPES CLASS P1

TESTED TO 20 m HEAD, CLASS P2 TESTED TO 40 m HEAD
AND CLASS P3 TESTED TO 60 m HEAD
Internal Barrel dimension

diameter
of pipes Class P1 Class P2 Class P3
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
80 25 25 25
100 25 25 25
150 25 25 25
200 25 30 35
225 25 30 35
250 25 30 35
300 30 40 45
350 32 45 55
400 32 50 60
450 35 50 70
500 35 55 75

600 40 65 90
700 40 70 105
800 45 80 120
900 50 90 -
1000 55 100 -
1100 60 - -
1200 65 - -
Notes:
The effective length of barrel shall be 2 m up to 250 mm nominal diameter pipes

and 2.5, 3.0, 3.5 or 4.0 m for pipes above 250 mm.
Collar dimensions will be same as specified for class NP2 pipes.
MR 16.001 : Sewer Drainage - Providing and fixing of uPVC SDR

pipes as Underground Sewerage Pipes as per IS 15328-2003 for
underground non pressure applications , placing in trench , jointing
the pipes with solvent cement as per manufacturer's specifications
complete as per specifications and as directed by the Engineer - in
- Charge. Make of the pipe: Supreme/Finolex SN4 (SDR 41, Stiffness
Class 4KN/m2). PCC for bedding, haunching or all round the pipe,
excavation and backfilling shall be payable separately under
relevant head
a) 160 mm dia uPVC PIPE
MR 16.002 : b) 200 mm dia
MR 16.003 : c) 250 mm dia
MR 16.004 : d) 315 mm dia
The pipes shall be round and shall be supplied in straight lengths with
socketed ends. The internal and external surfaces of pipes shall be smooth,
clean, and free from grooving and other defects. The ends shall be cleanly
cut and square with the axis of the pipe. The pipes shall be designed by
external diameter and shall conform to IS: 15328:2003. The Pipe shall be
of SN4- SDR 41, stiffness 4KN/m2.
Laying
UPVC pipes shall be laid on cement concrete bed of cradles as specified and
shown on the detailed drawings. The cradles may be precast and sufficiently
cured to prevent cracks and breakage in handling. The invert of the cradles
shall be left 12 mm below the invert level of the pipe and properly placed
on the soil to prevent any disturbance. The pipe shall then be placed on
`the bed concrete or cradles and set for the line and gradient by means of
sight rails and boning rods, etc. Cradles or concrete bed may be omitted, if
directed by the Project Manager.
Jointing

Jointing for UPVC pipes shall be made by means of solvent cement. The
type of joint shall be used as per site conditions / direction of the Owner’s
site representative.
Cement Concrete for Pipe Supports
a. Unless otherwise directed by the Project Manager Cement concrete for
bed, all round or in haunches shall be as follows:
upto 1.5m upto 3m beyond 3m
depth depth depth
PVC / HDPE pipe All round In In
(1:2:4) Haunches Haunches
(1:3:6) (1:3:6)
All pipes under building All round In Haunches In Haunches
(1:2:4) (1:2:4) (1:2:4)
External Civil Work shall be completely done as per Item No. 39.
TESTING
Mirror Test shall be performed at site.
MEASUREMENTS
i. The description of each item shall unless otherwise stated, be
held to include where necessary, conveyance, and delivery,
handling unloading, storing fabrication, hoisting, all labor for
finishing to required shape and size; testing, fitting in position,
straight, cutting and waste, return of packing
ii. The length shall be measured on running meter basis of finished
work. The length shall be taken along the center line of the pipe
and fittings. The pipes fixed to floors etc shall be measured and
paid under this item.
iii. All measurements of cutting shall unless otherwise stated be held
to include the consequent waste.
iv. In case of fitting of unequal bore, the largest bore shall be
measured for the rest.
v. Connection to down take pipe
vi. Testing of pipe lines fittings and joints include for providing all
plant and appliances necessary for obtaining access to the work
to be tested and carrying out the tests.
vii. The rate shall be exclusive of encasing of pipe with sand or PCC,
and same shall be paid in relevant tender items.
The rate shall be for a unit of one running meter
DSR Item No. 19.6.2 : STORM DRAINAGE - Providing and laying non-
pressure NP2 class (light duty) R.C.C. pipes with collars jointed with
stiff mixture of cement mortar in the proportion of 1:2 (1 cement :
2 fine sand) including testing of joints etc. complete:
(a) 150mm RCC Pipe
DSR Item No. 19.6.3 : (b) 250mm dia R.C.C. pipe
DSR Item No. 19.6.4 : (c) 300mm dia R.C.C. pipe

Please refer relevant specification of Drainage work Sub head 19.0 of

CPWD Civil works specifications 2009 Volume II
DSR Item No. 19.1.1 : Providing, laying and jointing glazed

stoneware pipes class SP-1 with stiff mixture of cement mortar in
the proportion of 1:1 (1 cement : 1 fine sand) including testing of
joints etc. complete:
a) 100mm dia.

DSR Item No. 19.2.2 : Providing and laying cement concrete

1:5:10 (1 cement : 5 coarse sand :10 graded stone aggregate 40
mm nominal size) all-round including bed concrete as per
standard design.
(a)150mm nominal dia
DRS Item No. 19.2.3 : (b) 200mm nominal dia
DSR Item No. 19.2.4 : (c) 250mm nominal dia.

DSR Item No. 19.3.4 : Providing and laying cement concrete 1:5:10
(1 cement : 5 coarse sand :10 graded stone aggregate 40 mm
nominal size) up to haunches of pipes including bed concrete as per
standard design.
(a) 250mm diameter
DSR Item No. 19.3.4 : (b) 300mm nominal dia

DSR Item No. 19.2.4.1 : Providing and fixing square-mouth S.W.

gully trap class SP-1 complete with C.I. grating brick masonry
chamber with water tight C.I. cover with frame of 300x300 mm size
(inside) the weight of cover to be not less than 4.50 kg and frame
to be not less than 2.70 kg as per standard design 150 x 100 mm
size P type
With common burnt clay F.P.S.(non modular) bricks of class
designation 7.5

DSR Item No. 19.30.1.1 : Constructing brick masonry chamber for

underground C.I. inspection chamber and bends with bricks in
cement mortar 1:4 (1 cement : 4 coarse sand) C.I. cover with frame

(light duty) 455x610 mm internal dimensions, total weight of cover

with frame to be not less than 38 kg (weight of cover 23 kg and
weight of frame 15 kg), R.C.C. top slab with 1:2:4 mix (1 cement: 2
coarse sand : 4 graded stone aggregate 20 mm nominal size),
foundation concrete 1:5:10 (1 cement : 5 fine sand : 10 graded
stone aggregate 40 mm nominal size), inside plastering 12 mm
thick with cement mortar 1:3 (1 cement : 3 coarse sand), finished
smooth with a floating coat of neat cement on walls and bed
concrete etc. complete as per standard design:
Inside dimensions 455x610 mm and 45 cm deep for single pipe line
With common burnt clay F.P.S. (non modular) bricks of class
designation 7.5

DSR Item No. 19.31.1 Extra for depth beyond 45 cm of brick

masonry chamber :
For 455x610 mm size with common burnt clay F.P.S. (non modular)
bricks of class designation 7.5

DSR Item No. 19.9.1.1 : Sewer Manhole - Constructing brick

masonry circular type manhole 0.91 m internal dia at bottom and
0.56m dia at top in cement mortar 1:4 (1 cement :4 coarse sand),
in side cement plaster 12 mm thick with cement mortar 1:3 (1
cement : 3 coarse sand) finished with a floating coat of neat cement,
foundation concrete 1:3:6 mix (1 cement : 3 coarse sand : 6 graded
stone aggregate 40 mm nominal size), and making necessary
channel in cement concrete 1:2:4 (1 cement : 2 coarse sand : 4
graded stone aggregate 20 mm nominal size) finished with a
floating coat of neat cement, all complete as per standard design.
0.91 m deep with S.F.R.C. cover and frame (heavy duty, HD-20
grade designation) 560 mm internal diameter conforming to
I.S.12592, total weight of cover and frame to be not less than 182
kg., fixed in cement concrete 1:2:4 (1 cement : 2 coarse sand : 4
graded stone aggregate 20 mm nominal size) including centering,
shuttering all complete. (Excavation, foot rests and 12mm thick
cement plaster at the external surface shall be paid for separately)
designation 7.5

DSR Item No. 19.10.1 : Extra depth for circular type manhole 0.91m
internal dia (at bottom) beyond 0.91 m to 1.67 mt With common
burnt clay F.P.S. (non modular) bricks of class designation 7.5


DSR Item 19.13.1.1 : Constructing brick masonry circular manhole

1.52 m internal dia at bottom and 0.56 m dia at top in cement
mortar 1:4 (1 cement : 4 coarse sand) inside cement plaster 12 mm
thick with cement mortar 1:3 (1 cement : 3 coarse sand) finished
with a floating coat of neat cement, foundation concrete 1:3:6 (1
cement : 3 coarse sand : 6 graded stone aggregate 40 mm nominal
size) and making necessary channel in cement concrete 1:2:4 (1
cement : 2 coarse sand : 4 graded stone aggregate 20 mm nominal
size) finished with a floating coat of neat cement, all complete as
per standard design a 2.30 m deep with SFRC Cover and frame
(heavy duty HD- 20 grade designation) 560 mm internal diameter
conforming to I.S. 12592, total weight of cover and frame to be not
less than 182 kg. fixed in cement concrete 1:2:4 (1 cement : 2
coarse sand : 4 graded stone aggregate 20 mm nominal size)
including centering, shuttering all complete. (Excavation, foot rests
and 12 mm thick cement plaster at the external surface shall be
paid for separately) With common burnt clay F.P.S. (non modular)
bricks of class designation 7.5

DSR Item No. 19.14.1 : Extra depth for circular type manhole 1.52
m internal dia (at bottom) beyond 2.30 m :With common burnt clay
F.P.S. (non modular) bricks of class designation 7.5

DSR Item No. 19.16 : Providing orange colour safety foot rest of
minimum 6 mm thick plastic encapsulated as per IS : 10910, on 12
mm dia steel bar conforming to IS: 1786, having minimum cross
section as 23 mmx25 mm and over all minimum length 263 mm and
width as 165 mm with minimum 112 mm space between protruded
legs having 2 mm tread on top surface by ribbing or chequering
besides necessary and adequate anchoring projections on tail
length on 138 mm as per standard drawing and suitable to with
stand the bend test and chemical resistance test as per
specifications and having manufacture’s permanent identification
mark to be visible even after fixing, including fixing in manholes
with 30x20x15 cm cement concrete block 1:3:6 (1 cement : 3 coarse
sand : 6 graded stone aggregate 20 mm nominal size) complete as
per design.


DSR Item No.19.9.1.1 : Storm Chamber - Constructing brick

masonry chamber for underground C.I. inspection chamber and
bends with bricks in cement mortar 1:4 (1 cement : 4 coarse sand)
C.I. Grating with frame (light duty) 455x610 mm internal
dimensions, total weight of cover with frame to be not less than 38
kg (weight of cover 23 kg and weight of frame 15 kg), R.C.C. top
slab with 1:2:4 mix (1 cement: 2 coarse sand : 4 graded stone
aggregate 20 mm nominal size), foundation concrete 1:5:10 (1
cement : 5 fine sand : 10 graded stone aggregate 40 mm nominal
size), inside plastering 12 mm thick with cement mortar 1:3 (1
cement : 3 coarse sand), finished smooth with a floating coat of
neat cement on walls and bed concrete etc. complete as per
standard design
designation 7.5

DSR Item No. 19.10.1 : Extra depth for circular type manhole 0.91m
internal dia (at bottom) beyond 0.91 m to 1.67 m
a) With common burnt clay F.P.S. (non modular) bricks of class
designation 7.5

DSR Item No. 19.27.1 : Constructing brick masonry road gully

chamber 50x45x60 cm with bricks in cement mortar 1:4 (1 cement
: 4 coarse sand) including 500x450 mm pre-cast R.C.C. horizontal
grating with frame complete as per standard design :
a With common burnt clay F.P.S. (non modular) bricks of class
designation 7.5
DSR Item No. 19.27.2 : Constructing brick masonry road gully

chamber 45x45x77.5 cm with bricks in cement mortar 1:4 (1
cement : 4 coarse sand) with pre-cast R.C.C. vertical grating
complete as per standard design
: a With common burnt clay F.P.S. (non modular) bricks of class
designation 7.5
DSR Item No. 19.30.1.1 : Storm Chamber - Constructing brick

masonry chamber for underground C.I. inspection chamber and
bends with bricks in cement mortar 1:4 (1 cement : 4 coarse sand)
C.I. Grating with frame (light duty) 455x610 mm internal
dimensions, total weight of cover with frame to be not less than 38
kg (weight of cover 23 kg and weight of frame 15 kg), R.C.C. top
slab with 1:2:4 mix (1 cement: 2 coarse sand : 4 graded stone
aggregate 20 mm nominal size), foundation concrete 1:5:10 (1
cement : 5 fine sand : 10 graded stone aggregate 40 mm nominal
size), inside plastering 12 mm thick with cement mortar 1:3 (1

cement : 3 coarse sand), finished smooth with a floating coat of

neat cement on walls and bed concrete etc. complete as per
standard design:
designation 7.5
DSR Item No. 19.31.1.1 : Extra for depth beyond 45 cm of brick

masonry chamber :
For 455x610 mm size
designation 7.5

MR 16.005 : Constructing De-silting chamber ( roof water de-

silting) with coarse sand, aggregate & nelton mesh, chamber will
be constructed ( as shown in drawing ) of brick work with bricks of
class 75 with cement mortar 1:5 (1 cement:5 fine sand) plastering
internal face with cement mortar 1:3 (1 cement: 3 fine sand and
rough plaster on outer face with a floating coat of neat cement.
R.C.C top slab with medium duty HD -20 SFRC manhole cover and
frame of 600 mm dia. The weight of cover & frame not be less
than182 Kg as per standard design. Including excavation,
dewatering, refilling, watering, ramming and removing the surplus
excavated material complete as per approved specifications and
indicated tender drawing. (All sizes are clear internal sizes).
a Size 2000 x 2000 x 1500 mm deep
Please refer specification of Drainage work Sub head 19.0 of CPWD Civil
works specifications 2009 Volume II and dwg. ref No. NUC(1)-MP-P6.2
DSR Item No. 19.7.1 : Constructing brick masonry manhole in

cement mortar 1:4 ( 1 cement : 4 coarse sand ) with R.C.C. top slab
with 1:2:4 mix (1 cement : 2 coarse sand : 4 graded stone aggregate
20 mm nominal size), foundation concrete 1:4:8 mix (1 cement : 4
coarse sand : 8 graded stone aggregate 40 mm nominal size), inside
plastering 12 mm thick with cement mortar 1:3 (1 cement : 3 coarse
sand) finished with floating coat of neat cement and making
channels in cement concrete 1:2:4 (1 cement : 2 coarse sand : 4
graded stone aggregate 20 mm nominal size) finished with a
floating coat of neat cement complete as per standard design
:Inside size 90x80 cm and 45 cm deep including C.I. cover with
frame (light duty) 455x610 mm internal dimensions, total weight
of cover and frame to be not less than 38 kg (weight of cover 23 kg
and weight of frame 15 kg) :With common burnt clay F.P.S. (non
modular) bricks of class designation 7.5
works specifications 2009 Volume II

DSR Item no. 19.9.1.1 : Extra for depth for manholes : Size 90x80
cm With common burnt clay F.P.S. (non modular) bricks of class
designation 7.5
works specifications 2009 Volume II
DSR Item No. 18.9.10 : DOMESTIC WATER - Providing and fixing

Chlorinated Polyvinyl Chloride (CPVC) pipes, having thermal
stability for hot & cold water supply including all CPVC plain & brass
threaded fittings This includes jointing of pipes & fittings with one
step CPVC solvent cement ,trenching ,refilling & testing of joints
complete as per direction of Engineer in Charge. External work
a) 150 mm nominal outer dia Pipes Schedule 80
DSR Item No. 18.9.5 : (b) 40 mm nominal outer dia Pipes SDR 11
Please refer specification of Water Supply work Sub head 18.0 of CPWD
Civil works specifications 2009 Volume II
MR 16.006 : Providing and fixing G.I. pipes B Class, confirming to

IS 1239 Part 2 with G.I. fittings as per IS 1879 Part 1 to X , including
painting of pipes, excavation up to 1m depth laying of pipes,
backfilling complete as per specifications , excavation, painting and
backfilling shall be paid separately under relevant head
External work (a) 32 mm nominal inner dia Pipes
MR 16.007 : (b)40 mm nominal inner dia Pipes
MR 16.008 : (c)50 mm nominal inner dia Pipes
MR 16.009 : (d)65 mm nominal inner dia Pipes
MR 16.010 : (e)80 mm nominal inner dia Pipes
MR 16.011: (f)100 mm nominal inner dia Pipes
MR 16.012 : (g)150 mm nominal inner dia Pipes
Please refer CPWD specs under relevant para of Water Supply sub head
18.0 for fixing and item specs 2 for excavation and dressing of pipes and
fittings
DSR Item No. 18.40.4 : Painting G.I. pipes and fittings with two
coats of anti-corrosive bitumastic paint of approved quality a) 32
mm nominal inner dia Pipes
DSR Item No. 18.40.5 : (b)40 mm nominal inner dia Pipes
DSR Item No. 18.40.6 : (c)50 mm nominal inner dia Pipes
DSR Item No. 18.40.7 : (d)65 mm nominal inner dia Pipes
DSR Item No. 18.40.8 : (e)80 mm nominal inner dia Pipes
MR 16.013 : (f)100 mm nominal inner dia Pipes ( Medium duty )

MR 16.015 : (g)150 mm nominal inner dia Pipes ( Medium duty)
Please refer relevant CPWD specs under subhead 18.0
DSR Item 18.9.5 : DRINKING WATER DISTRIBUTION -Providing and

fixing Chlorinated Polyvinyl Chloride (CPVC) pipes SDR 11, having
thermal stability for hot & cold water supply including all CPVC plain
& brass threaded fittings This includes jointing of pipes & fittings
with one step CPVC solvent cement ,trenching ,refilling & testing of
joints complete as per direction of Engineer in Charge.
a) 25 mm nominal outer dia Pipes
DSR Item 18.9.2 : (b) 20 mm nominal outer dia Pipes
DSR Item No. 18.9.6 : (c) 50 mm nominal outer dia Pipes
DSR Item No. 18.9.8 : FLUSHING WATER DISTRIBUTION - Providing

and fixing Chlorinated Polyvinyl Chloride (CPVC) pipes SDR 11,
having thermal stability for hot & cold water supply including all
CPVC plain & brass threaded fittings This includes jointing of pipes
& fittings with one step CPVC solvent cement ,trenching ,refilling &
testing of joints complete as per direction of Engineer in Charge.
(a) 80 mm nominal inner dia Pipes
DSR Item No. 18.9.4 : (b) 32 mm nominal outer dia Pipes
DSR Item No. 18.9.5 : (c) 40 mm nominal outer dia Pipes
DSR Item No. 18.9.6 : (d) 50 mm nominal outer dia Pipes
MR 16.015 : Constructing Grease Trap of size as mentioned below

of 1200 liquid depth in brick work of class 75 with cement mortar
(1:6), inside plastering 16 mm thick with cement mortar 1:3 with
floating coat of neat cement and rough plaster on outside.
Including aluminium bucket as per detail to collect the grease. RCC
top slab with 2 nos. 600 x 600 mm dia medium duty hinged type
cover with epoxy coating, double seal manhole covers with frame
(weight of covers & weight of frame 75 Kg), necessary 150 mm
thick foundation concrete (1:2:4).
2000mm x 1500mm as per detailed drawings and specifications
Please refer specification under Subhead 19.0 and dwg. ref No. NUC(1)-
MP-P6.2

17 PUMPS TREATMENT SYSTEM & EQUIPMENTS
MR 17.001 : Hydro pneumatic Booster system on for maintaining

pressure in rooms - Domestic Water Supply
Supply Installation , Testing & Commissioning of suitable hydro

pneumatic system consisting of horizontal/vertical multistage
centrifugal pump having stainless steel (SS304) impellers, shaft
and housing, with single mechanical seal and pressurized tank of
100 Liter capacity, complete with all standard accessories including
pressure switch, pressure gauges, non-return & isolating valves,
with necessary protection and operational devices i.e. alternate
pumping operation and shut-off during dry running conditions etc.
with suitable electrical motor to be operated on 210/220 OR
400/440 volt 50 cycle AC supply, suitable for following duty
parameters and with set of pumps - 2 nos.(1 working+1standby)
complete with Control Unit Panel, manifolds & chassis, including
fixing on foundation, complete as required. Construction of
foundation and Foundation bolts shall be paid separately under
relevant items. No. of Pumps per Set: 2 (1 Working + 1 Stand by
)
Capacity : app 200 lpm per pump

Head : app. 30 m
SCOPE
This section of the contract involves the design, supply, installation,
testing and commissioning of the complete Hydro-pneumatic pumping
system and other pumping systems complete with all controls and
electrical work for domestic water supply / water supply for flushing /
for cooling tower make-up. All submersible water re-circulation,
drainage and ejector pumps for the project are also included in this
contract. It also involves testing and commissioning of the pumping
system with the domestic water and flushing water supply & distribution.
This specification described the particulars of the contract, designs and
systems chosen, and mode of operation. All installation work shall
comply with the latest rules and regulations. The work embraced by this
specification covers the design, submission to authorities, supply, and
delivery on site, installation, testing, commissioning and maintenance of
the Hydro-pneumatic pumping system, other pumping system
installation of the building in accordance with this specification and
associated drawings.
The scope of work shall include the following (list is indicative and not
exhaustive):
- Variable speed pumping unit’s domestic water & flushing water supply
& distribution.
- Suitably sized food grade quality, non-toxic diaphragm type pressure
vessels complete with necessary interconnections and controls.

- Control panel for pump control complete with variable speed drives,
circuit breakers, fusses, pressure transmitters etc. complete with all
interconnections to pumps and electrical supply panels.
- Pump control units complete with pre-programmed micro-processor
chip.
- Pump monitoring units to monitor operation of pumps.
- Skid mounting arrangement including supports for piping and valves
of complete system
- Each Hydro-pneumatic Pumping unit shall be supplied as a complete
set including variable speed pumps, pressure vessels suction and
discharge common manifolds, non-return valves, isolating valves,
pressure transmitters on the discharge side and level electrode at the
suction
tank. Each unit shall be provided with electronic microprocessors for unit
control and all necessary electrical work for the unit.
- All the pipe work etc. shown in the system drawings is meant for
information only and shall be carried out by others. The Hydro-
pneumatic system supplier shall provide the pumping units in the
designated pump rooms as complete units included all necessary piping
within plant such that only discharge connections are required to be
connected into the unit’s discharge manifolds just inside the plant room,
by the Plumbing contractor. The Hydro-pneumatic system contractor
shall guarantee specified pump performance at various pump speeds
and Hydro-pneumatic pumps must be able to supply at least 2 bar
pressure at the highest/farthest fitting.
- Electrical equipment and installation work including the PLC in Control
panel.
- Painting and labeling of pipe work and equipment;
- Provision of all hold down bolts, spigots struts and the like required to
be built in during construction;
-Provision of dry contacts to BMS indicating the status of the pumps and
pressure vessel in form of hardware interfacing panels inside each pump
room and control panels of all pumps.
- Provision of all level switches, flow switches and other sensing devices
for status indication.
- All interfacing work with other trades.
- Testing & commissioning and balancing of the Hydro-pneumatic &

Pumping system;
- Provision of twenty four (24) months operational maintenance and

breakdown services;
- Provisions of operating instructions and maintenance manuals;

- Provision of spare parts;
- Training of the employer's staff for proper operation of the entire

systems;
- Liaison with Local Authorities to obtain all necessary certificates and

approvals, including the completion of all submission drawings, forms
and payment of any fees and charges. All the costs for all the tests
required by Local Authorities shall be included. To attend to any
Authorities inspection regardless of whether this inspection is carried out
after the defect liability period;
- Provisions of the necessary installation which include pumping works,

pipe work within the pumping unit up to suction and discharge
manifolds, conduit and control wiring, etc. to form a workable system
required;
- All other works and systems as specified in the Contract document and
or shown on the drawings.
- All cutting, patching, framing up, furring in, chasing and making good
associated with the building construction for the passage of pipes,
conduits and the like including providing GI pipes sleeves of required
size corresponding to pipe dia., wherever pipes crossing fire rated walls
and floors and sealing with glass wool in between and fire sealant
compound on either end. Details on shop drawings shall also be
provided.
GENERAL
Equipment offered for supply and installation shall include the following:
All minor items and incidental work, equipment accessories and
materials may not be specifically mentioned but are required for the
proper completion of the installations in accordance with the true intent
and meaning of this Specification.
All necessary safety devices for the protection of personnel against
injury and the protection of plant and equipment against damage
including relief valves, belt guards, fan inlet and/or discharge guards,
safety railing, effective earthing of electrical components, electrical
interlocks, warning lights and alarms.
Readily accessible, dust-proof lubricating facilities on all moving parts
and equipment including provision for cleaning all lubricating lines and
bearings and charging same with the correct lubricants after installation
but prior to testing and commissioning.
Clearly visible and robust manufacturer's name-plates permanently
fitted each and every item of equipment and showing the manufacturer's

name, type and/or model number, serial number, and all essential
operating data such as speed, capacity, voltage, current draw, etc.
The Contractor also shall allow provision for the inspection of all plant
and equipment by the Manufacturer or his licensed representative, at
least twice during the course of the installation.
PIPING
The pipes and fittings shall be GI class `C' (heavy class) conforming to
IS: 1239 (Part-I) for pipes and IS: 1879 (Part 1 to 10) for malleable cast
iron galvanized fittings.
PUMPS FOR HYDROPNEUMATIC & DRAINAGE SYSTEM

Pumps
Pumps shall be vertical, centrifugal, multistage directly coupled to
motor. Provision of pump with pump head & base of cast iron and other
parts in SS 304 shall be made for pumps required in Hydro-pneumatic
System and water fountain re-circulation system. Impeller shall be
hydraulically balanced and keyed to shaft. Pump shall be mounted on a
concrete foundation, projecting at least 15 CM above finished floor level.
The pumps base shall be set on a vibration elimination pad. The pump
shall be lubricated in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s
instructions and shall be factory aligned prior to shipment. All motors
and bases shall be painted with approved finish shop coat of paint. The
pump shall be selected for the lowest operating noise level and shall be
complete with flexible connections, valves, and pressure gauges. The
pumps shall include cost of foundation channel complete.
The Contractor shall supply and install pumps of the type and
performance as shown on the drawings. All duties of pumps given in the
Tender Drawings shall be checked and where necessary corrected before
ordering. All the parts of the pumps that are in contact with water e.g.
shaft, impeller etc. shall be of stainless steel construction.
Pumps shall be so selected that the design duty point is within 5% of
the maximum efficiency point.
The pump casing so selected shall have ample space to take an impeller
one size larger than that capable of performing the design duty.
The pump shall have a speed of not more than 1500 rpm. However
pumps of 2900 rpm with high efficiency and low noise motor can be
selected and noise data submitted for approval. All pumps and motors
shall be of minimum vibration and noise level during operation. Vibration
isolators shall be provided for all pump sets.
Facilities shall be provided to prevent starting of pumps when the water
tank is at low water level. An indicator for this low water level alarm
shall be provided.

Facilities to select which pump to be duty pump and standby pump shall
be provided and be interchangeable. Leakage from pump gland shall be
drained to the nearest floor waste.
Pump curves for all pumps offered shall be submitted. All curve
indicating excessive shut-off head will not be approved.
Each pump shall be provided with a gate valve at suction and discharge,
approved check valve at discharge, approved strainer at suction, flexible
connections at pump suction and discharge, eccentric reducer at suction,
concentric reducer at discharge, pressure gauges at suction and
discharge, circulation relief valve and automatic air relief valve.
Appropriate neoprene vibration isolation mountings shall be provided for
each pump sets.
Vertical Multi-Stage Pumps
Multi-stage pumps shall be of centrifugal type and arranged with shafts
vertically installed. The impellers shall be of stainless steel mechanically
balanced and keyed to shaft. Renewable guide rings are to be provided
in the casting, keyed to prevent rotation.
Pumps shall be driven by elevated in-line TEFC squirrel cage motors via
extended vertical shafted complete with universal couplings. The shafts
shall be stainless steel. Stainless steel sleeves shall be provided to
protect the shaft in the water space and through the sealing glands. The
sleeves shall be keyed to prevent rotation and secured against axial
movement.
The bearings shall be of ball or roller type protected against ingress of
water, dirt and other matter.
Vertical multistage pumps shall have universal flanges. Intermediate
bearing, support bearing shall be provided in the pump.
The shaft seal shall be easily serviceable and shall allow for correct
adjustment and loading of the seal. Pump motors above 7.5 kW shall be
equipped with a spacer coupling which allows changing of shaft seals
without removing the motor. The pump motors shall be of Class “F”
insulation and IP55 rating and shall be provided with built-in thermistors
for protection against overheating.
Variable Speed Hydro-pneumatic Pumping System

Variable speed Hydro-pneumatic pumping units shall be provided for
supply of domestic water, flushing water supply for the project. The units
shall be selected so as to provide at minimum of 2 bar pressure at the
highest/farthest fitting in each plumbing system, the unit serves. The
hydro-pneumatic pumping units shall have the following features ;
System Description
The system shall be supplied as complete sets including suction and
discharge common manifolds, non-return valves, isolating valves,
pressure transmitter on the discharge side and electrode at the suction
tank.

The system operation will be such that the initial small water demand
shall be met by the charged diaphragm pressure vessel. Should the
water demand continue the system pressure will dip to a preset pump
cut-in point when the lead pump starts to operate at reduced speed
through the variable speed drive. However, should the system pressure
be still below the preset value, the controller continuously increases
pump speed to meet the system demand. When the lead pump is not
able to meet the system pressure at full speed, the second pump also
starts to operate.
At peak demand all the pumps operate, similarly, if there is a drop in
water demand the duty pump speed starts to reduce, then standby
pumps cuts-off, followed by stopping of the duty pump.
The closed diaphragm pressure vessel shall be of polyethylene material
with a pressure gauge and isolating valve. The interior shall be of non-
toxic lining suitable for use with potable water. The vessel shall be
manufactured to conform to ASME pressure vessel code/standards.
The system shall be under the control of an electronic microprocessor
unit (EMU).
A pressure transmitter shall detect the pressure at the delivery manifold
and feedback to the Microprocessor control panel via control circuit.
The system shall incorporate a frequency converter or frequency

converter motors on the pumps and the pressure transmitter shall
register the actual pressure on the discharge side.
The variable speed drive pumping system shall maintain a constant
pressure regardless of the system demand. If there is a drop in pressure
outside the preset point, the Variable Speed Drive (VSD) pump shall
start to run until the pressure increases to the preset limit, or it will
continue to increase the pump speeds to the upper limit of the
frequency. If the water system demand still cannot be met, the second
pump shall be called in to run, the VSD will then alter the pump speed
to meet the preset pressure point. If the set point is still unable to be
met, the third pump is then activated to run (in case of 3 pumps units).
This shall be achieved by continuously varying the motor speed of the

duty pump according to the demand up to a maximum designed
capacity.
Under decreasing hydraulic demand the reverse sequence to the above
description shall apply.
The EMU shall ensure alternation of all the duty and standby pumps for
even running hours for all the pumps.
The frequency converter shall be linked to the motor of the duty pump
for continuous speed adjustment and ultimately the water delivery shall
be maintained at constant pressure at the preset value.

Local Motor Control Panel

The motor control panel shall be equipped with all the necessary
electrical components including a microprocessor control unit and a
frequency drive. The control panel and the microprocessor shall cover
the followings functions:
- Flexibility and simplicity in allowing the necessary re-adjustment of the
pumping system preset delivery pressure to operate the pumps within
the specified maximum and minimum
Delivery ranges.
- Built-in frictional loss compensation factor which will automatically
increase the delivery Pressure setting, in collaboration with the increase
in flow demand. This shall be able to minimize the system pressure
differences and provide a more constant pressure along the Supply line
and also to save the energy consumption of the motor when running at
low speed.
- Automatic changeover of the pumps to be controlled by the

microprocessor which dictates the duty and standby pumps to run at
variable speed.
- Built-in clock functions with weekly programming and with switch on
system to operate at least 10 different pre-set pressure points as
required
- When the system has not been operated for more than 24 hours, it
shall automatically start the pumps for a few seconds/day to ensure the
pumps readiness at all times. The standby pumps shall be activated
upon failure of duty pump(s). In event of control failure, the pumps shall
be able to be start/stopped manually at the local panel by means of
pressure switches.
- The microprocessor control panel shall be able to cut-off the pumping

system when excess pressure is registered in the discharge common
manifold.
- The system shall have the capability of receiving input signal

concerning reduced water level in suction tanks and shall have control
mechanisms to prevent the pumps form running dry.
- Automatically starting the pumps when the water level is back to

normal.
- In case of pump failure due to motor overload, the standby pump is
switched on automatically. Alarm signal is displayed on the LCD Display
unit and alarm lights are activated.
- Functions to limit the no. of start/stop of pumps per hour.

- The system control panel shall incorporate at least the following

components:
a) LCD Display
b) Pumps selections for up to 4 pumps so that system controller can
control up to 6
pumps
c) Pump status button to display duty pump speed and system
capacity
d) Zone status button to display operating parameters for different
pumping units
e) Setting button to input preset pressure, system start/stop time
etc.
f) ±1 button to key in numeric data such as pressure set point, etc.
g) Enter button for confirmation of input into the system
h) Alarm button to show location of fault - self diagnostic function
display
i) Hour Run measurement for each supplied pump set
j) Buttons for scrolling to select the actual display reading for
system configuration, i.e.
up and down scroll concept.
k) Necessary devices for programming, supervising and monitoring
operation
Data/system, status shall be incorporating into the control panel.
Operations
Local control panel shall perform as follows:
Auto mode
The desired delivery pressure within the range specified, shall be set at
the duty local control panel. The pressure transmitter shall detect the
delivery pressure continuously within 1 second and feedback to the
microprocessor which will control the variable speed drive frequency
converter for speed control of the duty pump. When demand increases,
the subsequent pumps in the system will be activated to boost up the
pressure. Ultimately the duty pump set shall be operated fully
automatically to maintain the delivery pressure constantly at the desired
set value.
Manual Mode
The on/off function of the pumps shall be manually adjusted at the
microprocessor located at the local control panel.
Frequency Control By-pass Mode

All the pump sets shall be started/stopped automatically with the pump
output at fixed maximum rotational speed. All the control and protection
functions shall remain active. The cut in/cut out pressure shall be
internally calculated by the microprocessor for each pump.
System Features

The required performance features of each Hydro - pneumatic pumping

unit shall be as follows:
System Configuration
Variable speed pumps with pressure vessels.
Control panel consisting of the following components:
- Pump Functional Unit (PFU) - control unit c/w pre-programmed
microprocessor chip. This unit shall control all pumping unit operations
through electronic controller.
- Pumping Monitoring Unit (PMU) - monitor the operation of the pump
sets. This unit shall allow for monitoring and setting of all control
parameter.
- Variable Speed Drive
- Circuit Breakers
- Fusses
- Pressure Transmitter
Set Point
Ten separate pressure “set points” shall be able to be programmed into
the PMU, and switching between set points is timed by a real time clock
when a lower pressure is acceptable during certain periods, for instance
after hours or weekends, the set point shall be lowered to minimize
power consumption. An external input shall also be used to switch
between set points, or manually adjust a set point at any time.
Friction Loss Compensation
It shall be possible to allow for the friction loss component of the system,
calculated at full flow and set as a percentage of the set point which will
reduce the working pressure of the pump set depending on the actual
no. of pumps in operation. A linear approximation of system resistance
curve can therefore be allowed for, and pressure will automatically
increase as system flow and subsequent frictional losses increase. As
such power consumption shall reduce which is required for the pumping
system.
Displays
Through the PMU keypad all variable parameters shall be adjustable,
current status of settings and measured values shall be able to display
on the 2 line x 24 character liquid crystal display. Individual menus shall
be available for monitoring individual pumps, zones, settings, alarms
and ON/OFF functions.
Pump Status
Running hours of each pump
Actual pump status (running, not available, standby, allocated to zone,
fault)
Maximum head of pump at zero flow.

Zone Status
This menu shall be the main operating menu where at the setting and
operating parameters can be
viewed,
 Current operating set point
 Measured values in the system
 Operating capacity in terms of total output
 Mode of operation for the zone
 Clock programs (relating to set point pressures)
 Standby pumps
 Pump change over time
 Zone configuration
 Pressure transducer scaling
 Friction loss compensation
 Pump priority
 Inlet pressure measuring (if required)
 System response times
 Allowable number of starts per hour for the pumps
 Minimum limit (loss of water, burst mains protection)
Setting Menu (Set)

In this menu all parameters for the operation of the pump set shall be
able to be adjusted as required.
a) Set points (up to 10)
b) On/Off function (used to prevent unnecessary cycling at low
demands)
c) Displayed pressure units (Bar, PSI, mBar, kPa)
d) Real time clock programming for any time of the day, week, or
weekend
e) Zone configuration
f) Friction loss compensation
Alarm
The alarm menu shall display all faults that occur during operation,
logging the time and date of when the fault occurred and when it was
corrected, or whether it is still an actual fault, up to 10 faults can be
maintained as history in the controller. The following type of faults shall
be diagnosed by the controller.
a) Mains failure
b) Frequency converter fault
c) Analogue input (pressure transducer) fault
d) High discharge pressure fault
e) Low discharge pressure fault
f) Motor thermal overload fault
Variable Frequency Drive

Variable frequency drive shall be of a reputable make acceptable to
Project Manager and shall be complete with RFI filter and harmonic
dampers.

Enclosure
An IP 54 powder coated steel enclosure shall house all the electrical
components.
The enclosure can be supplied loose for remote mounting, or mounted
on a common base with the pumps, it shall be adequately ventilated for
use in conditions up to a maximum ambient temperature of 45 degrees
Celsius.
Electrical Component
All circuit breakers, thermal overloads and contactors shall be of
reputable make acceptable to the architect. Electrical supply to the pump
controller shall be protected using an isolating circuit breaker.
Method of Starting
The panel shall be built to start the pumps in suitable starting modes,
i.e. D.O.L., Star/Delta, or using Soft Starters.
Quality and Testing
Manufacture of the pumps, plus design and assembly of the complete
packaged Hydro-pneumatic pumping system shall be factory assembled
and the pump station shall be fully tested hydraulically and electrically
prior to dispatch to site. Test reports etc. shall be submitted for review
before dispatch.
Pump Pressure Vessel

Diaphragm type pressure vessels shall be provided as shown on the
drawings. They shall be incorporated into the system so that during
normal operation the pump shall not need to be start within 30 seconds
of it switching off in order to prevent the pump hunting.
The pressure vessel shall be of adequate capacity to accommodate a
considerable fluctuation in water demand by the system with minimum
start/ stop cycles of the pumps. The vessel shall be constructed of steel
plate built to ASME Standards for Unfired Pressure Vessel. A rubber
diaphragm shall be provided in the vessel for separating the water and
pre-charge nitrogen. The pre-charge pressure shall be adjustable and
charging port with non-return device shall be provided. The adjustable
cut-in and cut-off pressure unit for the pumps shall be built-in at the
vessel to suit the system.
Control of Duty / Standby Pumps

Operation of the duty and standby pumps shall be carried out by the
following method:
a) Automatically by means of pressure sensor (i.e. pressure
switches);
b) Manually by means of a local start/stop push buttons on pump
local motor control panel and emergency stop switch.

The pressure switch shall be installed next to the manual release valve.
When the pressure drops to the pre-determined level, a signal will be
sent to the pump local motor control panel to start the pump.
Automatic controls shall be operated by electronic, float less type level
switches.
Pump Indicator
The following audible and visible indication shall be provided at the pump
local control panels as applicable:
a) Red "overflow level" indicator with buzzer for the associated
water tanks;
b) Amber "extra high water level" indicator for the associated water
tank;
c) Amber "high water level" indicator;
d) Amber "low water level" indicator;
e) Red "pump trip" indicator for each pump;
f) Green "pump on" indicator for each pump;
g) "Pump electrical supply healthy" indicator for each pump;
h) Amber "remote/local" status indicator.
MR 17.002 : STP ACADEMIC SPINE- Design , Construction, Testing and

Commissioning of Sewage Treatment plant of 96 cum including settler,
Anaerobic baffle Reactor + Anaerobic Filter & plant gravel filter
(DEWAT Technology), and finishing pond. The cost shall be inclusive
of design, submission and approval of drawings, testing and
commissioning of complete system. The work should be completed as
specified in Technical specification.
MR 17.003 : STP AMENITIES- Design , Construction, Testing and

Commissioning of Sewage Treatment plant of 20 cum including settler,
Anaerobic baffle Reactor + Anaerobic Filter & plant gravel filter
(DEWAT Technology), and finishing pond. The cost shall be inclusive
of design, submission and approval of drawings, testing and
commissioning of complete system. The work should be completed as
specified in Technical specification.
Scope:
The system should comprises of design , construction and approval of

drawings for an STP with anaerobic digester / baffle reactor , anaerobic
filter and plant gravel filter for solid separation and treatment to ensure
treated water parameters within the range central pollution controlled
board.
The water from polishing pond will be further transfer to treated water
collection tank for tertiary treatment where it would be further treated with
sand carbon filter and UV filtration/ killing of microorganisms. Tenderer to
be please note that tertiary treatment system comprising sand carbon filter
and UV treatment would be under separate tender. All civil work shall be
completely executed as specified under civil work heads, no extra cost shall

be paid for civil / excavation, backfilling, and civil construction this contract
item shall be inclusive of everything that is required for execution.
Contractor shall fulfill requirements as specified in contract conditions for
experience in design and implementation of technology with at least 5
successful installation with capacity equivalent to project requirement or
higher in any case low capacity of installation shall be considered as point
in above captioned system, client may ask to submit test report of existing
projects for consequent years where parameters are maintained.
The tenderer for this item shall be completely responsible for design,
execution and supervening of system inclusive providing test report for inlet
and outlet parameters of system
Testing, commissioning and establishment of guarantee

parameters
The tenderer shall guarantee for the design , engineering, construction ,

erection testing and commissioning and establishing of the guarantee
parameters of the STP outlet quality, as specified under the specification
given below, in case if during commissioning and establishing of the STP,
the guarantee parameters are not achieved the tenderer himself would
identify the cause of the same and rectify the system by providing additional
units as required at his own cost, and there shall be not claim in this aspect.
Training
After successfully commissioning of STP system, the tenderer should

arrange 15 days training for building operator during which representatives
of client and consultants would take part and inlet and outlet quality of
water should be tested by tenderer from approved laboratory to all
parameters are maintained under varying loads.
Fundamental Requirements: All below mentioned scope is only for

representation not exhaustive, contractor shall be completely responsible
for design and implementation of system, all civil work shall be done as
specified under relevant specification and paid under this item only. In case
of any deviation preapproval should be taken from consultant prior to
execution of work at site
Excavation:
All excavation should be done to accommodate STP as per system capacity,
extra excavation should be refilled back with compaction as per system
requirement.
Gravel Bedding:

The gravel bedding crash must be clean of any comical materials and not
from river. The shale in the bedding of STP system has to be minimum 2
inches and maximum on 4 inches.
Work process:
The process of the gravel bedding is to bring exact to site. After that it must
be used on the specific area which is excavated for the STPS System. It
needs to be compact for next steps of installation.
Form work:
Form work shall be completed and approved. Debris and foreign materials
shall be removed from interior of farms before start of concrete placing.
PCC process:
In this process we have a specific mixing ratio, which is (1:2:2). It may be
used to cover top and bottom slab, beams, column and CMU filling. PCC
must get watered for 28 days.
Partition Wall:
When a partition wall is used to divide the prefabricated tanks into different
compartments, assumptions regarding the arrangement of liquid loading
shall cause the most critical effects such as:
a. Particular attention shall be paid to possible sliding and overturning
due to differential moment;
b. The partition shall be structurally sound and fixed without diminishing
the integrity of the tank;
c. The tank partition wall during pumping out shall not collapse, or get
permanently deformed.
Joints and edge:

The joints of the STPS system must be construct in a proper manner,
plastered well, water tied, and also the edge of the STPS system should be
chamfer at each wall corners.
Septic Tank:
Septic tanks provide suitable conditions for the settlement, storage and
partial decomposition of solids which need to be removed at regular
intervals. The discharge can still be harmful and further treatment from a
percolation area, percolation mound or intermittent filter will be required.
An effluent screen on the outlet is optional but is recommended as it gives
extra protection to the percolation/filter system and gives early warning of
the need for de-sludging. They can incorporate an alarm system.
Plaster work:
After separating material from sand that will be used on plaster work by
mixing (1:4). Plaster must be 2.5 cm on both sides. Plastering has to be
soaked for 7 days at the end of the every working day.

Piping System:
The piping system for the package shall comply with the following criteria:
All baffle pipes into the anaerobic reactor should be provide accurate well
and in one level and should be checked into the three directions (X, Y, Z).
The arrangement of the piping system and interconnection pipes in the
prefabricated tanks shall not obstruct maintenance work of the equipment
in the tanks;
All the buried piping shall be properly bedded and supported with the
selected compacted fill material;
The arrangement of the above ground piping shall minimize obstruction and
maneuverability;
Any on-site installation or assemblies of pipe support to the prefabricated
tank shall not be allowed;
No bending is allowed at any sewage distribution pipe excluding the force
main piping. Instead, a chamber shall be provided to any change of
direction in sewage flow.
Inlet and Outlet pipe:

All opening for pipe connections of the prefabricated tanks shall be pre-
fitted at the factory with a socket, a spigot, a flange or a 300 mm length
short piece of pipe. On-site drilling of openings for pipe connection shall be
prohibited.
Vent Pipe:
The vent pipe shall be provide and construct at the beginning of anaerobic
systems (Settler, ABR) to remove CH4, S20gases from the STPS system,
where it should construct well protected with concrete around the pipe and
should install higher than the buildings height.
Rebar:
Different kinds of rebar used for construction have to be in good condition
not damage by corrosion. The size of designed rebar is 10mm, 12mm,
14mm and 16mm and the grade of these rebar must be (Grad 60).
Cast iron manhole cover:

Cast iron manhole cover must be ordered during construction as designed
in drawing details. The manhole cover design should be ideally being in size
of (60x60), (65x65) and (70x70). In case of deviation from given size, all
manhole covers should have perfect fit for cast iron covers.
Pumps:
The minimum control mechanism for the pumps installed within the
package shall be:
Automatic by float switch for sewage transfer pump;

Automatic by timer and interlock with solenoid valve for return and waste
sludge pump in sedimentation tank;
Manual by push button for sludge transfer pump to remove the sludge from
sludge holding tank.
Backfill Material:
The backfill material for the STPS system shall be of particle size and
grading that allow the specified relative compaction to be achieved with the
intended compaction methods. The material shall not contain organic
matter that affects the backfill material performance. It should be free of
materials that are physically and chemically harmful to the system. The
support and overlay material shall be placed in layers of appropriate
thickness for the method of compaction, to achieve the relative compaction
or soil modulus.
RAW SEWAGE EFFLUENT PARAMETERS
Parameters Range
Nature of Waste Sewage
BOD5 300 – 350 Mg/Ltr.
TSS 20-50 mg/ltr.
COD 400 to 450 Mg/Ltr.
Oil and grease 50 Mg/Ltr
Suspended Solids 250 Mg/Ltr.
pH 6 to 8
QUALITY OF STP TREATED WATER (REQUIRED FROM STP)
Parameters Range
BOD < 10 Mg/Ltr.
COD < 50 Mg/Ltr.
Suspended Solids < 20 Mg/Ltr.
Color Clear/ Unobjectionable

Oil & Grease < 5 Mg/Ltr
Odor Unobjectionable
pH 6.5-8.5
MR 17.004 : Sewage Water Transfer Pump- Submersible Centrifugal

pump - Supply, installation , testing & commissioning compact
monoblock dry motor submersible pumps for suitable rating, with non-
clog free flow open impeller, suitable for operation on 415 volts + 5%
-15%, 50 C/s , speed 960/1440R&M including oil chamber, guide wire

for lifting & lowering of pump, M.S. galvanized lifting chain, duck foot
bend with following specifications:
(a) Total 2 nos. of Pumps (Both operating in cyclic operation) with
minimum solid handling capacity of 100 mm.(b) Necessary cables
from pump set to control panel including termination as required
(position of panel marked on enclosed drawings).-- 1 Set
(b) Electrical switch panel having all necessary accessories & safety
devices of standard specifications. (Panels with sump pumps near
each sump as per site conditions). Panel shall be compatible for
integration with Building Management / Automation system with
adequate potential free contacts etc.--1 Set
(c) Automatic built-up water level controller with necessary length
of cable upto control panel. Including pump foundation complete as
required
a) Flow rate : 20m3/hr. Head : 15 Mts Solid Handling : 15-20 MM
Location : Collection chamber to STP MOC : CI body; SS Impeller &
Shaft
MR 17.004 : Flow rate 30m3/hr. Head 15 M
MR 17.005 : Submersible Centrifugal pump - Supply, installation,

testing and commissioning of continuous duty submersible centrifugal
non-clogging drainage pumps complete with 3 phase motor with all
necessary protection and mechanical seal etc. complete with all
ancillaries including float type level controllers, electrical control
panels fabricated from 14 gauge CRCA sheet volt meter ammeter with
selector switch, TPMPCB, 5 VA CL : CTs, phase indicating lamps
protected by 2 amp SP MCB, DOL starter, necessary wiring, cable
alleys, earthling, interlocking, starter with Automatic float type level
controller, provision of high level alarm, sequence timer, potential free
contact to starter for connection to BAS, both pumps may run
simultaneously at pre-determined level. (1 Working + 1 Standby) -
Flushing water Transfer from polishing pond
a) Flow rate : 20m3/hr. Head : 15 Mts Solid Handling : 15-20 MM

Location : Polishing Pond to transfer sewage to STP collection
tank : MOC : CI body; SS Impeller & Shaft
MR 17.006 : Flow rate 30m3/hr. Head 15 M
1. MATERIAL :-
a. These shall be fully submersible with a fully submersible motor. The pumps
shall be provided with an automatic level controller and all interconnecting
power and control cabling which shall cause the pumps to operate when the
water level in the sump rises to a preset level and stop when the preset low
level is reached.
b. Pumps for drainage shall be single stage, single entry.
c. Pump shall be C.I. casing and C.I. two vane open type with a dynamically
balanced impeller connected to a common shaft of the motor. The vane for
sewage pump will be open type, while for drainage pump, etc. it will be of

semi open type. The MOC of the sump shall be in accordance to schedule
of quantity.
d. Stuffing box shall be provided with mechanical seals.
e. Each pump shall be provided with a suitably rated induction motor suitable
for 415 volts, 3 phase, 50
f. Hz A.C. power supply.
g. Each pump shall be provided with in built liquid level controller for operating
the pump between predetermined levels.
h. The pumping set shall be for stationary application and shall be provided
with pump connector unit.
i. The delivery pipe shall be joined to the pump through a rubber diaphragm,
and bend and guide pipe for easy installation.
j. Pump shall be provided with all accessories and devices necessary and
required for the pump to make it a complete working system.
k. Sump pump shall be complete with level controllers, power and control
switch gear, Auto/off/Manual switches, pumps priority selections and
control and power cabling up to motor and controller/probes etc. (Including
earthing). Level control shall be such that one pump starts on required
level, 2nd pump cuts in at high level and alarms is given at extra high level.
All level controllers shall be provided with remote level indications.
l. Motor Design
i. The pump motor shall be a squirrel cage induction, housed in air

filled water-tight enclosure. Oil filled motors are not
acceptable. The stator windings shall be Class "F" insulation
(155 degree C or 311 degree F) for general usage and class
`H' insulation (180 degree C or 317-8 grade 2) for submersible
type.
ii. The stator shall be heat shrunk fitted into the enclosure and
shall not use bolts, pins or other fasteners that penetrate
through the stator enclosure. The starter shall be equipped
with a thermal switch embedded in series in the coils of the
stator windings to protect the stator from wheel.
iii. The motors shall be designed for continuous running duty type
at 415 volts, 3 phase, 50 Hz power supply and capable of
sustaining a minimum of 20 starts/stops per hour.
iv. Between stator housing and pump, a tandem seal
arrangement will be provided with an oil barrier. Both seals
run in oil, allowing dry running without seal damage. Both
seals shall be of the rubber bellows or metallic bellow type with
positive drive between shaft and rotating seal face.
2. Measurement : Pumps shall be measured by the number and rate

which shall include supply, testing and commissioning of pumps
MR 17.008 : Supply, installation , testing & commissioning vertical,

inline multistage centrifugal pumping set with stainless steel SS-
304 stage casing and SS-304 impellers with stainless steel shaft
and suction & discharge casing as per IEC standards , connected to
TEFC ventilated induction motor of 2 pole, 2900 RPM, suitable for

400/440 Volts, 3 phase, 50 Hz A.C. supply with pressure gauge and

with gunmetal isolation cocks, vibration elimination pads etc.
complete with base and frame, nuts and bolts and necessary RCC
foundations as per requirement as per instructions and pump shall
have following duty:
No. of Pumps: 2(1Working + 1Stand by)
Capacity : 25 m3/Hour each
Head : 30Meters
1. MATERIAL :
a. Pumps shall be horizontal, centrifugal, single stage directly coupled

to motor. Provision of pump with pump head & base of cast iron and
other parts in SS 304. Pump shall be mounted on a concrete
foundation, projecting at least 15 CM above finished floor level. The
pumps base shall be set on a vibration elimination pad. The pump
shall be lubricated in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s
instructions and shall be factory aligned prior to shipment. All motors
and bases shall be painted with approved finish shop coat of paint.
The pump shall be selected for the lowest operating noise level and
shall be complete with flexible connections, valves, and pressure
gauges. The pumps shall include cost of foundation channel
complete.
b. The Contractor shall supply and install pumps of the type and
performance as shown on the drawings.
c. All duties of pumps given in the Tender Drawings shall be checked

and where necessary corrected before ordering. All the parts of the
pumps that are in contact with water e.g. shaft, impeller etc. shall be
of stainless steel construction.
d. Pumps shall be so selected that the design duty point is within 5% of

the maximum efficiency point.
e. The pump casing so selected shall have ample space to take an

impeller one size larger than that capable of performing the design
duty.
f. The pump shall have a speed of not more than 1500 rpm. However
pumps of 2900 rpm with high efficiency and low noise motor can be
selected and noise data submitted for approval. All pumps and
motors shall be of minimum vibration and noise level during
operation. Vibration isolators shall be provided for all pump sets.
Facilities shall be provided to prevent starting of pumps when the
water tank is at low water level. An indicator for this low water level
alarm shall be provided.
g. Facilities to select which pump to be duty pump and standby pump

shall be provided and be interchangeable.
h. Leakage from pump gland shall be drained to the nearest floor waste.

i. Pump curves for all pumps offered shall be submitted. All curve
indicating excessive shut-off head will not be approved.
j. Each pump shall be provided with a gate valve at suction and

discharge, approved check valve at discharge, approved strainer at
suction, flexible connections at pump suction and discharge,
eccentric reducer at suction, concentric reducer at discharge,
pressure gauges at suction and discharge, circulation relief valve and
automatic air relief valve.
k. Appropriate neoprene vibration isolation mountings shall be provided

for each pump sets.
l. Single-stage pumps shall be of centrifugal type and arranged with

shafts vertically installed. The impellers shall be of stainless steel
mechanically balanced and keyed to shaft. Renewable guide rings are
to be provided in the casting, keyed to prevent rotation.
m. Pumps shall be driven by elevated in-line TEFC squirrel cage motors

via extended vertical shafted complete with universal couplings.
n. The shafts shall be stainless steel. Stainless steel sleeves shall be

provided to protect the shaft in the water space and through the
sealing glands. The sleeves shall be keyed to prevent rotation and
secured against axial movement.
o. The bearings shall be of ball or roller type protected against ingress

of water, dirt and other matter.
p. Vertical multistage pumps shall have universal flanges. Intermediate

bearing, support bearing shall be provided in the pump.
q. The shaft seal shall be easily serviceable and shall allow for correct
adjustment and loading of the seal.
r. Pump motors above 7.5 kW shall be equipped with a spacer coupling

which allows changing of shaft seals without removing the motor.
The pump motors shall be of Class “F” insulation and IP55 rating and
shall be provided with built-in thermistors for protection against
overheating.
i. CONTROL OF DUTY / STANDBY PUMPS
Operation of the duty and standby pumps shall be carried out by the
following method:
a) Automatically by means of pressure sensor (i.e. pressure
switches);
b) Manually by means of a local start/stop push buttons on pump

local motor control panel and emergency stop switch.

The pressure switch shall be installed next to the manual release

valve. When the level drops to the Pre-determined level, a signal will
be sent to the pump local motor control panel to start the pump.
Automatic controls shall be operated by electronic, float less type

level switches
2. Measurement : Pumps shall be measured by the number and rate
which shall include supply, testing and commissioning of pumps
MR 17.009 : SUMP FOR BALANCING PONDS - Supply, installation ,

testing & commissioning compact monoblock dry motor submersible
pumps for suitable rating, with non-clog free flow open impeller,
suitable for operation on 415 volts + 5% -15%, 50 C/s , speed
960/1440R&M including oil chamber, guide wire for lifting & lowering
of pump, M.S. galvanized lifting chain, duck foot bend with following
specifications:
(a) Total 2 nos. of Pumps (Both operating in cyclic operation) with
minimum solid handling capacity of 46mm.
(b) Necessary cables from pump set to control panel including
termination as required (position of panel marked on enclosed
drawings).- 1 Set
(c) Electrical switch panel having all necessary accessories & safety
devices of standard specifications. (Panels with sump pumps near
each sump as per site conditions). Panel shall be compatible for
integration with Building Management / Automation system with
adequate potential free contacts etc. --1 Set.
(d) Automatic water level controller with necessary length of cable
up to control panel.
Discharge - 20 cum/hr. Each
Total head - 35 Meters
Solid handling - 20-25mm
MOC - COMPLETE SS -316 INLCUDING, BODY, SHAFT & IMPELLER
(Complete set including all items as above)

non-clogging sewage pumps complete with 3 phase motor with all
simultaneously at pre determined level. (2 Working + 1 Standby)
a) Flow rate: 10m3/hr. Head: 15 Mts Solid Handling : 15-20 MM
Location : Amphitheatre: MOC : CI body; SS Impeller & Shaft


non-clogging sewage pumps complete with 3 phase motor with all
simultaneously at pre determined level. (1 Working + 1 Standby) -
a) Flow rate : 3m3/hr Head : 15 Mts Solid Handling : 15-20 MM
Location : Ampitheatre: MOC : CI body; SS Impeller & Shaft
MR 17.012 : Supply, installation , testing & commissioning M.S. puddle

flanges fabricated of 750 mm long pipe pieces to R.C.C. water tanks
wall / slab. The entire fitting shall be hot dipped galvanised (Flanges
shall confirm to BS10 Table E)
(a) 32 mm dia (Screwed ends MS plate 6 mm thick; 100 mm x 100 mm

plus dia of pipe).
MR 17.013 : (b) 40 mm dia (Screwed ends MS plate 6 mm thick; 100

mm x 100 mm plus dia of pipe).
MR 17.014 : (c) 50 mm dia (Screwed ends MS plate 6 mm thick; 250

MR 17.015 : (d) 80 mm dia (Flanged ends MS plate 6 mm thick; 250

MR 17.016 : (e)100 mm dia (Flanged ends MS plate 6 mm thick; 300

mm x 300 mm plus dia of pipe)
MR 17.017 : (f) 150 mm dia(Flanged ends MS plate 6 mm thick; 300

MR 17.018 : (g) 200 mm dia(Flanged ends MS plate 6 mm thick; 300

Puddle Flanges shall be fabricated from MS pipe, Heavy duty confirming

to IS 1239 part 1 and 6mm thick MS plate of specified dimension and
flange shall be welded at one end of the puddle for connection with header
the complete arrangement shall be made as per typical details drawings
provided by consultant and the complete arrangement shall be galvanized
post fabrication of set as required. Installation of puddle flanges under
RCC tank should be done as per drawing provided by consultant /

approved drawings. In any case no puddle flange should be installed prior

approval of drawings from engineering consultant
MR 17.019 : Supply, installation , testing & commissioning dial type

(100 mm) pressure gauge ( glycerin filled) working range 0 to 10
kg/cm2 with isolation ball valve suitable for working pressure upto
150 PSI. Cost shall be inclusive of providing any short pieces, nipples,
and elbows etc. as per approved specifications.
1. Material: The pressure gauge shall be brass body syphon and cock
dial type. Pressure gauge sensing elements shall be of continuous `C'
bourdon type. Gauges shall be of 150 mm diameter dial stored enamel
black finish case. Normal process pressure shall be gauged within 70%
of full scale reading of the scale range. Accuracy shall be within 1.0 %
of full scale range. Gauges shall have internal and external stop pegs
for cover range protection of 125% of maximum range and zero point
respectively. All gauges shall have bottom connection for local
mounting. All gauges shall be provided with 3 way gauge isolation
valve or lock union nut, with nipple and tail pipe, wherever required.
The Dial shall have the calibration in MKS and FPS units and shall be
properly calibrated before installation.
2. Workmanship: The pressure gauge shall be fixed & screwed in the

pipe making or drilling necessary holes in pipe line etc. The pressure
gauge shall be tested for the leak proofness of the joints along with
pipeline laid under testing clause of relevant seamless piping work
a) Supplying and fixing pressure gauge of diameter as specified in
schedule of quantities.
b) All transport and handling charges.
c) All necessary labour, material and use of tools.
d) The measurement shall be for each unit of pressure gauge supplied
and fixed
MR 17.020 : Supply, installation , testing & commissioning of brass Y

strainer confirming to IS 778 , including cutting of pipe, jointing,
complete as per approved specifications
(a)25mm nominal dia
MR 17.021 : (b) 40mm nominal dia
MR 17.022 : (c) 50mm nominal dia
Gun metal strainer shall be used for smaller dia. pipes, and for threaded
connections. The strainer shall bear certification as per IS:778

18 FIRE FIGHTING
SCOPE
The scope of this section consists of but is not necessarily limited to supply,
installation, testing and commissioning of the fire protection system. The
philosophy of the system is as follows :
The Fire protection System shall comprise the Fire Hydrants System, the
Sprinkler System (Wet type), and Hand Appliances along with fixed fire
protection system.
Water from the underground RCC Fire Water Storage Tanks of

200 cum capacity, shall be supplied for the uses listed below.
Fire Hydrant System (Pressurized) both for the external hydrants, the
internal landing valves and the hose reels at landings.
The Hydrant System, under normal conditions, shall be lowest

pressurized by means of the electric motor driven Jockey Pump.
The Hydrant System shall be provided with two pump sets, one of which
will be diesel engine driven and the other electric motor driven.
The piping and valve connections shall be done so that the water from
the discharge of the Hydrant Pump sets is able to supply water,
automatically to the Sprinkler System whenever, the Sprinkler Pump is
unable to maintain the pressure or fails and not vice versa.
The starting and stopping of the Jockey pump shall be automatic based
on the pressure switches at preset low and high pressure.
The electric motor driven Hydrant Pump starts automatically at a preset

pressure by means of a pressure switch. As soon as the Hydrant Pump
starts, the Jockey Pump Stops. If for any reason the electric motor
driven Hydrant Pump does not start at the preset pressure or is unable
to maintain the pressure, the diesel engine driven Hydrant Pump starts
at the preset pressure.
The Hydrant Pump, whether electric motor driven or the diesel engine
driven shall be stopped only manually.
Contractor shall ensure Hydro Testing for the complete system.
DRAWING :-
The work shall be carried out in accordance with the Architectural
drawings, structural drawings and approved shop drawings. The shop
drawings shall be correlated before the executions of work.
The tender drawings accompanying these specifications are design

drawings and generally are schematic. They do not show every offset,
T, Cross, Y, junction coupling/flanges etc., which are required for

installation in the space provided. The contractor shall prepare detailed

shop drawings by following these drawings, as closely as is practicable,
with necessary additional bends, elbows or junctions etc., where
required to suit local site conditions, from actual site measurement
taken, get the same approved from the Consultants in good time & follow
then at site, without additional cost to the Owner. The Owners reserve
the right to make any reasonable change in outlet location prior to
roughing in. All connections and appurtenances, shown in the various
diagrams, shall be included in the finished job. The contractor shall visit
the site prior to bidding, to familiarize himself with all conditions.
It shall be the contractor’s responsibility to co-ordinate with all others

for proper and adequate installation clearances.
ORDINANCE, CODE AND REGULATIONS:-
The Contractor shall obtain the necessary approval of the drawings and
the schemes from the local authority / IS /NBC as called for. The
contractor shall also take care of any other requirement so that
insurance cover can be obtained, if required at minimum premium at a
later date.
Unless, otherwise approved the product shall bear the mark of approval
of ISI as required by the Governing bodies, code and ordinances and
local authorities, whose permission are required for occupation of the
building on completion.
MEASUREMENT LINES &LEVELS:-
Check dimension at the building site and establish lines and levels for
the work specified.
All pipes, water mains, or gas mains, telephone and electric cables etc.,
met within the course of excavation, shall be carefully protected and
supported without any extra charge.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
All materials shall be of the best quality conforming to the specifications

and subject to the approval of the Consultants.
Pipes shall be fixed in a manner as to provide easy accessibility for repair

and maintenance and shall not cause obstruction in shafts, passages etc.
Pipes shall be securely fixed to walls and ceilings by suitable clamps and
supports (galvanized after fabrication) at intervals specified. Only
approved type of anchor fasteners shall be used for RCC slabs and walls
/ floors etc.
Valves and other appurtenances shall be so located that they are easily
accessible for operations, repairs and maintenance.

Pipes and fittings shall be fixed truly vertical, horizontal or in slopes as

required in a neat workman like manner.
Pipe accessories such as gauges, meters, control devices, etc. shall have
the same working pressure rating as the associated pipe work. All pipe
work shall be free from burrs, rust and scale and shall be cleaned before
installation. All personnel engaged on welding operations must possess
a certificate of competence issued by an acceptable / recognized
authority.

ITEMIZED SPECIFICATIONS FOR FIRE FIGHTING

WORKS
MR 18.001 : Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of

electrically driven high pressure centrifugal fire hydrant pump,
suitable for automatic operation consisting of the following:
a. Horizontal, split casing centrifugal pump, suitable for operation
on 415 volts ± 6%, 3 phase, 50 HZ AC supply. The installation shall
be complete with flexible coupling and coupling guard as required.
Fire pump shall have CI casing, CS diffusers, bronze impeller (hard
finished and dynamically balanced) and SS (304) shaft with
mechanical seal, capable for delivering 2280 LPM at outlet head of
80 mts to ensure a minimum pressure of 3.5 Kg/Sqcm at the
farthest or topmost hydrant / sprinkler. The installation shall be
complete with necessary pressure gauge with gun metal shut off
cock on delivery side (The pump should be tested for bench make
at factory and shall be gotten approved by the Local fire
Authority).Pump shall be capable of furnishing not less than 150%
of rated capacity at a head of not less than 65% of the rated head.
The shut off head shall not exceed 120% of rated head. Squirrel
cage induction motor, TEFC type suitable for operation on 415
volts, 3 phase 50 HZ A.C supply, for the above pump with
synchronous speed of 1450 RPM, conforming to IP 55 protection &
class F insulation. The motor shall conform to IS 325-1978 (up to
date) with flexible coupling and coupling guard, complete as
required. Common base plate for (a) and (b) from M.S. Channel for
required sized. Suitable cement concrete foundation with cement
concrete plaster (design and drawing to be provided by the
Contractor while the foundation will be done by others) complete
with anti-vibration arrangement of cushy foot mountings. The rate
includes interconnecting cables, foundations & foundation bolts

electrically driven high pressure centrifugal fire hydrant pump,
suitable for automatic operation consisting of the following:
a)Horizontal, end suction/split casing centrifugal pump,
suitable for operation on 415 volts ± 6%, 3 phase, 50 HZ AC supply.
The installation shall be complete with flexible coupling and
coupling guard as required. Fire pump shall have CI casing, CS
diffusers, bronze impeller (hard finished and dynamically balanced)
and SS (304) shaft with mechanical seal, capable for delivering
1620 LPM at outlet head of 55 mts to ensure a minimum pressure
of 3.5 Kg/Sqcm at the farthest or topmost hydrant / sprinkler. The
installation shall be complete with necessary pressure gauge with
gun metal shut off cock on delivery side (The pump should be tested
for bench make at factory and shall be gotten approved by the Local
fire Authority).Pump shall be capable of furnishing not less than
150% of rated capacity at a head of not less than 65% of the rated
head. The shut off head shall not exceed 120% of rated head.
Squirrel cage induction motor, TEFC type suitable for operation on
415 volts, 3 phase 50 HZ A.C supply, for the above pump with

synchronous speed of 1450 RPM, conforming to IP 55 protection &

class F insulation. The motor shall conform to IS 325-1978 (up to
date) with flexible coupling and coupling guard, complete as
required. Common base plate for (a) and (b) from M.S. Channel for
required sized. Suitable cement concrete foundation with cement
concrete plaster (design and drawing to be provided by the
Contractor while the foundation will be done by others) complete
with anti-vibration arrangement of cushy foot mountings.

Diesel Engine driven fire pump suitable for automatic operation
comprising of the following and conforming to BS 649/IS 10002 all
amended upto date.
(a). Horizontal, split casing centrifugal pump, suitable for operation
on 415 volts ± 6%, 3 phase, 50 HZ AC supply. The installation shall
be complete with flexible coupling and coupling guard as required.
Fire pump shall have CI casing, CS diffusers, bronze impeller (hard
finished and dynamically balanced) and SS (304) shaft with
mechanical seal, capable for delivering 2280 LPM at outlet head of
80 mts to ensure a minimum pressure of 3.5 Kg/Sqcm at the
farthest or topmost hydrant / sprinkler. The installation shall be
complete with necessary pressure gauge with gun metal shut off
cock on delivery side (The pump should be tested for bench make
at factory and shall be gotten approved by the Local fire
Authority).Pump shall be capable of furnishing not less than 150%
of rated capacity at a head of not less than 65% of the rated head.
The shut off head shall not exceed 120% of rated head.
(b). Heat exchanger cooled (secondary cooling) diesel engine of
speed 1500 RPM suitable for the above pump with automatic
starting mechanism and other accessories including fuel tank
(fabricated from 3mm MS sheet, painted with two coats of synthetic
enamel paint over a coat of primer) of adequate capacity to sustain
pump operation for 8 hours continuous working. The tank shall be
fitted with Magnetic oil level indicator, MH with cover, drain valve,
air vent including structural supports (painted with approved
shade), 2 Nos. x 12 volt battery, heat exchanger with necessary
piping connections & fittings, flexible coupling, coupling guard &
exhaust pipe connection complete as required.
(c). The pump and motor shall be mounted on Common base frame
made out of M.S. Channel for required size and painted with
approved colour shade, fixed to RCC foundation complete with anti-
vibration arrangement of cushy foot mountings. Suitable RCC
foundation with cement concrete plaster (design and drawing to be
provided by the Contractor), the construction of foundation along
with foundation bolts will be paid separately under relevant items.

Diesel Engine driven fire pump suitable for automatic operation
comprising of the following and conforming to BS 649/IS 10002 all
amended up to date.
(a). Horizontal , split casing/end suction centrifugal pump, suitable
for operation on 415 volts ± 6%, 3 phase, 50 HZ AC supply. The

installation shall be complete with flexible coupling and coupling

guard as required. Fire pump shall have CI casing, CS diffusers,
bronze impeller (hard finished and dynamically balanced) and SS
(304) shaft with mechanical seal, capable for delivering 1620 LPM
at outlet head of 55 mts to ensure a minimum pressure of 3.5
Kg/Sqcm at the farthest or topmost hydrant / sprinkler. The
installation shall be complete with necessary pressure gauge with
gun metal shut off cock on delivery side (The pump should be tested
for bench make at factory and shall be gotten approved by the Local
fire Authority).Pump shall be capable of furnishing not less than
150% of rated capacity at a head of not less than 65% of the rated
head. The shut off head shall not exceed 120% of rated head.
(b). Heat exchanger cooled (secondary cooling) diesel engine of
speed 1500 RPM suitable for the above pump with automatic
starting mechanism and other accessories including fuel tank
(fabricated from 3mm MS sheet, painted with two coats of synthetic
enamel paint over a coat of primer) of capacity adequate to sustain
pump operation for 8 hours continuous working. The tank shall be
fitted with Magnetic oil level indicator, MH with cover, drain valve,
air vent including structural supports (painted with approved
shade), 2 Nos. x 12 volt battery, heat exchanger with necessary
piping connections & fittings, flexible coupling, coupling guard &
exhaust pipe connection complete as required.
(c). Common base plate for (a) and (b) from M.S. channel of
required size.
(d). Suitable cement concrete foundation with plaster, (design and
drawing to be provided by the Contractor while the foundation will
be done by others) complete with anti-vibration arrangement of
cushy foot mountings.

jockey pump (pressurization pump) comprising of the following:
(a). Vertical centrifugal pump, suitable for operation on 415 volts ±
6%, 3 phase, 50 HZ A.C supply. The installation shall be complete
with Flexible coupling and coupling guard, complete as required.
The pump casing shall be CI, shaft shall be SS & impeller/ shaft
sleeve/casing wearing ring shall be bronze. The pump shall be
provided with mechanical seal the system shall be complete with
necessary pressure gauge with gun metal shut off cock on delivery
side. (The pump should meet the condition and shall be gotten
approved by the Local fire Authority).
(b). Squirrel cage induction motor TEFC type for operation on 415
V, 3 phase 50 Hz AC supply for the above pump with a synchronous
speed of 2900 RPM with flexible coupling and coupling guard etc.
as required. (c) Common base plate for (a) and (b) from M.S.
channel as required size.
be done by others) complete with Anti-vibration arrangement of
cushy foot mounting. For pump defined above & of duty as follows
:

Flow : 180 LPM, Head : 80 mts

jockey pump (pressurization pump) comprising of the following:
(a). Vertical centrifugal pump, suitable for operation on 415 volts ±
6%, 3 phase, 50 HZ A.C supply. The installation shall be complete
with Flexible coupling and coupling guard, complete as required.
The pump casing shall be CI, shaft shall be SS & impeller/ shaft
sleeve/casing wearing ring shall be bronze. The pump shall be
provided with mechanical seal The system shall be complete with
V, 3 phase 50 Hz AC supply for the above pump with a synchronous
speed of 2900 RPM with flexible coupling and coupling guard etc.
as required. (c). Common base plate for (a) and (b) from M.S.
channel as required size.
be done by others) complete with Anti-vibration arrangement of
cushy foot mounting. For pump defined above & of duty as follows
:
Flow : 180 LPM, Head : 55 mts

booster pump comprising of the following:
(a). Horizontal mono-block centrifugal pump, suitable for operation
on 415 volts ± 6%, 3 phase, 50 HZ A.C supply. The pump casing
shall be CI, shaft shall be CS & impeller /shaft sleeve / casing
wearing ring shall be bronze. The system shall be complete with
V, 3 phase 50 HZ AC supply for the above pump with a synchronous
speed of 2900 R.P.M. with flexible coupling and coupling guard etc.
as required.
(c). Common base plate for (a) and (b) from M.S. channel as
required size.d. Common base plate for (a) and (b) from M.S.
channel of required size.d. Suitable cement concrete foundation
with plaster, (design and drawing to be provided by the Contractor
while the foundation will be done by others) complete with anti-
vibration arrangement of cushy foot mountings.
For pump defined above & of duty as follows :
a) Flow :900 LPM Head : 30 mts

SCOPE
Work under this section shall consist of furnishing all labor, materials,
equipment and appliances necessary and required to completely install
electrically operated and diesel driven pumps and as required by drawings and
specified hereinafter or given in the schedule of rates.
Multi-outlet electrically operated pumps with motors, common base plates,
coupling, coupling guard and accessories.
Automatic starting system with all accessories, wiring and connections and
pressure switches.
Motor control centre.
Annunciation system with all accessories wiring and connections.
Pressure gauges with isolation valves and piping, bleed and block valves.
Suction strainers and accessories.
Vibration eliminator pads and foundation bolts.
Leak-off drain shall be led to the nearest floor drain.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Pumps shall be installed true to levels on suitable concrete foundations.

Base plate shall be firmly fixed by properly grouted foundation bolts.
Pumps and motors shall be truly aligned by suitably instruments. Record of
such alignment shall be furnished to the Project Manager.
All pump connections shall be standard flanged type with number of bolts
as per relevant standard requirement for the working pressure. Companion
flanges shall be provided with the pumps.
Manufacturers’ instructions regarding installation, connections and
commissioning shall be strictly followed.
Contractor shall provide necessary test certificates, type test certificates,
performance curves and NPSH curves of the pumps from the manufacturer
when called for. The contractor shall provide facilities to the Project
Manager & Consultant for inspection of equipment during manufacturing
and also to witness various tests at the manufacturer’s works without any
cost to the Project Manager or Consultant.
Seismic isolation and clamping for each pump and flexible connection on
the suction as well as the discharge side shall be provided.
The contractor shall submit with this tender a list of recommended spare
parts for three years of normal operation and quote the prices for the same
as a separate submittal / annexure.
ELECTRIC FIRE PUMP
General
The electric fire pump shall be suitable for automatic operation complete with
necessary electric motor and automatic starting gear, suitable for operation
on 415 volts, 3 phase, 50 Hz. A.C. system. Both the motor and the pump shall
be assembled on a common base plate, fabricated M.S. channel type or cast
iron type.

Drive
The pump shall be direct driven by means of a flexible coupling. Coupling

guard shall also be provided.
FIRE PUMP
The fire pump shall be multistage pump with Multi outlets, horizontally
mounted, centrifugal type. It shall have a capacity to deliver 2800 lpm as
specified and developing adequate heads so as to ensure a minimum
pressure of 3.5 kg/sq.cm at the highest and the farthest outlet.
The pump shall be capable of giving a discharge of not less than 150 per
cent of the rated discharge, at a head of not less than 65 per cent of the
rated head. The shut off head shall be within 120 per cent of the rated head.
The pump casing shall be of cast iron to grade FG 200 to IS: 210 and parts
like impeller, shaft sleeve, wearing ring etc. shall be of non-corrosive metal
like bronze/brass/gun metal. The shaft shall be of stainless steel. Provision
of mechanical seal shall also be made.
Bearings of the pump shall be effectively sealed to prevent loss of lubricant

or entry of dust or water. The pump shall be provided with a plate indicating
the suction lift, delivery head, discharge, speed and number of stages. The
pump casing shall be designed to withstand 1.5 times the working pressure.
The pump shall be preferably Non-overloading type with continuous rising

head characteristic.
The pumps should be factory assembled and aligned with the motor
mounted on a motor stool.
The impeller shall be enclosed type, statically & dynamically balanced.
The impeller shall be same size & same diameter.
The Shut off head of the pump shall not exceed 120% of rated head.
Pumps shall deliver not less than 150% of rated capacity at total head of
not less than 65% of rated head.
Pump should be with gland packing
Provision of Jockey Pump of multi outlet for low and high zone shall be
made. The pump shall be vertical SS type and of detail as in schedule of
quantity. Contractor shall verify that the capacity of the Jockey pump shall
not be less than 3% (Minimum 230 LPM) and not more than 10% of the
installed pump capacity. The pump should factory assemble and aligned
with motor mounted on motor stool.
Motor

The motor shall be squirrel cage A.C. induction type suitable for operation on
415 volts 3 phase 50 Hz. system. The motor shall be totally enclosed fan
cooled type conforming to protection clause TEFC IP 55 suitable for DOL
starting. The class of insulation shall be F. The synchronous speed shall
be 1500 RPM as specified. The motor shall be rated for continuous duty and
shall have a horse power rating necessary to drive the pump at 150 per cent
of its rated discharge with at least 65 per cent rated head. The motor shall
conform to I.S.325-1978.
Motor Starter
The motor starter shall be as per detail in MCC. The unit shall include suitable
current transformer and ammeter of suitable range on one line to indicate the
current. The starter shall not incorporate under voltage, overload voltage trip
overload or SPP.
The starter assembly shall be suitably integrated in the power and control
panel for the wet riser system & sprinkler system.
MOC of Pump
Sr. Description Main Pump Jockey Pump

Casing CI IS 210 Gr. FG 260 CI IS 210 Gr. FG 260
Impeller Bronze LT BR IS 318 - LTB 2 Bronze LT BR IS 318 -

LTB 2
Shaft Carbon Steel, CS IS 1570 40C8 Carbon Steel, CS IS

NOM 1570 40C8 NOM
Shaft ST ST ASTMA 276 -410 ST ST ASTMA 276 -

Sleeve 410
DIESEL FIRE PUMP
General
The diesel pump set shall be suitable for automatic operation complete
with necessary automatic starting gear, for starting on wet battery system
and shall be complete with all accessories. Both engine and pump shall be
assembled on a common base plate.
Drive
The pump shall be only direct driven by means of a flexible coupling.

Coupling guard shall also be provided. The speed shall be 1500 RPM as
specified.

a. Fire Pump
i. The fire pump shall be horizontally mounted centrifugal multi

stage. It shall have a capacity to deliver as specified, and
developing adequate head so as to ensure a minimum
pressure of 3.5 Kg/Sq.cm at the highest and the farthest
outlet. The pump shall be multi stage as specified. The pump
shall be capable of giving a discharge of not less than 150%
of the rated discharge at a head of not less than 65% of the
rated head. The shut off head shall be within 120% of the rated
head.
ii. The pump casing shall be of cast iron to grade FG 200 to IS

210 and parts like impeller, shaft sleeves, wearing-ring etc.
shall be of non-corrosive metal like bronze/brass/gun metal.
The shaft shall be stainless steel. Provision of mechanical seal
shall also be made.
iii. The pump casing shall be designed to withstand 1.5 times the
working pressure.
iv. Bearing of pump shall be effectively sealed to prevent loss of

lubricant or entry of dust or water.
b. PUMP SETS ASSEMBLY
c. On the main fire sprinkler and hydrant headers near pump sets a 150
mm dia by-pass valve located in an accessible location shall be provided
along with a rate of flow meter calibrated in 1 pm and able to read
200% of the rated pump capacity. The delivery shall be connected to
the fire tank.
d. Each and every pump set assembly shall be provided with suction valve
(only for positive suction head), discharge valve, non-return valve and
150 mm dia Bourdon type pressure gauge with isolation valve.
e. FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
f. On all suction and delivery lines double flanged reinforced neoprene

flexible pipe connectors shall be provided. Connectors should be
suitable for maximum working pressure of each pipe line on which it is
mounted and tested to a test pressure of 1:5 time the operating
pressure. Length of the connector shall be as per manufacturer’s
standard.
g. INTERLOCKING

h. The following inter-locking between the two main fire pumps (i.e. wet
riser pump & sprinkler pump), the jockey pump and the diesel engine
driven pump.
i. Only one category of pumps will work at a time i.e. either jockey pump
or main fire pumps (wet riser and sprinkler, both the wet riser and
sprinkler can come up at a time) or Standby (diesel driven) pump.
Sr. JOCKEY WET RISER SPRINKLER STANDBY

PUMP PUMP PUMP PUMP
1. ON OFF OFF OFF
2. OFF ON OFF OFF
3. OFF OFF ON OFF
4. OFF ON ON OFF
5. OFF OFF ON ON
6. OFF OFF OFF ON
7. OFF ON OFF ON
VIBRATION ISOLATION
The pump set shall be mounted on rolled steel channels and 150 mm thick
inertia block spring and ribbed neoprene vibration isolation mounting shall
support the inertia block onto a 100 mm thick concrete plinths. The spring
mountings shall have a maximum deflection of 15 mm. Reference shall be
made to the section on “Nose and Vibration” for further technical
requirements.
PERIODICAL TESTING AND MAINTENANCE CHART
Sr. DURATION
SUBJECT ACTIVITIES
1. Reservoir Level checking Weekly Once in two
Clearing years
2. Pump Running test Daily 5 minutes
Test flow Annually
Lubrication Quarterly
G1and packing Weekly
Overhaul Once in two years
3. Engine Running Once in day (5 mins)
Battery Status weekly
Load test Annually
Overhaul Once in two years
Fuel tank check Daily
4. Motor Lubrication Weekly

Sr. DURATION
SUBJECT ACTIVITIES
Starter contact Weekly
checking insulation Half yearly
resistance check
5. Main piping Flushing Once in two years
Gauge pressure Check daily
6. Sluice valves Operation Monthly
Gland packing Monthly
7. Deluge valves Operation Weekly
Alarm check Weekly
Overhaul Annually
Cleaning Quarterly
8. Sprayers Cleaning Quarterly
Flow test Quarterly
9. Detectors Performance Six monthly
10. Spray Performance Quarterly
installation Physical checkup of Monthly
piping for seeing dis-
location of support,
wrong orientation,
over-loading etc
11. Pressure Calibration Annually
gauges
12. Painting Painting of entire Every two years
installation
MR 18.008 : Supply, installation, testing & commissioning of

pressure switch for auto cut in & cut out of pump. The pressure
switch shall decide maximum pressure at which the switch has to
changeover, On-OFF differential, and maximum/minimum
changeover pressure. Pressure switch shall be mounted on pipe
with electrical contact, connection from fire panel, Cost shall be
inclusive of providing any short pieces, nipples, and elbows etc. as
per approved specifications.
The pressure switches shall be employed for starting and shutting down
operation of pumps automatically, dictated by line pressure. The Pressure
Switch shall be diaphragm type. The housing shall be die cast aluminum,
with SS 316 movement, pressure element and socket. The set pressure
shall be adjustable.
The Switch shall be suitable for consistent and repeated operations without
change in values. It shall be provided with IP:55 water and environment
protection.

MR 18.009 : Supply, installation, testing & commissioning dial type

(100 mm) pressure gauge with isolation ball valve suitable for
working pressure of 250 PSI. Cost shall be inclusive of providing
any short pieces, nipples, elbows etc as required.
Pressure gauge shall be provided near all individual connections of the

hydrant system with isolation valves and near each flow switch assembly
of the sprinkler system. Pressure gauge shall be 50 mm dia gunmetal
bourdon type with gunmetal isolation ball valve, tapping and connecting
pipe and nipple. The gauge shall be installed at appropriate height for
easy readability.
MR 18.010 : Providing, laying, jointing, testing and commissioning

of following sizes of pipes conforming to IS-1239 with all
accessories like all fittings (standard MS fitting with welded joint
shall be used on the pipes) including tees, elbows, reducers, union,
flanges, rubber gaskets, GI nuts bolts, washer including
supporting/fixing the pipe on floor / wall /ceiling with clamps,
hangers (using anchor fasteners) as per specification. G.I. pipe
sleeve of suitable higher size shall be provided wherever the pipes
are crossing the walls/floors and sealing the sleeves with glass
wool in between & fire sealant compound at either end all as per
Project Manager’s / Consultants requirements including cutting
holes and chases in brick, RCC work and making good the same to
original conditions complete in all respects. All hangers, clamps,
brackets etc. shall be of galvanized iron unless specified other wire
and then supply of the same shall also be included for rates under
this head. (Welding of any kind on the galvanized support / hanger
shall not be permitted including synthetic enamel paint of approved
shade over a coat of zinc primer).
(a)25mm nominal dia
MR 18.011 : (b) 65 mm nominal dia
MR 18.012 : (c ) 80 mm nominal dia
MR 18.013 : (d) 100mm nominal dia
MR 18.015 : (f) 32mm nominal dia
MR 18.016 : (g) 40mm nominal dia
MR 18.017 : (h) 50mm nominal dia
Pipes of following types are to be used:
Mild steel black pipes as per IS:1239 heavy grade(for pipes of sizes
150 mm N.B. and below) suitably lagged on the outside to prevent
soil corrosion. M.S. pipes buried below ground shall also be suitably

be lagged with 2 layers of 400 micron polythene sheet over 2 coats

of bitumen.
Steel pipelines up to 150 mm dia shall be as per IS: 1239, Part-II

(heavy grade) while pipelines above 150 mm dia shall be as per
I.S.:3589.
All pipe clamps and supports shall be fabricated from MS steel

sections and shall be factory galvanized before use at site. Welding
of galvanized clamps and supports shall not be permitted.
Pipes shall be hung by means of expandable anchor fastener of

approved make and design. The hangers and clamps shall be
fastened by means of galvanized nuts and bolts. The size/diameter
of the anchor fastener and the clamps shall be suitable to carry the
weight of water filled pipe and dead load normally encountered.
Hangers and supports shall be thoroughly galvanized after

fabrication. The selection and design of the hanger & support shall
be capable of carrying the sum of all concurrently acting loads. They
shall be designed to provide the required supporting effects and allow
pipeline movements as necessary. All guides, anchor braces,
dampener, expansion joint and structural steel to be attached to the
building/structure trenches etc. shall be provided. Hangers and
components for all piping shall be approved by the Consultants.
The piping system shall be tested for leakages at 2 times the

operating pressure or 1.5 time shut-off pressure, whichever is
highest including testing for water hammer effects.
Flanged joints shall be used for connections for vessels, equipment,

flanged valves and also on two straight lengths of pipelines of
strategic points to facilitate erection and subsequent maintenance
work.
For pipes underground installation the pipes shall be buried at least

one meter below ground level and shall have 230 mm x 230 mm
masonry or concrete supports at least 300 mm high at 3m intervals.
Masonry work to have plain cement concrete foundation (1 cement:
4 coarse sand: 8 stone aggregate) of size 380x380x75 thick resting
on firm soil.
Mains below ground level shall be supported at regular intervals not

exceeding 3.0 meters and shall be laid at least 2.0 meter away from
the building.
PIPING INSTALLATION & SUPPORT
a) Tender drawings indicate schematically the size and location of pipes. The
Contractor, on the award of the work, shall prepare detailed working
drawings, showing the cross-sections, longitudinal sections, details of

fittings, locations of isolating and control valves, drain and air valves, and
all pipe supports. He must keep in view the specific openings in buildings
and other structure through which pipes are designed to pass.
b) Piping shall be properly supported on, or suspended from, on stands,

clamps, hangers as specified and as required. The Contractor shall
adequately design all the brackets, saddles, anchor, clamps and hangers,
and be responsible for their structural stability.
c) Pipe work and fittings shall be supported by hangers or brackets so as to

permit free expansion and contraction. Risers shall be supported at each
floor with Galvanized steel clamps. To permit free movement of common
piping support shall be from a common hanger bar fabricated from
Galvanized steel sections.
d) Pipe hangers shall be provided at the following maximum spacing:
Pipe Dia Hanger Rod Dia Spacing between

(mm) (mm) Supports
(m)
Up to 25 6 2
32 to 50 6 2.5
65 to 80 8 2.5
80 to 100 10 2.5
125 to 150 10 3.0
200 to 300 12 3.5
e) The end of the steel rods shall be threaded and not welded to the threaded
bolt.
f) All pipe work shall be carried out in a proper workman like manner, causing
minimum disturbance to the existing services, buildings, roads and
structure. The entire piping work shall be organized in consultation with
other agencies work, so that area can be carried out in one stretch.
g) Cut-outs in the floor slab for installing the various pipes area are indicated
in the drawings. Contractor shall carefully examine the cut-outs provided
and clearly point out wherever the cut-outs shown in the drawings, do not
meet with the requirements.
h) Pipe sleeves, larger diameter than pipes, shall be provided wherever pipes
pass through walls and slab and annular space filled with fiberglass and
finished with retainer rings.
i) The contractor shall make sure that the clamps, brackets, saddles and
hangers provided for pipe supports are adequate or as specified / approved
by Consultants. Piping layout shall take due care for expansion and
contraction in pipes and include expansion joints where required.

j) All pipes shall be accurately cut to the required sizes in accordance with
relevant BIS codes and burrs removed before laying. Open ends of the
piping shall be closed as the pipe is installed to avoid entrance of foreign
matter. Where reducers are to be made in horizontal runs, eccentric reduces
shall be used for the piping to drain freely. In other locations, concentric
reduces may be used.
k) Automatic air valves shall be provided at all high points in the piping system
for venting. All valves shall be of 15mm pipe size and shall be associated
with an equal size gate valves. Automatic air valves shall be provided on
hot water risers.
l) Discharge from the air valves shall be piped through a pipe to the nearest
drain or sump. All pipes shall be pitched towards drain points.
m) Pressure gauges shall be provided as shown on the approved drawings.

Care shall be taken to protect pressure gauges during pressure testing.
PIPE FITTINGS
Pipe fittings mean tees, elbows, couplings, unions, flanges, reducers etc
and all such connecting devices that are needed to complete the piping work
in its totality.
Forged steel fittings of approved type with “V” groove for welded joints shall
be used for pipes of all sizes.
Fabricated fittings shall not be permitted for pipes diameters 50mm and
below.
When fabricated fittings are used, they shall be fabricated, welded in

workshops. They shall be inspected by Project Manager before dispatch
from the workshop. The welding procedures of the workshop should have
been approved by the rules for sprinkler system and applicable to hydrant
and sprinkler system. For “T” connection, pipes shall be drilled and
reamed. Cutting by gas or electrical welding shall not be permitted.
PROCEDURE FOR PYPKOTE / COATEK APPLICATION
Surface Preparation - The pipe surface shall be cleaned by a wire brush.

Application of Primer - Pypkote / Coatek primer is to be applied on pipes
immediately after cleaning. This is to prevent any further accumulation
of rust on the pipe. This is a cold applied primer and is applied by brush.
Application of Pypkote / Coatek 4 mm Tape - After the primer is applied

on the pipe, it is allowed to dry for about 30 min. till it becomes touch
dry. Before adhering the tape to the pipe, it is advisable to gently heat
the primer coated pipe by a run of LPG torch. Remove the bottom
polyethylene from the tape & then heat bottom surface of the tape by

LPG torch or any heat source & start wrapping the tape to the pipe by
heating the primer coated pipe & by removing the bottom polyethylene
from the tape before wrapping better adhesion between the tape & pipe
is obtained. Overlaps are maintained with a minimum of 12.5 mm.
Tape coating of weld joints - The tape is applied over the weld joints
after the necessary welding & testing methods of the joints is
completed. The procedure for application of tape shall be the same as
bare pipe procedure. Overlaps on each side of the weld joints shall be
50 mm.
A final coat of White wash with water based cement paint is done
immediately over the entire coated pipe.
JOINTING
Welded Joints:
Joints between MS pipes and fittings shall be made with the pipes
and fittings having “V” groove and welded with electrical resistance
welding in an approved manner. But welding without “V” groove shall
not be permitted.
All joints in the pipe line with screwed fittings shall be seal welded
after testing and the weld plus the adjoining portion shall be given
two coats of zinc rich primer.
Flanged joints (65 mm dia. and above)
Flanged joints with flanges conforming to IS: 6392 shall be provided on

Straight runs at intervals not exceeding 25-30m on pipe lines of 50 mm
dia and above and as directed by the Project Manager.
For jointing all types of valves, appurtenances, pumps, connections with
other type of pipes, to water tanks and other places necessary and as
required for good engineering practice and as shown/noted on the drawings.
Flanges shall be with GI bolts and nuts and 3mm insertion gasket of natural
rubber conforming to IS: 11149.
Unions (up to 50 mm dia)
Approved type of dismountable unions shall be provided on pipe lines of

40 mm dia and smaller dia, in locations similar to those specified for
flanges.
PAINTING
All Hydrant and Sprinkler pipes shall be painted with post office red colour
paint. All M S pipes shall first be cleaned thoroughly before application of
primer coat. After application of primer coat two coats of enamel paint shall
be applied. Each coat shall be given minimum 24 hours drying time. No

thinners shall be used. Wherever required all pipe headers shall be worded
indicating the direction of the pipe and its purpose such as "TO RISER
NO.1" etc.
Painting shall be expertly applied, the paint shall not over run on surfaces
not requiring painting such as walls, surfaces etc. Nuts and bolts shall be
painted black, while valves shall be painted blue.
EXCAVATION
Excavation for pipe lines shall be in open trenches to levels and grades
shown on the drawings or as required at site. Pipe lines shall be buried
with a minimum cover of 1 meter or as shown on drawings.
Wherever required Contractor shall support all trenches or adjoining

structures with adequate timber supports, shoring and strutting.
On completion of testing in the presence of the Project Manager and pipe

protection, trenches shall be backfilled in 150 mm layers and consolidated.
Contractor shall dispose of all surplus earth as directed by the Project

Manager.
ANCHOR / THRUST BLOCK Contractor shall provide suitably designed

anchor blocks in cement concrete/steel support to cater to the excess thrust
due to work hammer and high pressure
Thrust blocks shall be provided at all bends, tees and such other location
as determined by the Project Manager.
Exact location, design, size and mix of the concrete blocks/steel support
shall be as shown on the drawings or as directed by the Project Manager
prior to execution of work.
MR 18. 022 : Supply, installation, testing & commissioning bronze

ball valve with bronze ball suitable for test pressure of not less than
15 kg / sq.cm of the 25mm nominal dia. (Cost shall be inclusive of
providing necessary union / flange connection).
MR 18.023 : (b) 40 mm nominal dia.
MR 18.024 : (c) 50 mm nominal dia
The ball valve shall be rated to IS778

The ball valve shall be made bronze and suitable for test pressure of
pipe line. The valve shall be internally threaded to receive pipe
connections.
The ball shall be made from brass and machined to perfect round shape
and subsequently chrome plated. The seat of the valve body-bonnet
gasket and gland packing shall be of Teflon.
The handle shall be provided with PVC jacket. The handle shall also
indicate the direction of ‘open’ and ‘closed’ situations. The gap between
the ball and the Teflon packing shall be sealed to prevent water seeping.
The handle shall also be provided with a lug to keep the movement of
the ball valve within 90°. The lever shall be operated smoothly and
without application of any unnecessary force.
The ball valve shall be rated to IS778
The ball valve shall be made bronze and suitable for test pressure of
pipe line. The valve shall be internally threaded to receive pipe
connections.
The ball shall be made from brass and machined to perfect round shape
and subsequently chrome plated. The seat of the valve body-bonnet
gasket and gland packing shall be of Teflon.
The handle shall be provided with PVC jacket. The handle shall also
indicate the direction of ‘open’ and ‘closed’ situations. The gap between
the ball and the teflon packing shall be sealed to prevent water seeping.
The handle shall also be provided with a lug to keep the movement of
the ball valve within 90°. The lever shall be operated smoothly and
without application of any unnecessary force.
DSR E & M Item No. 16.7.1.6 : Supply, installation , testing &

commissioning of slim seal type butterfly valve confirming to IS
13095 PN 16 rating , EPDM rubber gasket, including nut, bolts,
washers etc. complete as required
a)65mm nominal dia
DSR E & M Item No. 16.7.1.5 : b) 80mm nominal dia
DSR E & M Item No. 16.7.1.4 : b) 100mm nominal dia
DSR E & M Item No. 16.7.1.2 : c) 150mm nominal dia
DSR E & M Item No. 16.7.1.1 : d) 200mm nominal dia

The butterfly valve shall be suitable for waterworks and rated for 300
P.S.I
The body shall be of cast iron to IS:210 in circular shape and of high
strength to take the water pressure . The disc shall be heavy duty cast
iron with anti-corrosive epoxy or nickel coating.
The valve seat shall be of high grade elastomer or nitrile rubber. The
valve is closed position shall have complete contact between the seat
and the disc throughout the perimeter. The elastomer rubber shall have
a long life and shall not give away on continuous applied water pressure
. The shaft shall be EN 8 grade carbon steel.
The valve shall be fitted between two flanges on either side of pipe
flanges. The valve edge rubber shall be projected outside such that they
are wedged within the pipe flanges to prevent leakages.
DSR E & M Item No. 16.7.4.5 : Supply, installation , testing &

commissioning CI `Y' strainer with bronze perforated sheet basket
including rubber gasket, flanges, nuts, bolts and washers, complete
as required.
(a). 80 mm nominal dia.
DSR E & M Item No. 16.7.4.6 : (b). 65mm nominal dia

DSR E & M Item No. 16.7.4.4 : (c). 100mm nominal dia
DSR E & M Item No. 16.7.4.2 : (d). 150mmm nominal dia
CI Y strainer shall be confirm of IS standard of approved make, flanged end

and SS -304 screen with fixing on pipes with flanges as per IS 6392
pressure rating PN 10.
DSR E & M Item No. 16.7.3.6 : Supply, installation, testing &

commissioning dual plate CI wafer type check valve tested to a
pressure of 15 Kg/sq.cm. Including rubber gasket, flanges, union,
nuts, bolts, washers & painting complete as per approved
specifications.
(a). 65mm nominal dia.
DSR E & M Item No. 16.7.3.5 : b) 80mm nominal dia.

Complete as per CPWD E&M manual specs 16.7.3.6
MR 18.027 : Supply, installation, testing & commissioning swinging

type First Aid hose reel in red color drum with 36 mts long and 20

mm dia heavy duty rubber water hose, 20 mm dia. globe valve stop
cock, terminating with G.M. coupling & nozzle of 6mm outlet with
shut off valve confirming to IS 8090 - 1976 complete with MS socket
for tap-off, drum and brackets (including painting) for fixing on wall
with anchor fastener, bolts & nuts conforming to IS: 884-1969
complete as required.
Contractor shall provide standard fire hose reels of 20mm dia high pressure
Dunlop rubber hose 36 m long with gunmetal nozzle, all mounted on a
circular hose reel of heavy duty mild steel construction having cast iron
brackets. Hose reel shall be connected directly to the wet riser with an
isolating valve. Hose reel shall conform to IS:884 and shall be mounted
vertically This shall be measured and paid for separately.
MR 18.028 : Supply, installation, testing & commissioning standard

fireman’s axe with heavy rubber handle.
Fire man Axe shall conform to IS:926 and shall be mounted vertically This
shall be measured and paid for separately.
DSR Item No. 18.7.1 : : Supply, installation , testing &

commissioning of bronze gate valves with high tensile brass rising
stem confirming to IS 778 suitable for the system pressure-Bronze
Gate Valve
Gun metal Valves shall be used for smaller dia pipes, and for threaded
connections. The Valves shall bear certification as per IS:778
The body and bonnet shall be of gun metal to IS:318. The stem gland and
gland nut shall be of bronze to IS:6912. The hand wheel shall be of cast iron
to IS:210.
The Hand wheel shall be of high quality finish to avoid hand abrasions.
Movement shall also be easy. The spindle shall be non-rising type.
MR 18.029 : Supply, installation , testing & commissioning GM fire

hydrant single landing valve with 80 mm N.B. flanged inlet, brass
spindle controlled 63 mm dia female instantaneous outlet type.
GM coupling, blank cap, chain, twist release type lug & all
accessories Conforming to IS standards, including fixing with
anchor fastener and flanged tapping from wet riser and providing
pressure gauge with gun metal ball valve complete as required
EXTERNAL HYDRANTS
i. Contractor shall provide external hydrants. The hydrants shall be
controlled by a cast iron sluice valve. Hydrants shall have
instantaneous type 63mm dia outlets.
ii. The hydrants shall be double outlet conforming to IS:908 with CI

duck foot bend and flanged riser or required height to bring the
hydrant to correct level above ground.

iii. Contractor shall provide for each external fire hydrant two
numbers of 63mm dia. 15 m long controlled percolation hose pipe
with gunmetal male and female instantaneous type couplings
machine wound with GI wire (hose to IS:636 type certification) ,
gunmetal branch pipe with nozzle to IS:903. This shall be
measured and paid for separately.
iv. Each external hydrant hose cabinet shall be provided with a drain
in the bottom plate.
v. Each external hydrant hose cabinet containing items as above

shall also be provided with a nozzle spanner and a Fireman’s Axe.
This shall be measured and paid for separately.
vi. Each hose cabinet shall be conspicuously painted with the letters
“FIRE HOSE”.
Internal Hydrants
i. Contractor shall provide on each landing and other locations

as shown on the drawings double headed gunmetal landing
valve with 100 mm dia inlet as per IS:5290, with shut off
valves having cast iron wheels as shown on the drawings.
Landing valve shall have flanged inlet and instantaneous
type outlets as shown on the drawings.
ii. Instantaneous outlets for fire hydrants shall be standard

pattern and suitable for fire hoses.
iii. Contractor shall provide for each internal fire hydrant station
two numbers of 63 mm dia. 15 m long rubberized fabric lined
hose pipes with gunmetal male and female instantaneous
type coupling machine would with GI wire (hose to IS:636
type 2 and couplings to IS:903 with IS certification), fire
hose reel, gunmetal branch pipe with nozzle to IS:903. This
shall be measured and paid for separately.
iv. Each internal hydrant hose cabinet shall be provided with a

drain in the bottom plate. All drain point shall be connected
to UG flushing tank located at basement
v. Each internal hydrant hose cabinet containing items as above

shall also be provided with a nozzle spanner and a Fireman’s
Axe. The cabinet shall be recessed in the wall as directed.
This shall be measured and paid for separately.
vi. Each hose cabinet shall be conspicuously painted with the

letters “FIRE HOSE”.

MR 18.030 : Supply, installation, testing & commissioning GM 63

mm dia. instantaneous pattern branch short pipe, 20 mm dia.
Nozzle conforming to IS 903, suitable for inter connection to hose
pipe coupling complete as required.
Branch pipes shall be of gun metal with loaded tin bronze ring at the
discharge and to receive the nozzle and provided at the other with a
leaded tin bronze ring to fit into the instantaneous coupling. Nozzle
shall be of spray type of diameter of not less than 16 mm and not
more than 25 mm. Nozzle shall be of loaded tin bronze branch pipe
and nozzle shall be of instantaneous pattern conforming to Indian
Standard - 903.
MR 18.031 : Supply, installation , testing & commissioning non-

percolating rubber reinforced lined fire hose pipe (as per IS : 8423)
of 63 mm dia and length as described below. The hose shall be rated
for brust pressure of 35.7 Kg/sqcm. Hose shall be complete with
ISI marked brass male & female coupling (IS:903) bound & riveted
to hose pipe with copper rivets & 1.5 mm copper wire (Location :
Internal fire hydrant) 15 m length
a) All hose pipes shall be of 63 mm diameter RRL/ CP as required,

conforming to IS : 8423 The hose shall be provided with copper alloy
delivery coupling. The hose shall be capable of withstanding a bursting
pressure of 35.7 Kg/Sq.cm without undue leakage or sweating. Hose
shall be provided with instantaneous spring-lock, type couplings.
b) Branch Pipe, Nozzle
c) Branch pipes shall be of gun metal with loaded tin bronze ring at the
discharge and to receive the nozzle and provided at the other with a
leaded tin bronze ring to fit into the instantaneous coupling. Nozzle shall
be of spray type of diameter of not less than 16 mm and not more than
25 mm. Nozzle shall be of loaded tin bronze branch pipe and nozzle shall
be of instantaneous pattern conforming to Indian Standard - 903.

brigade connection (suction collecting head) consisting of 4 Nos. 63
mm dia. instantaneous type male couplings with built-in check
valves, 1 No. 150 mm dia. butterfly, (1 No. 150 mm dia. non-return
valve) and 150 mm dia. flanged outlet complete with bolts, nuts
and rubber insertions as required and as per IS standards ( cost of
butterfly valve and check valve shall be paid separately under
relevant head)
The storage tank shall be provided with a 150 mm fire brigade pumping
connection to discharge at least 2280 litres / minute into it. This
connection shall not be taken directly into the side of the storage tank,
but arranged to discharge not less than 150 mm above the top edge of
the tank such that the water flow can be seen. The connection shall be

fitted with stop valve in a position approved by the Project Manager. An

overflow connection discharging to a drain point shall be provided from
the storage tank.
The fire brigade connection shall be fitted with four numbers of 63mm
instantaneous inlets in a glass fronted wall box at a suitable position at
street level, so located as to make the inlets accessible from the outside
of the building. The size of the wall box shall be adequate to allow hose
to be connected to the inlets, even if the door cannot be opened and
the glass has to be broken. Each box shall have fall of 25mm towards
the front at its base and shall be glassed with wired glass with ”FIRE
BRIGADE INLET” painted on the inner face of the glass in 50 mm size
block letter. Each such box shall be provided with a steel hammer with
chain for breaking the glass.
In addition to the emergency fire brigade connection to the storage

tank, a 150mm common connection shall be taken from the four 63mm
instantaneous inlets direct to hydrant main so that the fire brigade may
pump to the hydrants in the event of the hydrant pumps being out of
commission. The connection shall be fitted with a sluice valve and reflux
valve. Location of these valve shall be as per the approval of the Project
Manager.
Two way collecting head with two numbers 63 mm instantaneous type

inlets shall be connected to the sprinkler header. All other details shall
be as described above.
MR 18.033 : Supply, installation , testing & commissioning MS

cabinet (to enclose above FB connection) fabricated from 16g MS
sheet with full front glass door and locking arrangement duly
painted with one coat of primer and two or more coats of synthetic
enamel paint of approved make and shade and suitably mounted on
a raised masonry platform as required (Approx. 0.6m x 0.6m x
0.45m)
Item shall be provided for all internal and external fire hydrants. Shutter
shall be fabricated from 16 gauge MS powder coated sheet of fully welded
construction with hinged double front door partially glazed (3 mm glass
panel) with locking arrangement, stove enameled fire red paint (shade No.
536 of IS:5) with “FIRE HOSE CABINET” written on it prominently (size as
given in the schedule of quantities). Cabinet surfaces in contact with the
walls shall not be powder coated but instead given two coats of anti-
corrosive bitumastic paint.

brigade suction hose coupling (draw-out connection) with nut for
female coupling as per IS standards complete with 100 mm dia GI
suction pipe and 100 mm dia foot valve (to be connected to static

tank). Provision of GI drop pipe and foot valve shall be made in

all the fire water static storage tanks (1 Nos) (GI pipe to be
paid separately through appropriate item while cost of foot valve
to be included)
Draw out connection brass should be as per IS 903 and it should

be ISI mark complete as specified in IS 3844
MR 18.035 : Supply, installation , testing & commissioning MS

cabinet (to enclose draw-out connection as per Item above)
fabricated from 16 g MS sheet with full front glass door and locking
arrangement duly painted with one coat of primer and two or more
coats of synthetic enamel paint of approved make and shade and
suitably mounted on a raised masonry platform as required
(Approx. 0.6 m x 0.6 m x 0.45 m)
Please refer item specs for MR 18.034
MR 18.036 : Supply, installation, testing & commissioning of spring

loaded relief commissioning of spring loaded relief valve suitable
for pressure of 15 Kg / sq.cm including flanges nuts bolt and
washer etc. complete as required. 25 mm dia
Each System shall be provided with a Pressure Relief Valves. The

Valve shall be spring actuated and set to operate as per field
requirement. The Valve shall be constructed of bronze and provided
with an open discharge orifice for releasing the water. The Valve shall
be open lift type
MR 18.037 : Fire duct Shutter fabricated out of M.S. sheet of 16swg

and frame, door shall be 900mm x 1200 mm min. & fixed with 4 mm
thick Glass, suitable Rubber beading and locking arrangement.
Quoted rate shall be includes all fasteners etc., and complete
shutter shall be powder coated of approved color both inside
and outside etc., complete
Please refer item specs for MR 18.034
MR 18.038 : Providing, fixing, testing and commissioning of pre-

charged air vessel (size 450 mm dia & 2000 mm height) for
pressurization of hydrant system complete with adequate pressure
switches (as per design/requirement) with valves to operate as per
operating sequences including 25 mm dia drain valve, air release
valve with stop cock on the top, 25 mm dia inlet with isolating valve
duly painted from inside and outside complete as required.
Item shall be manufactured completely as specified above and

IS 2825
MR 18.039 : Supply, Mechanical Foam type Fire Extinguisher. In HP

Mild Steel Cylinders ISI marked TAC approved fitted with pressure
indicating gauge, internal tube, squeeze lever type valve fully

charged complete in all respects including wall suspension bracket

/ trolley mounted and conforming to IS:910
a) 50 Litres (trolley mounted)

following types of extinguisher with provision of wall bracket (fixed
with anchor fastener).ISI marked (IS:940) portable chemical fire
extinguisher, water (gas pressure) type capacity 9 liters with gun
metal cap and nozzle and complete in all respects including initial
fill
and wall suspension brackets ( As approved by IS 15683)
MR 18.041 : ISI marked (IS:15683) ABC Dry Powder fire of clean

agent Fire extinguisher, flat base including valve, discharge hose
and wall suspension bracket. - 6 Kgs
MR 18.042 : ISI marked (IS:15683) ABC (Powder Type) Fire

Extinguisher. In HP Mild Steel Cylinders ISI marked TAC approved
fitted with pressure indicating gauge, internal tube, squeeze lever
type valve fully charged with ABC powder (Mono Ammonium
Phosphate) pressured by Nitrogen complete in all respects including
wall suspension bracket and conforming to IS:1349-1993 6 Kgs
MR 18.043 : ISI marked (IS:2878) Fire Extinguisher, Carbon-di-

oxide type capacity 4.5 Kg. Flat base including valve, discharge
hose of not less than 10 mm dia, 1M long and complete in all
respects including initial fill with CO2 gas conforming to IS:307-
1966 filled to a filling rate of not more than 0.667 and wall
suspension bracket.
Scope
a. Work under this section shall consist of furnishing all labor, materials,
appliances and equipment necessary and required to install fire
extinguishing hand appliances as per relevant specification of various
authorities.
b. Without restricting to the generality of the foregoing, the work shall
consists of the following:
c. Installation of fully charged and tested fire extinguishing hand
appliances of A B C powder type as required and specified in the
drawings and schedule of rates.
General Requirements
i. Hand appliances shall be installed in easily accessible locations with

the brackets fixed to the wall by suitable anchor fasteners.
ii. Each appliance shall be provided with an inspection card indicating
the date of inspection, testing, change of charge and other relevant
data.
iii. All appliances shall be fixed in a true workmanlike manner truly
vertical and at correct locations.

iv. Distribution / installation of fire extinguisher to be in accordance to

IS: 2190.
1. Material :-
a. Carbon Dioxide Extinguisher
i. The Carbon Dioxide Extinguisher shall be as per IS: 2878

ii. The body shall be constructed of seamless tube conforming to IS:
7285 and having a convex dome and flat base. Its dia shall be
maximum 140 mm, and the overall height shall not exceed 720
mm.
iii. The discharge mechanism shall be through a control valve
conforming to IS: 3224. The internal syphon tube shall be of
copper aluminum conforming to relevant specifications.
iv. Hose Pipe shall be high pressure braided Rubber hose with a
minimum burst pressure of 140 Kg/cm2 and shall be
approximately 1.0 meter in length having internal dia of 10 mm.
The discharge horn shall be of high quality unbreakable plastic
with gradually expanding shape, to convert liquid carbon dioxide
into gas form. The hand grip of Discharge horn shall be insulated
with Rubber of appropriate thickness.
v. The gas shall be conforming to IS: 307 and shall be stored at
about 85 Kg/cm2. The expansion ratio between stored liquid
carbon dioxide to expanded gas shall be 1:9 times and the total
discharge time (effective) shall be minimum 10 secs and
maximum 25 secs.
vi. The extinguisher shall fulfill the following test pressures:
vii. Cylinder: 236 Kg/cm2
viii. Control Valve: 125 Kg/cm2
ix. Burst Pressure of Hose: 140 Kg/cm2 minimum
x. It shall be an Upright type. The cylinder, including the control
valve and high pressure Discharge Hose must comply with
relevant Statutory Regulations, and be approved by Chief
Controller of Explosives, Nagpur and also bear IS marking.
xi. The Extinguisher including components shall be IS marked.
b. ABC Type Dry Powder Extinguisher
i. The Extinguisher shall be filled with ABC grade 40, Mono

Ammonium Phosphate 40% from any approved manufacturer.
ii. The capacity of the extinguisher when filled with Dry Chemical
Powder (First filling) as per IS 4308, Part
iii. II, shall be 5 Kg +/-2% or 10 Kg +/- 3%.
iv. The distribution of fire extinguishers to be as per IS 2190 – 1992.
v. It shall be operated upright, with a squeeze grip valve to control
discharge. The plunger neck shall have a safety clip, fitted with a
pin, to prevent accidental discharge. It shall be pressurized with
Dry Nitrogen, as expellant. The Nitrogen to be charged at a
pressure of 15 Kg/cm2

vi. Body shall be of mild steel conforming to relevant IS Standards.

The neck ring shall be also mild steel and welded to the body. The
discharge valve body, shall be forged brass or leaded bronze,
while the spindle, spring and siphon tube shall be of brass. The
nozzle shall be of brass, while the hose shall be braided nylon.
The body shall be cylindrical in shape, with the dish and dome
welded to it. Sufficient space for
vii. Nitrogen gas shall be provided inside the body, above the powder
filling.
viii. The Neck Ring shall be externally threaded - the threading portion
being 1.6 cm. The filler opening in the neck ring shall not less
than 50 mm. Discharge nozzle shall be screwed to the hose. The
design of the nozzle shall meet the performance requirement, so
as to discharge at least 85% of contents up to a throw of 4 mtrs,
continuously, at least for 15 seconds. The hose, forming part of
discharge nozzle, shall be 500 mm long, with 10 mm dia internally
for 5 Kg capacity and 12 mm for 10 Kg capacity. It shall have a
pressure gauge fitted to the valve assembly or the cylinder to
indicate pressure available inside. The extinguisher shall be
treated with anti-corrosive paint, and it shall be labelled with
words ABC 2.5 cm long, within a triangle of 5 cm on each face.
The extinguisher body and valve assembly shall withstand internal
pressure of 30 Kg/cm2 for a minimum period of 2 minutes. The
pressure gauge shall be imported and suited for the purpose.
c. Water Type Extinguisher (Gas Pressure Type)
i. The Extinguishing medium shall be primarily water stored under

normal pressure, the discharge being affected by release of
Carbon Dioxide Gas from a 120 gms cylinder.
ii. The capacity of Extinguisher, when filled up to the indicated level,
shall be 9 ltr +/- 5%
iii. The skin thickness of the Cylinder shall be minimum 4.0 mm,
fabricated from Mild Steel sheet, welded as required, with dish
and dome, being of same thickness, and of size not exceeding the
diameter of body.
iv. The diameter of body to be not less than 150 mm and not
exceeding 200 mm. The neck shall be externally threaded up to a
minimum depth of 16 mm, and leaded tin bronze.
v. The cap shall be of leaded tin bronze, and screwed on the body
up to a minimum of 1.6 cm depth, with parallel screw thread to
match the neck ring. The siphon tube to be of brass or G.I. and
the strainer of
vi. Brass. The cartridge holder, knob, discharge fittings and plunger
to be of Brass/Leaded tin bronze, and plunger of stainless steel,
spring of stainless steel. The cap to have handle fixed to it. The
discharge hose shall be braided nylon, of 10 mm dia and 600 mm
long, with a nozzle of brass fitted at end.
vii. The extinguisher shall be treated for anti-corrosion internally and
externally, and externally painted with

viii. Fire Red paint. The paint shall be stove enameled/powder coated.
The cartridge shall be as per IS, and have 60 gm net carbon
dioxide gas for expelling. The extinguisher, body and cap shall be
treated to an internal hydraulic pressure of 25 Kg/cm2. It shall
have external marking with letter A, of 2.5 cm height, in block
letters within a triangle of 5 cm each side. The extinguisher shall
be upright in operation, with the body placed on ground and
discharge tube with nozzle held in one hand to give a throw of not
less than 6 mtr, and continue so for at least 60 secs. The
extinguisher body shall be clearly marked with ISI stamp (IS
940).
2. Measurement
Fire extinguishers shall be counted in numbers and include installation of

all necessary items required as given in the specifications
MR 18.044 : Supplying and installing at approved location approved

make fire buckets of 24 gauge galvanized steel sheet, standard 9
litre capacity and of round bottom shape, painted white inside and
red outside and black on the bottom, inscribed with letters “FIRE”
in black and gold. Cost shall be inclusive of providing MS stand duly
painted over a coat of primer- 6 Buckets/Stand.
1. Material: The fire bucket shall be conforming to IS 2574 – 1974. Mild

steel black sheets used for the manufacture of buckets shall conform
to Grade St 34 or Grade St 42 of IS : 1079-1968.Mild steel rod used
for the top and bottom handles shall conform to IS : 226-1969.Mild
steel wire used for stiffening the top rim shall conform to IS : 280-
1962. Paints used for painting of fire buckets shall conform to the
appropriate Indian Standards given in Table 1 :
Table 1 – Paints for Painting of Fire Buckets
Sr.
No. Purpose Reference to IS Standards
When Enamel
When Oil Paint Finish is
Finish is required required
(1) (2) (3) (4)
White paints for
painting
i) the inside IS : 641-1964
Red paints for painting IS : 2932-1964
ii) the outside IS : 120-1962
Black paint for painting
handles, cars and
iii) letters IS : 128-1962

SHAPE AND ESSENTIAL DIMENSIONS

The shape and the essential dimensions of fire bucket shall conform
to those shown in Fig. 1.
MANUFACTURE:
1. Body - The together by butt uniformly beaded body shall be in two

halves which shall be joined welding. The top rim of the body shall
be wired and the beading shall be fully formed without gaps. The
thickness of body shall be 1 mm and diameter of beading wire 3’55
mm.
2. Bottom- The bottom shall be dished and shall be joined to the body
by butt welding so that there is no raw edge or crevice on the inside
of the bucket. The thickness of the bottom sheet shall be 1 mm.
3. Ears - The ears shall be made of mild steel sheet and shall be fitted
to the body at the top by means of welding with the flat head on the
side. The thickness of sheet for ears shall be 2’8 mm.
4. Top Handle - The top handle shall be of mild steel rod of 10 mm in
diameter with its ends bent up as shown in Fig. 1.
5. Bottom Handle - The bottom handle shall be of mild steel rod of 10
mm in diameter and it shall be joined to the bottom by welding as
shown in Fig. 1. The grip shall have no sharp edges.

FINISH
1. All parts of the bucket shall be finished smooth and sharp edges
rounded off.
2. The bucket shall be galvanized after manufacture as per IS :
2629- 1966*. The thickness of coating of zinc on any portion shall
be not less than 0.06 g/cma( both sides inclusive ).
3. Bucket shall, in addition to galvanizing, be painted with two coats
of white paint on the inside and two coats of red paint on the
outside ( scc also 2.4 ). The handles and the. ears shall be
painted with two coats of black paint.
The word ‘ FIRE ’ shall be painted in black. centrally on the outside; its letters
shall be 75 mm high, and approximately 12 mm thick.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
1. The bucket shall be water tight and tested for leakage

2. The bucket shall be filled with water to the brim and kept for 15
minutes. The bucket shall not show any sign of leakage during this
period.
3. A water tank of suitable size and full of water shall be used for
conducting the test. The dry empty bucket with its top facing upwards
shall be pressed down the water vertically taking care that the top is at
least 6 mm above the water level. It shall be observed whether any
watergets into the bucket from the bottom or sides of the bucket. If
any water enters the bucket, it shall be considered to have failed the
test.
4. The bucket shall be withdrawn, reversed (with top downwards ) and
again pressed down the water vertically without agitating the water.
Should any air bubble be seen escaping through the water, the bucket
shall be considered to have failed the test.
INSPECTION:
The purchaser or his representative shall, if desired, be granted facilities

for inspection of finished goods prior to dispatch at the manufacturer’s
works.
Mode of Measurement:
Fire Bucket Stand shall be counted as set of 6 bucket / stand and inclusive
of all placing at location and necessary items required as given in the
specifications

CABLES AND END TERMINATIONS

CABLES AND END TERMINATIONS
MR 18.046 : Supply, Installation, Testing and Commissioning of
following armoured cables from main panel to sub panels and from
sub panels to final DBs. All the below mentioned cables shall be
1.1kV grade, XLPE insulated, FRLS type armoured cables of Al / Cu,
whichever applicable with inner and outer PVC sheath. The said
cables shall confirm IS 7098-1, BS 5467, IEC 60502-1, BS 7889 all
supplymentary.The rate shall include complete Supply, Installation,
Testing and Commissioning rates including cost of fire retardant
sealant all tools and accessories required to Complete the job in full
respect.
4C X 16 sq.mm 2XWY
MR 18.047 : 3C X 6 sq.mm 2XWY
MR 18.048 : 4C X 25 sq.mm Cu. 2XWY
MR 18.049 : 3.5C X 50 sq.mm Cu. 2XWY
MR 18.050 : 2C X 2.5 sq.mm. 2XY for instrumentation
MR 18.051 : Design, fabrication, assembling, wiring, supply,

installation, testing and commissioning of motor control centre
shall be fabricated out of 14 gauge CRCA sheet steel in form in 3b
formation with reinforcement of suitable size angle iron, channel ‘T’
sections irons and /or flats wherever necessary.
MCC-1 for Fire Fighting equipment's
Incoming
63 amps TPN MCCB with the following accessories:
a.) 0-500 volts 96 x 96 mm square voltmeter with selector switch
protected by 2 amps TP MCB. 1 Set
b). Phase indicating lamps protected by 2 amp SP MCB 3 Sets
Outgoings
a.) 1 Nos. 32 amps TPN MPCB, 5.5 KW DOL starter, replay range
13.5 - 20.0 A with single phase preventer and outgoing feeder to
terrace pump motor. The compartment shall contain CT operated
ammeter of 0-63 amps and indicating lamps with MCBs for
ÒN'/OFF`TRIP' status of pump motors.
b.) Necessary cable alleys, internal wiring, and interlocking,
earthling for all equipment shall also included.
c). Necessary cable alleys space for spare switches, internal
wiring and copper earthling of all equipment shall also be
included. All switch gears/control gears shall be motor duty
rating.
d) Complete Auto Start and stop of pumps at set pressure as per
specifications
Provision shall be made for providing potential free contacts to
all pumps starters for connection to building automation system.

installation, testing and commissioning of motor control center


formation with reinforcement of suitable size angle iron, channel
‘T’ sections irons and /or flats wherever necessary.
MCC-1 A for Fire Fighting equipment's
Incoming
63 amps TPN MCCB with the following accessories:
a.) 0-500 volts 96 x 96 mm square voltmeter with selector
switch protected by 2 amps TP MCB. 1 Set
b). Phase indicating lamps protected by 2 amp SP MCB 3 Sets
Outgoings
a.) 1 Nos. 63 amps TPN MPCB, 25 KW DOL starter, relay range
28-40 A with single phase preventer and outgoing feeder to
terrace pump motor. The compartment shall contain CT
operated ammeter of 0-63 amps and indicating lamps with
MCBs for ÒN'/OFF`TRIP' status of pump motors.
b.) 1 Nos. 5 amps TPN MPCB, 3 KW DOL starter, suitable relay
range with single phase preventer and outgoing feeder to
terrace pump motor. The compartment shall contain CT
d.) Necessary cable alleys, internal wiring, and interlocking,
earthling for all equipment shall also included.
e). Necessary cable alleys space for spare switches, internal
wiring and copper earthling of all equipment shall also be
included. All switch gears/control gears shall be motor duty
rating.
f) Complete Auto Start and stop of pumps at set pressure as per
specifications
Provision shall be made for providing potential free contacts to
all pumps starters for connection to building automation
system.

installation, testing and commissioning of motor control centre
formation with reinforcement of suitable size angle iron, channel
‘T’ sections irons and/or flats wherever necessary. Cable gland
plates shall be provided on top as well as at the bottom of the
panels. Panels shall be treated with all anticorrosive process before
painting as per specifications with 2 coats of red oxide primer and
final approved shade of powder coated paint. 2 Nos. earthling
terminals shall be provided for 3 phase, 4 wire, 50 Hz supply
system. Lifting hooks shall also be provided in case of large panels.
Approval shall be taken for each panel before fabrication. Cadmium
Plated hardware shall be used in fabrication of panels. Quoted rates
shall inclusive of cables (in accordance to specification) with
earthling from panel to each motor / equipment.
MCC-2 for firefighting Incoming
a. 2 Nos. 125 amps 4 pole mechanical interlocked incoming
MCCB complete with the following
i. 0-500 volts 96 x 96mm square voltmeter with selector
switch shall be protected by 2 amps TP MCB 1 Set

ii. 0-125 amps 96 x 96 mm square ammeter and selector

switch - 1 Set
iii. Phase indicating lamps shall be protected by 2 amps SP

MCB - 6 Sets
b. Aluminum bus bar sleeves type, rated at 800 amps for three
phase & neutral phase bus bar shall have maximum current
density of 1 amps per sq.cm and the neutral bus bar of not
less than 50% capacity.
Outgoing:
a. 1 Nos. 100 amps TPN MCCB outgoing feeders with 75 KW
DOL starters outgoing feeders to Hydrant pump motor. The
compartment shall contain CT operated ammeter of 0-100
amps range with selector switch auto / manual selector
switch and indicating lamp with MCBs for ÒN'/OFF`TRIP'
status of motor.
b. 1 Nos. 25 amps TPN MCCB, 5.5 KW Direct online starter with

single phase preventer and outgoing feeder to jockey pump
and terrace pump motor. The compartment shall contain CT
c. 1 No. 16 Amp Outgoing Feeder for Sump started panel
d. Supply, installation , testing & commissioning 1 No. auto

start panel activated with pressure switch for diesel engine
complete with all accessories, batteries, battery charger of
suitable rating, MCB timers, push buttons, microprocessor
based alarm annunciator, wiring and cabling including
connection to diesel engine complete as required ready for
working.
All MCCB's to be suitable for motor duty and shall be of 25 KA

breaking capacity.
MCC-2 as described above
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SCOPE
The scope of this section comprises of fabrication, supply, erection,

testing and commissioning of fire pump panels
GENERAL
Work shall be carried out in accordance with the accompanying

specifications and shall comply with the latest relevant Indian
Standards and Electricity Rules and Regulations.

The tenderer should supply necessary starters for motors. Other

electrical wiring/earthling up to the control board will be done by
another agency. The tenderer will however, be responsible to carry out
all further electrical work thru a Licensed electrical contractor.
Electrical Panel:-
The panel (MCC) shall be free standing. Cubical type with copper bus
bars and painting by usual tanking treatment. A voltmeter and an
ammeter with selector switches and indicating lamps shall be provided
at both the incomers. An ammeter with indicating lamp shall be provided
on all outgoings. Suitable interlocking to prevent connection of both
sources of supply at the same time should be included. A warning
beeper and hooter should be provided to operate in case of either a
failure of power or low pressure in the delivery main. Earthing of all
equipment to be included. Only power line upto the panel board will be
arranged by the Owners
SPECIFICATIONS OF LT ELECTRICAL PANELS:
Applicable Standards:
The design, manufacturing process and performance of the L.T.

electrical panel boards and all the equipment & instruments
incorporated in the same shall comply with the latest Indian
Standards set by B.I.S. and particularly to the following :
BRIEF DESCRIPTION REFERENCE STAND

Switch gear General Requirements IS : 13947-1993
Factory Built Assemblies of Switch gear IS : 8623
and Control gear
Miniature Circuit Breaker IS : 8828
HRC Cartridge fuse IS : 9224 (Part 2)
Current Transformers IS : 2705
Indicating Instruments IS : 1248
Busbar Connections and Accessories IS : 5578, 11353
Code of Practice for Phosphate Iron & IS : 6005
Steel
PVC Wires IS : 694
The above are minimum standards expected. The technical

specifications to follow and those given in schedule of quantities, if
found to be more stringent as compared to those listed above, then the
more stringent specifications shall prevail.
SHEET METAL WORK

The panel boards frame shall be fabricated using suitable mild steel
structural sections or pressed and shaped cold rolled sheet steel of
thickness not less than 3.5 mm.
Frames shall be enclosed by cold rolled sheet steel of thickness not less
than 3.0 mm. smoothly finished, leveled and free from flaws. Doors,
top covers and partitions shall be made of cold rolled sheet steel of
thickness not less than 3.6 mm. Stiffeners shall be provided wherever
necessary.
As far as wall mountable panels incorporating only Miniature Circuit
Breakers and E.L.C.B. & starters are concerned, the thickness of sheet
still shall be 3.6 mm for enclosure and door.
All panel edges and door edges shall be reinforced against distortion by
rolling, bending or by the addition of welded reinforced members. Cut-
outs shall be true in shape and devoid of sharp edges. The complete
structure shall be rigid, self-supporting and free from vibration, twists
and bends.
PAINTING
All sheet steel work shall be phosphate with applicable standards
mentioned above.
The panel manufacturer shall have in-house 7 tank process facility. The
type of painting will be as per the direction given in the preamble to the
relevant section of the schedule of quantities.
CONSTRUCTIONAL FEATURES
Switch gear shall be:
Indoor, floor mounted modular type (wall mounted wherever so
specified in schedule of quantities) of vermin proof construction;
Provided with a degree of protection of IP 52;
provided with a metal sill frame made of structural steel channel section
properly drilled for mounting the switch gear along with necessary
mounting hardware (hardware shall be zinc plated and passivated);
Provided with gaskets all-round the perimeter of removable covers and
doors; and provided with bus bar of adequate rating.
No equipment needing manual operation shall be located less than 250
mm above ground level and exceed 2,100mm from ground level.
Cable alleys shall be provided with suitably hinged doors/cover. It shall
be possible to safely carry out maintenance work on cable connections
to any one circuit with the bus bar and adjacent circuits live. Adequate
number of slotted cable support arms shall be provided for cleating the
cables.
All doors shall be folded type. All covers and doors to be provided with
neoprene gaskets.
Provision shall be made for insulating covers on outgoing terminals for
protection against accidental touch.

Base Channel of ISMC-75 shall be provided in case of free floor standing

panels.
Four Lifting Lugs per each shipping section shall be provided.
FUSES
Fuses shall be of the HRC cartridge fuse-link type having a certified
rupturing capacity of not less than 50 kA at 440 V. Fuses shall be
provided with visible indication to show that they have operated.
MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (M.C.C.B.)
The M.C.C.B.s shall comprise single units of triple pole construction and
shall be rated for 500 V AC.
All live parts shall be totally enclosed in a heat resistant flame retardant
molded insulating material housing with high withstand capability against
thermal and mechanical stresses. Operating mechanism shall be quick
make, quick break and trip free type.
All M.C.C.B.s shall be capable of variable load adjustment.
The M.C.C.B.s shall be provided with the following features:
Inverse-time-current tripping characteristics under sustained overload.
Instantaneous tripping on short circuit.
ICU=100%ICS
MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKER (M.C.B.)
M.C.B. shall be quick make, quick break and trip free type.
Miniature circuit breaker shall have minimum short circuit breaking capacity
as indicated in the single line diagrams or schedule of quantities. If breaking
capacity is not specified then it should not be less than 10 kA.
M.C.B. shall be of current limiting type(Class – 3)
M.C.B. shall be classified as per their tripping characteristic curves.
M.C.B. shall have minimum power loss characteristic curves.
BUSBAR CHAMBER (B.B.C)
This shall be totally enclosed, metal clad type fabrication from rust proofed
16 SWG sheet steel on angle iron frame and provided with sheet steel or
cast iron detachable front cover and undrilled detachable end plates,
suitable for mounting on wall or angle iron floor stand and painted with high
quality enamel paint, G.I bolts and nuts shall be used for assembly with
suitable packing materials to ensure dust proof finish. Meters shall be
provided on suitable sheet steel boxes. Switch shall be provided with cable
end boxes as required.
The depth of B.B.C shall be 250 mm (minimum). Minimum clearance of
phase bars to earth shall be 26 mm and between bus bars shall be minimum
32 mm.

H.C (High Conductivity) copper bus bars properly tinned are to be rated at
1000Amps. Per sq. in and Aluminum bus bars (wrought aluminum alloy
strip) conforming to relevant I.S. specification at 800 Amps per sq.in.
Neutral Bus bars are to be rated to carry 100% of phase current up to 200A
and 60% for higher.
These shall be mounted on DMC/SMC supported of proper dielectric and
mechanical strength and shall be appropriately colour coded for
identification of phase with PVC selves of 1.1 KV grade throughout the
length.
Lettering shall be done for identification of switches, as directed. The
contractor shall submit fully dimensioned drawing of the board with the
physical position of the switches.
BUSBARS
Bus bar shall be suitable for carrying full load current and short circuit
current without overheating of phase and neutral bus bars and shall be
extendable on either side. Bus bars and interconnections shall be insulated
with heat shrinkable sleeve and shall be color coded. Bus bars shall be
supported on glass fiber reinforced thermosetting plastic insulated supports
at regular intervals to withstand the force arising in case of short circuit in
the system. All bus bars shall be provided in a separate chamber and all
connections shall be done by bolting. Additional cross sectional area to be
added to the bus bar to compensate for the holes.
ISOLATOR/ SWITCH FUSE UNITS
All isolators and switches shall be two position type (ON/OFF) heavy duty,
load break, quick make and break type and suitable for front of board
operation and shall conform to I.S. 4064.
The isolators for motor feeders shall be of “Motor Duty” type adequate for
interruption of locked rotor current of motors (excepting for motors rated
50 Kilowatts and above).
Switches and isolators provided in the switch boards shall be interlocked

with door to prevent opening and closing of the door in the closed (ON)
position of the isolators.
All live terminals on the isolating / switches shall be adequately shrouded

to prevent accidental contact and danger to the personnel.
Properly rated co-coordinating fuses (HRC type) shall be provided for every
outgoing feeder unless otherwise indicated. The fuse shall be non-

deteriorating high rupturing capacity link type mounted in suitable fuse

carrier / fuse base and conform to I.S. 3106.
INTERCONNECTION IN B.B.C, SWITCH FUSE, METERS
For rating above 150 Amps these shall consist of insulated copper strips of
adequate section considering current density as specified previously. For
rating below 150 Amp PVC copper cable tails of appropriate size,
terminating in tinned copper sockets may be used to considering 1.5
Amp/sq.mm for copper & 1.0 Amp/sq.mm or aluminum. The above are to
be enclose either in sheet metal trucking or conduits so that no part is
exposed.
CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
Current transformers shall be of the Cast Resin Type.

All current transformers shall be earthed through a separate earth link.
INDICATING INSTRUMENTS AND METERS
Electrical indicating instruments (Analog type) shall be of minimum 96 mm

square size, 900 scale deflection and with a class of accuracy of 3.0 and
shall have provision for zero adjustment outside the cover. Digital
meters should have red colored readout.
CABLE TERMINATIONS
Suitable double compression type, brass cable glands with check nuts,
rubber sealing ring and brass washers mounted on a removable
gland plate shall be provided to support all cables entering the
switchgear. Cable Termination will be measured under separate item in
the schedule of quantities.
INTERNAL WIRING
Wiring inside the switchgear shall be carried out with 1100 V grade, single
core, PVC insulated, stranded copper conductor wires. Minimum size of
conductor for power circuits is 4 sq. mm. Not more than two connections
shall be made on any one terminal.
TERMINAL BLOCKS
Terminal blocks shall comprise finely threaded pairs of brass studs of at

least 6 mm diameter, links between each pair of studs, washers, nuts and
lock nuts. The studs shall be securely locked within the mounting base to
prevent their turning. Insulated barriers shall be provided between
adjacent terminals.

Terminals shall be shrouded. Terminal blocks shall be adequately rated to

carry the current of the associated circuit. Minimum rating of the terminal
block shall be 10 A.
LABELS:
All labels shall comprise white letters on a black background and shall be
made of non-rusting metal or 3-ply lamicoid or engraved PVC. Size of
lettering shall be 6.0 mm.
EARTHING
Switchgear shall be provided with a 30 x 5 mm copper earth bus bar

running along the entire length of the board. At either end of the earth
bus, one clamp type terminal with nuts, bolts and washers shall be
provided for bolting the earthing conductor.
Earth bus bars shall be supported at suitable intervals. Positive connection
between all the frames of equipment mounted in the switchboard and
earth bus bar shall be provided by using insulated copper wires/bare bus
bars of cross section equal to that of the bus bar or equal to half the size
of circuit load current carrying conductor, whichever is smaller.
All instrument cases shall be connected to the earth bus bar using 660 V
grade, single core 3.5 sq. mm. stranded, copper earthing conductor.
All non-current carrying metal and hinged doors shall be earthed to the
earth bar.
TESTS
Switchgear shall be subjected to following tests as per relevant standards

along with following tests:
Mechanical operation test.
H. V. test for one minute.
Insulation resistance at 500 V D.C. before/after one minute H.V. Test.
Testing of panels shall be as per following codes :
IS : 8623 (Part – I) 1977 for factory built assemblies of switch gear for
voltages upto and including 1000 VAC.
IS : 13947: 1993 Degree of protection.
IS : 5578 & 11353: 1985 Arrangement of bus bars
OVERALL FIRE FIGHTING SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
1. QUIPMENT PROTECTION:-
Keep all pipe and conduit openings closed by means of plugs or caps to
prevent the Entrance of foreign matter. Protect all piping, conduit, fixtures,

equipment or apparatus. Any such items damaged prior to final completion

or work shall be replaced at no expense to the Owner.
Accessibility:- The installation of valves, thermometers, cleanout fittings

and other indicating equipment or specialties requiring frequent reading,
adjustments, inspections, repairs, removal or replacement, shall be
conveniently and accessibly located with reference to the finished buildings.
Thermometers and gauges shall be installed so as to be easily read from
the floor.
2. EQUIPMENT & PIPING IDENTIFICATION:-
Pipe Markers:- Each piping system shall be provided with a name plate
properly clamped or stenciled. Letters are to be 80 mm. Plates on parallel
groups of pipes etc. shall be neatly lined up. Wording of lettering shall
correspond to the equipment designations used in piping legend and shall
be as approved. Name plate to be of G.I. sheets (1 mm thick on 25 x 25 x
3M angle) secured on to sheet metal and angle iron to be welded on main
pipes. In case of insulated pipe, the 25 x 25 mm angle bracket should be
projecting beyond insulation thickness. CI markers to be fixed as directed
in ground to indicate location of underground services.
Valve Register:- To be submitted in six copies along with location and

identification number in final drawing to be furnished by contractor.
3. MODE OF MEASUREMENT:-
All pipes shall be measured in linear length along the centre line is
completed. Fittings and specials shall be measured in position as a part of
the pipe. The rate shall include lead caulking or nut and bolt joints, etc.,
complete as specified in the respective items.
Same rate shall be applicable for pipes of same size and materials laid in
building at anylevel or floor.
All gate valves, ball valves, non-return valves, sluice valves etc. shall be
measured in numbers after excluding them from linear measurements.
The diameter of pipes and fittings mentioned in the specifications are the
normal diameter in all cases unless otherwise stated
4. TOOLS & MATERIALS & STORAGE:-

Surplus materials from the site shall be carted away by the Contractor
without any cost to the Employer and the storage space provided to the
Contractor shall be handed over to the employer clean and ready for
occupation.
5. GENERAL SERVICES:-
Any materials brought at site shall not be removed without the written
authority of the Owner and when the Contractor shall have received
payment in respect of any certificate in which it is stated that the valve of

any unfixed materials on the works has been taken into account, such
materials shall become the property of the Employer and the Contractor
shall be liable for any loss or damage thereto.
6. LABOUR
Workmen approved, by the Engineer for a particular trade only will be

allowed to do that work. Each worker will have an identity card issued by
the Contractor/Engineer with his photograph. While on duty he shall
punch the card. Daily list of workers & the jobs done by them will be
submitted to the Engineer. A person approved to do a particular job alone
will be allowed to work on it.
The contractor will have to get alignments of lines & locations of fittings
approved from the Engineer. He will have to do mockups (rough
assembly & sample assembly) well in time and get it approved from the
Engineer. Main work should be executed as per the finally approved
mockup. Cost of mockups should be included in the quoted rates.
Regular record of testing of systems should be maintained & all

measurements got checked before covering up. No item shall be covered
without the written confirmation of the Site Engineer.
7. COMMISSIONING & GUARANTEE
SCOPE OF WORK
Work under this section shall be executed without any additional cost. The
rates quoted in this tender shall be inclusive of the works given in this
section.
Contractor shall provide all tools, equipment, metering and testing devices
required for the purpose.
On award of work, Contractor shall submit a detailed proposal giving

methods of testing and gauging the performance of the equipment to be
supplied and installed under this contract.
All tests shall be made in the presence of the Architect or his representative
or any inspecting authority. At least five working days’ notice in writing shall
be given to the inspecting parties before performing any test.
Water flow rates of all equipment and in pipe lines through valves shall be
adjusted to design conditions. Complete results of adjustments shall be
recorded and submitted.
Contractor shall ensure proper balancing of the hydraulic system and for
the pipes / valves installed in his scope of work by regulating the flow rates
in the pipe line by valve operation. The contractor shall also provide
permanent Tee connection (with plug) in water supply lines for ease of
installing pressure gauge, temperature gauge & rotameters. Contractor

shall also supply all required pressure gauge, temperature gauge &
rotameters for system commissioning and balancing. The balancing shall be
to the satisfaction of Consultant / Project Manager.
Three copies of all test results shall be submitted to the Engineer in A4 size
sheet paper within two weeks after completion of the tests.
PRECOMMISSIONNIG
On completion of the installation of all pumps, piping, valves, pipe

connections, insulation etc. the Contractor shall proceed as follows:
Prior to start-up and hydraulic testing, the Contractor shall clean the entire
installation including all fitments and pipe work and the like after installation
and keep them in a new condition. All pumping systems shall be flushed
and drained at least once through to get rid of contaminating materials. All
pipes shall be rodded to ensure clearance of debris, cleaning and flushing
shall be carried out in sections as the installation becomes completed.
All strainers shall be inspected and cleaned out or replaced.
When the entire systems are reasonably clean, a pre-treatment chemical

shall be introduced and circulated for at least 8 hours. Warning signs shall
be provided at all outlets during pre-treatment. The pre-treatment chemical
shall:
Remove oil, grease and foreign residue from the pipe work and fittings;
Pre-condition the metal surfaces to resist reaction with water or air.
Establish an initial protective film;
After pre-treatment, the system shall be drained and refilled with fresh
water and left until the system is put into operation.
Details and procedures of the pre-treatment shall be submitted to the
Architect for approval.
Check all clamps, supports and hangers provided for the pipes.
Check all the equipment, piping and valves coming under hot water system
and operate each and every valve on the system to see if the valves are
functioning properly. Thereafter conduct & hydro test of the system as for
(b) above.
Fill up pipes with water and apply hydrostatic pressure to the system as
given in the relevant section of the specification. If any leakage is found,
rectify the same and retest the pipes.
Fire Protection System
Check all hydrant valves by opening and closing : any valve found to be
open shall be closed
Check all the piping under hydro test.
Check that all suction and delivery connections are properly made for all
pump sets.
Check rotation of each motor after decoupling and correct the same if
required.

Test run each pump set.

All pump sets shall be run continuously for 8 hours (if required with
temporary piping back to the tank).
Commissioning and Testing
Pressurize the fire hydrant system by running the jockey pump and after it
attains the shutoff pressure of the pump, then Open bypass valve and allow
the pressure to drop in the system. Check that the jockey pump cuts-in and
cuts-out at the preset pressure. If necessary adjust the pressure switch for
the jockey pump. Close by-pass valve. Open hydrant valve and allow the
water to below into the fire water tank in order to avoid wastage of water.
The main fire pump shall cut-in at the preset pressure and shall not cutout
automatically on reaching the normal line pressure. The main fire pump
shall stop only by manual push button. However the jockey pump shall cut-
out as soon as the main pump starts,
Switch off the main fire pump and test check the diesel engine driven pump
in the same manner as the electrically driven pump,
When the fire pumps have been checked for satisfactory working on
automatic controls, open fire hydrant valves simultaneously and allow the
hose pipes to discharge water into the fire tank to avoid wastage.
Check each landing valve, male and female couplings and branch pipes, for
compatibility with each other. Any fitting which is found to be incompatible
and do not fit into the other properly shall be replace by the Contractor.
Each landing valve shall also be checked by opening and closing under
pressure
8. STATUTORY AUTHORITIES' TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
As and when notified in writing or instructed by the Architect, the Contractor

shall submit shop drawing and attend all tests and inspections carried out
by Local Fire Authorities, Water Authority and other Statutory Authorities,
and shall forthwith execute free of charge any rectification work ordered by
the Architect as a result of such tests and inspections where these indicate
non-compliance with Statutory Regulations. Some of these tests may take
place after the issue of Practical Completion of the Main Contract and the
Contractor shall make all allowances in this respect.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the submission of all necessary

forms and shop drawings to the Statutory Authorities which shall conform
in layout to the latest architectural plans submitted to and kept by these
Authorities.
The submission shall comply with the requirements set forth in the current
Codes of Practice and circular letters of the Statutory Authorities. The shop

drawings to be submitted shall be forwarded to the Architect for checking

before submission.
The Contractor shall allow for at least two submissions of complete sets of
shop drawings to the Authorities, one to be made within six months after
the award of the Contract but not less than six weeks before the inspection.
The Architect may at his discretion instruct the Contractor for additional
submissions to the Local Authorities whenever necessary.
The Contractor shall notify the Architect at least seven days in advance of
his application for local Authority tests and inspections. On receipt of a
confirmed date for test and inspection the Contractor shall inform the
Architect without delay.
9. FINAL ACCEPTANCE TESTS
Following commissioning and inspection of the entire installation, and prior

to issue of the Completion Certificate, the Contractor shall carry out final
acceptance tests in accordance with a programme to be agreed with the
Architect.
Should the results of the acceptance tests show that plant, systems and/or
equipment fail to perform to the efficiencies or other performance figures
as given in this Specification, the Contractor shall adjust, modify and if
necessary replace the equipment without further payment in order that the
required performance is obtained.
Where acceptance tests are required by the relevant Authorities having

jurisdiction, these tests shall be carried out by the Contractor prior to the
issue of Completion Certificate to the acceptance of the Authorities.
10. REJECTION OF INSTALLATION / PLANT
Any item of plant or system or component which fails to comply with the
requirements of this Specification in any respect whatsoever at any stage
of manufacture, test, erection or on completion at site may be rejected by
the Architect either in whole or in part as he considers
necessary/appropriate. Adjustment and/or modification work as required by
the Architect so as to comply with the Authority's requirements and the
intent of the Specification shall be carried out by the Contractor at his own
expense and to the satisfaction of the Authority/Architect.
After works have been accepted, the Contractor may be required to carry
out assist in carrying out additional performance tests as reasonably
required by the Architect/Employer.

11. WARRANTY AND HANDOVER
The Contractor shall warrant that all plant, materials and equipment
supplied and all workmanship performed by him to be free from defects of
whatsoever nature before handover to the Owner.
HANDING OVER OF DOCUMENTS
All testing and commissioning shall be done by the Contractor to the entire
satisfaction of the Owner’s site representative and all testing and
commissioning documents shall be handed over to the Owner’s site
representative.
The Contractor shall also hand over all maintenance and operation manuals,
all certificates and all other documentation as per the terms of the contract to
the Owner’s site representative.
12. PIPE COLOUR CODE:
SI.No. Pipe Lines Ground / Base Color First Second

Color Color
Band Band
1 Fire Post Office Red
System

SUB HEAD:19
ELECTRICAL WORK

ELECTRICAL MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
SUMMARY PAGE
I. Electrical Works
_______________________________________________________
A. Specification
Chapter-0 General
Chapter-1 Wiring
Chapter-2 MCBs, MCCBs, DBs
Chapter-3 Cables & End Terminations
Chapter-4 Cable trays & Raceways
Chapter-5 Earthing & Lightning protection
Chapter-6 UPS
Chapter-7 Civil & Misc. Works
Chapter-8 Fixtures
Chapter-9 LT Panels, Switchgears & Meters

CHAPTER-0
GENERAL
A. PURPOSE
This document describes the detailed specification of all the items used under the
electrical subhead of Tender BOQ along with the basic guidelines for installation,
testing and commissioning of all the listed items / Jobs described under this tender
package. This document also describes the list of relevant codes and standards to
be followed for respective items. Contractor needs to ensure that the items
specifications and guidelines laid under this part of the tender document shall be
strictly adhered.
B. GENERAL SYSTEM CHARACTERISRICS
System Ambient : 45 degree Celsius
System Voltage :
(a) 415V (Three Phase Four wire for feeder loads )
(b) 230V (Single Phase loads)
(c) 415V (Three phase three wire motor loads)
Voltage Variations : +/- 5%
System Frequency : 50 Hertz
Frequency Variations : +/- 3%
Permissible voltage drop (at each feeding bus) : 3%
Permissible voltage drop (for motors) : 5% at starting and 3% otherwise.

CHAPTER-1
WIRING
A. SCOPE
The scope of this section comprises the supply, delivery, erection, testing and
commissioning of following:
1. Wiring for power and UPS outlets, heavy duty sockets, industrial plugs.
2. Wiring from distribution boards to different switchboards and from there
onwards to individual points like light points, Bell Buzzers, Fan points, small
exhaust fan points etc for all internal areas.
3. Switchboards, power plugs and its accessories like gang box, front plate,
switches etc.
4. Wires and its accessories like conduits, Outlet boxes, junction boxes, pull-
through boxes etc. but excluding metal boxes if any, provided with
switchboards for loose wires/conduit terminations.
5. Ceiling rose, Connectors, Holders etc. for light points, Fan points, Bell
buzzers, small exhaust fan points etc for all internal areas.
6. Conduit/channel as the case may be, accessories for the same and wiring
cables between the switch box and the point outlet, loop protective earthing of
each fan/ light fixture.
7. All fixing accessories such as clips, screws, Phil plug, raw plug etc. as
required.
8. Metal or PVC switch boxes (as specified) for control switches, regulators,
sockets etc, recessed or surface type, and phenolic laminated sheet covers
over the same.
9. Control switch or MCB, as specified.
10. 3 pin or 6 pin socket, ceiling rose or connector as required. (2 pin and 5
pin socket outlet shall not be permitted.)
11. Connections to ceiling rose, connector, socket outlet, lamp holder, switch
etc.
12. Bushed conduit or porcelain tubing where wiring cables pass through wall
etc. However In areas where false ceiling are provided, termination of wires
should beat the fittings. Flexible conduits from ceiling junction box to the
fittings shall be provided duly coupled at both ends. This shall be included
within the scope of point wiring.)
13. Interconnecting wiring between switches within the switch box on the
same circuit.
B. CODES AND STANDARDS

The relevant sections of Indian Standard Specifications as more particularly stated
herein and broadly to all the codes, status and regulations as applicable shall be
strictly enforced and adhered to. More particularly following codes should be
strictly followed.
1. National Electrical Code - 2008

2. National Building Code - 2005
3. IS: 694 - Specification for PVC insulated cables for working voltage up to and
including 1100 volts.
4. IS: 732 - Code of practice for Electrical Wiring Installation.

5. IS: 8130 - Specification for Conductors for Insulated Electric Cables & Flexible
cords.
6. IS: 9938 -Recommended Colors for PVC Insulation for LF Wires and Cables.
7. IS: 3043 - Code Of Practice of Earthing.
8. IS: 3202 - Climate proofing of Electrical Work.
9. IS: 2509 of 1973 - Rigid non-metallic conduits for Electrical Work
C. DEFINATIONS
Sub-Mains wiring: Sub mains wiring is defined as wiring from distribution boards
to respective switchboards (including the first switchboard wired from DB and
switchboards looped with this first switch board) and power outlets for all internal
areas. Wiring for DB controlled light points are also considered in sub-mains
wiring.
Point wiring: Point wiring is defined as wiring from Switchboards to individual

points like light points, Bell Buzzers, Fan points, small exhaust fan points etc for
all internal areas.
Group A: It is a type of classification for Points measured under 3.4.3 on unit

basis. Group ‘A’, is for point wiring for type I, type II and type III residential
quarters and hostels.
Group B: It is a type of classification for Points measured under 3.4.3 on unit

basis. Group ‘B’, is for point wiring for type IV and above type of residential
quarters and barracks.
Group C: It is a type of classification for Points measured under 3.4.3 on unit

basis. Group ‘C’ is for all types of non-residential buildings such as offices,
hospitals, laboratories, educational institutions, libraries etc.
Master Telephone Sockets: For use as the first socket outlet on a direct
exchange.
Secondary Telephone Sockets: For use as extension sockets when connected

on the same line as a Master Socket.
D. SPECIFICATION OF ITEMS
DSR Item no. 1.14.2: Wiring of circuit / sub-main wiring along with
earth wire with the following sizes of FRLS PVC insulated copper
conductor, single core cable in surface / recessed medium
class PVC conduit as required.
(a) 2 x 2.5 sq.mm. + 1 x 2.5 sq.mm. earth wire.
DSR Item no. 1.14.3: (b) 2 x 4 sq.mm. + 1 x 4 sq.mm. earth wire
DSR Item No. 1.14.4: (c) 2 x 6 sq.mm. + 1 x 6 sq.mm. earth wire.
1. Wires:
The wires shall be made from bright electrolytic annealed bare copper conductor
with strands as specified under IS:694. Solid conductor wires shall not be
accepted. The wires shall be PVC (Poly vinyl chloride) insulated confirming to BIS

specifications and shall be specified by the manufacturer for working voltage up

to and including 1100 volts. The total gauge of wire shall be strictly in accordance
with what has been specified in IS:694.The wires shall be FRLS ( Fire resistant low
smoke ) with appropriate and acceptable mechanical strength so that the
insulation does not gets damaged while pulling these wires in conduit. Unless
otherwise specified following sizes of wires shall be used for different applications:
(a) Wires from DB to Lighting switchboard (along with internal loop within
such switchboard) shall be 2 x 2.5 sq.mm. + 1 x 2.5 sq.mm. earth wire.
(b) Wires from DB to 6A switchboard (along with internal loop within such
switchboard) shall be 2 x 2.5 sq.mm. + 1 x 2.5 sq.mm. earth wire.
(c)Wires from DB to 16A& 6/16A switchboard (along with internal loop within
such switchboard) shall be 2 x 4 sq.mm. + 1 x 4 sq.mm. earth wire.
(d)Wires from DB to Industrial sockets shall be 2 x 6 sq.mm. + 1 x 6 sq.mm. earth
wire.
2. Thimbles/lugs:
The wires shall be terminated with the help of crimping lugs at both the terminals.
These lugs shall be non-insulated made of tin plated copper, suitable for
termination of 1.5 sqmm / 2.5 sqmm / 4 sqmm / 6 sqmm of copper wires. The
lugs shall be suitable for 1100V and the min temperature rating for these lugs
shall be 150 degree Celsius. The lugs shall be pin type with pin designed in such
a fashion to prevent damage to the wire from over tightening and ensure a reliable
electrical connection. The lugs shall have good wire contact and good tensile
strength. The lugs shall ensure quick and easy wire insertion.
3. PVC conduits and accessories:
All non-metallic conduit pipes and accessories shall be of suitable material

complying with IS 2509 : 1973 and IS 3419 : 1989 for rigid conduits and IS 9537
(Part 5) : 2000 for flexible conduits. The interior of the conduits shall be free from
obstructions. The rigid conduit pipes shall be ISI marked. The conduits shall be
circular in cross-section. The conduits shall be designated by their nominal outside
diameter. No non-metallic conduit less than 20 mm in diameter shall be used. The
conduit wiring system shall be complete in all respect including accessories. Rigid
conduit accessories shall be normally of grip type while flexible conduit accessories
shall be of threaded type. Bends, couplers etc. shall be solid type in recessed type
of works, and may be solid or inspection type as required, in surface type of works.
Saddles for fixing conduits shall be heavy gauge non-metallic type with base. For
all sizes of conduit, the size of clamping rod shall be 4.5 mm (7 SWG) diameter.
All the conduits shall be FR (Fire resistant) type.
The minimum width and the thickness of the ordinary clips or girder clips shall be
as per Table below.
Size of Conduit Width Thickness
20 mm & 25 mm 19 mm 20 SWG (0.9144 mm)
32 mm & above 25 mm 18 SWG (1.219 mm)

MR 19.001: Wiring of circuit / sub-main wiring along with earth

wire with the following sizes of FRLS PVC insulated copper conductor,
single core cable inside existing metallic adaptable raceways as required.
(a)2 x 2.5 sq.mm. + 1 x 2.5 sq.mm. earth wire
MR 19.002: (b)2 x 4 sq.mm. + 1 x 4 sq.mm. earth wire
MR 19.003: (c)2 x 6 sq.mm. + 1 x 6 sq.mm. earth wire
1. Wires :
with strands as specified under IS:694.Solid conductor wires shall not be
(a) Wires from DB to Lighting switchboard (along with internal loop within
such switchboard) shall be 2 x 2.5 sq.mm. + 1 x 2.5 sq.mm. earth wire.
(b) Wires from DB to 6A switchboard (along with internal loop within such
switchboard) shall be 2 x 2.5 sq.mm. + 1 x 2.5 sq.mm. earth wire.
(c)Wires from DB to 16A& 6/16A switchboard (along with internal loop within
such switchboard) shall be 2 x 4 sq.mm. + 1 x 4 sq.mm. earth wire.
(d)Wires from DB to Industrial sockets shall be 2 x 6 sq.mm. + 1 x 6 sq.mm. earth
wire.
2. Thimbles/lugs :
These lugs shall be non insulated made of tin plated copper, suitable for
DSR Item No. 1.21.2: Supplying and fixing of following sizes of medium
class PVC conduit along with accessories in surface/recess including
cutting the wall and making good the same in case of recessed conduit
as required.
(a) : 25 mm
DSR Item No. 1.21.3: (b) : 32 mm
DSR Item No. 1.21.4: (c) : 40 mm
DSR Item No. 1.21.5: (d) : 50 mm
1. PVC conduits and accessories :


circular in cross-section. The conduits shall be designated
by their nominal outside diameter. No non-metallic conduit less than 20 mm in
diameter shall be used. The conduit wiring system shall be complete in all respect
including accessories. Rigid conduit accessories shall be normally of grip type while
flexible conduit accessories shall be of threaded type. Bends, couplers etc. shall
be solid type in recessed type of works, and may be solid or inspection type as
required, in surface type of works. Saddles for fixing conduits shall be heavy gauge
non-metallic type with base. For all sizes of conduit, the size of clamping rod shall
be 4.5 mm (7 SWG) diameter. All the conduits shall be FR (Fire resistant ) type.
as per Table below.
20 mm & 25 mm 19 mm 20 SWG (0.9144 mm)
32 mm & above 25 mm 18 SWG (1.219 mm)
DSR Item No. 1.20.2: Supplying and fixing of following sizes of steel
conduit along with accessories in surface/recess including painting in
case of surface conduit, or cutting the wall and making good the same in
case of recessed conduit as required.
(a) : 25 mm
DSR Item No. 1.20.3: (b) : 32 mm
DSR Item No. 1.20.4: (c) : 40 mm
DSR Item No. 1.20.5: (d) : 50 mm
1. Metallic conduits and accessories :
All rigid conduit pipes shall be of steel and be ISI marked. The wall thickness shall
be not less than 1.6 mm (16 SWG) for conduits up to 32 mm dia and not less than
2 mm (14 SWG) for conduits above 32 mm dia. These shall be solid drawn or
reamed by welding, and finished with galvanized or stove enameled surface. No
steel conduit less than 20 mm in diameter shall be used. The conduit wiring system
shall be complete in all respects, including their accessories. All conduit
accessories shall be of threaded type, and under no circumstances pin grip type
or clamp grip type accessories shall be used.
Bends, couplers etc. shall be solid type in recessed type of works and may be solid
or inspection type as required, in surface type of works. Saddles for surface
conduit work on wall shall not be less than 0.55 mm (24gauges) for conduits up
to 25 mm dia and not less than 0.9 mm (20 gauges)for larger diameter. The
corresponding widths shall be 19 mm & 25 mm. The minimum width and the
thickness of girder clips used for fixing conduits to steel joists, and clamps shall
be as per Table below.

20 mm & 25 mm 19 mm 20 SWG (0.9144 mm)
32 mm & above 25 mm WG (1.219 mm)
DSR Item No. 1.19 : Supplying and drawing Co-axial TV cable RG-6
grade,0.7mm solid copper conductor PE insulated, shielded with fine
tinned copper braid and protected with PVC sheath in the existing
surface/recessed steel/PVC conduit as required.
TV WIRING AND ACCESSORIES:
• Testing of each TV outlet for proper signal level as per system specifications.
• TV cables shall be run in heavy gauge fire retardant PVC conduits and
accessories.
• TV cable laying Coaxial Cable runs shall be in continuous lengths. No splice shall
be permitted in any conduit run. Cables shall be installed without sharp bends and
the minimum bending radius specified by the manufacturer shall be adhered to.
The coaxial cable runs shall be tagged as to function and destination. Each cable
shall be left with a loop of approximately 300 mm at the traps and amplifiers to
facilitate future changes.
• Coaxial cable connectors shall be solder less with 75 Ohm impedance and be
designed for the specific cable being used. All connections shall be made using a
crimp tool designed consistent with connector construction and intended use.
• The coaxial cables should be with PE dielectric and PVC jacket suitable for
wideband type with operation up to 860 MHz capability. RG – 6 grade Cable shall
be used. TV outlets shall be matching with the modular switch sockets.
• The distribution system shall furnish signal to all wired TV outlets. The signal
strength of each TV outlet shall be minimum of 65 dB uv across 75 ohms.
• The maximum amplitude variations at system outlets between distributed
channels shall not be more than 12 dB over the entire range and not more than 3
dB between adjacent Channels visual carries.
• The Amplitude response as a function of frequency for the entire system shall
be such that the variation in gain over any television channel is not more than +/1
2 dB relative to that at vision carrier. Frequency and the gain shall not vary by
more than 0.5 dB with in any frequency range of 0.5 MHz.
The TV outlet shall have IEC Male Plug fixed for mating with IEC Female Plug of
Connecting Lead.
• The outlet shall have either a screw clamp connection or “F” Connector
connections for connecting In-house Cable to Room Outlet.
• The outlet shall provide DC isolation for center conductor between TV Set and
Distribution network.
DSR Item no. 1.53 : Supplying and drawing of UTP 4 pair CAT6 LAN cable
in the existing surface / recessed steel/PVC conduit as required.
CAT-6, 4 pair, UTP Cable:

Cable shall be 4 Pairs Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) Cable made up of solid bare
copper and grey in color. The conductor dia shall be 0.560mm nominal, 23 AWG

with insulation diameter 0.970mm Nominal. Insulation used shall be HD-PE with
jacket material PVC UL94V-0/LSZH. The overall diameter of cable shall be 6mm
Nominal with PE Central Cross separator.
MR 19.004 RG-6: Supplying and fixing shuttered type, UTP CAT6

compatible, RJ-45 data connectors suitable for fixing in existing 1M (75
mm x 75 mm) modular plate and complete as required.
RJ-45 data outlet:
RJ -45 data outlet shall comply with AS/NZS 3080:2003, ISO/IEC 11801 2002 and
ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B Series Connecting Hardware Standards, and shall also be
compatible with CAT-5e products. Outlet shall be UL 94V-O rated, and shall accept
solid 22-24 AWG diameter conductors. Colour shall be universal and Port shall be
based on lead frame technology which eliminates the possibility of PCB failures.
The port shall be compatible be used in multi-user telecommunication outlet
applications (MUTO). Port shall be suitable to get housed in (75 mm x 75 mm) 1
Module plate with clear IDC caps that allow for termination verification and assist
in cable retention.
DSR Item No. 1.27.1: Supplying and fixing following size / modules, GI
box along with modular base and cover plate for modular switches in
recess etc as required.
(a) : 1 or 2 Module (75mm x 75mm)
DSR Item No. 1.27.2: (b) : 3 Module (100mm x 75mm)
DSR Item No. 1.27.3: (c) : 4 Module (125mm x 75mm)
DSR Item No. 1.27.4: (d) : 6 Module (200mm x 75mm)
DSR Item No. 1.27.5: (e) : 8 Module (125mm x 125mm)
DSR Item No. 1.27.6: (f) : 12 Module (200mm x 150mm)
1. Modular GI Box:
All the back boxes used shall be concealed GI type with loop in loop out holes
marked which shall be removed at the time of jetting conduit inside the same.
Size of such holes shall be suitable to take a 32mm diameter conduits. All such
back box shall be made from pre-galvanized GI sheet metal with a wall thickness
of 1.1mm and confirming to BS:4662:2006. All such back box shall be provided
with Brass Earth terminals and adjustable lugs. The metallic box shall be duly
painted with anti-corrosive paint before erection. An earth terminal with stud and
2 metal washers and terminal block shall be provided in each back box for
termination of protective conductors and for connection to socket outlet/metallic
body of fan regulator etc. A metal strip shall be welded/screwed, to the metal box
as support if tumbler type of control switches, sockets and/or fan regulators in
flush pattern. Clear depth of the box shall not be less than 60 mm and this shall
be increased suitably to accommodate mounting of fan regulators in flush pattern.
2. Modular Base and cover plate:

The front plate shall have smooth surface from both the side and shall be properly
matching the fixing alignment. Perfect alignment shall be maintained while fixing
of the back boxes. The color shall be as per the architect’s directives.
DSR Item No. 1.24.4: Supplying and fixing following modular switch /
socket on existing modular plate and switch box including connections
but excluding modular plate etc as required.
(a) : 3 pin 5/6 amp socket outlet
DSR Item No. 1.24.5: (b) : 6 pin 15/16 amp socket outlet
MR 19.005: (c) : Universal 6/16 amp switch socket outlet
DSR Item No. 1.24.1: (d) : 5/6 amps switch
DSR Item No. 1.24.3: (e) : 15/16 amp switch
DSR Item No. 1.24.6: (f) : Telephone socket outlet
DSR Item No. 1.24.7: (g): TV antenna socket outlet
DSR Item No. 1.24.8: (h): Bell Push
MR 19.006: (i): 25A switch and socket
MR 19.007: (i): 32A switch
1. Switch - Socket Outlets :
Wall receptacle (switch /sockets) outlets shall been closed type flush mounted
made up of superior grade GE plastic polycarbonate with high mechanical electrical
and thermal properties, suitable for 240 volts, 50Hz, ac. All switches socket outlets
and fan regulators shall be fixed on metal strips which shall be screwed / welded
to the box. All switches shall be in accordance with IS 3854:1997. The terminals
and contacts shall be bimetallic silver contacts designed to withstand high overload
conditions, high quality brass and copper contacts shall be used for fixed / moving
contacts and there shall be a sufficient clearance of minimum 5mm between fixed
and moving contacts to break the arc during switch operation. The terminals shall
also be made from high quality brass. All sockets shall comply IS 1293: 2005.All
receptacle outlets shall be shuttered type. Three/Six pin Universal type sockets
shall be used and these shall be mounted inside the switch boxes on adjustable
flat M S strips / plates with tapped holes and brass machine screws, leaving ample
space at the back and sides for accommodating wires. 5pin socket outlets will not
be permitted. The third pin shall be connected to earth through protective (loop
earthing) conductor. 2 pin or 5 pin sockets shall not be permitted to be used.
Conductors connecting electrical appliances with socket outlets shall be of flexible
type with an earthing conductor for connection to the earth terminal of plug and
the metallic body of the electrical appliance. All such outlets shall be tested for an
impact test value of 1NM, through a hammer stroke from a distance of 270mm
from such outlets. The universal 6/16A sockets shall be capable to take the plugs
for both 6A and 16A. No adapter shall be permitted.

2. Telephone Socket Outlets :
Telephone sockets used shall be RJ-11 suitable for all kind of telephones and cable
to take both paired cable and CAT-7 / CAT6e / CAT-6 wires. The operating
temperature for such receptacles shall be -20 degree C to +60 degree C and IP-
20 rated. Master telephone outlets shall be equipped with surge protection devices
and ringing capacitors.
3. TV antenna socket outlet :
TV sockets used shall be suitable for all kind of TV and coaxial cable to take
relevant coaxial wires. The terminations shall be single screw type with fully
enclosed PCBs with angled connectors provided. The operating temperature for
such receptacles shall be -20 degree C to +60 degree C and IP-20 rated.
DSR Item No. 1.38: Supplying and fixing call bell / buzzer suitable for
single phase, 230 volts, complete as required.
1. Call Bells or Buzzer :
The call bells or buzzers shall confirm to IS : 2268 : 1994 and shall be so
constructed that, in normal use, there will be no electrical or mechanical failure
that might impair compliance with the standard. The insulation shall not be
damaged and contact and connections shall not work loose as a result of heating,
vibration etc. Moreover, overload protection, if any, shall not operate under
normal running condition. The call bell or buzzer shall withstand the test of electric
strength as given in 16.4 of IS 302-l ( 1979). The call bells and buzzers shall
operate satisfactorily at the over voltage and under voltage as specified below:
Rated Voltage Under Voltage Over Voltage
Single value Rated voltage + 10 Rated voltage - 10

percent percent
Range of Voltage Maximum voltage of Minimum voltage of the
the range+ 10 percent range - 10 percent
DSR Item No. 1.26: Supplying and fixing modular blanking plate on the
existing modular plate & switch box excluding modular plate as required.
1. Blanking Plate :
Blanking plates shall be modular type single module made up of polycarbonate

with high mechanical electrical and thermal properties, the minimum thickness
shall be 1.7 mm and all such blanking plates shall be suitable for fixing in the
existing switchboard. The dimensions of these blanking plate shall be such that
there remains no gap between the blank plate and the front plate of the
switchboard.
DSR Item No. 1.25: Supplying and fixing stepped type electronic fan
regulator on the existing modular plate switch box including connections
but excluding modular plate etc. as required.

1. Electronic fan regulator:
Step Type Electronic regulators should be used instead of resistance type

regulators for controlling speed of fans. The fan regulator must be modular type
with steps 1 to 5 for speed regulation of fan and another separate step for off. The
fan regulator shall be engraved with good quality lettering showing the step range
1 to 5 and “OFF” step. The color shall be as per the architect’s directives.
DSR Item No. 2.18: Supplying and fixing 20 amp, 240 Volts, SPN
industrial type, socket outlet with 2 pole and earth, metal enclosed plug
top along with 20 amps "C curve", SP , MCB, in sheet steel enclosure, on
surface or in recess, with chained metal cover for socket outlet and
complete with connections , testing commissioning etc. as required.
1. Industrial Socket:
Industrial sockets shall comply to IEC : 60309.1.2002, with minimum IP rating of

IP42 or specified otherwise in tender drawings and BOQ. All such sockets shall be
splash proof. However where-ever specified in drawings these may be water
sealed type sockets. The marking and dimensions shall be as per standards. The
plugs shall be provided with suitable earthing terminal and electrical interlocking
such that the lug doesn't comes out of the socket till the supply is there in plug.
Accessories with earthing contact shall be provided with an earthing terminal.
Metal-clad fixed accessories with an internal earthing terminal can, in addition, be
provided with an external earthing terminal, which, except for flush type socket-
outlets, shall be visible from the outside. Earthing contacts shall be directly and
reliably connected to the earthing terminals, except that the earthing terminal of
socket-outlets incorporated in the output circuit of an isolating transformer shall
not be connected. Accessible metal parts of accessories with earthing contact,
which may become live in the event of an insulation fault, shall be reliably
connected to the internal earthing terminal(s) by construction. Accessories with
enclosures of rubber or thermoplastic material, and parts of elastomeric such as
sealing rings and gaskets, shall be sufficiently resistant to ageing. The construction
of such Industrial plugs shall comply with IEC: 60309.1.2002. All such industrial
plugs shall be suitable for 415V/240V, 3Phase/1Phase, 50Hz ac supply as specified
in tender drawings and BOQ for the mentioned current ratings.
2. Miniature Circuit Breaker (MCB):
MCB should be trip free, quick make and quick break type. MCB should be suitable
for interchangeable line/ load connections. The MCB shall have minimum 10 KA
breaking capacity with (Ics=Icu=10kA), where Ics is service breaking capacity
and Icu is ultimate breaking capacity defined as per IS-13947. MCBs shall have
ISI mark as per IS8828-1996 (IEC60898).The MCB shall be suitable for
temperature up to 50 deg C without de-rating. All outgoing feeder MCB shall be
provided with clip on type auxiliary contact to interface. Terminal of MCB shall be
provided with insulated separators between the phases and also on both end. The
size and design of the terminal should be adequate to accommodate aluminum/
copper cable required for the rated current of the MCB. It should confirm to current
limiting principle class –3 to ensure extremely low let through energy (I²t) under
fault conditions. It should have ‘two position’ DIN clip ensuring easy mounting and

removal. It should confirm C.E. Marking (confirmation to European standards),

based upon the tripping characteristics the MCB shall be described as B, C or D
curves and the same must be mentioned in bold upon the MCB. All MCB shall have
a mention of Full load current, short circuit current, utility voltage, frequency,
tripping characteristics (B, C, and D), basic 3 line diagram. The poles of MCBs shall
have minimum self-resistance as per latest IEC standards.
3. Sheet Steel Enclosure:
The enclosure shall be made from sheet steel of 1.6 mm thickness and of required
size and dimensions to accommodate the industrial socket in required manner as
directed by Engineer-in-charge. All such enclosures shall be dust / vermin proof,
corrosion resistive and as be IP rated as specified in tender drawings / Tender
BOQ. All such enclosure shall be provided with a chained metal cover for the socket
outlets.
DSR Item No. 2.20: Supplying and fixing 30 amp, 415 Volts, TPN
top along with 30 amps "C curve", TP , MCB, in sheet steel enclosure, on

connected to the internal earthing terminal(s)by construction. Accessories with


outlets.
MR 19.008 : Supplying and fixing 32 amp, 240 Volts, SPN industrial type,
socket outlet with 2 pole and earth, metal enclosed plug top along with
32 amps "C curve", SP , MCB, in sheet steel enclosure, on surface or in
recess, with chained metal cover for socket outlet and complete with
connections , testing commissioning etc. as required.

of such Industrial plugs shall comply with IEC : 60309.1.2002. All such industrial

copper cable required for the rated current of the MCB.It should confirm to current
outlets.
MR 19.009 : Supplying and fixing 63 amp, 240 Volts, SPN industrial type,
63 amps "C curve", SP , MCB, in sheet steel enclosure, on surface or in


connected to the internal earthing terminal(s) by construction. Accessories with
outlets.
DSR Item No. 2.17 : Supplying and fixing TP sheet steel enclosure on
surface/ recess along with 16/25/32amps 415 volts "C" curve TP MCB
complete with connections, testing and commissioning etc. as required.


outlets.
MR 19.010 : Supplying and fixing 40 amp, 415 Volts, TPN industrial type,
40 amps "C curve", TP , MCB, in sheet steel enclosure, on surface or in


outlets.
MR 19.011 : Supplying and fixing 63 amp, 415 Volts, waterproof TPN

top along with 63 amps "C curve", TP , MCB, in sheet steel enclosure, on



of such Industrial plugs shall comply with IEC : 60309.1.2002. All such industrial
plugs shall be suitable for 415V/240, 3Phase/1Phase, 50Hz ac supply as specified
outlets.
MR 19.012 : Supplying and fixing IP 66 rated adaptor with transparent

flap suitable for any 3 modules switch/socket assembly complete with
fixing, making drills , concealing etc as required but excluding the cost of
switch/socket.
MR 19.013 : Supply and installation of 3 Module pop-up type flush

mounting boxes complete as required, but excluding switch, sockets.

mounting boxes complete as required, but excluding switch, sockets.

mounting boxes complete as required , but excluding switch, sockets.
1. Adapter:

The adapter shall be used to for housing industrial sockets or any switch/socket
assembly of 3/4/8 module. The adapter shall be made from high quality
polycarbonate and the transparent flap shall be made up of PVC/Fiber with good
thermal and mechanical strength. The complete assembly shall be press fit type.
MR 19.016 : Supply and installation of floor mounted Ega box for housing
2 x 6A switch socket, 1 x 6/16A switch socket, 1 x data & 1 TV / Telephone
point boxes complete as required. The cost of switch socket and data and
TV / Telephone point and their receptacles shall be paid separately under
relevant items.
Ega Box
Boxes and fittings are indicated on Drawings in approximate locations unless

dimensioned. Adjust box location up to accommodate intended purpose. Floor
boxes shall be totally flush with the adjacent floor finish on all sides.
The floor box shall be provided with a quick-fix, metal base box and Opening lid
to an angle of 30°, with integrated cable outlets, can be installed in two positions
and can easily be removed during installation and use. The lid can be fitted with
a floor material insert.
Box can be screw fitted to floor tile by using holes in mounting frame (If hole in
tile is outside maximum tolerance use self-tapping screws of required thickness
as per recommendation of OEM). Base shall be detachable from mounting frame
by releasing screws which enables the base to be connected to the services and
left under floor tiles for protection until the carpet, lid and trim are fitted Cable
routers can also be removed.
DSR Item No. 1.10.3: Wiring for light point / fan point / exhaust fan point
/ call bell point with 1.5 sq.mm. FRLS PVC insulated copper conductor,
single core cable in surface / recessed medium class PVC conduit, with
modular switch, modular plate, suitable GI box and earthing the point
with 1.5 sqmm FRLS PVC insulated copper conductor single core cable
etc. as required.
(a) Group C
1. Wires :
with strands as specified under IS:694.Solid conductor wires shall not be
2. Thimbles/lug :
These lugs shall be non-insulated made of tin plated copper, suitable for


as per Table below.
20 mm & 25 mm 19 mm 20 SWG (0.9144 mm)
32 mm & above 25 mm 18 SWG (1.219 mm)
4. Modular GI Box:
be increased suitably to accommodate mounting of fan regulators in flush pattern.

6. Switches:
Wall receptacle (switch) shall been closed type flush mounted made up of superior
grade GE plastic polycarbonate with high mechanical electrical and thermal
properties, suitable for 240 volts ,50Hz,ac. All switches shall be fixed on metal
strips which shall be screwed / welded to the box. All switches shall be in
accordance with IS 3854 :1997. The terminals and contacts shall be bimetallic
silver contacts designed to withstand high overload conditions, high quality brass
and copper contacts shall be used for fixed / moving contacts and there shall be
a sufficient clearance of minimum 5mm between fixed and moving contacts to
break the arc during switch operation. The terminals shall also be made from high
quality brass. All such outlets shall be tested for an impact test value of 1NM,
through a hammer stroke from a distance of 270mm from such outlets.
DSR Item No. 1.11: Wiring for twin controlled light point with 1.5 sq.mm.
FRLS PVC insulated copper conductor, single core cable in surface /
recessed medium class PVC conduit, 2 way modular switch, modular
plate, suitable GI box and earthing the point with 1.5 sqmm FRLS PVC
insulated copper conductor single core cable etc. as required.
(a) Group C.
1. Wires :
with strands as specified under IS:694. Solid conductor wires shall not be
otherwise specified following sizes of wires shall be used for different applications
2. Thimbles/lugs:
These lugs shall be non insulated made of tin plated copper, suitable for


as per Table below.
20 mm & 25 mm 19 mm 20 SWG (0.9144 mm)
32 mm & above 25 mm 18 SWG (1.219 mm)
4. Modular GI Box:
suitably to accommodate mounting of fan regulators in flush pattern.
6. Switches:
Wall receptacle (switch) shall be enclosed type flush mounted made up of superior
grade GE plastic polycarbonate with high mechanical electrical and thermal
properties, suitable for 240 volts, 50Hz, ac. All switches shall be fixed on metal
strips which shall be screwed / welded to the box. All switches shall be in
accordance with IS 3854 :1997. The terminals and contacts shall be bimetallic
silver contacts designed to withstand high overload conditions, high quality brass
and copper contacts shall be used for fixed / moving contacts and there shall be

a sufficient clearance of minimum 5mm between fixed and moving contacts to

break the arc during switch operation. The terminals shall also be made from high
quality brass. All such outlets shall be tested for an impact test value of 1NM,
through a hammer stroke from a distance of 270mm from such outlets.
7. Ega Box
Boxes and fittings are indicated on Drawings in approximate locations unless

dimensioned. Adjust box location up to accommodate intended purpose. Floor
boxes shall be totally flush with the adjacent floor finish on all sides.
The floor box shall provided with a quick-fix, metal base box and Opening lid to
an angle of 30°, with integrated cable outlets, can be installed in two positions
and can easily be removed during installation and use. The lid can be fitted with
a floor material insert.
Box can be screw fitted to floor tile by using holes in mounting frame (If hole in
tile is outside maximum tolerance use self tapping screws of required thickness as
per recommendation of OEM). Base shall be detachable from mounting frame by
releasing screws which enables the base to be connected to the services and left
under floor tiles for protection until the carpet, lid and trim are fitted Cable routers
can also be removed.
DSR Item No. 1.34 : Supplying and fixing of brass batten / angle holder /
connectors including connections etc as required.
1. Angle Holders / Brass Batten / Connecters :

An Angle holder/ brass batten / ceiling rose / connector shall not be used on a
circuit, the voltage of which normally exceeds 250V. Only one flexible cord shall
be connected to an Angle holder/ brass batten / ceiling rose / connector. Specially
designed ceiling roses/ connectors shall be used for multiple pendants. An Angle
holder/ brass batten / ceiling rose / connector shall not embody fuse terminal as
an integral part of it. Angle holders shall be used for wall mounted light fixtures
while brass battens shall be used for tube fittings.
DSR Item No. 1.44 : Installation, testing and commissioning of ceiling fan,
including wiring the down rods of standard length (up to 30 cm) with 1.5
sqmm FRLS PVC insulated copper conductor single core cables etc. as
required.
DSR Item No. 1.44 : (i): Installation of Wall fan suitable for single phase,
230 volts including wiring with 1.5 sqmm FRLS PVC insulated copper
conductor single core cables etc., complete as required.
1. Ceiling Fans :
Ceiling fans including their suspension shall conform to relevant Indian Standards.
The capacity of a ceiling fan to meet the requirement of a room with the longer
dimension D meters should be about 55 D m3/min. The height of fan blades above
the floor should be (3H + W)/4, where H is the height of the room, and W is the
height of the work plane. The minimum distance between fan blades and the

ceiling should be about 0.3 meters. Energy efficient fans with BEE 5 star rating or
complying with IS 374: 1979,shall be used. The minimum service value of fans
shall be 3.5 m3/min/W and air delivery 200 m3/min. All ceiling fans shall be wired
to ceiling roses or to special connector boxes, and suspended from hooks or
shackles, with insulators between hooks and suspension rods. There shall be no
joint in the suspension rod. For wooden or steel joists and beams, the suspension
shall consist of GI flat of size not less than 40 mm x 6 mm, secured on the sides
of the joists or beams by means of two coach screws of size not less than 5 cm
for each flat. Where there is space above the beam, a through-bolt of size not less
than 1.5 cm dia, shall be placed above the beam from which the flats are
suspended. In the latter case, the flats shall be secured from movements by
means of another bolt and nut at the bottom of the beam. A hook consisting of In
the case of ‘I’ beams, flats shall be shaped suitably to catch the flanges MS rod of
size not less than 1.5 cm dia shall be inserted between the MS flat through oval
holes on their sides. Alternatively, the flats may be bent inwards to hold tightly
between them by means of a bolt and nut, a hook of ‘S’ form and shall be held
together by means of a long bolt and nut for concrete roofs, a 12 mm dia. MS rod
in the shape of ‘U’ with their vertical legs bent horizontally at the top at least 19
cm on either side, and bound to the top of the roof shall be used. In buildings
with concrete roofs having a low ceiling height, where the fan clamp cannot be
used, or wherever specified, recessed type fan clamp inside metallic box, shall be
used. Canopies on top of suspension rod shall effectively hide the suspension. The
leading in wire shall be of nominal cross sectional area not less than 1.5sq. mm.
and shall be protected from abrasion. Unless otherwise specified, all ceiling fans
shall be hung 2.75 m above the floor. The metallic body of regulators of ceiling
fans shall be connected to earth by protective conductor.
DSR Item No. 1.50.1 : Installation of exhaust fan in the existing opening,
including making good the damage, connection, testing commissioning
etc as required.
(a): Up to 450mm sweep
DSR Item No. 1.50.2 : (b): 510 mm sweep.
DSR Item No. 1.51 : Extra for fixing the louvers / shutters complete with
frame for a exhaust fan of all sizes.
1. Exhaust Fans:
Exhaust fans shall conform to relevant Indian Standards. Exhaust fans shall be
erected at the places indicated in drawings For fixing an exhaust fan, a circular
opening shall be provided in the wall to suit the size of the frame, which shall be
fixed by means of rag bolts embedded in the wall. The hole shall be neatly
plastered to the original finish of the wall. The exhaust fan shall be connected to
the exhaust fan point, which shall be wired as near to the opening as possible, by
means of a flexible cord, care being taken to see that the blades rotate in the
proper direction. Exhaust fans for installation in corrosive atmosphere, shall be
painted with special PVC paint or chlorinated rubber paint. Installation of exhaust
fans in kitchens, dark rooms and such other special locations need careful
consideration; any special provisions needed shall be specified. The metallic body
of regulators of exhaust fans shall be connected to earth by protective conductor.
E. INSTALLATIONS, TESTING & COMMISSIONING – WIRING

1. Power’ wiring shall be kept separate and distinct from light wiring, from the
level of circuits, i.e., beyond the branch distribution boards. Conduits for
light/power wiring shall be separate.
2. Essential/non-essential/UPS distribution each will have a completely

independent and separate distribution system starting from the main, switchboard
up to final wiring for each system. As for example, conduit carrying non-essential
wiring shall not have essential or UPS wiring. Wiring for essential and UPS supply
will have their own conduit system. No mixing of wiring is allowed.
3. Generally, no switchboard will have more than one source of incoming supply.
More than one incoming supply will be allowed only at main board with proper
safety and interlocking so that only one source can be switched on at a time.
4. Each MDB/DB/Switch Board will have reasonable spare outgoing ways for future
expansion.
5. Balancing of 3-phase circuit shall be done.
6. Wiring shall be done only by the looping system. Phase/live conductors shall be
looped at the switch box. For point wiring, neutral wire/earth wire looping for
the1st point shall be done in the switch box; and neutral/earth looping of
subsequent points will be made from point outlets.
7. In wiring, no joints in wiring will be permitted anywhere, except in switch box

or point outlets, where jointing of wires will be allowed with use of suitable
connector etc.
8. The wiring throughout the installation shall be such that there is no break in
the neutral wire except in the form of linked switchgear.
9. Light, fans and call bells shall be wired in the ‘lighting’ circuits. 15A/16A socket
outlets and other power outlets shall be wired in the ‘power’ circuits. 5A/6A socket
outlets shall also be wired in the ‘power’ circuit both in residential as well as non-
residential buildings.
10. Following color coding shall be followed in wiring :

Phase : Red / Yellow / Green (For Respective phases in three Phase)
Neutral : Black
Earth : Green
11. Circuit will consist of phase/neutral/earth wire. Circuit will terminate in a

switch board(first tapping point, where from point wiring starts) in following
manner:
(a) Phase wire terminated in phase connector.
(b) Neutral wire terminated in neutral connector.
(c) Earth wire terminated in earth connector.
(d) The switchboard will have phase, neutral and earth terminal connector blocks
to receive phase/ neutral/ earth wire.

12. Above false ceiling, in no case, open wiring shall be allowed. Wiring will be
done in recessed conduit or surface steel conduit as specified in tender document.
13. Wiring shall not be bare in any case and has to go under a conduit / raceway
/ channel as specified in tender document.
14. When wiring cables are to pass through a wall, these shall be taken through a
protection (steel/ PVC) pipe or porcelain tube of suitable size such that they pass
through in a straight line without twist or cross in them on either porcelain, PVC
or other approved material.
15. All floor openings for carrying any wiring shall be suitably sealed after
installation.
16. No bare conductor in phase and/or neutral or twisted joints in phase, neutral,
and/or protective conductors in wiring shall be permitted.
17.There shall be no joints in the through-runs of cables. If the length of final

circuit or sub-main is more than the length of a standard coil, thus necessitating
a through joint, such joints shall be made by means of approved mechanical
connectors in suitable junction boxes.
18. Termination of multi-stranded conductors shall be done using suitable

crimping type thimbles.
19. Outlets shall be looped in accordance with the scheme proposed in " Good for
construction" drawings.
20. Every socket outlet shall be controlled by a switch or MCB, as specified. The
control switch/MCB shall be connected on the ‘live’ side of the line.
21. 5A/6A and 15A/16A socket outlets shall be installed at the following positions,
unless otherwise specified.
(a) Non-residential buildings – 23 cm above floor level.
(b) Bathroom – No socket outlet is permitted for connecting a portable appliance
thereto. MCB/IC switch may be provided above 2 m for fixed appliances, and at
least 1 m away from shower.
(c)Rooms in residences – 23 cm above floor level, or any other level in special
cases as desired by the Engineer-in-charge.
22. Unless and otherwise specified, the control switches for the 6A and 16A socket
outlets shall be kept along with the socket outlets.
23. Recessed conduit work is generally suitable for all applications. Surface conduit
work may be adopted in places like workshops etc. and where recessed work may
not be possible to be done. The type of work shall be as specified in individual
works. Flexible non-metallic conduits shall be used only at terminations, wherever
specified.
24. If the pipes are liable to mechanical damages, they should be adequately
protected.

25. The maximum number of PVC insulated copper conductor cables of 650/1100
V grade conforming to IS 694 : 1990 that can be drawn in one conduit of various
sizes shall be as specified in Table -1, Page number 33 of part-8 " electrical and
allied installation" of NBC-2005.
26. The erection of conduits of each circuit shall be completed before the cables
are drawn in before laying of conduits. The path of conduit shall be clearly marked
with the help of Milton chalk or chalk powder in a straight route as far as possible
before actually laying the conduit.
27. All joints shall be sealed/cemented with approved cement. Damaged conduit
pipes/fittings shall not be used in the work. Cut ends of conduit pipes shall have
neither sharp edges nor any burrs left to avoid damage to the insulation of
conductors while pulling them through such pipes. For metallic conduits, Conduit
pipes shall be joined by means of screwed couplers and screwed accessories only.
Threads on conduit pipes in all cases shall be between13 mm to 19 mm long,
sufficient to accommodate pipes to full threaded, portion of couplers or
accessories.
28. The Engineer-in-charge, with a view to ensuring that the above provision has
been carried out, may require that the separate lengths of conduit etc. after they
have been prepared shall be submitted for inspection before being fixed. No bare
threaded portion of conduit pipe shall be allowed, in case of metallic conduit unless
such bare threaded portion is treated with anticorrosive preservative or covered
with approved plastic compound.
29. All bends in the system may be formed either by bending the pipes by an
approved method of heating, or by inserting suitable accessories such as bends,
elbows or similar fittings, or by fixing non-metallic inspection boxes, whichever is
most suitable. Where necessary, solid type fittings shall be used. For metallic
conduits all necessary bends in the system, including diversion, shall be done
either by neatly bending the pipes without cracking with a bending radius of not
less than 7.5 cm, or alternatively, by inserting suitable solid or inspection type
normal bends, elbows or similar fittings, or by fixing cast iron inspection boxes,
whichever is most suitable.
30. Radius of bends in conduit pipes shall not be less than 7.5 cm. No length of
conduit shall have more than the equivalent of four quarter bends from outlet to
outlet.
31. Care shall be taken while bending the pipes to ensure that the conduit pipe
is not injured, and that the internal diameter is not effectively reduced.
32. For surface conduit works, conduit pipes shall be fixed by heavy gauge non-
metallic saddles with base, secured to suitable approved plugs with screws in an
approved manner, at an interval of not more than 60 cm, but on either side of
couplers or bends or similar fittings, saddles shall be fixed at a closer distance
from the center of such fittings. Slotted PVC saddles may also be used where the
PVC pipe can be pushed in through the slots. For metallic conduits Conduit pipes
shall be fixed by saddles, secured to suitable approved plugs with screws in an

approved manner at an interval of not more than one meter, but on either side of
the couplers or bends or similar fittings, saddles shall be fixed at a distance of 30
cm from the center of such fittings.
33. Where the conduit pipes are to be laid along the trusses, steel joists etc. the
same shall be secured by means of saddles or girder clips as required by the
Engineer-in-charge. Where it is not possible to use these for fixing, suitable clamps
with bolts and nuts shall be used. For metallic conduits, conduit fittings shall be
avoided as far as possible on conduit system exposed to weather. Where
necessary, solid type fittings shall be used. In long distance straight run of conduit,
inspection type couplers at reasonable intervals shall be provided, or running
threads with couplers and jam nuts shall be provided.
34. It is recommended to start the conduit works in the initial phase when the
building is under construction. The conduits shall be buried in the wall before
plastering, and shall be finished neatly after erection of conduit. In worst case if a
chase is required in the wall for conduit that chase in the wall shall be neatly made
and of ample dimensions to permit the conduit to be fixed in the manner desired
and then making it neat plastered again. The conduit pipe in such case shall be
fixed by means of staples, J-hooks, or by means of saddles, not more than 60 cm
apart or by any other approved means of fixing. Also all threaded joints of conduit
pipes in such case shall be treated with some approved preservative compound to
secure protection against rust.
35.In case of exposed brick work, special care shall be taken to fix the conduit
and accessories in position along with the building work.
36. While laying the conduit in RCC works following points shall be adhered:
(a) The conduit pipes shall be laid in position and fixed to the steel reinforcement
bars by steel binding wires before the concreting is done. The conduit pipes shall
be fixed firmly to the steel reinforcement bars to avoid their dislocation during
pouring of cement concrete and subsequent tamping of the same.
(b) Fixing of standard bends or elbows shall be avoided as far as practicable, and
all curves shall be maintained by bending the conduit pipe itself with along radius,
which will permit easy drawing in of conductors.
(c) Location of inspection / junction boxes in RCC work should be identified by
suitable means to avoid unnecessary chipping of the RCC slab subsequently to
locate these boxes.
37. While fixing inspection box for conduits following points shall be adhered:
(a) Suitable inspection boxes to the minimum requirement shall be provided to
permit inspection and to facilitate replacement of wires, if necessary.
(b) The inspection box shall be mounted flush with the wall or ceiling concrete.
Minimum 65mm depth junction boxes shall be used in roof slabs and the depth of
the boxes in other places shall be as per IS 2667 : 1988.
(c) Suitable ventilating holes shall be provided in the inspection box covers.
38. To facilitate subsequent drawing of wires in the conduit, GI fish wire of1.6
mm/1.2 mm (16/18 SWG) shall be provided along with the laying of the recessed
conduit.

39. Cables carrying alternating current, if installed in conduit shall always be

bunched so that the outgoing and return cables are drawn into the same conduit.
In case of three phase distribution separate conduits shall be planned for R, Y and
B phases. Also conduits for lighting, power and UPS circuits shall be separate.
Conduits carrying cable for firefighting / fire alarm circuits shall be marked red
with a good quality paint at every 1.8 meters.
40. The entire system of metallic conduit work, including the outlet boxes and
other metallic accessories, shall be mechanically and electrically continuous by
proper screwed joints, or by double check nuts at terminations. The conduit shall
be continuous when passing through walls or floor. A protective (loop earthing)
conductor(s) shall be laid inside the conduit between the metallic switch boxes
and distribution switch boards and terminated with proper earth lugs/ terminals.
Only PVC insulated copper conductor cable of specified size green in color shall be
allowed. The protective conductors shall be terminated properly using earth studs,
earth terminal block etc. as the case may be. Gas or water pipe shall not be used
as protective conductor (earth medium).
41. All accessories like switches, socket outlets, call bell pushes and regulators
shall be fixed in flush pattern inside the switch/regulator boxes. Accessories like
ceiling roses, brackets, batten holders etc. shall be fixed on outlet boxes. The fan
regulators may also be fixed on outlet boxes, if so directed by the Engineer-in-
charge.
42. All circuits shall be tested for their circuit continuity through loop resistance
test.
43. Acceptable voltage levels between phases and phase to neutral as well s
neutral to earth shall be checked for each socket.
44. Adaptable raceways shall be used for power cables and data cables to run
parallel in two different compartments with partition.
45. For ease of maintenance, cables carrying direct current or alternating current
shall always be bunched inside the raceway so that the outgoing and return cables
are drawn in the same raceway.
46. Raceways shall be of such a design that it holds the wires inside the raceway
body (casing) at suitable intervals, so that at the time of opening of the raceway
cover (capping), the wires may remain in position in the raceway body (casing)
and do not fall out.
47. In the case of metallic raceways there shall be a metallic link between adjacent
raceway covers with screw connections, and also connections from the end casing
to the earth terminal of metallic boxes / outlets / switch boards as per the case
maybe, for the complete body earthing of the system.
48. Suitable space shall be left inside a raceway for pulling of wires and future
maintenance. Raceways shall not be filled with 100% wiring. 25-30% space shall
be left in each raceway.
F. MEASUREMENTS

1. Circuit and sub-main wiring shall be measured on linear basis along the run of
the wiring. The measurement shall include all lengths from end to end of conduit
or channel as the case may be, exclusive of interconnections inside the switch
board etc. The increase on account of diversion or slackness shall not be included
in the measurement.
2. The length of circuit wiring with two wires shall be measured from the
distribution board to the nearest switch box from which the point wiring starts.
Looping of switch boxes also will be counted towards circuit wiring, measured
along the length of conduit/channel.
3. When wires of different circuits are grouped in a single conduit/ channel, the
same shall be measured on linear basis depending on the actual number and sizes
of wires run.
4. Protective (loop earthing) conductors, which are run along the circuit wiring and
the sub-main wiring, shall be measured on linear basis and paid for separately.
5. Conduit carrying sub-main will not carry circuit/point wiring. Similarly conduit
carrying circuit wiring will not carry sub-main/point wiring. Conduit carrying point
wiring will not carry sub-main/circuit wiring.
6. Unless and otherwise specified, there shall be no linear measurement for point
wiring for light points, fan points, exhaust fan points and call bell points. These
shall be measured on unit basis by counting, and classified.
7.Except as specified above for point wiring, circuit wiring and sub-main wiring,
other types of wiring shall be measured separately on linear basis along the run
of wiring depending on the actual number and sizes of wires run.
8. The light plug (6 A) point and power (16 A) point wiring shall be measured on
linear basis, from the respective tapping point of live cable, namely, switch box,
another socket outlet point, or the sub-distribution board as the case may be, up
to the socket outlet.
9. In the case of points with more than one point controlled by the same switch,
such points shall be measured in parts i.e. (a) from the switch to the first point
outlet as one point (b) for the subsequent points, the distance from that outlet to
the next one and so on, shall be treated as separate point(s).
10. A light point controlled by two numbers of two way switches shall be measured
as two points from the fittings to the switches on either side.
11. In the case of call bell points with a single call bell outlet, controlled from more
than one place, the points shall be measured in parts i.e.
(a) From the call bell outlet to one of the nearest ceiling roses meant for
connection to bell push, treated as one point
(b) From that ceiling rose to the next one and so on, shall be treated as separate
point(s).

12. In the case of measurement of extra down rod for ceiling fan including wiring,
the same shall be measured in units of 10 cm. Any length less than 5 cm shallbe
ignored.
G. SUBMITTALS
The contractor shall submit following submittals as mentioned in "Procedures" and

"Close-out"
1. Product data (P.D)

2. Shop drawings (S.D)
3. Work methodology statement (W.M.S).
4. Material Inspection Request (M.I.R)
5. As built drawings. (A.B.D)
6. Operation & maintenance manuals. (O&M)
H. PROCEDURES
1. The contractor shall study all the drawings and tender document carefully and
shall strictly adhere "General conditions of Contract "& "Special Conditions of
contract ".
2. Any deviation in "Good for construction" drawings with respect to following shall
be brought into the notification of consultant in prior before indenting material and
execution of job at site :
(a) Deviations with respect to Bill of quantities.
(b) Deviations with respect to Tender drawings.
(c) Deviations with respect to tender specifications.
(d) Deviations with respect to site conditions.
Shop drawing reflecting the deviation has to be prepared by the contractor and
the same shall be approved by "Engineer in Charge" / Consultant / Client's
representative.
3. The contractor shall prepare a work methodology statement prior to

commencement of wiring job at site with detailed description of how the job shall
be carried out at site along with necessary testing and commissioning procedures
in detailed manner. This methodology statement has to be duly approved by the
concerning "Engineer in Charge" / Consultant / Client's representative and work
has to be carried out with respect to this approved work methodology statement.
4. Contractor needs to ensure that a mock up for the job shall be shown to
concerning "Engineer in Charge" / Consultant / Client's representative at site and
the rest work shall further carry on after the approval of mock up at site by the
said personnel.
5. The contractor shall organize a preparation meeting prior to the commencement

of job at site describing the work methodology statement in meeting.

of job at site describing the work methodology statement in meeting and the

concerning attendees of the meeting have to be informed 24 hrs prior to the

commencement of meeting.
7. The contractor shall adhere best installation and safety practices.
8. Product data shall be submitted to " The Consultant" before indenting the
material along with the specification compliance sheet duly signed and stamped
by the concerning Vendor. Once the consultant approves the product data then
only the procurement shall be made.
9. The product once reached at site has to be inspected by concerning " Engineer
in Charge" / Client's representative and the product needs to be accepted or
rejected in the form of a written document called M.I.R ( " Material Inspection
Request " ). In case the material is rejected the same has to be mentioned in the
M.I.R form clearly stating the reason for rejection of material. If accepted the
same also needs to be mentioned in M.I.R form.
10. The contractor shall co-ordinate well within as well as other agencies prior to
the commencement of job so that any deviation / clashes can be resolved prior to
the execution of work at site.
11. Testing and commissioning needs to be performed in the presence of Engineer

in Charge" / Client's representative.
12. Pre- final Inspection needs to be carried out in the after full execution of
concerning work at site with Engineer in Charge" / Client's representative. Any
snags identified during inspection shall be attended and rectified by the contractor.
13. The contractor shall follow a better work sequence and final inspection call has
to be raised prior to hand over only. The contractor shall incorporate all the
comments provided during pre-final inspection. The work shall be locked/sealed
by "The client" after final inspection.
I. CLAUSES
1. The Contractor shall strictly adhere "General conditions of Contract "& "Special
Conditions of contract ".
2. In the case of group controlled point wiring as described in Clause no.9 of

"Measurements" under section "Wiring", no recovery shall be made for non-
provision of more than one switch in such cases.
3. In the case of twin controlled point wiring as described in Clause 10 of

"Measurements" under section "Wiring", no recovery shall be made for non-
provision of more than one ceiling rose in such cases.
4. In the case of multiple controlled call bell point wiring as described in Clause 11
(a & b) of "Measurements" under section " Wiring", no recovery shall be made for
non-provision of more than one ceiling rose or connector for connection to call bell
in such cases.

5. In case of ceiling fans the wiring of extra down rod shall be paid as supplying
and drawing cable in existing conduit.
6. In case Engineer in Charge" / Client's representative/ consultant requires any

test to be conducted at site, in spite of the fact that a type test report or a routine
test report from OEM is already available for such test and if such test is mentioned
under the specifications of any standard as mentioned under the tender document
and if so feasible at site, the contractor shall be liable to conduct such test as
required at no additional time and cost.
7. The contractor shall be liable to furnish the recommendations / clarifications /

justification / acceptance from respective OEM as and when required by Engineer
in Charge" / Client's representative/ consultant.
8. The contractor shall submit the calibration test report for all the testing
equipment being used at site as well has used during factory testing as such test
reports shall be acceptable only if furnished by NABL accredited laboratory or if
required from the laboratory as specified by Engineer in Charge" / Client's
representative/ consultant.
J. CLOSE OUT DOCUMENTATION
1. Once the Final inspection is done, the contractor shall submit the following as
close out submittals:
(a) 6 Nos. fully laminated, legible hard copies of "As built drawings"
(b) Soft Copy of "As built drawings" in AUTOCAD 2000 version in a pen-drive.
(c) 4 Nos. fully compiled in box file, legible hard copies of " Operation and
maintenance manuals ".
(d) Soft Copy of "Operation and maintenance manuals" in pdf format in a pen-
drive.
(e) 4 Nos. fully compiled in box file Training document literature and presentation.
(f) Soft copy of Training document literature and presentation.
2. A draft of operational and maintenance manual has to be submitted by the

contractor to concerning " Engineer in Charge" / Consultant / Client's
representative defining detailed O&M procedures along with product data, List of
spare accessories etc. Upon the receipt of their approval. A final copy of O&M then
needs to be prepared and submitted by the contractor in required format.
3. The contractor shall impart training to the concerning personnel those will be
taking care of operation and maintenance of the facility. The training shall
comprise of both classroom and field training.
4. A draft of training document literature and presentation has to be submitted by

the contractor to concerning "Engineer in Charge" / Consultant / Client's
representative. Upon the receipt of their approval on the same the training shall
be then conducted and a final copy of training document literature and
presentation needs to be prepared and submitted by the contractor in required
format.

CHAPTER-2
MCCBs, MCBs & DBs
A. SCOPE
commissioning of following :
1. Distribution boards considered for all internal and common areas. This also
includes items for switchgears used inside the distribution boards and its
accessories.
2. All internal wirings including neutral and earthing connections inside DB.
This should however not include the earth connection from DB to earth pit.
3. Complete Installation of distribution board in recess / surface as required.
4. Dressing of Distribution board.
5. Testing and commissioning of distribution board in accordance with
relevant IS standards.
6. Tagging of each distribution board.
7. Mounting of switchgear inside distribution boards.
8. Switchgears (MCCB/MCB) in existing cubical enclosure.

strictly followed.

3. IS 8623:1977 - Distribution boards
4. IS 2675: 1983 - Enclosed distribution fuse boards and cutouts for
voltages not exceeding 1000 V Ac and 1200 V Dc
5. IEC 439-3 IEC for Distribution boards up to 250A with door
6. BS EN 60439-3 -Low-Voltage Switchgear And Control gear Assemblies.
C. DEFINATIONS
TPN DB : It is defined as a three pole and neutral (TPN) distribution board also
call horizontal type TPN DB which consist of a three phase incoming suitable for
415V, 50Hz and single phase outgoings in each phase respectively suitable for
240V, 50Hz. This is suitable for 3 Phase distribution scheme where the load
demand or number of circuits are more and one phase is not sufficient.

SPN DB : It is defined as a single pole and neutral distribution board which consist
of a single phase incoming and single phase outgoings suitable for 240V, 50Hz
distribution scheme.
VTPN DB : It is defined as a Vertical three pole and neutral (VTPN) distribution

board which consist of a three phase incoming suitable for 415V, 50Hz and
outgoings are provided with module in such a manner that both single phase and
three phase outgoings can be tapped from this DB. This DB finds its application
where three phase outgoings are required from a distribution boards.
Ways : It is defined as the total number of clear outgoings in each phase (for a
three phase DB) and total number of clear outgoings (for a single phase DB).
Module : It is defined as space required by one single pole MCB inside a DB.
Switchgear : It is defined as electrical device used for switching purpose inside

a distribution board, distribution panel, cubical or switchboard. It comprises of
following :
ISO : Isolater
MCB : Miniature Circuit Breaker
RCCB : Residual current circuit breaker
RCBO : Residual current break over
MCCB : Molded case circuit breaker
MR 19.017 : Supply, Installation, Testing and Commissioning of following

three phase and neutral (TPN), MS powder coated with thickness 1.6 mm,
horizontal , double door (IP 43), recessed mounting type, MCB
distribution boards complying to IS 8623:1977, IS 2675: 1983, IEC 439-
3 and BS EN 60439-3 including all supplements. The distribution boards
shall have protection against mechanical impact index of minimum IK08.
Supplier should provide the testing certificate for Ingress protection and
mechanical impact tested at third party location. Outer door shall be
hinged type, inner door shall be fixed up with screws with cut-outs for
MCB operation, copper bus-bar of 100 Amp rating, along with din bars,
neutral bars, earth bars, lockable door arrangement including all internal
connections as required. The board shall have adequate space for
termination of incoming and outgoing cables, and also a separate space
with proper partition of same material and thickness as specified for
distribution board or better, to accommodate a TV splitter and a 5 pair
telephone terminal block, removable un drilled top & bottom gland plates,
should be suitable for wall, column mounting type B.
(a) 4 Way TPN DB with 12 modules for SP MCBs in outgoing ,2 modules
per phase for RCCB, min 4 modules for placing incoming switchgear,
space to accommodate a TV splitter and a 5 pair telephone terminal block

complete with earth bar, neutral bars, din rails, connections but excluding
the cost of switchgear.
MR 19.018 : (b) 6 Way TPN DB with 18 modules for SP MCBs in outgoing,

2 modules per phase for RCCB, min 4 modules for placing incoming
MCB/RCDs, space to accommodate a TV splitter and a 5 pair telephone
terminal block complete with earth bar, neutral bars, din rails,
connections but excluding the cost of MCCB/MCB/RCDs
MR 19.019 : (c) 8 Way TPN DB with 24 modules for SP MCBs in outgoing,

connections but excluding the cost of MCCB/MCB/RCDs.
MR 19.020 : (d) 12 Way TPN DB with 36 modules for SP MCBs in outgoing,

connections but excluding the cost of MCCB/MCB/RCDs. (d) 12 Way TPN
DB with 36 modules for SP MCBs in outgoing, 2 modules per phase for
RCCB, 6 modules for placing incoming switchgear, space to accommodate
a TV splitter and a 5 pair telephone terminal block complete with earth
bar, neutral bars, din rails, connections but excluding the cost of
switchgear.
1. Distribution Board (DB) :
Distribution board shall be made up of sheet steel thickness of minimum

2mm with powder coating, completely dust / vermin / corrosion free with
ingress protection rating of IP 43. The board shall have adequate space for
termination of incoming and outgoing cables, and also a separate space with
proper partition of same material and thickness as specified for distribution
board or better, to accommodate a TV splitter and a 5 pair telephone tag
block. Removable un-drilled top & bottom gland plates, should be suitable
for wall, column mounting type B. The distribution shall be double door type
with provision of front operated, fully lockable, hinged door. The distribution
boards shall have protection against mechanical impact index of minimum
IK08. Neoprene gasket, shall be provided to make distribution box air tight
and free from moisture. Inner door shall be fixed up with screws with cut-
outs for MCB operation. Each such distribution board shall have din rails for
mounting switchgears those shall be made up of galvanized steel, passivized
with a thick layer. The ampere ratings of these din rails shall typically be 1.5
times the full load current carrying capacity of the mounting switchgear. The
dimensions shall be so selected so that the switchgear gets easily and tightly
mounted in the din rail. The distribution board shall have neutral bars of
current rating equivalent to phase bars for each phase. Neutral bars of
individual phases shall be isolated with each other so that leakage on any
one phase doesn't affect the other healthy phases. The clearances among
various components inside the distribution board shall comply with
mentioned codes and standards. Each neutral bar shall have tinned plated

bolts to terminate neutrals of respective circuits to the neutral bar and each
neutral bar of respective phase shall be provided with arc flash insulating
covers. Terminal blocks shall be suitable for termination of conductor/ cable
of required size but minimum rated cross section of the terminal blocks
should be 6 sq. mm. Terminal block shall be made of flame retardant
polyamide material.
Color terminal blocks and FRLS wires for easy identification of RYB Phases,
Neutral and Earth. DB shall be provided with a detachable cassette for safe
removal of MCBs, RCCBs. Detachable plate with Knock out holes shall be
provided at the top/ bottom of board. Copper bus-bar of at least 1.5 times
the rating of incomer MCB / MCCB, along with, neutral bars, earth bars.
Board shall be suitable for operation on 3 Phase / single phase, 415 / 240
volts, 50 cycles, 4 wire system, with neutral grounded at transformer. The
selection, design and construction of bus bars shall conform to IS
specifications and the latest amendments. The bus bars shall be air insulated
and made of high conductivity, high strength cu. Bus bars. Direct access or
accidental contact with bus bars and primary connections shall not be
possible. Bus bars shall be rated in accordance with service conditions and
the rated for continuous and short time current ratings specified in SLD /
data sheets. Maximum temperature of the bus bar and bus bar connections,
under operating conditions, while carrying rated normal current at rated
frequency shall not exceed 85 degree C.
MR 19.021 : Supply, Installation, Testing and Commissioning of MCB

3 and BS EN 60439-3 including all supplements, MS powder coated with
thickness 1.6 mm, horizontal , double door (IP 43), recessed mounting
type, for following single phase and neutral (SPN) DB. The distribution
boards shall have protection against mechanical impact index of
minimum IK08. Supplier should provide the testing certificate for Ingress
protection and mechanical impact tested at third party location. outer
door shall be hinged type, inner door shall be fixed up with screws with
cut-outs for MCB operation, copper bus-bar of 100 Amp, along with din
bars, neutral bars, earth bars, lockable door arrangement including all
internal connections as required. The board shall have adequate space for
termination of incoming and outgoing cables, and also a separate space
with proper partition of same material specification as distribution board
or better to accommodate a TV splitter and a 5 pair krone connector,
removable un drilled top & bottom gland plates, should be suitable for
wall, column mounting type B.
(a) 6 Way SPN DB with 6 modules for SP MCBs in outgoing , 2 modules

for placing incoming MCB/RCDs, space to accommodate a TV splitter and
a 5 pair telephone terminal block complete with earth bar, neutral bars,
din rails, connections but excluding the cost of MCCB/MCB/RCDs.
MR 19.022 : (b) 8 Way SPN DB with 8 modules for SP MCBs in outgoing ,

2 modules for placing incoming MCB/RCDs, space to accommodate a TV
splitter and a 5 pair telephone terminal block complete with earth bar,
neutral bars, din rails, connections but excluding the cost of MCB/RCDs.

MR 19.023 : (c) 12 Way SPN DB with 12 modules for SP MCBs in outgoing,

2 modules for placing incoming MCB/RCDs, space to accommodate a TV
neutral bars, din rails, connections but excluding the cost of MCB/RCDs.

block. Removable un drilled top & bottom gland plates, should be suitable for
wall, column mounting type B. The distribution shall be double door type with
provision of front operated, fully lockable, hinged door. The distribution
mounting switchgears those shall be made up of galvanized steel passivized
polyamide material.
Distribution Board shall be suitable for operation on 3 Phase / single phase,
415/ 240 volts, 50 cycles, 4 wire system, with neutral grounded at
transformer. The selection, design and construction of bus bars shall conform
to IS specifications and the latest amendments. The bus bars shall be air
insulated and made of high conductivity, high strength cu. Bus bars. Direct
access or accidental contact with bus bars and primary connections shall not
be possible. Bus bars shall be rated in accordance with service conditions and

MR 19.024 : Supply, Installation, Testing and Commissioning of MCB

3 and BS EN 60439-3 including all supplements , MS powder coated with
thickness minimum 1.6 mm, horizontal , double door (IP 43), recessed
mounting type, for following configuration vertical three phase and
neutral (VTPN) DB . The vertical TPN DB shall be recessed mounted
vertically with modules suitable to draw out both single phase and three
phase outgoings. The distribution boards shall have protection against
mechanical impact index of minimum IK08. Supplier should provide the
testing certificate for Ingress protection and mechanical impact tested at
third party location. outer door shall be hinged type, inner door shall be
fixed up with screws with cut-outs for MCB operation, copper bus-bar of
at least 1.5 times the rating of incomer MCB / MCCB, along with din bars,
neutral bars, earth bars including all internal connections as required. The
board shall have adequate space for termination of incoming and
outgoing cables, and also a separate space with proper partition of same
material specification as distribution board or better to accommodate a
TV splitter and a 5 pair krone connector, removable un-drilled top &
bottom gland plates, should be suitable for wall, column mounting type
B.
(a) 6 Way VTPN DB with 18 modules suitable for both SP and TP MCBs
in outgoing, (min 4 modules for placing incoming MCB/RCDs, or required
modules for MCCB) along with space to accommodate a TV splitter and a
5 pair telephone terminal block complete with earth bar, neutral bars, din
rails, connections but excluding the cost of MCCB/MCB/RCDs.
MR 19.025 : (b) 8 Way VTPN DB with 24 modules suitable for both SP and
TP MCBs in outgoing , (min 4 modules for placing incoming MCB/RCDs, or
required modules for MCCB) along with space to accommodate a TV
neutral bars, din rails, connections but excluding the cost of
MCCB/MCB/RCDs.
MR 19.026 : (c) 12 Way VTPN DB with 36 modules suitable for both SP

and TP MCBs in outgoing , (min 4 modules for placing incoming
MCB/RCDs, or required modules for MCCB) along with space to
accommodate a TV splitter and a 5 pair telephone terminal block complete
with earth bar, neutral bars, din rails, connections but excluding the cost
of MCCB/MCB/RCDs.


block. Removable un-drilled top & bottom gland plates, should be suitable
for wall, column mounting type B. The distribution shall be double door type
with provision of front operated, fully lockable, hinged door. The distribution
mounting switchgears those shall be made up of galvanized steel passivized
polyamide material.
Distribution Board shall be suitable for operation on 3 Phase / single phase,
415 / 240 volts , 50 cycles, 4 wire system, with neutral grounded at
transformer. The selection, design and construction of bus bars shall conform
to IS specifications and the latest amendments. The bus bars shall be air
insulated and made of high conductivity, high strength cu. Bus bars. Direct
access or accidental contact with bus bars and primary connections shall not
be possible. Bus bars shall be rated in accordance with service conditions and
DSR Item No. 2.10.1 : Supplying and fixing 5 amps to 32 amps rating,
240/415 volts, "C" curve, miniature circuit breaker suitable for
inductive load of following poles in the existing MCB DB complete with
connections, testing and commissioning etc. as required.
(a) Single pole
DSR Item No. 2.10.3 : (b) Double pole
DSR Item No. 2.10.4 : (c) Triple pole
1. Switchgear (MCB/RCCB/RCBO) :

MCB should be trip free, quick make and quick break type. MCB should be
suitable for interchangeable line/ load connections. The MCB shall have
minimum 10 KA breaking capacity with (Ics=Icu=10kA), where Ics is service
breaking capacity and Icu is ultimate breaking capacity defined as per IS-
13947. MCBs shall have ISI mark as per IS8828-1996 (IEC60898).The MCB
shall be suitable for temperature up to 50 deg C without de-rating. All
outgoing feeder MCB shall be provided with clip on type auxiliary contact to
interface. Terminal of MCB shall be provided with insulated separators
between the phases and also on both end. The size and design of the terminal
should be adequate to accommodate aluminum/ copper cable required for
the rated current of the MCB. It should confirm to current limiting principle
class –3 to ensure extremely low let through energy (I²t) under fault
conditions. It should have ‘two position’ DIN clip ensuring easy mounting and
removal. It should confirm C.E. Marking (confirmation to European
standards), based upon the tripping characteristics the MCB shall be
described as B, C or D curves and the same must be mentioned in bold upon
the MCB. All MCB shall have a mention of Full load current, short circuit
current, utility voltage, frequency, tripping characteristics (B, C, and D),
basic 3 line diagram. The poles of MCBs shall have minimum self-resistance
as per latest IEC standards.
The RCCB shall have sensitivities of 30mA and 100mA as specified in the
design drawing or SLD or BOQ. The RCCB shall comprise of a core balance
current transformer built in to calibrate the differential current between any
phase and neutral. The RCCB shall have a mention of its sensitivities
engraved upon it.
Residual current break over shall be rated for overload, short circuit as well
as earth leakage and shall be capable to provide protection against all three
of these fault conditions. The RCBO shall be quick make quick break type. It
should confirm to current limiting principle class –3 to ensure extremely low
let through energy (I²t) under fault conditions. It should have ‘two position’
DIN clip ensuring easy mounting and removal.
MR 19.027 : Supplying and fixing 40 amps rating, 240/415 volts, "C"

curve, miniature circuit breaker suitable for inductive load of following
poles in the existing MCB DB complete with connections, testing and
commissioning etc. as required.
(a) Double pole
MR 19.028 : (b) Triple pole
MR 19.029 : (c) Four pole
MCB should be trip free, quick make and quick break type.MCB should be


engraved upon it.
MR 19.030 : Supplying and fixing 63 amps rating, 240/415 volts, "C"

curve, miniature circuit breaker suitable for inductive load of following
poles in the existing MCB DB complete with connections, testing and
(a) Double pole
MR 19.031 : (b) Four pole
MCB should be trip free, quick make and quick break type MCB should be
interface. of MCB shall be provided with insulated separators between the
phases and also on both end. The size and design of the terminal should be
adequate to accommodate aluminum/ copper cable required for the rated
current of the MCB. It should confirm to current limiting principle class –3 to
ensure extremely low let through energy (I²t) under fault conditions. It
should have ‘two position’ DIN clip ensuring easy mounting and removal. It
should confirm C.E. Marking (confirmation to European standards), based
upon the tripping characteristics the MCB shall be described as B, C or D
curves and the same must be mentioned in bold upon the MCB. All MCB shall
have a mention of Full load current, short circuit current, utility voltage,

frequency, tripping characteristics (B, C, and D), basic3 line diagram. The
poles of MCBs shall have minimum self-resistance as per latest IEC
standards.
engraved upon it.
MR 19.032 : and fixing 32 amps rating, 415 volts, four pole ,"C" curve,
miniature circuit breaker suitable for inductive load of following poles in
the existing MCB DB complete with connections, testing and
engraved upon it.
of these fault conditions. The RCBO shall be quick make quick break type.It

MR 19.033 : Supplying and fixing following rating, 240 volts, double pole
,"C" curve, residual current break over (RCBO) suitable for inductive load
of following poles in the existing MCB DB complete with connections,
testing and commissioning etc. as required.
(a) 25A, 30mA, 10 kA DP RCBO
MR 19.034 : (b) 40A, 30mA, 10 kA DP RCBO
engraved upon it.
DSR Item No. 2.14.1 : Supplying and fixing following rating, double pole,
(single phase and neutral), 240 volts, residual current circuit breaker
(RCCB) having sensitivity up to 30milliampere in the existing MCB DB
complete with connections, testing commissioning etc. as required
(a) 25 amps

DSR Item No. 2.14.2 : (b) 40 amps
DSR Item No. 2.14.2 : (c) 63 amps
engraved upon it.
DSR Item No. 2.2.13 : Providing and fixing following rating and breaking
capacity and pole MCCB in existing cubicle panel board including drilling
holes in the cubical panel, making connections etc. as required.
(a) 100 A, 30kA, FP MCCB
DSR Item No. 2.2.14 : (b) 125 A, 36kA, FP MCCB
DSR Item No. 2.2.15 : (c) 200 A, 36kA, FP MCCB
1. Switchgear (MCCB) :
MCCB should be provided with door operating mechanism having interlock,

defeat and padlocking facility. The Molded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB) shall
conform to IEC 947 – 2.The MCCB shall be suitable for ambient temperature

up to 55 deg C without de-rating. The MCCB should trip free, quick make and
quick break type and should be equipped with a current limiting feature.
MCCB shall have spreader links and terminal shroud as a feature for safety
and proper heat dissipation. The MCCB shall indicate its suitability for
isolation and this should appear clearly with the symbol as specified in IS
13947. All MCCBs shall be microprocessor type with overload, short circuit
and earth fault releases unless otherwise specified. For the entire range,
Service Breaking capacity (Ics) shall be equal to Ultimate Breaking capacity
(Icu), ( Icu = Ics =100% ). The MCCB shall have following setting options
available. No dip switches shall be installed for settings. Test knob and trip
reset unit of the breaker shall be fully activated . Any accessories required
for the same shall be included. The complete assembly shall be BMS
compatible.
Overload setting (L ) 0.4-1 x In

Short circuit setting (with time delay)(S) 2 –10 x Ir
Time delay (td) 0-500 m sec
Short circuit setting (Instantaneous) (I) 11 x In
Where In = nominal current of MCCB & Ir = rated current to which
it is set.
Ground Fault Setting with time delay (0-300ms) (G) : 0.1-1 x In
Neutral setting (N) (where ever required): 0.5-1 x In
All MCCB’s shall be provided with additional 2 spare NO+NC contact, a shunt
trip coil and an under voltage coil auxiliary along with alarm switches, Front
door operating mechanism with door interlock defeat facility. Release shall
have inbuilt memory and true RMS sensing.
Frame sizes of MCCB’s shall be of following standard sizes.
MCCB Rating Frame Size

100 amps & below 100 amps. 100 amps.
More than 100 amps up to 160 amps 160 amps.
More than 250 amps up to 400 amps. 400 amps.
The breaking capacities of MCCB’s are mentioned panel wise. MCCB’s shall
be of following standard ratings.

25 KA & above. 25 KA
Above 25 KA up to 35 KA. 35 KA
Above 35 KA up to 50 KA 50 KA
Above 50 KA up to 70 KA 70 KA.

DSR Item No. 2.11 : Supplying and fixing single pole blanking plate
in the existing MCB DB complete etc. as required.
1. Blanking plate for DB :
Blanking plate shall be made up of minimum 18 gauge sheet steel and shall
be suitable for fixing inside any type of distribution board. The dimensions
shall be selected in such a fashion so that it completely covers exposed din
bars. Holes made in these blanking plates for fixing nuts and bolts shall be
made a site only with a drill machine of required dia and extra holes shall be
plugged in with a fire sealant.
DSR Item No. 2.13.1 : Supplying and fixing following rating, four pole,
415 volts, isolator in the existing MCB DB complete with connections,
testing and commissioning etc. as required.(a) 32 Amp
DSR Item No. 2.13.1 : (b) 40 Amp
DSR Item No. 2.13.1 : (c) 63 Amp
1. Isolator :
operation and shall conform to I.S. 4064.The isolators for motor feeders shall
be of “Motor Duty” type adequate for interruption of locked rotor current of
motors (excepting for motors rated 50 Kilowatts and above).Switches and
isolators provided in the switch boards shall be interlocked with door to
prevent opening and closing of the door in the closed (ON) position of the
isolators. All live terminals on the isolating / switches shall be adequately
shrouded to prevent accidental contact and danger to the personnel.
E. INSTALLATIONS, TESTING & COMMISSIONING
1. Distribution boards shall be flushed in the wall and a niche shall be made after
measuring the actual depth of DB so that the distribution box gets properly fitted
inside niche. In case of surface mounted distribution board the location shall be
confirmed in co-ordination with architect and civil team.
2. The distribution board shall be properly aligned and the leveled within tolerance
of +/- 2mm and shall be ensured with a water level indicator or a laser gun
whichever available.
3. DB shall have peel able poly layer on the cover for protection from cement,
plaster, paints etc. during the construction period.
4. The holes made in sheet steel enclosure for cable termination shall be made
only through drill machine or approved cutting tool with marking of dia done prior
to cutting or drilling. Extra left out holes shall be filled neatly with fire retardant
sealant.

5. The enclosure shall be tightly fixed. No spare nuts-bolts shall be left out un-
tightened / open inside the DB enclosure in any case.
6. Gland plates where ever used for cable termination shall be tightly fixed and
shall be earthed.
7. Din bar shall be mounted in a linear horizontal fashion in case of TPN/SPN DBs
and may be in vertical fashion only in case of VTPN DB. Din bars shall not be
allowed to cut once fixed and installed inside DB. The excess exposed part of din
shall be covered with blanking plate. In case if the din needs to be cut after
installation or if so directed by the engineer in charge. The complete din bar needs
to be dismantled from DB first and then cutting shall be done.
8. Switchgears shall be mounted on din tightly and accurately with incoming poles
facing top and outgoing pole facing bottom.
9. Internal wiring of distribution board shall be terminated into respective

switchgears, earth bars and neutral bars only with the help of pin type lugs /
thimbles. However for body earthing of DB cu. C / U type lugs can be used.
10. Termination lugs shall be tightly fixed and connected and there shall not be
any bare wire strand jetting out of the lugs. Suitable crimping tool shall be used.
And terminal wires shall be coved with heat shrinkable sleeves whose color coding
has to match with the color of the wire used.
11. For complete internal wiring the size of phase earth and neutral conductor
shall be equal and as specified for that particular circuit.
12. Color coding shall be followed for internal wiring also in a similar pattern as
described in chaper-1 wiring under the specification document.
13. Ferruling shall be neatly done after completing the circuit wiring with good
quality ferrules and ferrules shall be so installed that the letters are easily visible
from front side without adjusting the ferrule. Only factory marked and made
ferrules shall be acceptable. The ferrules shall clearly depict circuit name and
number as per GFC drawing.
14. The door of DB shall be aligned properly and there shall be no air gap left after
closing the DB door. Gaskets shall be used to make DB free from moisture.
15. Site fabricated DBs shall not be acceptable.
16. DB shall have Padlocking arrangement and shall be pad locked after complete
installation.
17. Distribution board shall be fully tested (both type and routine test) for its
components as per the specification laid under Indian standards. In particular
following test shall be done:
(a) Continuity test (both earth continuity and loop continuity)
(b) Insulation resistance test.
(c) Contact resistance test.

(d) Primary injection test.

(e) Trip test and trip unit reset test with Test knob of breaker.
(f) RCCB sensitivity test with earth leakage test kit ranging up to 50ma, 100ma
and 300ma.
(g) Phase rotation test.
18. After testing is done. The distribution board shall be functionally checked for
its functioning and shall be commissioned thereafter.
F. MEASUREMENTS
1. Measurement for DBs shall be done in numbers. DB shall be counted as a single

entity inclusive of its din bars, neutral bars, earth bars, doors, terminals,
internal wiring, terminations, dressing etc. The same shall be paid accordingly
2. Measurements of switchgears fixed inside DBs /cubical shall also be done in
numbers. However only switchgears shall be considered and DB/enclosures
shall be paid extra.
3. Measurements of blanking inside DBs /cubical shall also be done in numbers
and shall be paid accordingly.
G.SUBMITTALS

"Close out"
1. Product data (P.D )
H. PROCEDURES
shall strictly adhere "General conditions of Contract" & "Special Conditions of
contract ".
representative.


commencement of Installation of DB at site with detailed description of how the
job shall be carried out at site along with necessary testing and commissioning
procedures in detailed manner. This methodology statement has to be duly
approved by the concerning "Engineer in Charge" / Consultant / Client's
representative and work has to be carried out with respect to this approved work
methodology statement.
4. The contractor needs to ensure that a mock up for the job shall be shown to
concerning "Engineer in Charge" / Consultant / Client's representative at site and
said personnel.


8. Product data along with General arrangements and type test report shall be
submitted to "The Consultant" before indenting the material along with the
specification compliance sheet duly signed and stamped by the concerning Vendor.
Once the consultant approves the product data then only the procurement shall
be made.


I.CLAUSES
1. The Contractor shall strictly adhere "General conditions of Contract "& "Special
2. Supplier should provide the testing certificate for Ingress protection and
mechanical impact of distribution board tested at third party location.
3. The contractor shall be paid in accordance with the measurement as described.

test to be conducted at site , in-spite of the fact that a type test report or a routine

J.CLOSE OUT DOCUMENTATION
drive.

4.A draft of training document literature and presentation has to be submitted by

the contractor to concerning " Engineer in Charge" / Consultant / Client's

format.

CHAPTER-3
CABLES & END TERMINATIONS
A. SCOPE
1. The scope of this section comprises of supply, delivery, store at site, laying
of L.T. cables, fixing of Cable glands, cable dressing and termination in proper
position.
2. Items under this section covers Armoured / Unarmoured / flexible

AL/Cu. cables & their end terminations from Substation to different feeder pillars,
from feeder pillars to metering panels / Main LT Panel of different buildings and
therefrom to different distribution boards and HVAC Panels.
3. All control cables used for the specified scope of power cables along with their
end terminations used are also covered in this section.
4. All tools and accessories required to complete the job in full respect and as per
engineer in charge shall be included.

strictly enforced and adhered to. More particularly following codes should be strictly
followed.
IS : 7098-II XLPE insulated heavy duty cables for working voltages above
1000 V.
IS : 3961-II Recommended current ratings for cables.
IS : 8130 Conductors for insulated cables.
IS : 583 XLPE Insulation and outer sheath of electric cables.
IS : 7098-I Test Procedures for cables.
IS : 10418 Specification for drums for electric cables.
IS : 39751 Mild steel wire, strips, and tapes for armoring of cables.
IS : 1554 PVC insulated.
C. DEFINATIONS
Abbreviation used to define the following are stated in front of the entitiy
Aluminum Conductor A
XLPE Insulation 2X
Steel round wire armor W

Steel strip armor F

Steel Double round wire armor WW
Steel Double strip armor FF
Non-magnetic (A1.) round wire armor Wa
Non-magnetic (A1.) strip armor Fa
PVC outer sheath Y
MR 19.035 : Supply, Installation, Testing and Commissioning of following

armoured / flexible / unarmoured cables. All the below mentioned cables
shall be 1.1kV grade, XLPE insulated, FRLS type armoured cables of Al /
Cu, with inner and outer PVC sheath. The said cables shall confirm IS
7098-1, BS 5467, IEC 60502-1, BS 7889 with all supplementary. The rate
shall include complete Supply, laying/installation, testing and
commissioning rates including cost of conduits, fire retardant sealant and
all tools and accessories required to Complete the job in full respect.
(a) 3.5C X 300 Sqmm A2XFY.
MR 19.036 : (b) 3.5C X 240 Sqmm A2XFY.
MR 19.037 : (c) 3.5C X 185 Sqmm A2XFY.
MR 19.038 : (d) 3.5C X 150 Sqmm A2XFY.
MR 19.039 : (e) 3.5C X 120 Sqmm A2XFY.
MR 19.040 : (f) 3.5C X 95 Sqmm A2XFY.
MR 19.041 : (g) 3.5C X 70 Sqmm A2XFY.
MR 19.042 : (h) 3.5C X 50 Sqmm A2XFY.
MR 19.043 : (i) 3.5C X 35 Sqmm A2XFY.
MR 19.044 : (j) 4C X 25 Sqmm A2XFY.
MR 19.045 : (k) 4C X 16 Sqmm 2XWY.
MR 19.046 : (l) 4C X 10 Sqmm 2XWY.
MR 19.047 : (m) 4C X 6 Sqmm 2XWY.
MR 19.048 : (n) 4C X 4 Sqmm 2XWY.
MR 19.049 : (o) 4C X 16 Sqmm Cu. 2YY (PVC flexible cable) in a 32 mm

dia medium duty PVC conduit

MR 19.050 : (p) 4C X 10 Sqmm Cu. 2YY (PVC flexible cable) in a 32 mm

MR 19.051 (q) 4C X 6 Sqmm Cu. 2YY (PVC flexible cable)in a 32 mm dia

medium duty PVC conduit
MR 19.052 (r)4C X 4 Sqmm Cu. 2YY (PVC flexible cable)in a 32 mm dia

MR 19.053 (s) 3C X 10 Sqmm 2XWY
MR 19.054 (t) 3C X 6 Sqmm 2XWY
MR 19.055 (u) 3C X 4 Sqmm 2XWY
MR 19.056 (v) 3C X 6 Sqmm Cu. 2YY (PVC flexible cable) in a 25 mm dia

MR 19.057 (w) 3C X 4 Sqmm Cu. 2YY (PVC flexible cable) in a 25 mm dia

MR 19.058 (x) 3C X 2.5 Sqmm Cu. 2YY (PVC flexible cable) in a 25 mm

dia dia medium duty PVC conduit
MR 19.059 (y) 1C X 70 Sqmm 2XY
MR 19.060 (z) 1C X 120 Sqmm 2XY
MR 19.061 (aa) 1CX35 Sqmm 2XY Control Cables:
MR 19.062 (bb)2C x 2.5 sqmm cu. control cables
MR 19.063 (cc)4C x 2.5 sqmm cu. control cables
MR 19.064 (dd) 6C x 2.5 sqmm cu. control cables
1. Cables :
1.1 KV Grade cables shall be PVC insulated PVC sheathed, Al or Copper

conductor Armour confirming to IS 1554 with latest amendments.
Stranded Aluminum/Copper conductor shall be used. All
Aluminum/Copper XLPE cables insulation shall be of high grade Cross-
linked Polyethylene for insulation for extrusion process. Cores laid up.
The inner sheath should be bonded over with thermoplastic material for
protection against mechanical and electrical damage. Armoring should
be provided over the inner sheath to guard against mechanical damage.
Armoring should be Galvanized steel wires or galvanized steel strips. In
single core cables used in A.C. wires/strips, round steel wires should be
used; where diameter over the inner sheath does not exceed 13 mm,

flat steel armor should be used. Insulation shall be of XLPE type as per
latest IS general-purpose insulation for maximum rated conductor temp
90 degree C. The XLPE insulated cables shall conform to latest revision
IS read along with these specifications. The Conductor shall be stranded
Aluminum/Copper circular/sector shaped and compacted. In multi core
cables the core shall be identified by red, yellow, blue and black coloring
of insulation. The XLPE insulated 1100Volts grade power cables shall
conform to latest IS . The conductor shall be stranded Aluminum/Copper
as called for in the schedule of quantities. The outer sheath shall be as
per the requirement of type ST-2 of IS: 5831 of 1984.Conductor shall
be of electrolytic Aluminum/Copper conforming to IS: 8130 and are
compact circular or compact shaped. In Inner sheath laid up cores shall
be bonded over with thermo-plastic material for protection against
mechanical and electrical damage. Insulation, inner sheath and outer
sheath shall be applied by extrusion and lapping up process only.
Armoring shall be of galvanized steel wire/flat. Repaired cables shall not
be used. Current ratings of the cables shall be as per IS: 3961.The cables
shall be suitable for laying in racks, ducts, trenches, conduits and
underground buried installations with uncontrolled back fill and chances
of flooding by water. Progressive automatic in line sequential marking of
the length of cables in meters at every one meter shall be provided on
the outer sheath of all cables. Both ends of the cables shall be properly
sealed with PVC/Rubber caps so as to eliminate ingress of water during
transportation, storage and erection.
MR 19.065: Supplying and making and termination with brass

compression gland and aluminum lugs for following size of PVC insulated
and PVC sheathed /XLPE aluminum conductor cable of 1.1 KV grade of
the following sizes as required
(a)3.5 X 300 Sq mm (70mm)
MR 19.066 : (b) 3.5C X 240 Sqmm A2XFY.
MR 19.067 : (c) 3.5C X 185 Sqmm A2XFY.
MR 19.068 : (d) 3.5C X 150 Sqmm A2XFY.
MR 19.069 : (e) 3.5C X 120 Sqmm A2XFY.
MR 19.070 : (f) 3.5C X 95 Sqmm A2XFY.
MR 19.071 : (g) 3.5C X 70 Sqmm A2XFY.
MR 19.072 : (h) 3.5C X 50 Sqmm A2XFY.

MR 19.073 : (i) 3.5C X 35 Sqmm A2XFY.
MR 19.074 : (j) 4C X 25 Sqmm A2XFY.
MR 19.075 : Supplying and making and termination with brass

compression gland and copper lugs for following size of PVC insulated and
PVC sheathed /XLPE copper conductor cable of 1.1 KV grade of the
following sizes are required.
(k) 4C X 16 Sqmm 2XWY.
MR 19.076 : (l) 4C X 10 Sqmm 2XWY.
MR 19.077 : (m) 4C X 6 Sqmm 2XWY.
MR 19.078 : (n) 4C X 4 Sqmm 2XWY.
MR 19.079 : (o) 4C X 16 Sqmm Cu. 2YY (PVC flexible cable) in a 32 mm

MR 19.080 : (p) 4C X 10 Sqmm Cu. 2YY (PVC flexible cable) in a 32 mm

MR 19.081 : (q)4C X 6 Sqmm Cu. 2YY (PVC flexible cable) in a 32 mm

MR 19.082 : (r)4C X 4 Sqmm Cu. 2YY (PVC flexible cable) 2XY in a 32 mm

MR 19.083 : (s) 3C X 10 Sqmm 2XWY
MR 19.084 : (t) 3C X 6 Sqmm 2XWY
MR 19.085 : (u) 3C X 4 Sqmm 2XWY
MR 19.086 : (v) 3C X 6 Sqmm Cu. 2YY (PVC flexible cable) in a 25 mm dia

MR 19.087 : (w) 3C X 4 Sqmm Cu. 2YY (PVC flexible cable) in a 25 mm dia

MR 19.088: (x) 3C X 2.5 Sqmm Cu. 2YY (PVC flexible cable) in a 25 mm

dia dia medium duty PVC conduit
MR 19.089 : (y) 1C X 70 Sqmm 2XY
MR 19.090 : (z) 1C X 120 Sqmm 2XY
MR 19.091 : (aa) 1C X 35 Sqmm 2XY
Control Cables :
MR 19.092 : (bb)2C x 2.5 sqmm cu. control cables

MR 19.093 : (cc)4C x 2.5 sqmm cu. control cables
MR 19.094 : (dd) 6C x 2.5 sqmm cu. control cables
1. End termination :
All cable glands shall be made out of brass and of good quality as
approved. For all panel’s cable glands shall be of double compressions
type. Termination/ Joining of power and control cables shall be done by
means of compression methods using solder less tinned copper or
Aluminum terminal lugs. For control cables terminations, ring tongue or
reducer pin type lugs shall be used to suit the purpose. Proper crimping
tools with crimping paste shall be used to maintain proper conductivity
and avoid any air gap.
2. Cable Tags :
Cable tag shall be made out of stainless steel minimum 1.2 mm thick
and 25 mm x 100 mm size with holes provided to tag the cable. Following
information shall be engraved in the cable with good quality material and
the lettering height shall be 4.5mm
(a) Source of the Cable from where it is supplied power.
(b) Destination where the cable is terminated to
(c) No of Cores of cables
(d) Cross sectional area of the cable
(e)Complete notation as described under definition part of cable
specification.
1. Cables shall be stored in a dry covered place to prevent exposure to climate

conditions and wear and tear of wooden drums and it should be preferably
concrete surface.
2. All drums should be stored in such a manner as to leave sufficient space

between them for air circulation. It is desirable for drums to stand on battens
directly placed under the flange. In no case should the drums be stored “on the
flat” i.e. flange horizontal.
3. Both ends of the cables shall be properly sealed with PVC/Rubber caps so as to
prevent ingress of water, miniaturization of cores and armors during
transportation, storage and erection.
4. On receipt of cable drums visual inspection of drums should be carried out for
any damages to these cables. While unloading the cables certain precautions are
to be taken to ensure the safety of cables. The cable end to be opened on one

side and tested for its insulation and continuity.
5. The cable drums should not be dropped or thrown from the trucks/railway
wagons etc. during unloading operations as shock may cause serious damage to
cable layers. A crane may be used for unloading cable drums. While lifting the
cable drums with crane, it is recommended that the lagging should be left in place
to prevent the flanges from crushing on the cables. If crane is not available a ramp
should be prepared with approximate inclination of 1: 3 or 1: 4. The cable drums
should be rolled over the ramp by means of ropes and winches.
6. Additionally a sand bed at the foot of the ramp may be prepared to brake the
rolling of the cable drum. Cable should not be dragged along the earth surface.
Drums should be rolled in the direction of arrow only.
7. For laying of cables special care is to be taken to prevent sharp bending,
kinking, twisting. Cable should be unwound from drum by proper mounting the
cable drum on a cable wheel making sure the spindle is strong enough to carry
the weight without bending and that it is lying horizontally in the bearings, so as
to prevent the drum creeping to one side or the other, while it is rotating.
8. The maximum safe pulling force (when pulled by pulling eye) proper and safe
method of pulling of cable should be used depending upon the site conditions to
avoid any kind of damage to the cables. Following pulling forces to be noted.
Aluminum Conductor cables : 3.0 Kg/mm2

Copper conductor cables : 5 Kg/mm2
Special care is to be taken while laying cable at bends. Following are
the recommended bending radius for power and control cables.
Sr. Voltage PVC/XLPE Cables

No. rating in Multi Single
KV Co Core
re
1. Up to 1.1 12 D 15 D
2. Above 1.1 15 D 15 D
to 33 KV
D = D is over all diameter of cable.
9. Armored cables are to be laid on cable trays / underground as per relevant

design drawing and specifications.
10. All flexible cables shall be laid inside exposed / canceled conduits (rigid /
flexible)/ raceways or as per relevant design drawing and specifications.
11. If the cables are to be buried directly in the ground IS: 1255 is to be followed
for code of practice.
12. After the cable trench has been properly excavated and straightened, it shall
be covered with 100 mm thick layer of sand, the cable shall then be lifted and

placed over the sand cushion.
13. It may be planned to lay down the cables in stacks under the trench and under
such circumstances, cables shall be laid with the help of angular supports or cable
trays suitable to take the load of the cable. In case the cable is laid with the help
of angular supports inside the trench, such supports shall be provided at a regular
intervals so that the cable does not sag due to its weight.
14. After laying the cable the complete trench shall be filled with sand / earth up
to 200 mm depth from the ground level. A layer of silver sand along with a good
quality caution tape with warning written in Hindi and regional language shall be
laid throughout along the length of the trench at this level to indicate that electrical
cables are running below and the area shall not be further excavated without
suitable precautions and permissions. The complete trench may then be backfilled
with earth up to ground level.
14. Riggers shall ensure that while laying, the cable should not be subjected to
any form of damage. Cables shall be laid by skilled and experienced workmen
using adequate rollers to minimize stretching of the cable.
15. The cables shall not be laid in such a fashion that one cable crosses over the
other.
16. Proper spacing shall be left between two cables as mentioned in the GFC or as
specified or directed by engineer-in-charge.
17. Drain points shall be ensured inside these trenches so that in case of water
logging, the water ejects out through these drain points as a result of natural
gradient provided.
18. Man-holes shall be provided at strategic locations so as to ease the pulling of

cables and maintenance. The manhole shall be covered with suitable covers of
mentioned material and dimensions as per GFC.
19. When laid in cable trays above ground, power cables to be placed at the
bottom most layer and control cables at the top most layer. In case of multi core
power cables, cables shall be laid side by side with spacing not less than half the
diameter of larger cable.
20. Multi-core cables shall be clamped by means of mild steel galvanized saddles.
All cables below 1.1 KV single core cables if any should be clamped by means of
non-magnetic saddles. The saddles / clamps shall not be placed at the intervals
more than 1500 mm for horizontal and 1200 mm for vertical runs.
21. Multi core control cables can be laid touching each other in cable racks and
wherever required may be taken in two layers. These cables should be clamped
by means of PVC straps for horizontal and vertical runs. Fabricated aluminum
clamps may be used at regular intervals.
22. All the cable shall be properly identified at regular intervals and care shall be
exercised in laying cables to avoid forming kinks.

23. The relative position of the cables, laid on the cable tray shall be preserved
and the cables shall not cross each other.
24. At all changes in direction in horizontal and vertical planes, the cable shall
be bent smooth with a radius as recommended by the manufacturers.
25. All cables shall be laid with minimum half diameter gap and shall be clamped
at every meter to the cable tray and shall be tagged for identification with Cable
tag and clamped properly. Tags shall be provided at both ends and all changes in
directions both sides of wall and floor crossings. All cable shall be identified by
embossing on the tag the information as laid down under this specification.
26. If there is a need to joint the cable due to finishing of cable in cable drum such
joints shall be made through the approved straight through joints and jointing kits
as directed by and approved by engineer-in-charge at site.
27. Cables shall be fully tested (both type and routine test) as per the specification
laid under Indian standards. In particular following test shall be done at site.
(a) Insulation resistance test.
(b) Continuity test.
F. MEASUREMENTS
1. Measurement for cables shall be done in running meters and shall be measured
from one point of termination of cable to the other.
2. Extra loop length of the cable within, if laid within the measuring points as
described in point no. 1 shall only be considered if so directed by " Engineer in
Charge" / Consultant / Client's representative.
3. Cable trays, raceways, trenches, pipes and conduits to be measured extra under
relevant item head unless specified with the cable and if so specified with the
cable the length of these Cable trays, raceways, trenches, pipes and conduits
shall be measured along the length of the cable.
4. End terminations along with lugs and glands shall be measured in numbers.
One termination of cable including 1 gland and requisite no. of lugs shall be
counted as 1
G.SUBMITTALS
The contractor shall submit following submittals as mentioned in "Procedures"

and "Close out"
1. Product data (P.D )
H. PROCEDURES

contract ".
2. Any deviation in "Good for construction" drawings with respect to following

shall be brought into the notification of consultant in prior before indenting
material and execution of job at site :
representative.

commencement of Installation of cables at site with detailed description of how
the job shall be carried out at site along with necessary testing and
commissioning procedures in detailed manner. This methodology statement has
to be duly approved by the concerning "Engineer in Charge" / Consultant /
Client's representative and work has to be carried out with respect to this
approved work methodology statement.
4 The contractor needs to ensure that a mock up for the job shall be shown
to concerning "Engineer in Charge" /Consultant / Client's representative at site
and the rest work shall further carry on after the approval of mock up at site by
the said personnel.


submitted to " The Consultant" before indenting the material along with the
be made.


snags identified during inspection shall be attended and rectified by the
contractor.
I.CLAUSES
1. The Contractor shall strictly adhere "General conditions of Contract " & "Special
3. Extra loop length of the cable within, if laid within the measuring points as
described in point no. 1 of measurement of this section, shall only be paid if so
directed by " Engineer in Charge" / Consultant / Client's representative.
4.Cable trays, raceways, trenches, pipes and conduits to be paid extra under
relevant item head unless specified with the cable and if so specified with the cable
these Cable trays, raceways, trenches, pipes and conduits shall be paid according
to the measurement as described in measurement heading under this section.

test to be conducted at site , in spite of the fact that a type test report or a routine


8. The cost of straight through joints and cable jointing kit used for jointing of
cables shall not be paid extra.
close out submittals :
drive.


format.

CHAPTER -4
CABLE TRAYS AND RACEWAYS
A. SCOPE
commissioning of following:
1. Cable trays (both ladder type and perforated type) along with its
accessories used for all internal areas.
2. Raceways along with its accessories used for all internal areas.
3. All tools and accessories required to complete the job in full respect and as
per engineer in charge.

strictly followed.

3. NEMA VE-2 -2013
4. IS 1079, 2029, 2639 - Cable trays and their accessories
C. DEFINATIONS
Accessory: Components used to supplement the function of a straight section

or fitting. Examples include, but are not limited to, dropout, cover, conduit
adapter, hold-down device, and divider cable tray support.
Span: The distance between the centerlines of supports.
Cable tray system: A section or assembly of sections, and associated fittings,

forming a mechanical system used to support cables and raceways.
Channel cable tray: A fabricated structure consisting of a one-piece ventilated-

or solid-bottom channel section.
Connector: A component that joins any combination of cable tray straight

sections and fittings.

MR 19.095 : Supplying and installing following size of perforated hot

dip galvanized G.I cable tray, with galvanizing thickness of 65
micron with perforations not more than 17.5%, in convenient
sections, joined with connectors, suspended from ceiling with G.I
suspenders including bolts and nuts, etc. as required.
(a)100 mm width x 50 mm depth x 1.6 mm thickness
MR 19.096 : (b)150 mm width x 50 mm depth x 1.6 mm thickness.
MR 19.097 : (c)300 mm width x 50 mm depth x 1.6 mm thickness
MR 19.098 : (d)600 mm width x 50 mm depth x 2 mm thickness
MR 19.099 : (e)900 mm width x 50 mm depth x 2 mm thickness
1. Perforated Cable tray :
Cable tray system shall comprise of hot dip galvanized G.I cable trays, with
galvanizing thickness of 65 micron and standard length of 2.5 meters made out
of 2 mm thick perforated sheet metal for cable trays which are 600mm wide and
above and 1.6mm thick for cable trays whose width is below 600mm. The
construction of the cable trays shall be as per the approved GA drawing from
Vendor. The construction of cable tray shall follow NEMA standards. The cable
trays shall be hot dip galvanized with perforations not more than 17.5% and
factory fabricated out of G.I., angle iron, tee, bends, sections, flats and perforated
sheet for different loads. All accessories shall follow NEMA VE-2 standards
MR 19.100 : Supply and fixing of factory fabricated GI ladder type hot dip
galvanized cable trays, with radial bends, suspenders and supports as per
specification and of the following sizes.
(a) : 450 mm width X 50 mm depth X 2 mm thickness.
1. Ladder type cable tray :
Hot dip-galvanized factory fabricated GI ladder type cable trays shall be made up
of 2mm thick GI sheet steel with radial bends, elbows, reducers, tee's, coupler
plates & supports for cable trays. The runners shall be placed at a regular interval
of 200mm along the length and dimensions of rungs shall be (30mm x 15 mm )
with 2 mm thickness .Rungs shall be bolted type and complete assembly shall
follow NEMA VE-2 Standards.
MR 19.101 : Supply, Installation testing and commissioning of metallic

adaptable raceway system, compartmentalized into two sections of
required sizes as per drawing of below mentioned sizes suitable for
passing through walls and floors as per the layout ,suitable for FRLS

wires confirming to IS:694 and extra low voltage cables for data
/AV/telephone. The raceway shall be MS powder coated, have Z- section,
hole with thread for cover screw, coupler plate, cover, junction box, fly
cover, inspection box flushed to the finished floor at suitable distances
etc. as required. Raceways shall be fixed in PCC below the finished floor
level as directed. The screw for cover fixing shall be counter sunk type.
The cover shall have a thickness of 2mm.The cost shall also include the
cost of bends couplers and any other supporting accessories.
(a) : 50 mm x 40 mm x 1.6 mm
MR 19.102 : (b) : 75 mm x 40 mm x 1.6 mm
MR 19.103 : (c) : 100 mm x 40 mm x 1.6 mm
MR 19.104 : (d) : 150 mm x 40 mm x 1.6 mm
MR 19.105 : (e) : 200 mm x 40 mm x 1.6 mm
MR 19.106: (f) : 300 mm x 40 mm x 2 mm
1. Raceways :
The proposed Raceway system shall be metallic adaptable raceway system. The
raceways shall be made up of Powder coated MS sheet. The raceways
must be compartmentalize into two sections of required sizes as per
drawing with separations to accommodate power and ELV wiring. The
raceways shall have suitable strength to pass under floor without
breaking. The raceways must have smooth surfaces both inside and
outside. The raceway shall have Z- section, hole with thread for cover
screw, coupler plate, cover, junction box, fly cover, inspection box
flushed to the finished floor at suitable distances etc as required. The
screw for cover fixing shall be counter sunk type and shall be fully
adjustable type. The cover shall have a thickness of 2mm.The min
thickness of the raceways shall be 1.6mm and for 300mm wide raceway
it shall be 2mm.
1. The Complete installation of cable trays shall be in accordance with NEMA VE-
2 standards.
2.Before installing cable in the cable tray, examine cable paths to ensure all areas
are free of debris that may interfere with cable installation.
3. Cable tray should never be used as a walkway.
4. Most cable installations require the use of cable pulling tools On horizontal
straight runs, cables generally ride on rollers mounted in or on cable trays. These
rollers should be properly spaced, depending on the size and weight of the cable,
to prevent the cable from sagging and dragging in the cable tray during the pull.

5.Cable manufacturer shall be contacted for information regarding proper roller

spacing.
6.Cables may be fastened to the cable tray by means of cable clamps or cable ties
Generally, cables shall be fastened every 450 mm (18 in) on vertical runs.
Although not required by the NEC, single conductor cables can be fastened on
horizontal runs to maintain spacing and ensure that the cable is confined within
the cable fill area.
7.When using cable clamps, the clamps should be sized correctly and tightened
only enough to secure the cable without indenting the jacket. The same precaution
should be observed with cable ties, and they should be applied with a pressure
limiting device.
8.Extremely long vertical drops introduce a new set of issues requiring special
consideration. The weight per meter (foot) of the cable multiplied by the number
of meters (feet) in the vertical drop, in many cases, exceeds the load carrying
capacity of the cable tray component. The one or two rungs supporting this weight
are likely to be damaged, and the vertical load could exceed the allowable cable
tension. The cable weight should be supported in such a manner as to prevent
damage to the cable tray or cable during this type of installation.
9.As the cable is installed, intermediate supports should be installed on the vertical
drop to break the cable load into segments supported at multiple places.
10. Once the cable is installed in an open cable tray system, care must be taken
to protect the exposed cables from falling objects or debris that could cause
damage to the cable. In areas where the cable tray is to be covered, covers should
be installed as soon as possible. Temporary protection for the cables and cable
tray can be constructed of available wood or metal materials until the risk of
damage has passed.
11. Before installing a metallic adaptable raceway system clear marking shall be
done at site for the route where the raceway is planned to be laid.
12. The location of junction boxed shall then be identified and marked upon the
same routing.
13. The raceways shall be laid in straight sections and proper alignment shall be
ensured for the same.
14. Raceway shall be installed in a good quality PCC layer. This PCC layer shall be
laid along the path of raceway and once PCC settles down to its required strength
raceways shall be laid above this PCC bedding and shall be fastened with the help
of adjustable type screws.
15. The coupler plates shall be provided at regular interval as specified in approved
construction methodology.
16. All bolted connections shall be checked for their tightness and strength.
17. Flush type inspection boxes shall then be laid and fixed at the strategic

locations.
18. Utmost co-ordination is required while marking the race way routing and it is
suggested to mark the raceway route at site in co-ordination with the tile layout
proposed by "The Architect".
19. Raceways shall be protected by the means of thermacol or any water proof
cover after their installation.
20. Finished flooring shall then be laid above this raceways.
21. Fish wires shall be provided at each junction box to enable the ease of pulling
of wires inside the raceway.
F. MEASUREMENTS
1. Measurement for cables trays / raceways shall be done in running meters and
shall be measured from one point of termination of cable tray to the another.
2. Extra drops or branching of the cable tray / raceways, if laid within the
measuring points as described in point no. 1 shall only be considered if so
directed by " Engineer in Charge" / Consultant / Client's representative.
3. Coupler plates, Tees , bends and other accessories including inspection boxes
for raceways shall not be measured extra as these are considered to be an
integrated part of cable management system and shall not be measured
separately.
G.SUBMITTALS

"Close out"
1. Product data ( P.D )
H. PROCEDURES
contract ".


representative.

commencement of Installation of cables trays and raceways at site with detailed
description of how the job shall be carried out at site along with necessary testing
and commissioning procedures in detailed manner. This methodology statement
has to be duly approved by the concerning "Engineer in Charge" / Consultant /
Client's representative and work has to be carried out with respect to this
approved work methodology statement.
4.The contractor needs to ensure that a mock up for the job shall be shown to
concerning " Engineer in Charge" / Consultant / Client's representative at site and
said personnel.


be made.


I.CLAUSES
1. The Contractor shall strictly adhere "General conditions of Contract" & "Special
3. Extra drops or branching of the cable tray / raceways, if laid within the
measuring points as described in point no. 1 of measurement under this section
shall only be paid if so directed by " Engineer in Charge" / Consultant / Client's
representative.
4. Coupler plates, Tees, bends and other accessories including inspection boxes
for raceways shall not be paid extra as these are considered to be an integrated
part of cable management system and shall not be measured separately.


8. The cost of tools and kits used for installation of cables trays and raceways shall
not be paid extra.

drive.


format.

CHAPTER - 5
EARTHING & LIGHTNING PROTECTION
A. SCOPE
1. Lightning protection of building, earthing pits, earthing conductor and any

other accessory required for proper grounding of all exposed and metallic
conductors and lightning protection system.
2. Essential requirements of earthing system components and their installation.

This shall be read with relevant standards, which lays down criteria for their
design. For details not covered in these specifications IS code of Practice on
Earthing (IS 3043 : 1987) shall be referred to.

strictly followed.

3. IS 3043:1987 - Code of Practice for Earthing
4. IE rules - Indian electricity rules
5. IEEE :80 :2000
6. NFC 17-102.
C. DEFINATIONS
Definitions as per IS:3043 shall be followed for earthing.
MR 19.107 : Supply, installation, connections, testing & commissioning of

17.2 mm dia. rod of 3 meter length having copper bonding of 250 micron,
along with 5 kg of maintenance free ground enhancing compound & shall
comply as per IEEE 80:2000 Clause 14.5d with fused rod to tape clamp
for interconnection of strip from earth pit to equipment.
1. Earth Pit :
Earthing electrode shall consist of 17.2 mm dia. rod of 3 meter length having
copper bonding of 250 micron. The electrode shall buried vertically in the

ground as far as practicable below permanent moisture level with its top not
less than 200 mm belowground level. The electrode shall be in one piece and
no joints shall be allowed in the electrode. Earth electrode shall not be located
in proximity to a metal fence. It shall be kept clear of the building foundations
and in no case shall be nearer than 2 meters from the outer face of the wall.
The pipe earth electrode shall be kept vertically and surrounded with
maintenance free ground enhancing compound & shall comply as per IEEE
80:2000 Clause 14.5d with fused rod to tape clamp for interconnection of
strip from earth pit to equipment. The earthing shall be completely
maintenance free with no need of pouring water into it. Each earth pit shall
be covered with a 300 mm x 300 mm CI inspection chamber.
DSR Item No. 5.7 : Supplying and laying 6 SWG GI wire at 0.50 meter
below ground level for conductor earth electrode including connections /
termination with GI thimble etc. as required.
1. Earth Conductor:
Protective earthing conductor may be site fabricated or factory fabricated

made up of GI of required dimensions as mentioned in the tender document.
The earth conductor shall be rust free and shall be painted with silver paint
to prevent rusting in due course of time. Bare copper conductors shall not be
used as a protective conductor wherever required, a copper cable with
insulation shall be used and as specified. The protective earth conductor shall
be neatly fabricated with smooth surface.
DSR Item No. 5.9 : Supplying and laying 25mm x 5mm GI strip at 0.50
meter below ground as strip earth electrode including connections /
terminating with GI nut, bolts, spring, washer etc.as required (Jointing
shall be done by overlapping and with 2 set of G.I nut bolt and spring
washer spaced at 50mm).
1. Earth Conductor:

MR 19.108 : Supplying and laying 32mm x 6 mm GI strip at 0.50 metre

below ground as strip earth electrode including connections / terminating
with GI nut, bolts, spring, washer etc.as required (Jointing shall be done
by overlapping and with 2 set of G.I nut bolt and spring washer spaced at
50mm).
1. Earth Conductor:


DSR Item No. 6.1 : Providing and fixing of lightning conductor finial ,
made of 25mm dia 300mm long Copper tube, having single prong at top,
with 85mm dia 3mm thick Copper base plate including holes etc. complete
as required.
1. Conventional lighting protection rod:
Air terminal shall be made up of Copper tube thoroughly protected against

corrosion by a zinc coating. The size of the air terminal shall be 20 mm x 3mm.
Air termination networks may consist of vertical or horizontal conductors, or
combinations of both. For the purpose of lightning protection, the vertical and
horizontal conductors are considered equivalent and the use of pointed air
terminations, or vertical finial is, therefore, not regarded as essential. A vertical
air termination, where provided, need not have more than one point, and shall
project at least 30 cm, above the object, salient point or network on which it is
fixed. For a flat roof, horizontal air termination along the outer perimeter of the
roof shall be used. For a roof of larger area a network of parallel horizontal
conductors shall be installed. No part of the roof should be more than 9 m from
the nearest horizontal protective conductor horizontal air terminations should be
carried along the contours such as ridges, parapets and edges of flat roofs, and,
where necessary, over flat surfaces, in such a way as to join each air termination
to the rest, and should themselves form a closed network. All metallic projections
including reinforcement, on or above the main surface of the roof which are
connected to the general mass of the earth, should be bonded and form a part of
the air termination network. If portions of a structure vary considerably in height,
any necessary air terminations or air termination network for the lower portions
should be bonded to the down conductors of the taller portions, in addition to their
own down conductors.
DSR Item No. 6.5 : Providing and fixing Copper tape 20mm x 3mm thick
on parapet or surface of wall for lightning conductor complete as
required.(for horizontal run)
DSR Item No. 6.6 : Providing and fixing Copper tape 20mm x 3mm thick
on parapet or surface of wall for lightning conductor complete as
required.(for vertical run)
DSR Item No. 6.11 : Providing and fixing testing joint , made of 20mm x
3mm thick copper strip, 125 mm long, with 4 Nos. of tinned brass bolts,
nuts, check nuts and spring washers etc. complete as required.
1. Earth Conductor:


made up of Copper of required dimensions as mentioned in the tender
document. The earth conductor shall be rust free and shall be painted with
silver paint to prevent rusting in due course of time. Bare copper conductors
shall not be used as a protective conductor wherever required, a copper cable
with insulation shall be used and as specified. The protective earth conductor
shall be neatly fabricated with smooth surface.
1. Earth resistance value and nature of soil shall be suitably studied by the
contractor and complete installation shall be in accordance with IS :3043 &
IEEE:80:2000 whichever more stringent.
2. Land shall be suitably excavated for earthing and pipe electrode shall be suitably
laid as per the specification described.
3. Clearances required among various earthing system components shall be in

accordance with IS :3043 & IEEE:80:2000 whichever more stringent.
4. In the case of pipe earth electrode, wire type earthing conductor shall be
secured using a through bolt, nuts and washers and terminating socket.
5. A double C-clamp arrangement shall be provided for terminating tape type

earthing conductor. Galvanized “C” shaped strips, bolts, washers, nuts and check
nuts of adequate size shall be used for the purpose.
6. The earthing conductor from the electrode up to the building shall be protected
from mechanical injury by a medium class, 15 mm dia. GI pipe in the case of wire,
and by 40 mm dia, medium class GI pipe in the case of strip. The protection pipe
in ground shall be buried at least 30 cm deep (to be increased to 60 cm in case of
road crossing and pavements). The portion within the building shall be recessed
in walls and floors to adequate depth in due co-ordination with the building work.
9. The earthing conductor shall be securely connected at the other end to the
earth stud/earth bar provided on the switch board by:
(a)Soldered or preferably crimped lug, bolt, nut and washer in the case of wire,
and
(b) Bolt, nut and washer in case of strip conductor.
10. Enclosures and frame work of all current carrying equipment and accessories,
structural steel/columns shall be adequately earthed to a single Earthing system,
unless separate Earthing systems are specifically stipulated.
11. If the earth resistance is too high and the multiple electrode Earthing does not
give adequate low resistance to earth, then the soil resistivity immediately
surrounding the earth electrodes shall be reduced by adding IEEE approved backfill
compound.

10. Earth pits along with earth strips shall be fully tested as per the specification
laid under IS :3043 & IEEE:80:2000 whichever more stringent.. In particular
following test shall be done at site.
(a) Earth continuity test
(b) Measurement of earth resistance (both earth grid and individual)
F. MEASUREMENTS
1. Measurement for earth pits shall be made in number.

2. Measurement for earth conductor shall be made in meters and shall be
measured between the equipment or component to earth pit .
3. Extra earthing conductor, if laid within the measuring points as described in
point no. 2 shall only be considered if so directed by " Engineer in Charge" /
Consultant / Client's representative.
4. Soil treatment compound, earth pit covers and other accessories excluding
earth conductor shall not be measured extra as these are considered to be an
integrated part of earth pit and shall not be measured separately.
G.SUBMITTALS
The contractor shall submit following submittals as mentioned in "Procedures"

and "Close out"
H. PROCEDURES
contract ".
representative.

commencement of Installation of earth pits at site with detailed description of how
the job shall be carried out at site along with necessary testing and commissioning


4 The contractor needs to ensure that a mock up for the job shall be shown
to concerning "Engineer in Charge" / Consultant / Client's representative at site
and the rest work shall further carry on after the approval of mock up at site by
the said personnel.


be made.

I.CLAUSES

3. Extra earthing conductor, if laid within the measuring points as described in

point no. 2 shall only be paid if so directed by " Engineer in Charge" /
Consultant / Client's representative.
4. Soil treatment compound, earth pit covers and other accessories excluding
earth conductor shall not be paid extra as these are considered to be an integrated
part of earth pit and shall not be measured separately.


drive.



format.
CHAPTER - 6
UPS
A. SCOPE
commissioning of following un-interrupted power supply (UPS) system:
1. Three Phase input, Three phase output UPS.
2. Single Phase input, Single phase output UPS.
3. All internal components of the assembly along with tools and accessories
required to complete the job in full respect and as per engineer in charge.


strictly followed.

3. IS 1652 (1991) - Stationary cells and batteries, lead-acid type with plant
positive plates
4. IS 8320 (2000)- General Requirements and Methods of tests for Lead-acid
Storage Batteries
5. IEC 62040 (2008)- Uninterruptible power systems (UPS)- Part 1: General
and safety requirements for UPS
6. IEC 62040 (2005)- Uninterruptible power systems (UPS)– Part 2: Electro -
magnetic compatibility(EMC) requirements.
7. IEC 62040 (2011) - Uninterruptible power systems (UPS)- Part 3: Method
of specifying the performance and test requirements
8. IEC 61000 (2002) - Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)- Part 2-2:
Environment – Compatibility levels for low-frequency conducted disturbances
and signaling in public low voltage power supply systems
9. IEC 61000 (2006) Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)- Part 4: Testing and
measurement techniques.
C. DEFINATIONS
As per OEM's recommendations and IS 1885
MR 19.109 : Design, supply, Installation testing and commissioning of

following size and configuration IGBT based UPS system as per the said
specifications with inbuilt isolation transformer as per kVA rating with a
battery backup of 30 minutes. (12 volt battery comprising of 2 V cells)
(a) 7.5kVA three phase input three phase output
MR 19.110 : (b) 10kVA three phase input three phase output

MR 19.111 : (c) 20kVA three phase input three phase output
MR 19.112 : (d) 60kVA three phase input three phase output
MR 19.113: (e) 5kVA single phase input single phase output
MR 19.114 : (f) 5kVA Three phase input three phase output
The UPS system shall conform to IEC 62040 and shall consist of UPS module,
battery system, battery protective device, static bypass transfer switch, controls

and monitoring. Input ac power shall be connected to the normal source ac input
of the UPS module.
Alternate power source shall be connected to bypass/maintenance bypass. The

battery shall be connected to the dc input of the UPS module through the battery
protective device. The ac output of the UPS system shall be connected to the
critical loads.
Power semiconductors shall be fused with fast-acting fuses to prevent cascaded

or sequential semiconductor failures. Indicator lamp or display panel denoting
blown fuse conditions shall be readily observable by the operator without removing
panels or opening cabinet doors.
Provide dual control power supplies. The control power circuit shall have suitable
protection, appropriately marked and located in the immediate vicinity of the input
protective device.
The components and the system shall be designed to minimize the emission of
electromagnetic waves that may cause interference with other equipment. Wiring
practices, materials, and coding shall be in accordance with the requirements of
applicable standards. Wire runs shall be protected in a manner which separates
power and control wiring. Control wiring shall be minimum No. 16 AWG extra-
flexible stranded copper. Logic-circuit wiring may be smaller. Ribbon cables shall
be minimum No. 22 AWG. Control wiring shall have permanently attached wire
numbers.
The printed circuit board (PCB) subassemblies shall be mounted in pull-out and/or
swing-out trays where feasible. Cable connections to the trays shall be sufficiently
long to allow easy access to all components. Where not feasible to mount PCB
subassemblies in pull-out or swing-out trays, they shall be firmly mounted inside
the enclosure. Every PCB subassembly shall be monitored. Self-test and diagnostic
circuitry shall be included in the logic circuits such that a fault can be isolated
down to the PCB subassembly level.
UPS system shall be installed in cabinets of heavy-duty structure for floor
mounting. UPS module cabinet shall be structurally adequate for forklift handling
or lifting. Removable lifting eyes shall be provided on top of each cabinet. UPS
module cabinet shall have hinged and lockable doors on the front only, with
assemblies and components accessible from the front. Doors shall be key lockable.
Operating controls shall be located outside the locked doors. Input, output, and
battery cables shall be installed through the top or bottom of the cabinet.
Equipment cabinet shall be cleaned, primed and painted in the manufacturer's

standard colors, in accordance with accepted industry standards. Cabinets shall
be labeled for arc flash hazard with warning sign reading: "Warning-Potential Arc
Flash Hazard. Appropriate PPE and Tools required when working on this
equipment" or similar wording.
Live parts (300 volts and above) that are exposed when front access doors are
open shall be adequately protected or covered to minimize the chance of
accidental contact.

UPS shall be equipped with instruction plates including warnings and cautions,
suitably located, and describing any special or important procedures to be followed
in operating and servicing the equipment. The control panel display shall also
provide warning messages prior to performing a critical function.
The UPS system shall be compatible with the load characteristics defined in the
load profile below and load configuration. Compensation for UPS/load interaction
problems resulting from nonlinear loads or transformer and motor inrush shall be
provided.
Type of load: emergency lighting / power plugs / non linear loads

Size of load: as defined in relevant drawing
Switching pattern: cycled daily.
Steady-state characteristics: 0.8 lagging power factor.
Special factors: harmonic characteristics - Total Harmonic Distortion 30 percent.
IP Class :IP-20
Following shall be the ratings :
Three Phase input / Three Phase output UPS
1. Input
 Nominal Voltage 380/400/415 Vac (LL) & 220/230/240 Vac
(LN).
 Frequency 40-65Hz (self-adaptive to 50 Hz and 60 Hz)
 Wiring. 3Phase+ N + PE
 THD i <5%
 Power factor >0.99
 Dual line input Supported
 Battery Type : Maintenance free VRLA batteries
2. Output
 Voltage 380/400/415 Vac (LL) & 220/230/240 Vac (LN)
 Frequency 50/60 Hz
 Phase Three phase four wire + ground
 Power factor 0.8
 Overload capability 125%, 10 min 150%, 1 min.
3. Operation environment
 Temperature 0°C to 40°C
 Humidity 20% to 90%
4. Efficiency
 Line mode 92%
 HE (high efficiency) 98% Display
5. LCD English UPS state and operation introduction. Input voltage,
output voltage, current, frequency, charger voltage and current, fault
and warning display.
6. LED UPS operation state
7. Warning equipment

 Buzzer alarm and light double LED

8. Communication interface
 RS232, AS/400, RS485, service, EPO, compensate interface for
battery temperature, intelligent slot.
9. Parallel Operation : The UPS shall have parallel kit suitable to operate up
to 4 UPS in parallel of same capacity.
Single Phase input / Single Phase output UPS

1. Input
 Input Voltage range: 140-300 Vac (load dependent).
 Nominal Voltage:220 VAC 1 Phase.
 Frequency Range: 40-65Hz.
 Frequency : 50-60 Hz
 Wiring. 1 Phase+ N + PE
 THD i <5%
 Power factor =0.9.
2. Output
 Nominal Voltage:220 VAC 1 Phase.
 Output receptacle: 6A Indian.
 On battery voltage regulation : +12% / -18%
 Overload capability 125%, 1 min.
3. Battery
 Battery type : 2 x 12V
 UPS shall be started without being connected to Ac power.
 Battery charger shall have a max charging current of 10A.
 Recharge time shall be 5 hours to recover 90% capacity.
4. Communication
 Both audible and visual alarms in case of overload, fault,
battery discharge and any other abnormal functionality.
 Shall be equipped with RS-485 port as well as USB port.
 Shall have data logging facility.
 Shall be communicable with network racks.
5. Operation environment
 Temperature 0°C to 40°C
 noise less than 50dbA at a distance of 4 meters.
 Humidity 0% to 90%.
 Storage temperature: 15°C to 50°C.

Each UPS shall have the following transient response :
1. For voltage transients :

At 100% load step +/- 5%
At loss and return of a. c. input +/- 1%
Auto or manual transfer of load from UPS to by-pass +/- 4%
Recovery to 99% steady state condition within 20 ms after any of the above
transient.
2. For frequency transients: +/- 0.1 Hz , slew rate shall be 2 Hz max per second
(selection in 0.5 Hz / sec increments )
Following shall be the requirement for each UPS module:

1. UPS module shall consist of a rectifier/charger unit and a 3-phase inverter unit
with their associated transformers, synchronizing equipment if applicable,
protective devices, surge suppression, and accessories as required for operation.
2. The subassemblies in one UPS module shall be interchangeable with the

corresponding modules within the same UPS, and from one UPS system to another
of identical systems.
3. Rectifier/charger unit shall be solid state and shall provide regulated direct
current to the dc bus, supplying power to the inverter and charging the battery
plant.
4.Rectifier/charger unit shall be provided with an input protective device. The

protective device shall be sized to accept simultaneously the full-rated load and
the battery recharge current. The protective device shall be capable of shunt
tripping and shall have rated amperes symmetrical interrupting rating as specified.
The protective device shall have provision for locking in the "off" position.
5.A surge suppression device shall be installed at the UPS input to protect against
lightning and switching surges. Internal components shall be protected from
surges that enter at each ac input connection including main input, static bypass
transfer switch.
6.Rectifier/charger unit shall be protected by a power walk-in feature such that

when ac power is returned to the ac input bus, the total initial power requirement
will not exceed 20 percent of the rated full load current. This demand shall increase
gradually to 100 percent of the rated full load current plus the battery charging
current over the specified time interval.
7. Rectifier/charger unit shall be sized for the following two simultaneous

operating conditions:

a. Supplying the full rated load current to the inverter.

b. Recharging a fully-discharged battery to 95 percent of rated ampere-hour
capacity within ten times the discharge time after normal ac power is restored.
8. Primary current limiting: Battery-charging current shall be voltage regulated

and current limited. The battery-charging current limit shall be separately
adjustable from 2 percent to 25 percent of the maximum discharge current. After
the battery is recharged, the rectifier/charger unit shall maintain the battery at
full float charge until the next operation under input power failure. Battery charger
shall be capable of providing equalizing charge to the battery.
Rectifier/charger unit shall minimize ripple current and voltage supplied to the
battery; the ripple current into the battery shall not exceed 3 percent RMS of the
inverter input rated current; the ripple voltage into the battery shall not exceed 2
percent RMS of the float voltage.
9.Rectifier/charger unit shall have manual means for adjusting dc voltage for
battery equalization, to provide voltage within plus 10 percent of nominal float
voltage.
10. Module shall have a dc protective device to isolate the module from the battery
system. The protective device size and interrupting rating shall be as required by
system capacity and shall incorporate a shunt trip as required by circuit design.
The protective device shall have provision for locking in the "off" position.
11. Inverter unit shall be a solid-state device deriving its power from the dc bus
(rectifier or battery source) and providing ac power within specified limits to the
critical load. Inverter shall utilize microprocessor controlled solid state Pulse Width
Modulation (PWM) controlled IGBT power transistor technology to shape the ac
output.
12.The inverter shall be able to sustain an overload as specified across its out-put
terminals. The inverter shall not shut off, but shall continue to operate within rated
parameters, with inverse-time overload shutdown protection. If the overload
condition persists beyond the rated parameters of the inverter, the inverter shall
current limit, load shall be transferred to the bypass source, and the inverter shall
disconnect automatically from the critical load bus.
If the bypass source is not available and the overload/fault condition continues,
the inverter shall current limit for a limited time as determined by the
manufacturer and shall shut down to protect the internal components.
13. The inverter shall normally operate in phase-lock and synchronism with the
bypass source. When the bypass source frequency deviates by more than ±0.1
Hz, the internal frequency oscillator shall automatically take control and become
the new frequency reference. Upon restoration of the bypass source within the
required tolerance, the inverter shall synchronize back with that source at a slew
rate not exceeding the specified rate. The oscillator shall be temperature
compensated and shall be manually adjustable.

14. The output protective device shall be capable of shunt tripping or opening on
an applied control signal and shall have the proper frame size and trip rating to
supply overload current as specified. External output protective device shall have
provision for locking in the "off" position. The inverter output protective device
shall work in conjunction with the bypass protective device for both manual and
automatic load transfers to and from bypass power.
15. UPS module shall have built-in self-protection against under voltage,
overvoltage, overcurrent and surges introduced on the ac input source and/or the
bypass source. The UPS shall also have built-in self-protection against overvoltage
and voltage surges introduced at the output terminals by paralleled sources, load
switching, or circuit breaker operation in the critical load distribution system.
16. UPS module shall be self-protected against overcurrent, sudden changes in

output load and short circuits at the output terminals. UPS module shall be
provided with output reverse power detection which shall cause the module to be
disconnected from the critical load bus when output reverse power is present. UPS
module shall have built-in protection against permanent damage to itself and the
connected load for predictable types of failure within itself and the connected load.
At the end of battery discharge limit, the module shall shut down without damage
to internal components.
17. A static bypass transfer circuit shall be provided as an integral part of the UPS
and shall consist of a static switch, made up of two reverse-paralleled SCRs
(silicon-controlled rectifiers) per phase conductor, and a bypass protective device
or bypass switch, made up of a contactor or motor operated circuit breaker. The
bypass protective device shall be in parallel with the static switch. The inverter
output protective device shall disconnect and isolate the inverter from the bypass
transfer circuit.
18. The control logic shall contain an automatic transfer circuit that senses the
status of the inverter logic signals and alarm conditions and provides an
uninterrupted transfer of the load to the bypass ac power source, without
exceeding the transient limits specified herein, when a malfunction occurs in the
UPS or when an external overload condition occurs. The power section of the static
bypass transfer circuit shall be provided as a plug-in type assembly to facilitate
maintenance. The static bypass transfer circuit shall be used to connect the input
bypass ac power source to the critical load when required, and shall have the
following features:
(a)Uninterrupted Transfer
The static bypass transfer switch shall automatically cause the bypass ac power
source to assume the critical load without interruption when the bypass control
logic senses one of the following conditions and the UPS inverter output is
synchronized to the bypass ac power source:
a. Inverter overload exceeds unit's rating.
b. Battery protection period is expired and bypass is available.
c. System failure.
d. Inverter output under voltage or overvoltage.
(b) Interrupted Transfer

If an overload occurs and the UPS inverter output is not synchronized to the
bypass ac power source, the UPS inverter output shall current-limit for 200
milliseconds minimum. The inverter shall then turn off and an interrupted transfer
to the bypass ac power source shall be made. If the bypass ac power source is
beyond the conditions stated below, an interrupted transfer shall be made upon
detection of a fault condition:
a. Bypass voltage greater than plus or minus 10 percent from the UPS rated output
voltage.
b. Bypass frequency greater than plus or minus 0.5 Hz from the UPS rated output
frequency.
c. Phase differential of ac bypass voltage to UPS output voltage greater than plus
or minus 3 degrees.
(c) Manual Transfer
It shall be possible to make a manually-initiated static transfer from the system

status and control panel. The transfer shall be make-before-break utilizing the
bypass switch.
(d) Automatic Uninterrupted Forward Transfer
The static bypass transfer switch shall automatically forward transfer, without
interruption after the UPS inverter is turned "on", or after an instantaneous
overload-induced reverse transfer has occurred and the load current has returned
to less than the unit's 100 percent rating.
(e) Forced Transfer
The control logic circuitry shall provide the means of making a forced or reverse
transfer of the static bypass transfer circuit on an interrupted basis. Minimum
interruption shall be 200 milliseconds when the UPS inverter is not synchronized
to the bypass ac power source.
(f) Overload Ratings
The static bypass transfer switch shall withstand the following overload conditions:
a. 1000 percent of UPS output rating for one cycle.
b. 150 percent of UPS output rating for one minute.
c. 125 percent of UPS output rating for 10 minutes.
(g) Static Switch Disconnect
A static switch disconnect shall be incorporated to isolate the static bypass transfer
switch assembly so it can be removed for servicing. The switch shall be equipped
with auxiliary contacts.
MAINTENANCE BYPASS SWITCH
A maintenance bypass switch shall be provided as an integral part of the UPS and
located within the UPS module or in a matching cabinet adjacent to the UPS

cabinet. The maintenance bypass switch shall provide the capability to

continuously support the critical load from the bypass AC power source while the
UPS is isolated for maintenance. The maintenance bypass switch shall be housed
in an isolated compartment inside the UPS cabinet in such a way that service
personnel will not be exposed to electrically live parts while maintaining the
equipment. Switch shall contain a maintenance bypass protective device and a
module isolation protective device.
1. Load Transfer
The maintenance bypass switch shall provide the capability of transferring the
critical load from the UPS static bypass transfer switch to maintenance bypass and
then back to the UPS static bypass transfer switch with no interruption to the
critical load.
2. Load Bank Protection Device
A load bank protective device shall be provided to allow the UPS system to be
tested using a portable load bank. The load bank protective device shall be
connected on the line side of the maintenance bypass switch isolation protective
device.
MODULE CONTROL PANEL

The UPS module shall be provided with a control/indicator display panel. The
display panel shall be on the front of the UPS module. Controls, meters, alarms
and indicators for operation of the UPS module shall be on this panel. The display
panel shall be menu driven for browsing all the screens.
2.6.1 Module Meters
2.6.1.1 Monitored Functions
The following functions shall be monitored and displayed:
a. Input voltage, phase-to-phase (all three phases).
b. Input current, all three phases.
c. Input frequency.
d. Battery voltage.
e. Battery current (charge/discharge).
f. Output voltage, phase-to-phase and phase-to-neutral (all three phases).
g. Output current, all three phases.
h. Output frequency.
i. Output kilowatts.
j. Bypass voltage, phase-to-phase and phase-to-neutral (all three phases).
k. Output kilovars.
l. Battery temperature.
m. Output Percentage load.
n. Remaining battery time.
Meter Construction
The display panel shall display alphanumeric parameters based on true RMS
metering with 1 percent accuracy (minimum 4 significant digits).
Module Controls
Module shall have the following controls:

a. UPS/bypass transfer selector switch.

b. Static bypass transfer switch enable/disable selector switch.
Module Alarm Indicators

Module shall have indicators for the following alarm items. Any one of these
conditions shall turn on an audible alarm and the appropriate summary indicator.
Each new alarm shall register without affecting any previous alarm.
a. Input ac power source failure.
b. Input protective device open.
c. Input power out of tolerance.
d. Overload.
e. Overload shutdown.
f. DC overvoltage/shutdown.
g. DC ground fault.
h. Low battery.
i. Battery discharged.
j. Battery protective device open.
k. Blower fan failure.
l. Low battery shutdown.
m. UPS on battery.
n. Equipment over temperature.
p. Fuse blown (with indication where).
o. Control power failure.
r. Charger off/problem.
s. Inverter fault/off.
t. Emergency power off.
u. External shutdown (remote EPO activated).
v. Critical load on static bypass.
w. Static bypass transfer switch disabled/failure.
x. Inverter output overvoltage.
y. Inverter output under voltage.
z. Inverter output over frequency.
aa. Inverter output under frequency.
bb. Bypass source voltage outside limits.
cc. Bypass frequency out of range.
dd. Bypass source to inverter out of synchronization.
ee. Over temperature shutdown.
ff. Hardware shutdown.
Pressing the emergency off button shall cause the module to be disconnected from
the system, via its input protective device, output protective device, and battery
protective device. The button shall include a protective cover to prevent
unintentional activation.
An RS 485 communications and data acquisition port shall be provided. This port
shall allow the system parameters, status, alarm indication and control panel
functions specified to be remotely monitored and controlled.
Additionally, a second communication port shall be provided for use with the
following:
a. A set of remote alarm contacts rated at 240V, 0.5A, shall be provided for remote
alarm monitoring.

b. Auto-dial modem communication shall be provided to communicate with a

remote modem in case an alarm function is active.
c. A SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) adapter shall be provided to
communicate UPS monitoring via a network or direct connection to a PC.
d. A standard Web Browser adapter shall be provided to remotely view and
monitor UPS functions over the Internet.
All the communication ports and contacts shall be capable of simultaneous
communication.
TEMPERATURE CONTROL
Cabinet and enclosure ventilation shall be adequate to ensure that components
are operated within their ratings. Forced-air cooled rectifier, inverter, and control
unit will be acceptable. The cooling fans shall continue operation if UPS input
power is lost. Redundancy shall be provided so that failure of one fan or associated
circuit breaker will not cause an overheat condition. Cooling air shall enter the
lower front of the cabinets and exhaust at the top. Blower power failure shall be
indicated as a visual and audible alarm on the control panel. Air inlets shall have
replaceable filters that may be located on the inside of the cabinet doors and shall
be easily accessible for replacement.
a) Blower Power Source

Blower power source shall be internally derived from the output side of UPS
module, with automatic transfer arrangement.
b) Temperature Sensors
Temperature sensors shall be provided to monitor the air temperature. Separate
sensors shall monitor the temperature of rectifier and inverter heat sinks.
Separate sensors shall also monitor the transformer temperature. Critical
equipment over-temperature indication shall start a timer that shall shut down the
UPS system if the temperature does not return below the set point level
recommended by the UPS manufacturer.
BATTERIES
Battery system shall contain the battery cells, racks, battery disconnect, battery
monitor and cabinet, if required. A storage battery with sufficient ampere-hour
rating to maintain UPS output at full capacity for the specified duration shall be
provided for each UPS module. The battery shall be of heavy-duty, industrial
design suitable for UPS service. The cells shall be provided with flame arrestor
vents, inter-cell connectors and cables, cell-lifting straps, cell-numbering sets, and
terminal grease. Inter-cell connectors shall be sized to maintain terminal voltage
within voltage window limits when supplying full load under power failure
conditions. Cell and connector hardware shall be stainless steel of a type capable
of resisting corrosion from the electrolyte used.
The battery shall be rated as follows :
a. Type: Sealed Maintenance free lead-acid.

b. Specific gravity when fully charged: [____As per OEM _].

c. End voltage 1.75 volts per cell.

d. Float voltage: 2.17 to 2.26 volts per cell.
e. Equalizing voltage: 2.33 to 2.38 volts per cell.
f : Backup : 30 minutes
Battery Construction
The battery shall be of the valve-regulated, sealed, non-gassing, recombinant

type.
Battery Rack
The battery shall be provided with a suitable number of three-tier racks to fit the
room layout shown. Battery rack shall be steel and shall be protected with
electrolyte-resistant paint. Battery rack shall be shipped unassembled and shall
include hardware necessary for assembly. Each rack shall be complete with bus
bars to accommodate cables from UPS module. Bus bar connectors for battery-to-
battery connections and high-flex multi-stranded copper cable with proper cable
supports for connecting top row of batteries to bottom row of batteries at rack
ends shall be provided. End sections shall be cut to length to prevent wasting floor
space.
Cell-Terminal Covers
Acid-resistant transparent cell-terminal covers not exceeding 1.83 meters in

length and with vent holes drilled on top where needed shall be provided.
Battery Disconnect
Each battery pack assembly shall have a fused disconnect switch provided in a
enclosure, finished with acid-resistant paint and located in line with the assembly.
Switch shall be complete with line side and load side bus bars for connection to
battery cells. Switch shall be rated [_____] V dc, [_____] amperes, 3-pole with
interrupting rating as required by system capacity, and shall have an external
operator that is lockable in the "off" position.
1. The Complete installation of UPS shall be as per OEM's recommendation and

relevant standards as specified herein.
2.The contractor shall include wiring diagrams and installation details of

equipment indicating proposed location, layout and arrangement, control panels,
accessories, piping, ductwork, and other items that must be shown to ensure a
coordinated installation.
3.Wiring diagrams shall identify circuit terminals and indicate the internal wiring
for each item of equipment and the interconnection between each item of
equipment.
4.Drawings shall indicate adequate clearance for operation, maintenance, and

replacement of operating equipment devices. Submittals shall include the
nameplate data, size, and capacity.

5. The UPS module rectifier/charger shall convert the incoming ac input power to
dc power for the inverter and for float charging the battery. The inverter shall
supply ac power to the critical load continuously. Inverter output shall be
synchronized with the bypass ac power source, provided that the bypass ac power
source is within the specified voltage and frequency range.
6. Whenever the ac input power source deviates from the specified tolerances or
fails completely, the inverter shall draw its power from the battery system and
shall supply AC power to the critical load without any interruption or switching.
The battery shall continue to supply power to the inverter for the specified
protection time or until return of ac input source. At the same time, an alarm shall
sound to alert operating personnel and a trouble signal shall be sent over the
communication network, allowing startup of a secondary power source or orderly
shutdown of the critical load.
7. When stable ac input power source returns the rectifier/charger shall resume
operation and shall simultaneously supply the inverter with dc power and recharge
the battery. This shall be an automatic function and shall cause no disturbance to
the critical load.
8. Should the ac input power fail to return before the battery voltage reaches the
discharge limit, the UPS system shall disconnect from the critical load to safeguard
the battery.
9. When the UPS controller senses an overload or degradation of the inverter

output, the bypass switch shall automatically transfer the critical load from the
inverter output to the bypass ac power source without an interruption of power.
If the bypass ac power source is outside of specified tolerance limits, the UPS and
the critical load shall shut down.
10. The static bypass switch shall be capable of automatically retransferring the
load back to the inverter output after the inverter output has returned to normal
conditions. Retransfer shall only occur if the two sources are synchronized.
11. Manual closure of the maintenance bypass switch shall transfer the critical
load from the inverter output to the bypass ac power source without disturbing
the critical load bus. UPS module shall be capable of manual return to normal
operation after completion of maintenance.
12. The battery protective device shall provide the means of disconnecting the
battery from the rectifier/charger and inverter for maintenance. The UPS module
shall continue to function and meet the performance criteria specified except for
the battery back-up time function.
13. Following test in particular shall be conducted:

(a) Transient Test
(b) Efficiency test
(c) Load Test
(d) Battery discharge test.
(e) Annunciation, data logging and control mechanism tests.

F. MEASUREMENTS
1. Measurement shall be done in numbers.

2. Batteries shall not be measured extra
G.SUBMITTALS

"Close out"
H. PROCEDURES
contract ".
representative.

commencement of Installation of UPS at site with detailed description of how the
job shall be carried out at site along with necessary testing and commissioning
said personnel.


be made.

I.CLAUSES
3. Batteries or any other UPS accessories shall not be paid extra.
4. Factory testing of UPS shall be as described by "The Consultant".



J.CLOSE OUT
drive.


format.


CHAPTER – 7
CIVIL AND MISC WORKS
Please refer to relevant CPWD specifications for Civil works for items of
Excavation, PCC, Reinforced Cement Concrete, Brick work etc.
for construction of cable trenches, External Drainage work for
Construction of Manholes and Hume pipes, Steel work for
Erection Poles etc.

CHAPTER - 8
FIXTURES
A. SCOPE
1. Ceiling fans and wall fans.

2. Hotel Key cards.
3. Illuminated switches for hotels
4. Occupancy sensors.
5. Installation of lighting fixtures.

strictly followed.

C. DEFINATIONS
Timer : These are the simplest type of controls and are most popular. Some areas
in buildings may require lighting for specific durations like security lighting,
landscape lighting or building floodlighting. Timers allow this type of control by
switching ‘on’ and ‘off’ as per preset times. These can have one setting (same
time) for the whole year or several (seasonal/ weekly/daily) settings to take care
of the changing sunset times.
Occupancy Sensors: These devices – also known as ‘motion detectors’ – turn

lights off and on in response to human presence. Once sensitivity and coverage
area is established, sensors are selected from two predominant technology types.
Passive Infrared- Sensor: These detect the motion or heat between vertical and
horizontal detection zones. This technology requires a direct line of sight and is
more sensitive to lateral motion, but it requires layer motion as distance from the
sensor increases. The coverage pattern and field of view can also be precisely
controlled. It typically finds its best application in smaller spaces with a direct line
of sight, such as restrooms.

DSR Item No. 1.35 : Installation of following fixtures in all internal and
common areas complete in all respect including fixing and connection
from nearby terminal to fixture as required.
(a) 1 x LED 12W-300x300
DSR Item No. 1.35 : (b) 1 x LED 33W-300x300
DSR Item No. 1.35 : (c) 15W LED Down lighter
DSR Item No. 1.35 : (d) 1x12W LED down lighter
DSR Item No. 1.35 : (e) 1x33 W LED Down lighter
DSR Item No. 1.35 : (f) 1x20.8W LED Tube light
DSR Item No. 1.35 : (g) 1x49W LED Tube light
DSR Item No. 1.35 : (h) 1x10W LED Bulb
DSR Item No. 1.35 : (i) 50W LED Wall Washer
DSR Item No. 1.35 : (k) 18W Bulk Head Light
DSR Item No. 1.35 : (l) 1 x 4W LED Mirror Light
DSR Item No. 1.35 : (m) 1 x 27 W LED Down lighter
DSR Item No. 1.35 : (n) LED Focus Light
DSR Item No. 1.35 : (o) 13W LED Recessed Wall Light
DSR Item No. 1.35 : (p) 17W LED Spot Light
DSR Item No. 1.35 : (q) 18W LED Down lighter
DSR Item No. 1.35 : (r) 18W LED Down lighter (Battery Operated)
DSR Item No. 1.35 : (s) 20.8 W LED Tube Light-IP-65 Type
DSR Item No. 1.35 : (t) 20.8 W LED Tube Light -IP-65 Type(Battery
Operated)
DSR Item No. 1.35 : (u) 1 x 27 W LED Down lighter (Battery Operated)
DSR Item No. 1.35 : (v) 1x12W LED down lighter (Battery Operated)
DSR Item No. 1.35 : (w) 1x3W LED Ground Burial
DSR Item No. 1.35 : (x) 1x18 W LED Wall washer

DSR Item No. 1.35 : (y) 1x 5 W LED strip
DSR Item No. 1.35 : (z) 1x33 W LED pole Light
MR 19.130 : (a1) 1x12W Underwater Light
DSR Item No. 1.35 : (b1) 1x12 W Bollard Lights
DSR Item No. 1.35 : (c1) 1x15 W LED Down lighter (Battery Operated)
MR 19.131 : (d1) 65W LED Pole Mounted Light (IP65) (12M Pole)
MR 19.132 : (e1) 45W LED Post Top Light (IP65)
DSR Item No. 1.35 : (e1) Foot light
DSR Item No. 1.35 : (e1) 24 W Pass Light
Note : Refer Installation details in wiring and under this section.
DSR Item No. 15.2 : (n) Supplying , installation, testing and

commissioning of Passive Infrared (PIR) technology based occupancy
sensor with day light dimming (lighting level shall be regulated as per
availability of natural day light in an area along with occupancy
detection.) having high performance, regulating programmable type,
suitable for connected load up to 10 Amp , for mounting height up to 2.8
mtr and for 5 m diameter coverage area along with necessary fixing
arrangements i/c programming at site etc. complete as required.
1. Occupancy Sensor
Occupancy sensor shall be based on Passive infra-red technology with inbuilt day
light dimming feature such that the lighting levels are regulated as per availability
of natural day light in an area along with occupancy detection. The sensor shall
have high performance and shall be fully programmable. The coverage diameter
for such sensor shall be 5M .Occupancy sensor that shall turn the lighting off within
3 minutes of an occupant leaving the space. Light fixture controlled by occupancy
sensors shall have a wall mounted, manual switch capable to turning off lights
when the space is occupied.
MR 19.133 : (o) Supplying Ceiling Fan 1200mm sweep complete with

capacitor starting assembly, stiff pendent for hanging and wiring from
connector / ceiling rose to fan complete with good finish and well painted
from factory.
1. Ceiling Fan
Ceiling fans shall be complete with fan suspension stem canopies and regulators.
30 cm suspension stem shall be standard accessory and stems shall be heavy duty
galvanized steel tubes to IS 1239- 1958.

Fans shall be mounted on a pre-embedded hook with hard rubber isolator.

Regulators shall be no-step type mounted in the switch box. The box in all such
cases shall be large enough to accommodate the regulator and switches. One
sample box with top cover shall be got approved before procurement.
MR 19.134 : (p) Supplying Wall Fan complete with capacitor starting

assembly, stiff pendent for hanging and wiring from connector / ceiling
rose to fan complete with good finish and well painted from factory.
1. Wall Fan
The fan shall be provided with aluminum sturdy blades that deliver air
displacement less than or equal to 5500 cubic meter/hour. Fan motor shall be
powerful, energy efficient, rated at >=100W, delivers a top speed of 1500-2000
rpm. The fan shall have sturdy spiral mesh guard, which, besides being functional,
adds to the overall beauty and reliability of the design. The mesh shall be easy to
clean and maintain. The fan must have features of speed control options for an
optimum airflow that is sure to transform the place where you install it. The fan
shall have double ball bearing head to ensures a 90 degree oscillation that helps
it to cover all the area within its reach.
MR 19.135 : (p) Supplying installation testing and commissioning of hotel

key card switch complete with its 230V single pole and latching relay. The
relay and switch shall be 230V,50HZ, ac actuated to be connected before
Main incomer to control the power supply of the room through key card
complete with a bypass arrangement to by-pass the supply in case the
key-tag fails. The switch shall be compatible with any key fobe. The cost
of key fobe is exclusive
1. Hotel Key Card
Hotel key card shall be suitable for 240V, single phase wiring and shall be
compatible with any kind of key fobe. The finish shall be polycarbonate. The relay
and switch shall be 230V,50HZ, ac actuated has to be connected before Main
incomer of the main board to control the power supply of the room through key
card complete with a bypass arrangement to by-pass the supply in case the key-
tag fails. Under no circumstances the switching shall be done without a relay or
just with the help of a contactor.
MR 19.136 : (q) Supplying installation testing and commissioning of 2

Gang Full-Flat Switch with Illuminated “Do not Disturb” & “Please Clean
Up” Symbols complete with wiring , fixing and connections as required.
1. Illuminated switch
2 Gang Full-Flat Switch with Illuminated “Do not Disturb” & “Please Clean Up”
Symbols shall be suitable for 240V, single phase wiring in a high quality
polycarbonate finish. The switch shall glow the respective signage once pushed.

1. Lighting fixture / fans shall be installed at the height and co-ordinates as

specified in the GFC drawings.
2. The wiring terminals of the fixture / Fans shall be carefully looked into before
terminating wires into it and shall be checked for its connectivity.
3. Proper safety measures shall be taken while installing the fixtures at double
height zones.
4. Ensure that while installing the light the power supply in that particular circuit
is dead.
5. OEMs recommendation for installation shall be followed for occupancy sensors

and Hotel key tags and illuminating switches.
F. MEASUREMENTS
1. Measurement for each item shall be done in numbers.
G.SUBMITTALS

"Close out"
H. PROCEDURES
contract ".
execution of job at site:

representative.

commencement of Installation of mentioned fixtures and raceways at site with
detailed description of how the job shall be carried out at site along with necessary
testing and commissioning procedures in detailed manner. This methodology
statement has to be duly approved by the concerning "Engineer in Charge" /
Consultant / Client's representative and work has to be carried out with respect
to this approved work methodology statement.
said personnel.


be made.

snags identified during inspection shall e attended and rectified by the contractor.

I.CLAUSES


not be paid extra.
drive.



format.

CHAPTER - 9
LT PANELS, SWITCHGEARS & METERS
A. SCOPE
1. Low Voltage Panels along with the components.

2. Switchgears in an enclosures.
3. Meters

strictly followed.

3. IS 8623 - Factory Builds Assemblies of switchgear and control gear.
4. IS 4237 - General requirements for switchgears are control gear for voltage
not exceeding 1000 Volts.
5. IS 2147 - Degrees of protection provided and enclosures for low voltage
switchgear and control gear.
6. IS 375 - Marking and arrangement of bus bars.
Individual equipment housed in the LT panels shall conform to the following IS

specifications
7. IS 13947-2 Low voltage switchgear

8. IS 13703-1993 HRC Fuse Links
IS 2705 Current Transformer
IS 3231 Relay
IS 1248 Indicating Instruments
IS 722 Integrating Instruments
IS 6875 Control Switches & Push Buttons
IS 8828 Miniature Circuit Breaker
IS12640 ELCB
IS2804 Shunt Capacitor for Power System
C. DEFINATIONS
As per relevant IS and IEC standards

D. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR ITEMS OF PANELS
This section pertains to general specifications for Construction, components,

wiring, bus bars, painting installation connections and commissioning of All
Panel boards as per detailed BOQ. Panels shall be provided as per relevant
detailed BOQ descriptions and Single line diagrams. All switchgears,
indication lamps, meters, CT, PT etc. shall be as described in relevant BOQ
descriptions and sufficient space in compartments shall be provided in the
Panel as per approved fabrication drawings to accommodate all the switch
gears, bus-bars etc.
Design , fabrication, wiring, Supply, Installation, Testing and Commissioning

of following Wall mounted / Floor mounted(including base stand), 415V,3PH,
50Hz extensible and fully compartmentalized panels complying to IS
8623/93. The indoor panels shall be IP 42 and outdoor panels shall be IP 66
type. The Panel shall have proper space with required clearance for cables,
incoming / outgoing switchgear, CTs, PTs, Ammeter, Voltmeter, selector
switches, Insulated and properly supported compartmentalized bus bars with
heat shrinkable sleeves along with the other control circuit accessories within
the panel and any other electrical component mentioned in the Panel SLD.
The panel shall be fabricated out of CRCA not less than 2.0 mm thick for load
bearing members and 1.6mm for the doors of LT panel. The Panel shall have
seven tank pre-treatment process comprising of degreasing, rinsing, de-
rusting, rinsing, phosphatizing, rinsing and passivation followed by powder
coat painting having a paint thickness of 60 microns or as specified. The
Panel shall be Dust/Vermin poof with earth studs as per the SLD and
specifications
Note :
(1) Capacitor bank shall not be considered to be provided in any panel unless
specified specifically.
(2) Spare out-going shall not be provided with any meter.
(3) All MCCBs shall be microprocessor based with inbuilt O/L, S/C , E/F and
instantaneous trip protection.
(4) ALL MCCBs shall be provided with ON / OFF / TRIP indication.
(5) ACB shall be provided with ON / OFF / TRIP / SPRING CHARGE/ CONTROL
SUPPLY indication.
1. Design parameters
The 415V system shall be suitable for the following parameters

Rated Voltage: 415 V, 3 Phase & Neutral.
Rated Frequency: 50Hz.
Fault Level: As specified in SLD.
Enclosure: IP 42 ( for all indoor panels) and IP 66 (for all
outdoor panels).
Voltage variations +/- 5%
Frequency variations +/- 3%

Maximum Allowable Bus Bar Temperature: 55°C for silver plated

joints and 40°C Temperature rise for other joints above 50°C
Ambient temperature.
Operation Duty : Continuous
2. Construction
The main Power distribution panel & distribution boards shall be used to
provide power to all sort 415 V/ 230 V equipment /systems.
The main Power distribution panel shall be self-supporting, free standing or
wall mounted. The enclosure shall confirm to IP 66 protection for outdoor
panels and IP 42 for indoor panels. The main Power distribution panel &
distribution boards shall be designed of the requisite vertical sections, which
when coupled together shall form continuous switchboards. It should be
readily extensible on both sides by addition of vertical sections after removal
of the end covers or as otherwise called for the in the bill of quantities. The
main Power distribution panel & distribution boards shall be constructed only
of materials capable of with-standing the mechanical, electrical and thermal
stresses as well as the effects of humidity, which are likely to be encountered
in normal service.
The gland plate shall be of minimum 3 mm thick sheet. The gland plates shall
have knock able type holes of suitable diameter of cable glands. Minimum
30% extra knock able holes shall be provided on each gland plate. Non-
magnetic gland plates shall be used where single core cables are used for
three-phase supply. The terminal blocks shall be provided at convenient
location for cable termination. The distance between the terminal strip and
gland plate shall be kept in such a way that the cables can be properly
dressed & no cable tension is transferred on the terminal strip / or equipment.
A main horizontal aluminum grounding bus, rated to carry maximum fault
current, extending along the entire of the panel shall be provided. The ground
bus shall be provided with two-bolt drilling with GI bolts and nuts at each
end to receive the main Earthing grid. The front framed structure shall be
designed to house the components contributing to major weight of the panel,
such as circuit breaker cassettes, fuse switch units, changeover switches,
main horizontal bus-bars, vertical risers and other front mounted
accessories. The structure shall be mounted on a rigid base frame fabricated
using ISMC channel of minimum 75 mm height. The design shall ensure that
weight of the components is adequately supported without deformation or
loss of alignment during transit or during operation. The design shall ensure
generous availability of space for ease of installation and maintenance of
cabling, and adequate safety for working in one vertical section without
coming into accidental contact with live parts in an adjacent suction.
Front and rear doors should be fitted with synthetic rubber or neoprene
gaskets with fasteners designed to ensure proper compression of gaskets.

When covers are provided in place of doors, generous overlap shall be

assured between sheet steel surfaces with closely spaced fasteners to
preclude the entry of dust. The height of the panel should not be more than
2400 mm. The total depth of the panel should be adequate to cater for
proper cabling space and should not be less than 1300 mm for ACB sections
and 450 mm for Switch Fuse unit and MCCB sections or should be
appropriate.
Doors and compartment partitions shall be fabricated using 14 Gauge thick
sheet steel. Sheet steel shrouds and partitions shall be minimum 14 Gauge
thickness. All sheet steel work forming the exterior of switch boards shall be
smoothly finished. Leveled and free from flaws. The corners should be
rounded. The apparatus and circuits in the panels shall be so arranged as to
facilitate their operation and maintenance and at the same time to ensure
the necessary degree of safety. Apparatus forming part of the panels shall
have the following recommended minimum clearances for non-insulated bus
bars or should be as per relevant IS Codes.
Distance between minimum Clearances in mm

Phase to Phase 30mm
Phase to Neutral 25mm
Phase to Body 30mm
When, for any reason, the above clearances are not available, suitable
insulation shall be provided. Clearances shall be maintained during normal
service conditions. Creepage distances shall comply with those specified in
relevant standards. Bus bar calculations shall be furnished by the concerned
vendor.
All insulating material used in the construction of the equipment shall be of
non-hygroscopic material, duly treated to withstand the effects of high
humidity, high temperature tropical ambient service conditions. Functional
units such as circuit breakers and fuse switches shall be arranged in multi-
tier formation. All the Incoming Air Circuit Breakers shall be housed in a
single tier formation only. Air circuit breaker for outgoing feeders can be of
two-tier formation. Metallic/insulated barriers shall be provided within
vertical sections and between adjacent sections to ensure prevention of
accidental contact with main bus bars and vertical risers during operation,
inspection or maintenance of functional units and front mounted accessories.
All doors/covers providing access to live power equipment circuits shall be
provided with tool operated fasteners to prevent unauthorized access. Cable
entries and terminals shall be provided in the switchboard to suit the number,
type and size of aluminum conductor power cables and copper conductor
control cable specified in the detailed specifications. Provision shall be made
for top or bottom entry of cables as required. Generous size of cabling

chambers shall be provided, with the position of cable gland and terminals
such that cables can be easily and safely terminated. The minimum depth
of the panel shall be restricted to suit for this purpose. Barriers or shrouds
shall be provided to permit safe working at the terminals of one circuit
without accidentally touching that of another live circuit. Cable risers shall be
adequately supported to withstand the effects of rated short circuit without
accidentally touching that of another live circuit.
Necessary connecting bus-bar pieces with bends, offsets and drilled holes
with necessary cadmium plated nuts, bolts & washers shall be provided. The
details of the flange and bus configuration shall be obtained from the Bus
Trunkings supplier. Panel compartments shall be provided with space heaters
and lights operated by door limit switches.
3. Painting
All sheet steel work used in construction of panels shall be given for
proper shot blasting/surface finish to make it free from all
rusts/impurities/deposits. It shall be then provided with two primer coat
and then/powder coated (electro-statically) with final paint shade
RAL7032.
It shall be the process of Powder Coating with suitable primer and having
total coating thickness of 60 micron. The M.S Sheet Steel shall be given
for proper shot blasting / surface finish to make it free from all
impurities. All sheet steel work used in construction of panels should
have undergone a rigorous metal treatment 7 tank process as mentioned
below.
All sheet steel work shall be phosphate in accordance with the procedure
mentioned below and in accordance with relevant standards for
phosphatizing iron and steel.
Oil, grease and dirt shall be thoroughly removed by emulsion cleaning.
Rust and scale shall be removed by pickling with dilute acid followed by
washing with running water, rinsing with slightly alkaline hot water and
drying. A recognized phosphate process to facilitate durable coating of
the paint on the metal surface and also to prevent the speared of rustling
in the event of the paint film being mechanically damaged. This again,
shall be followed by hot water rinsing to remove traces of phosphate
solution. After phosphatizing through rinsing shall be carried out with
clean water followed by final rinsing with dilute dichromate solution and
oven drying. Passivation in de-oxalate solution to retain and augment
the effects of phosphatizing.

4. Bus Bars
The selection, design and construction of bus bars shall conform to IS
specifications and the latest amendments. The bus bars shall be air insulated
and made of high conductivity, high strength Aluminum Bus bars. Bus bars
shall be located in air-insulated enclosures and segregated from all other
compartments of the cubicle. Direct access or accidental contact with bus
bars and primary connections shall not be possible. Bus bars shall be rated
in accordance with service conditions and the rated for continuous and short
time current ratings specified in SLD / data sheets. Maximum temperature of
the bus bar and bus bar connections, under operating conditions, while
carrying rated normal current at rated frequency shall not exceed 85 degree
C. Bus bars shall be adequately supported on SMC insulators to with stand
dynamic stresses due to short circuit currents specified in SLD / BOQ /Data
sheets. Bus bar support insulators shall be of non-hygroscopic material and
shall confirm to relevant IS standards. The size of bus-stars should be
indicated in the contractor and shall be subject to the purchaser’s approval.
The current density of the bus bars shall not be less than 1 Amp / sq mm.
The size of the bus bar shall be chosen on the basis of temperature rise limit
of bus-bar for continuous rated current at rated frequency and also on the
basis of temperature rise limit at rated short circuit current for 1 sec and
mechanical stress capacity at rated peak short circuit current. The neutral
as well as the earth bar should also be capable of withstanding the electrical
& mechanical stresses equivalent to phase bus bars.
Appropriate clearances and creep age distance shall be provided for the bus
bars system to minimize the possibility of a fault.
Connections from the main bus bars to functional circuits shall be arranged
and supported so as to withstand without any damage or deformations the
thermal and dynamic stresses due to short circuits currents.
Bus bars should be color coded for easy identification of individual phases
and neutral.
All the bus bars should be provided with colour coded heat shrink sleeves.
The size of the Earth shall be same as the size of the neutral bus bar in any
case it should not be less than 50 x 6 mm.
5. Performance Characteristics
All switchgears and panels shall be capable of satisfactory operation for the
application, duty and other requirements as specified in these specifications,
enclosed data sheets/drawings. Air circuit breakers, molded case circuit
breakers and switches shall be suitable for switching duty of motors,
capacitors and other devices shown on drawing.
6. Safety Features

The safety shutter shall be provided in breaker panels, which shall prevent
in advertent contact with isolating contacts when breaker is withdrawn from
the Cradle. It shall be possible to interchange two breakers of two different
rating.
There shall be provision of positive earth connection between fixed and
moving portion of the ACB either through connector plug or sliding solid earth
mechanism. Earthing bolts shall be provided on the cradle or body of fixed
ACB. Arc chute covers shall be provided wherever necessary.
It shall be possible to bolt the draw-out frame not only in connected position
but also in TEST and DISCONNECTED position to prevent dislocation due to
vibration.
All live parts of MCCB and switches when doors are opened after switching
them OFF shall be shrouded with insulators of adequate size and strength so
that to prevent accidental contacts of the live parts.
basic 3 line diagram. The poles of MCBs shall have minimum self resistance
engraved upon it.

8. AIR CIRCUIT BREAKERS
i) AIR CIRCUIT BREAKERS
a. The circuit breakers shall be sheet metal enclosed flush front, draw
out type and shall be provided with a trip free manual operating mechanism
with mechanical "ON" - "OFF" indications. Shunt trip and closing coil suitable
for 24 Volts D.C. shall be provided. The Circuit breakers shall be for
continuous rating, and shall be suitable for fault level as specified in BOQ at
415 volts. The moving parts of 4 pole circuit breaker shall have operating
mechanism, primary and secondary isolating devices, auxiliary switches,
mechanical position indicators, all mounted on a rigid sturdy steel frame
work. Primary and secondary disconnecting devices shall be self aligning type
of fully isolating.
b. Circuit breaker shall be designed to close and trip without opening

the circuit breaker compartment door. The operating handle and the
mechanical trip push button shall be at the front of the breaker panel and
integral with the breaker. The ACB's shall be withdrawal type. The ACB
operating spring shall be chargeable with charging motor as well as manually
for electrically operated breaker. Spring charging motor will operate on
230V. AC. Once the spring is charged it should be able to close the breaker
and also trip without requiring to be charged. Every Trip-Close-Trip operation
with one charge of spring shall be possible. The ACB's shall be operable both
from the cubicle. Inbuilt anti pumping devices shall be provided both for
electrical and mechanical to prevent the breaker from restriking. Spring
charge/discharge indication to be provided.
c. Suitable contacts for "Auto-Trip" annunciation and indication shall be

provided.
ii) CRADLE
The cradle shall be so designed and constructed as to permit the smooth

withdrawal and insertion of the breaker into it. The movement shall be free
from jerks, easy to operate and shall be on steel balls/rollers and not on flat
surfaces. The modules shall be totally inter changeable, for same rating.
There shall be 3 distinct and separate positions of the circuit breaker on

the cradle.
Service : Both main and secondary isolating contacts in service.
Test : Main isolating contacts separate and secondary isolating

contacts in service.
Isolated : Both main and secondary isolating contacts in isolated.

There shall be provision for locking the breaker in all of the positions. The
breaker shall be provided with interlock to prevent the breaker from being
withdrawn or replaced except in the fully isolated position.
Separate limit switches with minimum 4 'NO' + 4 'NC' potential free contacts,
each shall be provided for 'Test' & 'Service' position of the breaker. 6 'NO' +
6 'NC' breaker auxiliary contacts shall be provided as spare.
Product data for ACB shall be submitted prior to selection and shall be duly
approved by the consultant. Vendor shall submit detailed accessories details
for ACB and the selected accessories by the consultant at the time of product
data approval shall be provided by the contractor at no additional cost.
9. Switchgear (MCCB) :
MCCB should be provided with door operating mechanism having interlock,

defeat and padlocking facility. The Molded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB) shall
conform to IEC 947 – 2.The MCCB shall be suitable for ambient temperature
up to 55 deg C without de-rating. The MCCB should trip free, quick make and
quick break type and should be equipped with a current limiting feature.
MCCB shall have spreader links and terminal shroud as a feature for safety
and proper heat dissipation. The MCCB shall indicate its suitability for
isolation and this should appear clearly with the symbol as specified in IS
13947. All MCCBs shall be microprocessor type with overload, short circuit
and earth fault releases unless otherwise specified. For the entire range,
Service Breaking capacity (Ics) shall be equal to Ultimate Breaking capacity
(Icu), ( Icu = Ics =100% ). The MCCB shall have following setting options
available. No dip switches shall be installed for settings. and test knob and
trip reset unit of the breaker shall be fully activated . Any accessories
required for the same shall be included. The complete assembly shall be BMS
compatible.
Overload setting (L ) 0.4-1 x In

Short circuit setting (with time delay)(S) 2 –10 x Ir
Time delay (td) 0-500 m sec
Short circuit setting (Instantaneous) (I) 11 x In
Where In = nominal current of MCCB & Ir = rated current to which
it is set.
Ground Fault Setting with time delay (0-300ms) (G) : 0.1-1 x In
Neutral setting (N) (where ever required): 0.5-1 x In
All MCCB’s shall be provided with additional 2 spare NO+NC contact, a shunt
trip coil and an under voltage coil auxiliary along with alarm switches, Front
door operating mechanism with door interlock defeat facility. Release shall
have inbuilt memory and true RMS sensing.
Frame sizes of MCCB’s shall be of following standard sizes.


100 amps & below 100 amps. 100 amps.
The breaking capacities of MCCB’s are mentioned panel wise. MCCB’s shall
be of following standard ratings.

25 KA & above. 25 KA
Above 25 KA up to 35 KA. 35 KA
Above 35 KA up to 50 KA 50 KA
Above 50 KA up to 70 KA 70 KA.
10. CONTACTORS
All contactors and bi-metal relays should conform to IS - 13947 - 4/IEC -

947-4 standards. Contactors should be suitable for requisite duty and the
contactor shall be designed to operate even in severe operating conditions.
The Contactors shall be suitable for switching and controlling squirrel cage
and slipping motors as well as other AC loads such as solenoids, capacitors,
lighting loads, heating loads and transformer loads.
The contactors shall be suitable for operation in service temperature up to
50 C without de-rating The contactors and bimetal relays shall have been
tested for type-2 co-ordination at 50 KA, 415 V 50 Hz as per IS 13947 for
both fuse protected as well as fuse-less motor feeders. The Contactor shall
have coil of 220/240 V AC or as may be specifically asked for. The design of
the current carrying parts, contact system and the magnet system should be
such that it should increase reliability of electrical and mechanical
endurance. Auxiliary contact should have double break parallel bridge contact
mechanism. For operator safety the contactors above 45 Amp. Should have
arc-chamber. The construction of the arc chamber should be such that there
is no emission of arc by-products on the surrounding equipment.
The contactor shall have funnel shaped cable entries, cable end stops and
predetermined insertion depths. Contactor below 63 Amp shall have captive
screws preventing the screws from falling. Main contacts should be of silver
alloy to have long contact life; it should withstand to keep the contact bounce
to minimum and should be shrouded with an arc chute. Both moving and fix
contacts should be accessible for inspection or replacement without
disturbing terminal wiring.

The magnet system should have laminated, construction to minimize the

losses. Coils should withstand high temperature and ensure low power
consumption. Coil should be resin cast/encapsulated. It should have inter
layer insulation. Contactor should have facility to mount add-on auxiliary
contact block. Mechanical interlocks should be provided for sequential
operations if required. Contactor should be comfortably mounted in any
position on a vertical plane. Contactor should be capable of handling high
transient currents, which occurs at a high time of switching of capacitors.
It’s Insulation voltage level should be – 1000 v. Contactor shall be designed
to have Mechanical endurance of the order of minimum 15 million operations
or better.
Contactor should operate without deration from - 30° C to +50°C
11. Current Transformer
Current transformers shall comply with the requirements of IS. 2705. They
shall have ratios, outputs as specified in SLD. The current transformers shall
be core type with cast resin/encapsulated secondary winding. CTs shall
withstand stresses originated from short circuit. These shall be mounted on
the switchboard stationary part.
The secondary CT leads from all panels should be terminated on the front of
the board on easily accessible shorting type terminal connectors so that
operation and maintenance can be carried out when the panels are in service.
CT’s shall be given heat run test.
CT’s shall be of class 1 accuracy unless otherwise specified.
12. Indicating Instrument

All indicating instruments shall be digital of flush mounting industrial
patterns, conforming to the requirements of I.S.
The instruments shall have non-reflecting bezels, clearly divided and indelibly
marked scales and shall be provided with zero adjusting devices in the front.
Integrating instruments shall be of flush mounting switchboard pattern,
complying with the requirements of I.S.
13. Protection Relay

The protection relay should be microprocessor based & have 12 mm, 8
values, Set values, Trip data and Trip History for analysis and
troubleshooting.
All Protection Relays should be conforming to following IS/IEC standards:
IEC 61000-4-8 Power Frequency Magnetic Test

IEC 61000-4-11 Voltage Dips and Interruption Test
IEC 61000-4-12 Ring Wave Test
IEC 61000-4-5 Surge Immunity

IEC 61000-4-3 Radiated Electromagnetic Field Test

IEC 61000-4-4 Electrical Fast Transient test
IEC 61000-4-2 Electrostatic Discharge Test
IS 8686/IEC 60255-22-1 High Frequency Disturbance Test
IS 8686/IEC 60255-5 Impulse Test
IS 3231/IEC 60255-5 Dielectric Test
The Protection relay should have built in Self Supervision and Self-Testing
Feature & Self diagnostic ensure continuous reliability. The protection relay
should have separate indication for Power On, Programming Mode and Relay
fault.
The protection relay shall have RS 485 port/MOD BUS for Communication
with BMS system. The Hardware/Software Protocol for the same shall be
given without any additional cost. The protection Relay shall have minimum
4 No of user programmable output relays. The protection relay should have
a test feature for maintenance and checking purpose. The protection relay
shall have 3 phase characteristics, which shall be adjustable over wide range
to provide discrimination between a multiplicity of devices.
14. Control Switches

Control Switches shall be of the heavy-duty rotary type with escutcheon
plates clearly marked to show the operating position. They shall be semi-
flush mounting with only the front plate and operating handle projecting.
Circuit breaker control switches shall be of the spring return to neutral type,
while instrument selector switches shall be of the stay-put type.
15. Push Button

Push buttons should be of the momentary contact, push to actuate type.
Push Buttons should be panel mounted, flush type having 22.5 mm Ø.
Push Buttons should be spring returns type.
Lock and key head with Push turn facility.
Modular blocks should contain NO-NC contact.
It should be snap-fit type for easy assembly.
Double break self-cleaning contacts for prolong life.
NO-NC contact block should be colour coded for easy identification.
Push Buttons should have transparent shroud and rubber shroud to enhance
protection against ingress as per IP- 67.
It should withstand operating voltage as well as frequent operation.
It should have finger proof shrouded terminals.
16. Control Wiring

All Control wiring shall be carried out with 1100 Volts grade single core PVC
cable conforming to IS694 having stranded copper conductors of minimum

1.5 sq mm for potential circuits and 2.5 sq. mm. section for current
transformer circuit.
Wiring shall be neatly bunched, adequately supported and properly routed to
allow for easy access and maintenance.
Wires shall be identified by numbered ferrules at each end. The ferrules shall
be of the ring type and of non-deteriorating material. They shall be firmly
located on each wire so as to prevent free movement.
All control circuits fuses shall be mounted in front of the panel and shall be
easily accessible.
17. Terminal Blocks

Terminal blocks shall be of Elmex /connect well make of the suitable type.
Insulating barriers shall be provided between adjacent terminals. CT
Terminal blocks shall be shorting type.
Terminal blocks shall have a minimum current rating of 10 Amps & 650 volt
grade rating complete with insulated barriers. Provisions shall be made for
label inscriptions.
It should have snap fit action.
It should have captive-screws and self-lifting washers.
Withstand temp range from –30° C to 100° C.
Terminal Connectors should have flame retardant property confirming to UL-
94, V-2.
Terminal Block should be suitable for commonly used DIN Rail – 35 X7.5 mm
and mounting channel ‘C’ shaped Std.32 mm.
Terminal Block should be suitable for commonly used DIN Rail – 35 X7.5 mm
and mounting channel ‘C’ shaped Std.32 mm.
The construction material should be of high quality like polyamide 6/6 and
contacts of Nickel plated brass. Labels shall be of anodized aluminum, with
white engraving on black background. They shall be properly secured with
fasteners.
18. Digital Energy Meter

The energy meters shall be digital counter type with LCD/LED display. It shall
be flush mounted on panel. The size shall be at least 96 mm x 96 mm at the
front side. The Class of accuracy of the meters shall be 1. The meters shall
be calibrated as per CT secondary current and directly from the LT voltage,
self-powered and suitable for 3 phases, 4 wire system.
Digital Energy Meter should be confirming to following IS/IEC standards.
o IEC 61000-4-8 Power Frequency Magnetic Test
o IEC 61000-4-11 Voltage Dips and Interruption Test
o IEC 61000-4-12 Ring Wave Test
o IEC 61000-4-5 Surge Immunity
o IEC 61000-4-3 Radiated Electromagnetic Field Test

o IEC 61000-4-4 Electrical Fast Transient test

o IEC 61000-4-2 Electrostatic Discharge Test
o IEC 1036 Accuracy
o IS 8686/IEC 60255-22-1 High Frequency Disturbance Test
o IS 8686/IEC 60255-5 Impulse Test
o IS 3231/IEC 60255-5 Dielectric Test
o IS13779 Operating Temperature
o IS 722 3 Phase Watt -Hour Meter with Maximum
Demand Indicator
Digital KW Meter shall have 2 Alarm set Points. This should have multi-
function facilities to measure Voltage, Current, Power factor, KW.
This unit should give True RMS Measurements.
This unit should have four quadrant operations.
The unit should have 2 No. of relay type outputs for alarm or control action.
The unit should have wide CT ratio selection range to suit site requirements.
The unit shall have large and clear display with backlit facility.
The unit shall have necessary arrangements communication port RS 485 for
energy metering.
19. LT Capacitors
All relevant Indian Standards shall be made applicable with latest

amendments and in particular IS:2834. Any other specific application is
required, then the same shall also be complied to. Following are the
specifications. They shall consist of following items:
Terminal insulators are required for the cover.

The raw materials should be of Metalized Polypropylene.
Each phase of the capacitor should be protected by a fuse mounted inside
the container.
In-rush current limiting coils should be provided with each container which
should limit the current in the event of switching surges.
The Metalized Polypropylene shall be self-healing quality.
The dielectric loss should be very low in the Order of 0.5 watts/ KVAr or
lower.
Each unit shall be capable of withstanding a continuous over voltage of 10%
and designated for low power loss using impregnated paper with metalized
polypropylene type.
Each unit shall have fuses rated to, isolate itself immediately from three line
supply as soon as it has developed any fault.
The Capacitors shall be of thee 3 phase, Delta connected self-cooled weather
proof type with all live parts totally enclosed and suitable for floor mounting
type.

The capacitor banks shall be erected on an angle iron frame with mounting
studs and with complete treatment done to frame work. The frame work
shall be effectively earthed to the earthing grid.
20.0 Discharge Resistance.

The Capacitor shall be provided with permanently connected discharge
resistors so that residual voltage to the capacitor shall be reduced to 50 Volts
or less within one minute after the capacitor is disconnected from the source
of supply.
21.0 Thyristor Switching Module
The thyistor switching module used in power factor correction panel shall
have following characteristics:
Suitable for real time power factor correction
Easy Installation: It can be used identically as a Contactor
Reaction time: 5 milli seconds
Permanent self-controlling of: Voltage Parameter, Capacitor Current,
Temperature of the thyristor switch
Alarm output per module
Manual operation possible
Automatic switch off in case of over current and over temperature
Display of: Operations, Faults, Activation
Range suitable for: 10, 25 and 50 kvAR
Rated Voltage: 480 V
22.0 APFC Relay
The relay shall be able to operate in both Auto/ Manual mode Measurement and shall
have measurement Sensitivity - 2.5%. The relay shall be able to automatically
recognize the direction of flow of current and shall have Flashing of alarm code in
case of abnormal conditions. It shall be capable to Online display PF, Voltage,
Current, KVAr, capacitor overload and Panel temperature. The last two contacts shall
be programmable as alarm and / or fan control. It shall have No-voltage release
protection function, Capacitor over-current and panel over-heating protection
Average weekly power factor measurement (last 7 days) shall be there. The relay
shall have high pf cut off settings so that the capacitors can be isolated from the
network in case of lading power factors.
23.0 Isolators
operation and shall conform to I.S. 4064.The isolators for motor feeders shall
be of “Motor Duty” type adequate for interruption of locked rotor current of
motors (excepting for motors rated 50 Kilowatts and above).Switches and

isolators provided in the switch boards shall be interlocked with door to

prevent opening and closing of the door in the closed (ON) position of the
isolators. All live terminals on the isolating / switches shall be adequately
shrouded to prevent accidental contact and danger to the personnel. Properly
rated co-coordinating fuses (HRC type) shall be provided for every outgoing
feeder unless otherwise indicated. The fuse shall be non-deteriorating high
rupturing capacity link type mounted in suitable fuse carrier / fuse base and
conform to I.S. 3106.
24.0 Dual Source Meter

The dual source meter shall Suitable for 3 phase 4 wire network with two
separate registers for mains and alternate power i.e. Stirling generator
generation. The meter shall have flashing indication on display to indicate
the source in use. The meter shall have Class- 1.0 accuracy with RS – 485
protocol. The meter shall be flush mounted with sealing facility provided and
must also give current reversal indication. Following features shall also be
provided:
24.1 Enclosure:
Dimensions: 96 x 96 x 96 mm
Weight: 300 gms
24.2 Front panel:

Display: Backlit LCD display
Digit Height: 8 mm x 4.8 mm
Protection index: IP 54
24.3 Inputs :
Current :
Via transformer with primary 50-200 Amp
Insulated secondary 5A
Current circuit burden < 0.1 VA
Overload 7A
Voltage
Measurement Range 120V AC to 300V AC from phase to neutral voltage
circuit burden 0.1 VA
24.4 Auxillary supply

230 V AC +/- 30%, 50 Hz with burden < 2.5VA
24.5 Accuracy :
Class-1.0
24.6 Pulse Output:
1 pulse = 1 kWH with a minimum pulse duration of 100ms.

25.0 Load Manager

The load manager shall be micro-controller based unit capable to measures
a host of electrical parameters and display them on a 128 x 64 mm backlit
LCD, It shall have load management feature and shall have six numbers of
output relay contacts apart from CT/PT contacts. These outputs shall be
individually field programmable for both the parameter on which to generate
alarm as well as the values on which to activate alarm and deactivate it. In
addition to this flexibility in terms of load management, the load manager
shall also have RS485 port. RS485 supports MODBUS RTU protocol for
connections to EMS/SCADA. The unit shall be made for three phase four wire
system. The installation type, CT ratios and PT ratios shall be site selectable.
The Load Manager with its six relay contacts shall be capable to be used as
a Demand Controller. The method of Demand calculation i.e. sliding window,
fixed window shall be selected at site. The device shall have all the features
needed to implement a robust electrical load management system. It shall
be programmable / configurable to suit most control and communication
needs. The load manager shall be capable to measure following parameters:
1. Voltage (Volts L-N & L-L) VL-N Accuracy: 0.5% of Reading VL-L
Accuracy: 1.0% of Reading.
2. Current (Amps IR, IY, IB) Accuracy: 0.25% of Reading.
3. Line Frequency 45 to 55 Hz, Accuracy: 0.3% of Reading.
4. Active Power (P) Accuracy: 0.5% of Reading (For IPFI>0.5).
5. Reactive Power (Q) Accuracy: 1.5% of Reading (Between 0.5 Lag to
0.8 Lead).
6. Apparent Power (S) Accuracy: 0.5% of Reading.
7. Power Factor For Individual phases and System. Accuracy: 0.5% of
Reading (IPFI≥0.5) Range of Reading: 0.05 to 1.000 Lag/Lead.
8. Total Active Energy (KWh) Range of Reading: 0 to 9999999.9 KWh
Accuracy: Class 0.5 as per IS14697.
9. Total Apparent Energy (KVAh) Range of Reading: 0 to 9999999.9
KVAh Accuracy: Class 0.5 as per IS14697.
10. Total Reactive Energy (KVARh) Range of Reading: 0 to 9999999.9
KVARh Accuracy: Class 1.0
11. 3 rd to 15 th Harmonics(Odd) for all Voltages with THD.
12. 3 rd to 15 th Harmonics(Odd) for all Currents with THD.
13. Active Power (KW) Demand - Sliding & Fixed, Selectable.
14. Apparent Power (KVA) Demand - Sliding & Fixed, Selectable
The device shall also have following features:

1. Display 128 X 64 Graphical LCD with Operating temp 10°C to 50°C.

2. Data Logging Buffer 2 MB, Non-volatile memory, capable of holding
19691 records Logging Duration Site selectable.
3. RS485 Modbus-RTU protocol
4. Communication USB 8.0 Pen-drive For downloading logged data
26.0 Test and report
25.1 Type Test

Type test shall be conducted on one unit of each type of panel with rated
bus-bar and circuit breaker mounted with the unit in accordance with
relevant IS and shall be as mentioned below:
Verification of Temperature rise limit.
Verification of dielectric properties
Verification of the short circuit withstand strength.
Verification of the effectiveness of the protective circuit.
Verification of clearance and creepage distances.
Verification of mechanical operation
Verification of degree of protection.
Type 2 co-ordination test
Breaker - Duty cycle
Mechanical endurance
Electrical endurance
Routine tests shall be conducted on all panels and Distribution boards in
accordance with relevant IS codes and shall be as mentioned below:
Insulation resistance test (IR value) by 1000V megger before HV test.
Dielectric test by applying 2.2 KV for 1 min and noting leakage reactance.
Insulation resistance test by 1000 V megger after H.V test.
Functional controls check for panels.
Logic simulation test.
Current injection test.
Bus-bar purity test
Test reports for all such tests shall be prepared by contractor for submission
along with Inspection offer.
27.0 Inspection
Inspection of the panels shall include inspection of wiring and electrical
operational tests where necessary, Dimensional & Visual verification.
Checking of Protective Measures and electrical continuity of the protective
circuits.
Primary and Secondary Injection Test for Checking of all Meters and Relays
Checking of control Circuit by simulating the conditions. Any such simulator
in case required shall be arranged by contractor / manufacturer / sub-
contractor etc.

28.0 Acceptance Test

All the tests carried out in the routine test shall be asked for acceptance test
and test shall be carried out in similar way except the dielectric test which
shall be carried out at 75% of the routine test voltage.
Testing.
The Capacitor bank shall be subject to tests as specified in relevant Indian
Standards at the factory and the test certificates shall be furnished. Residual
voltage after switching of the capacitors shall not be more than 50 Volts after
one minute. Insulation resistance shall be tested with a 1000 Volts meggar
between phases and phase to earth. Each discharge resistors shall be tested
for its working.
1. The complete Panel assembly shall be installed in accordance with the

manufacturer's installation drawing duly approved by "The consultant "
2. The panels needs to be grouted considering the seismic zone requirement.
3. Panels shall be properly aligned and the leveled within tolerance of +/- 2mm
and shall be ensured with a water level indicator or a laser gun whichever
available. No shim shall be allowed to make a panel level suitably.
4. All live sections and compartments shall be covered with insulation barriers.
5. All the components of the panel shall be easily accessible.
6. The location of installation shall be cleaned and co-ordination shall be made

with other disciplines.
7. Grouting holes shall be provided from inside and the panel shall be suitably and
tightly bolted. No tuck welding with base channel is allowed.
8. Panels shall have peel-able poly layer on the cover for protection from cement,
plaster, paints etc. during the construction period.
9. The holes made in enclosure for cable termination or anything else shall be
made only through drill machine or approved cutting tool with marking of dia done
prior to cutting or drilling. Extra left out holes shall be filled neatly with fire
retardant sealant.
5. The Panel shall be tightly grouted. No spare nuts-bolts shall be left out un-
tightened / open inside the DB enclosure in any case.

6. Gland plates where ever used for cable termination shall be tightly fixed and
shall be earthed.
7. Size of Horizontal and vertical bus bars shall be equal.
8. Switchgears above 63A shall be mounted on bus bars tightly and accurately.
10. Termination lugs shall be tightly fixed and connected and there shall not be
any bare wire strand jetting out of the lugs. Suitable crimping tool shall be used.
And terminal wires shall be coved with heat shrinkable sleeves whose color coding
has to match with the color of the wire used.
12. Color coding shall be followed for internal wiring also in a similar pattern as
described in chaper-1 wiring under the specification document. Bus bar shall be
tagged for phase indication.
13. Capacitors Panels shall be provided with fans controlled by door limit switch
and thermostat
14. The door of panel shall be aligned properly and there shall be no air gap left
after closing the DB door. Gaskets shall be used to make DB free from moisture.
16. Panel shall have Padlocking arrangement and shall be pad locked after
complete installation.
17. Panel board shall be fully tested (both type and routine test) for its
components as per the specification laid under Indian standards. In particular
following test shall be done :
(a) Continuity test (both earth continuity and loop continuity)
(b) Insulation resistance test.
(c) Contact resistance test.
(d) Primary injection test.
(e) Trip test and trip unit reset test with Test knob of breaker.
(f) CT testing (Polarity, Knee voltage)
(g) Phase rotation test.
(h) HV test on bus bar
(i) Space heater Testing
(j) Control wiring checks
F. MEASUREMENTS
1. Measurement shall be done in numbers
G.SUBMITTALS

"Close out"
1. Product data ( P.D )


H. PROCEDURES
contract ".
representative.

commencement of Installation of panels at site with detailed description of how
the job shall be carried out at site along with necessary testing and commissioning
said personnel.


be made.



I.CLAUSES


not be paid extra.
J.CLOSE OUT

(d) Soft Copy of "Operation and maintenance manuals " in pdf format in a pen-
drive.


format.

SUB HEAD: 20
ELEVATORS

1.0 SCOPE: This specification covers design, engineering, manufacture,

painting at manufacturer’s shop as well as at site after erection, inspection and
testing at the manufacturer's and / or his sub vendor's works, packing, delivery
to site, unloading, storage at site, erection, site testing, commissioning, clearance
from elevator inspector, and handing over in perfect working condition the
elevators complete with accessories as required for the project.
• Supply of commissioning spares
• Supply of initial requirement of oil, lubricants & cleaning/ flushing fluid

including replenishment during erection, testing and commissioning of the
elevator
• Any special tools and tackles required for operation and maintenance of the
elevator shall be included in the scope of supply. A list of such tools and tackles
shall be furnished by the vendor.
It is not the intent of this specification to specify completely herein all the details
of design and construction of equipment. However, the equipment offered shall
conform in all respects to high standards of engineering, design and workmanship
and be capable of performing in commercial operation up to Vendor's guarantee
in a manner acceptable to the Purchaser, who will interpret the meaning of
drawings, specification and shall have the power to reject any work or materials,
which in his judgment, are not in full accordance herewith.

Lift Data Sheet

Name of the building
Dining Campus inn International Faculty Admin Acade
Centre Club & mic
Infirma
ry
NUMBER OF 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 2+2 8+8
LIFT
CAPACITY 884 kg. 500 544 kg. 884 kg. 544 884 544 kg. 884 884
(kgs) 13 kg 8 13 kg. kg. 13 8 kg. 13 kg. 13
persons Goods Person person Perso perso Person person person
Lift s s ns ns s s s
Speed (mps) 1 mps 1 mps 1 mps 1 mps 1 mps 1 mps 1 mps 1 mps 1 mps
Rise (m) 5.4 m 5.4 m 9.0 m 9.0 m 6.0 m 6.0 m 3.60 m 2 Lift 8 Lift
GF Landing 0.00 m 0.00 0.0 m 0.0 m 0.0 m 0.0 m 0.0 m with with
level m rise rise
FF Landing 5.40 m 5.40 3.0 m 3.0 m 3.0 m 3.0 m 3.6 m 3.6 m 5.4 m
Level m Land. Land
SF Landing 6.0 m 6.0 m 6.0 m 6.0 m At GF GF 0.0
Level 0.0 m m, F.F.
TF Landing 9.0 m 9.0 m and FF 2.7 m
Level 3.6 and SF
m+ 5.4 m
------ -------
2 Lift + 8 Lift
with with
rise rise
7.2 m 10.8 m
Land Land
GF 0.0 GF 0.0
m, F.F. m, F.F.
3.6 m 5.4 m
and SF and SF
7.2 m 10.4 m
Approximate 10.8 m 10.8 14.4 m 14.4 m 11.4 11.4 10.5 m 13.0 13.0 m
Height of m m m m
Hoist way
Stop 2 Stops 2 4 Stops 4 Stops 3 3 2 Stops
2 3
with Stops with with Stops Stops with Stops Stops
(all with (all (all with with (openin
with with
openin (all openin openin (all (all g on
(all (all
g on openi g on g on openi openi the openin openin
the ng on the the ng on ng on differen
g on g on
same the same same the the t side)
the the
side) same side) side) same same same same
side) side) side) side) side)
+ 3
Stops
all
openin
g on
same
side
CONTROLLE Controller shall be microprocessor based AC variable voltage frequency (ACVVF)
R TYPE Drive.

DRIVE VF Regenerative (Closed Loop)

POWER 415 +/- 5%Volts (3 Phase AC)
SUPPLY
OPERATION Full collective operation With or without attendant mode
CAR GROUP One car/ Two car, (Simplex/Duplex) Common Landing Operating Panel for Duplex
Type Lifts.
MACHINE PM Gearless (Located in shaft on top of guide rail)

TRACTION Flat Coated Steel Belt
MEDIA
CAR FRAME Car Frame shall be in accordance with IS 14665 Part 4 section 3 made of steel
sheet of rigid construction and shall be so mounted on MS frame that the noise
and vibration transmitted to the passenger inside is minimum. The MS parts of
the frame and the sheets exteriors within the shaft shall be painted with approved
quality Epoxy paints.
CAR FINISH
• Rear Mid Panel = Stainless Steel #4(Hairline)
• Rear Corner Panels = Stainless Steel #4(Hairline)
• Side Mid Panels = Stainless Steel #4(Hairline)
• Side Corner Panels = Stainless Steel #4(Hairline)
• Front Panels = Stainless Steel #4(Hairline)
Car enclosure shall withstand a thrust of 35Kg applied at normally at any points
without permanent deformation.
FALSE False ceiling shall be of Stainless steel sheets #4(Hairline) finish with necessary
CEILING recess mounting of LED lights and cut out for Ventilating Fan.
TYPE The roof of car shall be capable of supporting a weight of at least 140 Kg.
VENTILLATI Cross flow fan with automatic sleep provision, size of fan minimum 300 mm dia.
ON
HAND RAILS Stainless Steel Mirror Finish Handrails on rear car panels
FLOORING Granite floor As per architectural detail over M.S. Checkered plates base of car.
CAR DOOR Stainless Steel #4(Hairline)

FINISH
LANDING Stainless Steel #4(Hairline)
DOORS
FINISH
FIRE RATED Fire rating-60mins
DOORS
PIT DEPTH As per manufacturer requirement.
OVERHEAD As per manufacturer requirement.

HOISTWAY As per drawing and Manufacturer Specifications
DIMENSION
S (W x D –
mm)
CAR As per manufacturer Specifications and in confirmation to IS 14665.
DIMENSION
S (W x D x H
- mm)

CAR & Central opening (CO) doors

HOISTWAY
DOOR TYPE
DOOR 900 mm X 2000 mm
OPENING (W
x H - mm)
DOOR DC Door Operator
OPERATOR
COP Stainless Steel #4(Hairline) Cover Plate for Car Opening Panel and
Led illuminated Push buttons of micro pressure type with Braille markings.
CAR Dot matrix(RED LED) Scrolling Display

POSITION
INDICATOR
HALL Surface mounted combined hall button with position indicator and direction
FIXTURES indicator.
HALL Stainless Steel #4(Hairline)
FIXTURE
FACE PLATE
HALL Hall Button with HPI
BUTTON Led illuminated push buttons of micro pressure type with Braille markings.
ARRANGEME
NT
STANDARD Anti-nuisance Car Call Protection (to prevent unnecessary movement of lift due
FEATURES to action of playful children) , Independent Service (for Duplex only) , Overload
Device, Nudging (If the door are prevented from closing for a longer period of
time than a buzzer sounds and doors start closing slowly,, Emergency Firemen’s
Service (Emergency alarm bell at GF can be activated by pressing the alarm
button in the car, device is operated by battery),, Emergency Car Light Unit,
Infrared Curtain Door Protection, Door Time Protection (If the car door does not
close completely after a set time of door close command then the car removes
itself from group operation in Duplex lift.), Emergency Alarm Button, Extra Door
Time of Lobby & Parking (The door open time for Lobby landing at GF is normally
longer than the door open time at upper landings)., Door Open/Close Button,
Manual Rescue Operation, Belt Inspection Drive, Auto Fan Cut Off, Automatic
Rescue operation, Intercom,

GENERAL SPECIFICATION
FOR
ELEVATORS

1.0 General
1.0 The Elevator shall be designed in accordance with IS 14665 (Part 1
to 5) and any other relevant specifications. The tenderer shall also take in
to account local and state regulations as in force for the design and
installation of the lift. In case there is no local lift act is in force, the
Bombay lift act shall be followed.
All electrical works in connection with installation of electric lift shall be

carried out in accordance with provisions of Indian Electricity Act 1910 and
Indian Electricity Rules 1956 amended up to date. The electrical works
shall also confirm CPWD General specifications for electrical works Part I
(Internal) 1994 and Part II (External) 1994 as amended up to date
wherever relevant.
2.0 The Elevator shall be suitable for 24 hours round the clock operation.
3.0 All parts requiring replacement or inspection or lubrication shall be

easily accessible without the need for dismantling of other
parts/equipment. All electrical cables shall be so laid that they are not
liable to damage and can be easily inspected and maintained.
Safe access for maintenance and removal of all mechanical and electrical
parts shall be ensured, without additional scaffolding.
4.0 Lift Power panel for 415V A.C, 50 Hz., 3 phase supply as per power
requirement and 230 V A.C, 1 phase for lighting for each elevators shall
be provided at single point within lift shaft. All control wiring and
necessary cabling for satisfactory operation of lift shall be arranged by the
vendor. Ventilation & Lighting for hoist way shall be done by the vendor
considering 150 lux illumination level, also lighting & ventilation for
elevator shaft shall be a part of bid only.
5.0 The vendor shall furnish drawings for hoist way, arrangement
required to fix gearless machine inside the hoist way, permissible vertical
centre to centre distance between supports for guide rail etc. to work out
civil / structural design and preparation of drawings.
Adequate number of hook shall be provided in the hoist way for erection
and maintenance purpose.
2.0 GENERAL PRINCIPLE:

The motive power to the elevator shall be transmitted on electrical principle.
For this purpose gearless elevator, the hoisting equipment shall be kept inside the
elevator shaft only, no machine room shall be required. The sliding assemble shall
slide on a pair of guide rails during upward and downward motion of the elevator
car. All other systems i.e. elevator door operations, car entrance, hoist way
entrances, car enclosure, signalling and other controls etc. shall be provided as
specified below and indicated in the data sheet.

3.0 HOIST MACHINE:

The hoisting machine shall be of the gearless type with a closed loop VF
drive at speeds indicated in data sheet, with motor, brake discs and drive sheave
compactly mounted within the hoist way. Suitable Sound isolation arrangements
shall be installed to reduce vibration or air borne noise. The motor shall be
reversible type particularly designed for elevator variable frequency service with
high starting torque and low starting current. Sound reducing material shall be
installed under machine. The hoisting machinery shall be gearless type with 3
phase AC synchronous motor of suitable speed.
4.0 EMERGENCY CRANKING:

The hoisting machines shall be provided with means of manual cranking
and to allow release of hoist brake and provide for manual movement of the car
in case of emergency.
5.0 BRAKE:
Disc type Brake shall be spring loaded closed (mechanically applied) and
shall open electrically. Braking shall be by using variable input frequency to bring
elevator to a stop electrically.
6.0 AUTOMATIC SELF -LEVELLING:

The elevator shall be provided with automatic self - levelling feature that
shall bring the elevator car level to within ± 5 mm of the landing floor regardless
of load or direction of travel. The automatic self - levelling feature shall correct for
over travel and rope stretch.
7.0 SPEED GOVERNOR AND SAFETY GEAR:

The car safety shall be operated by a mechanical centrifugal speed
governor. Hook shall be provided in hoist way. The governor shall actuate a switch
when excessive descending speed occurs, disconnecting power to the hoist motor
and applying the brake and actuate safety gear if necessary.
8.0 PIT SWITCH:

An emergency stop switch shall be located in the pit accessible from the pit
access door which when operated shall stop the car regardless of position in the
hoist way. Adequate lighting shall be provided in the pit. Ladder shall be provided
in the lift pit.
9.0 BUFFERS:
Buffers shall be installed in the pit as a means for slowing and stopping the
car and counterweight at the bottom limits of travel, in compliance with local
codes. Clearance from underside of car resting on a fully compressed buffer shall
be not less than 1.20 m. Buffer shall be designed for design speed + 15%. These
shall conform to IS 14665 Part 3.1. Spring or oil buffers only shall be used. Spring
buffers shall be capable of supporting, without being compressed solid, a total
load equivalent to two times the weight of car and its rated load for car buffers
and two times the weight of counter weight for counter weight buffers. The oil

buffers shall be self-resetting type. They will also be provided with means for
determining the oil level.
10.0 GUIDE RAILS:

Steel elevator guide rails shall be installed to guide the car and
counterweight, erected plumb and securely fastened to the building structure,
filled and filled to ensure smooth joints.
11.0 ROLLER GUIDES SHOES:

Rubber encased coil spring tension adjusted roller guides shall be provided
for passenger elevators with speed of 1.00 m/sec or greater, mounted on top and
bottom of the car frame, and on top and bottom of the counterweight frame to
engage their respective guide rails.
12.0 HOISTWAY OPERATING DEVICES:

Redundant series wired terminal stopping devices shall be provided to slow
down and stop the car automatically at the terminal landings. Resetting a tripped
devices shall be done manually only.
13.0 COMPENSATING ROPE:

Compensating ropes shall be provided to compensate for the shifting weight
of the hoist rope. Compensating chain where provided shall be noiseless type
polyurethane enclosed chain.
14.0 COUNTER WEIGHT

A structural steel frame with cast iron or steel plate filler weights shall be
furnished to provide proper counterbalance for smooth and economical operation.
The counterbalance shall be 50% of the rated car load.
15.0 COUNTERWEIGHT GUARD:

A metal (a suitable guided structural steel frame with suitable weights)
counterweight guard shall be furnished and installed at the bottom of the hoist
way, and shall wrap around counterweight rails for a height of no less than 1.80
m in order to protect accidental contact.
16.0 Belts
Flat coated steel belts of adequate size, construction to insure proper
operation of the elevator and give satisfactory and safety assurance. . Belts shall
conform to governing codes or regulations. The factor of safety for belt system
shall be minimum 12.
The Lift shall be provided with inbuilt system to monitor the integrity of the belt
cords for ensuring the safety.
17.0 HOISTWAY MATERIALS:

All hoist way materials shall be non-flammable except travel cable cladding
which shall be flame resistant. All other electrical cables / wires shall be FRLS and
housed in metal conduit or other metal enclosures. Isolation pads shall be provided
in hoist way Cable shall conform to codes and shall anchor to the frame by means

of an equalizing device to insure uniform cable loading. Cable safety shall

minimally conform to governing code. Traveling cable shall be secured to the cars
underside. Cable shall be clear of all obstructions while car is in motion. Cable
jacket shall be rated for immersion in water, salt water and oil. Jacket restraint
shall minimize strain on conductor.
18.0 HOISTWAY ENTRANCES:

For each landing served, furnish and install a complete elevator hoist way
entrance with stainless steel baked enamel painted steel hoist way door frame.
Each entrance shall have centre opening two speed horizontal sliding type doors
suitable for a clear opening as per IS codes, and shall include flush doors of hollow
metal pan type construction, extruded aluminium sill with anti-slip grooving on
the surface door, hanger supports and hanger cover. Exposed surfaces of doors
and frames shall be finished as directed by Architect or Interior Designer.
Corrosion resistant coating shall be applied, wherever required, prior to
completion of the installation.
19.0 HOISTWAY DOORS:

Sheave type two point suspension ball bearing door hangers and tracks
complete shall be furnished for each hoist way opening and adjustable ball bearing
rollers shall take the up thrust of the doors.
Each car and hoist way door leaf shall be fitted with two Teflon or nylon Gibbs as
bottom door stabilizers.
20.0 ARCHITRAVES AND DOORS:

Doors, threshold, door hangers and electro mechanical locks shall be as a
system, fire rated for not less than 1 hour.
21.0 DOOR OPEN CLEARANCE:

Clear door opening shall be 1600 mm as per IS codes. Any other dimension
shall require Owner's approval. Finishes shall be as directed by Interior Designer.
22.0 CAR AND HOISTWAY DOOR OPERATOR:

For each elevator door, a Variable Voltage Variable Frequency (with
harmonic filter) door operator shall be furnished to simultaneously open the car
and hoist way doors when the car is at a landing. The doors shall be closed
simultaneously by motor power.
Emergency key provision shall be made to open doors at top and bottom
landing from outside of the hoist way. The door speeds shall be controlled
independent of hydraulic cushioning.
In the event of interruption of electric power or failure of which shall prevent

elevator movement away from the landing unless the door is in the closed position.
Each hoist way door shall be equipped with a positive electromechanical interlock

and auxiliary door closing device so that the elevator can be operated only after
the interlock circuit is established.
The doors shall open automatically while the car is levelling at the respective
landing. The doors shall automatically close after a predetermined time interval
has elapsed, but the momentary pressure of the "door open" button provided in
the car shall reverse the motion and reopen the doors and reset the time interval
unless over ridden by the infra - red beams monitoring the open door.
The operation shall be possible with or without attendant with the provision
of key in the main operating panel. The emergency push button shall also be
provided to facilitate stopping of elevator at particular landing cancelling all the
registered calls.
It shall not be possible for the car to be started or kept in motion until all
the landing doors and the car door are locked in the closed position.
It shall not be possible to open the landing door from the landing unless the
elevator car is within the particular landing zone.
23.0 SHEAVES:
Sheaves shall be mentioned, balanced and shall maintain cable / sheaves
ratio well within code requirements. Lubrication points shall be extended to a
location that is easily accessible.
24.0 CARFRAME AND SAFETY:

A car frame fabricated from formed or structural steel members shall be
provided with adequate bracing to support the platform and car enclosures. The
car safety shall be integral with car frame, and shall be of the flexible guide clamp
type designed to stop and hold a fully loaded car which exceeds descending speed.
It shall withstand without deformation the operation of safety gear.
The car shall be so mounted on the frame that vibration & noise transmitted to
the passengers inside is minimum.
The MS parts of the frame and the sheets exteriors within the shaft shall be painted
with approved quality Epoxy paints.
25.0 PLATFORM:
The car platform shall be checkered plate steel construction. It shall be
equipped with slip resistant threshold. The entire platform shall rest on rubber
pads, so designed to form an isolating cushion between the car and car frame.
Platform deflection shall be limited to maximum 3 mm under maximum normal
operating conditions. Platform shall conform to local codes. Approved coloured
granite floor finish shall be provided. The weight of the granite stone shall be
considered as the part of dead weight of the car.
26.0 SILL TO SILL CLEARANCE:

Sill to sill clearance shall not exceed 30 mm for all elevators.

27.0 INFRA - RED BEAM DETECTOR:

An infra - red beam device with emitters & receivers shall be installed on
passenger elevator. This device shall monitor traffic across the threshold of the
door and shall initiate door closing 2 seconds after last beam interruption, thus
overriding door open period. There should be minimum of 50 beams criss -
crossing across door height. There shall be no zone in the entire opening that is
not monitored by the device.
28.0 OVER - LOAD FEATURE:

All elevators shall be fitted with over load warning indicator based on
sensing relays fitted in the platform of elevator cabin to illuminate and sound a
buzzer to indicate " Over - load " and subsequently defeat the car's operating
circuits when car load reaches 110% or more of rated load. Car platform may
require stiffening to minimize margin of error resulting from excessive deflection.
When the load exceeds 80 % of the rated load, the car will bypass
automatically all the hall calls along the service direction. This feature shall be
effective under full automatic mode i.e. without attendant service.
29.0 AUTOMATIC RESCUE DEVICE:
All elevators described in these standards must be equipped with an

automatic rescue device which will, upon signal from the central fire alarm
system, manually operated key switch or mains power failure,
automatically move the stalled elevator to the nearest landing, opening of
landing doors and facilitate the rescue of the passenger in the elevator and
close their doors and remain at that floor. All floor and car buttons shall
be rendered ineffective until the system is manually reset. A key operated
switch provided at the ground floor to activate and reset the retrieval
system manually. Self-testing facility shall be provided for all the Elevator
after restoring mains power.
29.1 Emergency operation shall return the elevator to a designated floor,

most commonly the lobby by means of a signal from the automatic fire
alarm system.
29.2 On initiation from the fire alarm system, all elevators traveling away
from the lobby floors shall stop and reverse with opening their doors
indicating fire mode operation to passengers, ignore all car and hall calls
and express to the lobby or alternate landing floor.
29.3 Cars traveling toward lobby shall express to lobby ignoring all car and
hall calls. Cars parked at intermediate floor shall close their doors and
express to lobby. Cars parked at lobby shall open their doors ignoring car
and hall calls. At hall and car buttons shall extinguish and shall accept no
further hall or car registration.
ARD shall activate rescue within 10 sec of power failure.

Battery capacity shall be adequate so as to operate the ARD at least seven

times a day, provided the duration between usage is at least 30 mins.
30.0 TERMINAL & ULTIMATE LIMIT SWITCH:

Limit switches shall be provided to slow down & stop the car automatically
at the terminal landings & ultimate limit switches shall be provided to
automatically cut off the power & apply the brake, should the car travel beyond
the terminal landing.
31.0 ACCELERATION / DECELARATION:

Shall be linear and smooth. Stops shall be made without cable oscillations.
32.0 NOISE LEVELS:

Noise from all stationary equipment shall not intrude into adjoining public
areas. Noise from moving equipment including door operation, car motion, fan,
wind, etc. shall not intrude into adjoining corridors.
33.0 WIRING:
Al wiring and electrical interconnections shall comply with governing codes
and manufacturer standards. Insulated wiring shall have flame retardant and
moisture proof outer Covering, and shall be run in metal conduit, tubing or
approved electrical raceways. Travelling cables shall be flexible and suspended to
relieve strain on individual conductors. A minimum of 10% spare conductors shall
be provided in travelling cable.
34.0 CAR POSITION INDICATOR:

A scrolling alpha numeric car position indicator shall be installed above each
operating panel. The position of the car in the hoist way shall be shown by
illuminating the corresponding landing at which the car is stopped or passing.
35.0 HALL LANTERNS:

Recessed surface mounted directional lanterns with stainless steel
faceplates or finish specified by architects shall be provided at all hoist way
entrances, with up and down indications at intermediate landings and single
indication at terminal landings. When a car is stopping at a landing, the lantern
shall indicate the direction in which the car is travelling and shall become
illuminated prior to arrival of the car. A soft chime shall sound once for the "UP"
direction and twice for the "DOWN" direction to announce the impending arrival of
the associated elevator.
36.0 CALL BUTTON:

Call button and face plate for Goods shall be as per Architect selection. Call
buttons shall have movement of 1.5 mm.
37.0 CAR OPERATING PANEL:

A full length car operating panel shall be provided in each passenger car.
The car operating panel shall contain a bank of mechanical micro movement
illuminated buttons with a maximum movement of 1.5 mm marked to correspond
to the landings serviced. It shall include a series of push buttons corresponding to

the floors served, along with an emergency stop and switches required. Operating
panel shall incorporate the following: floor buttons, door open / close, emergency
stop / alarm, up / down in manual mode, man / auto key switch and fire operation.
A locked compartment integral with operating panel shall contain
a. Up / down button.
b. Open / shut button
c. Alarm Button
d. Floor Button
e. Emergency stop button
f. Car direction indicator
g. Car position indicator
h. Fireman’s service indicator
i. Overload indication
j. Telephone
k. Key for with or without attendant operation.
l. Fire extinguisher as per IS codes shall be provided in the car.
A separate lockless cabinet shall house the emergency telephone.
38.0 LIGHTING:
The cabinet manufacturer shall make all provisions for installation of
lighting fixtures specified in datasheet or by interior designer, including integration
of emergency lighting fixtures. Car light shall be equipped with Automatic sleep
provision.
39.0 FIXTURE FINISHES:

The metal faceplates and required accessories for the operating as well as
signal devices in the cars and at the landings, shall be stainless steel as specified
in data sheet. All fixtures, form and finishes, etc. are subject to the Architect's and
interior designer's approval.
40.0 CAR CLADDING AND FINISHES:

Walls shall be of hair lined stainless steel sheet as per Data sheet.
41.0 INSPECTION OPERATION:

A switch shall be provided in the control panel and also on top of the car to
permit operation of the elevator from top of the car for inspection purposes, with
car and hall buttons inoperative.

42.0 INDEPENDENT SERVICE:

A key operated switch shall be provided which, when actuated, shall
disconnect the elevator from the hall buttons and permit operation from the car
buttons only.
43.0 SAFETY AND INSTALLATION ASPECTS:

The placing of equipment in elevators well should be such as to allow free
movement of maintenance personnel inside and highest level of safety.
43.1 Perforated M.S frame dully galvanized and painted to achieve fire resistance
rating of not less than two hour shall be provided between two hoist-way. One
elevator shall act as fire elevator as and when fire occurs.
43.2 Only authorized persons shall be allowed to work on elevators installation

and proper record thereof during the tests, inspection and maintenance
when necessary shall be taken by in the presence of employer’s representative.
43.3 If during installation any safety or protection device is inoperative, due care
must be taken in order to avoid accidents.
43.4 The car & landing buttons shall be isolated from circuit by switching the
maintenance switch provided on the top of the car / emergency stop switch inside
the car / attendant control switch during maintenance of the elevator.
43.5 As a standard precaution, face plate between the door header and the
corresponding upper landing, sill on each floor must be provided.
43.6 Before any maintenance / repairing work checked that any electro-
mechanical door locks are not short circuited either from the controller or at the
landings.
43.7 Provision of lockable storage space for safe custody of material
44.0 PERMITS & INSTALLATIONS:

The Contractor shall arrange all necessary Local Government permit and
shall make arrangements for inspections and tests required thereby. Including
required license for operation must be obtained
45.0 Submission of Drawings by Lift Vendor and getting the approval from
Engineer – in Charge before supply of equipment.
• Supply of following drawings, documents and manuals:
Following Drawings/documents shall be submitted for approval.
i) The General Arrangement drg. of elevator showing the complete elevation

and plan views of hoist way with drive assembly & drive mounting detail of
elevator, ground pit plan with necessary insert details and load data.
ii) Detail arrangement drawing of elevator car showing all accessories and
fittings attached to the car.
iii) Following electrical drgs. Shall also be submitted by the Tenderer for
approval and or information prior to start of manufacture:

฀ GA of control panel.
฀ GA & Data sheet of motor.
฀ GA of battery, battery charger & Inverter panel.
฀ Calculation for battery.
฀ Power and control schematic diagram
฀ Cable schedule
฀ Schematic control circuit drawing with wiring diagram.
฀ Control write-up & detail of interlocking of lift operation.
฀ Earthling Layout drawing
iv) Drive power calculation and VVVF drive sizing for the elevator.
v) Leaflets and catalogues for drive, brake, couplings, bearings, wire rope and
electrical equipment etc.
Vi) In addition to the above, Purchaser may ask for submission of other
drawings, documents, structural, mechanical and electrical calculations for
scrutiny and reference if required
vii) Instruction manual giving instruction for erection, pre-commissioning,

check-up, operation, abnormal condition, maintenance and repair, Write-up on
control and interlock provided, Recommended inspection points and period of
inspection, Schedule of preventive maintenance, Ordering information for all
replaceable parts, Recommendation for type of lubricants, lubrication points,
frequency of lubrication and lubricant changing schedule etc.
Ordering specification including, catalogues and details for all spares
46.0 INSPECTION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING:
1.0 Bidders shall submit quality assurance plan along with the Bid. The QAP
shall be subjected to Purchaser/consultant approval. This quality assurance plan
will form part of the Purchase Order to enable the Purchaser to assure the quality
of components at various stages of manufacture. The inspection & testing shall be
done as per the approved QAP. All the test certificates shall be submitted as per
approved QAP. Material shall be dispatched only after receiving dispatch clearance
from purchaser/consultant.
2.0 Following test procedures shall be carried out prior to acceptance of elevator
system.
a. Test to determine that the insulation resistance between power and control
lines and earth is as per specified IS codes.

b. Test to determine that the earthing of all conduit, switch, casings and
similar metal works is continuous and of low resistance.
c. Test to determine that the motor, brake, control equipment and door
locking devices and limit switches function correctly.
d. Load test with 100% and 110% of rated load as per clause no.8.1.6 of IS
14665 (Part 2/Sec 1): 2000.
e. Brake to be tested to check whether it can sustained a car at rest with 25%
of contract load.
f. Test to determine that the lift car achieves the specified speed.
g. Test for rated power against actual power consumption under full load.
h. Check for current drawn by each elevator during starting and full load
operation.
i. Sound level check for motors.
j. Visual inspection for all components.
k. The contractor shall guarantee the smooth and noiseless performance of

the elevators System
l. Any other test felt necessary by Purchaser and supplier to ensure proper
functioning and installation of the lift.
Test load & other equipment (stop watch etc.) shall be arranged by the contractor.
3.0 Vendor shall keep all his testing instruments duly calibrated against
standard meters not earlier than 6 months from the date of test of the equipment
covered under this specification, in the presence of Purchaser. Calibration
certificates shall be made available during inspection.
47.0 DEFECT LIABILITY & GUARANTEE:

After completion of the installation of the respective elevator by the
Contractor, maintenance service for the equipment furnished under these
specifications shall be provided for a period of twenty (24) months as a defect
liability period, free of cost. This service shall include regular monthly
examinations of the installations during regular working hours by trained
employees and shall include all necessary adjustments, greasing, oiling, cleaning,
supply of spares and genuine standard parts to keep the equipment in proper
operation, except any parts made necessary by misuse, or neglect caused by
others.
All the materials / equipment shall be governed by guarantee during defect

liability period against any manufacturing defects, design & workmanship. Also
any malfunctioning of equipment / system due to faulty installation / design /
manufacturing process etc. shall be replaced / rectified free of cost by the Main
contractor.

All necessary co-ordination with regard to sub-contracted equipment shall

be carried out by the Main contractor. The Purchaser / Architect / Consultant will
communicate only with the Main Contractor for all matters pertaining to this
contract.
The Maintenance contract shall be separately executed on annual basis after

completion of guarantee period & shall include all consumables required during
the contract.

SUB HEAD: 21
LANDSCAPE WORK

MR 21.001 : Providing and laying non-pressure NP2 class (light duty)

R.C.C. pipes vertically in tree-pits complete as directed by EIC including
supply of all material, labour and equipment up to any lead and lift 900
mm dia R.C.C. pipe
Cement concrete pipes shall be installed in tree-pits along roads and near
structures as shown in contract drawings to prevent tree roots from damaging
constructed areas.
Precast cement concrete pipes of diameter as specified in contract drawings shall
be supplied conforming to IS 458.
Contractor shall unload the pipes on location of laying only just before laying is
about to begin, and trench is prepared. Contractor shall unload the pipes with
great care. Any crack and chipping shall not be accepted, and Contractor shall
replace the pipe at his own cost.
Contractor shall lay the pipe using pulley mechanism such that the pipe is
absolutely vertical, checked with plumb line. Contractor shall level the pipe such
that its finished level matches that shown in contract drawings.
Contractor shall refill the outside portion of the trench manually with excavated
soil with great care not to disturb the laid pipe. Filling shall be done in layers 100
mm thick, and light tamping shall be done such that the pipe is not disturbed.
Contractor shall keep checking the level and alignment of the pipe periodically
with plumb line and correct any errors found.
Precast cement concrete pipes shall be measured in length just before laying,
accurate to the nearest centimetre. This work shall include transport, loading,
installation and soil filling around the pipe. The rate includes the cost of all
materials, equipment, labour, carting, loading & unloading, removal of debris to
local specified within the site, involved in all the operations described above.
MR 21.002 : Supply & application of bentonite clay lining with average

thickness of 75mm to bottom & sides surfaces of water bodies, clearing
and levelling the surface before application of bentonite using a 500kg
roller such that no part of the surface extends out from surroundings by
more than 100mm, rolling & consolidating after application with 500kg
roller, checking for leaks by local filling of water and sealing the same
with bentonite complete, including supply of all material, labour and
equipment as required, up to any lead and lift; as directed by Engineer-
in-Charge
Bentonite clay shall be sourced from approved sources only. Sample shall be
approved by Engineer-in-Charge before supply of bentonite clay.
Area on which bentonite is to be applied shall be cleared of all vegetation, growth,
large and small stones, rubble, etc. Area shall then be made even along the slope
or level on flat area such that there is no unevenness more than 100mm in any
area.
Bentonite shall be applied on this area in thickness of 75mm as shown in drawing,
and directed by Engineer-in-Charge. 500 kg roller shall be used to compact the
bentonite. Area shall be filled with water and checked for leaks or cracks, which
will be filled with bentonite.
Once area is cleared of leakage, protective soil cover of minimum 300mm shall be
laid on top of the bentonite. Protective soil shall be free of any vegetation, growth,

stones, etc and laid to line and level as directed by Engineer-in-Charge and shown
in drawings.
Measurement shall be in cubic metres volume, accurate to a centimetre in each
direction. The rate includes the cost of all materials, equipment, labour, carting,
loading & unloading, removal of debris to local specified within the site, involved
in all the operations described above.
MR 21.003 : Supply & spreading of graded moorum up to 300 mm for play

areas, in layers not exceeding 100mm thick and consolidating with 8 tons
roller, complete including supply of all material, labour and equipment,
up to any lead and lift as directed by EIC
Graded moorum shall be sourced from approved sources only. Sample shall be
approved by Engineer-in-Charge before supply of moorum.
Area on which moorum is to be applied shall be cleared of all vegetation, growth,
large and small stones, rubble, etc. Area shall then be level on flat area such that
there is no unevenness more than 100mm in any area.
Moorum shall be applied on this area in thickness of 100mm as shown in drawing,
and directed by Engineer-in-Charge. 8 ton roller shall be used to compact the
moorum.
Measurement shall be in cubic meters volume, accurate to a centimeter in each
direction. The rate includes the cost of all materials, equipment, labour, carting,
loading & unloading, removal of debris to local specified within the site, involved
in all the operations described above.
MR 21.004 : Supply & application of minimum 2mm thick PU surface on

minimum 8mm thick SBR sub-base for sports surfaces as per
manufacturer's specifications including supply of necessary labor,
material and equipment complete with carting, loading, storage, stacking
of debris and casting up to any lead and lift
PU outdoor sports surfaces shall be installed in high performance sports areas like
tennis courts, basketball courts, volleyball courts, etc
Polyurethane shall conform to relevant Indian Standards & following minimum
specifications:
Friction (Leroux) Dry 0.6 at 20 degrees C or higher
Wet 0.3 at 20 degrees C or higher
Sliding test Dry 0.4 at 20 degrees C or higher

Wet 0.2 at 20 degrees C or higher
Resistance to wear
(EN 660-2, DIN 54004, ASTM C-501) Taber H18 1kg 1000 cycles 3.6%
Gloss (DIN 67530) 3-6%
Surface Texture
Porosity closed
Micro polished
Macro Fine
SBR Rubber granulate sub-base layer shall meet the following specifications and
conform to relevant Indian Standards:
Surface Hardness
(DIN 53505, ASTM D-2240) Shore A=76
Tensile Strength (EN ISO 527-1, DIN 54455) 10 N/ sq mm

Elongation at break (EN ISO 527-1, DIN 54455) 190%

Tear Resistance (DIN 53515) 25 N / mm
All materials shall have a 20 year UV protection manufacturer’s replacement
warranty.
Performance Requirements
PU Sports surfaces installed shall exceed the performance requirements for impact
attenuation and Head Injury Criteria as per the requirements of U.S. Consumer
Product Safety Commission (CPSC) (confirming a maximum deceleration of no
more than 200 g's and a HIC value of no more than 1000 as per ASTM F-1292
method of testing).
The impact attenuation performance shall be documented by a certificate of
compliance and shall be performed using Triax 2000 non-destructive testing
apparatus within 30 days of installation.
Installed System shall conform to following minimum properties:
Vertical Ball Rebounce ( EN 12235 – DIN 18032) 99%
Compression set (ASTM D-395-B) 1.9%
Compression Strength 4 N / sq mm
Impact Resistance ( EN 1517-1999) 11Nm
Static load resistance ( 24 hours) 25 kg/ sq cm
Fire resistance
(DIN 51960) nonflammable class 1
(BS 476 part 7 (1997) nonflammable class 3
Submittals
Contractor shall submit the following before initiation of works:
Manufacturer’s description of product, installation methods, base preparation and
maintenance instructions.
Detailed shop drawings of safety surfacing edging details, material thickness and
base construction.
Color chart of available colors.
MSDS sheets for materials used to construct the same.
Test results confirming product has been tested and is in compliance with ASTM
F-1292.
Statement from the Manufacturer that the system to be installed shall only be
performed by authorized and trained personnel.
Statement from Manufacturer that the binders used in the system has been
specifically designed for playground surfacing.
Toxicity statement from Government approved material testing laboratory.
Sample of the surface system of minimum one square metre size.
Base Preparation
Base shall be prepared from Plain Cement Concrete or Reinforced cement concrete
with a slope of 2% in direction shown in contract drawings.
In order to ensure the consistent performance of the safety surfacing, bases must
be constructed to ensure a firm, stable and draining foundation for the surface.
Any and all contaminated materials or materials that are subject to decomposition
or expansion shall be removed and disposed of.
Ensure drainage of the base material is existing and in working condition.
Construct bases as per manufacturer’s specifications and as directed by EIC.
Surface Installation
Install geotextile filter fabric over base.

Provide protection to curbs, sidewalks and play equipment to eliminate

polyurethane residue on the same.
Minimum 8mm thick SBR rubber for base mat shall be laid as per manufacturer’s
specifications.
Minimum surface layer of 2mm thick polyurethane shall be applied or sprayed as
per manufacturer’s specifications.
Cleanup
Remove any spills or residue that may make contact with structure or surrounding
curbs or sidewalks. On completion of work and the 24 hours curing time, remove
all protection provided for the same.
Measurement
PU Sports surfaces shall be measured in square meters of surfaces installed,
accurate to the nearest centimeter, inclusive but not limited to all necessary
admixtures, equipment, barricades, temporary edges, labour, etc., but exclusive
of base preparation. The rate includes the cost of all materials, equipment, labour,
carting, loading & unloading, removal of debris to local specified within the site,
involved in all the operations described above.
MR 21.005 : Supply, fabrication and installation of play structure

comprising of SS 304 slide for children, wooden deck, ladders, Nylone
rope climbing net, Pergola house and the supporting structure of all the
components as per final detailed drawing. The rate to include necessary
painting of MS structures with approved colour Epoxy paint and all
wooden members to be applied with PU coating etc. complete including
all labour, equipment, material, upto any lead and lift as directed by EIC.
Play structure shall be Fabricated and installed at the site as per detailed drawings
– detail 19 of Drawing number NUC (1) – TD – L3.2 of Landscape details. Relevant
materials specifications as per CPWD Civil works specifications shall be followed.
DSR Item No. 23.28 : Preparation of mounds of various size and shape
by available excavated / supplied earth in layers not exceeding 20 cm in
depth, breaking clods, watering of each layer, dressing etc., lead upto 50
meter and lift upto 1.5 m complete as per direction of Officer-in-charge
DSR Item No. 16.1 : Road Work Preparation and compaction of sub grade
with power road roller of 8 to 12 tonne capacity after excavating earth to
an average of 22.5 cm depth, dressing to camber and compacting with
road roller including making good the undulations etc. and re-rolling the
sub grade and disposal of surplus earth with lead upto 50 metres.
DSR Item No. 16.11 : Dry stone pitching 22.5 cm thick including supply of
stones and preparing surface complete.
DSR Item No. 16.12 : Dry brick pitching half brick thick in drains including
supply of bricks and preparing the surface complete : With common burnt
clay F.P.S. (non modular) bricks of class designation 5

DSR Item No. 16.9 : Providing and laying tactile tile (for vision impaired
persons as per standards) of size 300x300x9.8mm having with water
absorption less than 0.5% and conforming to IS: 15622 of approved make
in all colours and shades in for outdoor floors such as footpath, court yard,
multi modals location etc., laid on 20mm thick base of cement mortar 1:4
(1cement : 4 coarse sand) in all shapes & patterns including grouting the
joints with white cement mixed with matching pigments etc. complete as
per direction of Engineer-in-Charge.
Please refer to relevant paras of Sub Head 16.0 of Road work of the Civil Works
Specifications 2009 Volume II for the above mentioned DSR items.

SUB HEAD: 22
ROAD WORKS

GENERAL
0.1 These Specifications shall apply to all such road and bridge
works as are required to be executed under the Contract or
otherwise directed by the Engineer-in-charge.
0.2 The work of CONSTRUCTION OF INTERNAL ROADS WITHIN

PROPOSED PERMANENT CAMPUS (AS PART OF NON RESIDENTIAL
PARCEL PHASE I) shall be executed as per the Detailed Items
Specifications for Roads & Bridges Works Published by Indian Road
Congress on behalf of Ministry of Road Transport and highways
(MoRTH) with its latest revision.
0.3 The Items not covered under MoRTH specifications, shall be

executed as per relevant specifications of CPWD Civil Works
Specifications Volume I & II (2009)
0.4 The specifications for NON Scheduled itmes not covered by

MoRTH Specifications or CPWD Specifications for Civil works are
given in this booklet.
0.5 In every case, the work shall be carried out to the satisfaction of the
Engineer-in-Charge and conform to the location, lines, dimensions, grades
and cross-sections shown on the drawings or as indicated by the Engineer-
in-Charge. The quality of materials, processing of materials as may be
needed at the site, salient features of the construction work and quality of
finished work shall comply with the requirements set forth in succeeding
sections. Where the drawings and Specifications describe a portion of the
work in only general terms, and not in complete detail, it shall be understood
that only the best general practice is to prevail, materials and workmanship
of the best quality or to be employed and instructions of the Engineer-in-
Charge are to be fully complied with.
0.6 Indian roads Congress Specifications and Recommended Codes of

Practice have been used in the preparations of these specifications. The
latest edition of all Specifications/Standards till 30 (thirty) days before the
final date of submission of the tender, shall be adopted. Reference
mentioned herein shall be applicable to all sections to the extent the context
permits and are intended to supplement the provisions in the particular
section. In case of any discrepancy/ deviation, the provisions in the
particular section shall take precedence.

0.3 INTERPRETATIONS
0.3.1 The Tender authority through Engineer-in-Charge shall be the sole

deciding authority as to the meaning, interpretation and implications for various
provisions of the specifications. His decision in writing shall be final.
0.3.2 Wherever any reference is made to any Indian Standard, it shall be taken
as reference to the latest edition with all amendments issued thereto. In the
event of any variation between the detailed specifications and the Indian
Standard, the former shall take precedence over the latter.
NH SOR Item No. 3.18 Earthwork - Construction of Subgrade and Earthen

Shoulders. (Construction of embankment for subgrade and earthen
shoulders with approved material obtained from borrow pits with all lifts
and lead up to 1000 m, transporting to site, spreading, grading to
required slope and compacting to meet requirement of MoRTH table 300-
2)
Refer 305. EMBANKMENT CONSTRUCTION As per MoRTH Specifications
311. WORKS TO BE KEPT FREE OF WATER
311.1. The Contractor shall arrange for the rapid dispersal of water
collected/accumulated on the earthwork or completed formation during
construction or on the existing roadway or which enters the earthwork or any other
item of work from any source, and where practicable, the water shall be
discharged into the permanent outfall of the drainage system. The arrangements
shall be made in respect of all earthwork including excavation for pipe trenches,
foundations or cuttings.
311.2. The Contractor shall provide, where - necessary, temporary water courses,
ditches, drains, pumping or other means for maintaining the earthwork free from
water. Such provisions shall include carrying out the work of forming the cut
sections and embankments in such manner that their surfaces have at all times a
sufficient minimum
crossfall and, where practicable, a sufficient longitudinal gradient to enable them
to shed water and prevent ponding.
The works involved in keeping the earthwork or any other item of works
free of water shall be deemed as incidental to the respective item of work
and as such no separate payment shall be made for the same.
Refer 1000. Specifications of Materials AS per MoRTH Specifications
Refer 1500. Formwork As per MoRTH Specifications

NH SOR Item No. 12.4 : Concrete work - PCC 1:3:6 in Foundation including
form work (Plain cement concrete 1:3:6 nominal mix in foundation with
crushed stone aggregate 40 mm nominal size mechanically mixed, placed
in foundation and compacted by vibration including curing for 14 days.)
Refer 1700. Specifications for Concrete Works As per MoRTH Specifications
NH SOR Item No. 4.12 : Wet Mix Macadam : Providing laying, spreading
and compacting graded stone aggregate to wet mix macadam
specifications including premixing the materials with water at OMC, in
mechanical mix plant carriage of mix material by tipper to site, laying in
uniform layer with paver in sub base/base course on well prepared
surface and compacting with vibratory roller to achieve desired density
as per relevant MoRTH clause 406
Refer 406. WET MIX MACADAM SUB -BASE/BASE As per MoRTH Specifications
NH SOR Item No. 6.1 : Construction of dry lean cement concrete sub base
over a prepared sub-grade with coarse and fine aggregate conforming to
IS:383, the size of coarse aggregate not exceeding 25 mm, aggregate
cement ratio not to exceed 15:1, aggregate gradation after blending to be
as per specifications, cement content not to be less than 150 Kg/cum,
optimum moisture content to be determined during trial length
construction, concrete strength not to be less than 10 Mpa at 7 days,
mixed in a batching plant, transported to site, for all leads & lifts, laid
with a mechanical paver, compacting with 8-10 tonne vibratory roller,
finishing and curing etc. complete as per direction of Engineer-
incharge.1069 Preparation and consolidation of sub grade with power
road roller of 8 to 12 ton capacity after excavating earth to an average of
22.5 cm depth, dressing to camber and consolidating with road roller
including making good the undulations etc. and re-rolling the sub grade
and disposal of surplus earth with lead up to 50 metres.
Refer 601. DRY LEAN CONCRETE As per MoRTH Specifications
NH SOR Item No. 6.2 : Construction of 225 mm thick un-reinforced, dowel

jointed, plain cement concrete pavement over a prepared sub base with

cement @ 425 kg per cum, coarse and fine aggregate conforming to IS

383, maximum size of coarse aggregate not exceeding 25 mm, mixed in
a batching and mixing plant as per approved mix design, transported to
site and laid with fixed form paver, spread, compacted and finished in a
continuous operation including provision of contraction, expansion,
construction and longitudinal joints, joint filler, separation membrane,
sealant primer, joint sealant, debonding strip, dowel bar, tie rod,
admixtures as approved, curing compound, finishing to lines and grades
as per drawing as per MoRTH clause 602
Refer 602. CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT As per MoRTH Specifications
DSR Item No. 16.68 : Providing and laying 60mm thick factory made
cement concrete interlocking paver block of M -30 grade made by block
making machine with strong vibratory compaction, of approved size,
design & shape, laid in required colour and pattern over and including
50mm thick compacted bed of coarse sand, filling the joints with fine sand
etc. all complete as per the direction of Engineer-in-charge.
DSR Item No. 16.94 : Providing and laying factory made chamfered edge
Cement Concrete paver blocks of required strength, thickness &
size/shape, made by table vibratory method, to attain superior smooth
finish using PU or equivalent moulds, laid in required Grey colour &
pattern over 50mm thick compacted bed of coarse sand, compacting and
proper embedding / laying of inter locking paver blocks into the sand
bedding layer through vibratory compaction by using plate vibrator,
filling the joints with jamuna sand and cutting of paver blocks as per
required size and pattern, finishing and sweeping extra sand in footpath,
parks, lawns, drive ways or light traffic parking etc. all complete as per
manufacturer’s specifications & direction of Engineer -in-Charge: (a) 80
mm thick c.c. paver block of M-30 grade with approved color design and
pattern.
Please refer to relevant paras of Sub Head 16.0 of Road work of the Civil Works
Specifications 2009 Volume II for the above mentioned DSR items.

NH SOR Item No. 8.13 : Road Marking with Hot Applied Thermoplastic
Compound with Reflectorising Glass Beads on Bituminous Surface
(Providing and laying of hot applied thermoplastic compound 2.5 mm
thick including reflectorising glass beads @ 250 gms per sqm area,
thickness of 2.5 mm is exclusive of surface applied glass beads as per
IRC:35 .The finished surface to be level, uniform and free from streaks
and holes.)
Refer 803. ROAD MARKINGS As per MoRTH Specifications
NH SOR Item No. 8.13 (A) : Type - A, "W" : Metal Beam Crash Barrier
(Providing and erecting a "W" metal beam crash barrier comprising of 3
mm thick corrugated sheet metal beam rail, 70 cm above road/ground
level, fixed on ISMC series channel vertical post, 150 x 75 x 5 mm spaced
2 m centre to centre, 1.8 m high, 1.1 m below ground/road level, all steel
parts and fitments to be galvanised by hot dip process, all fittings to
conform to IS:1367 and IS:1364, metal beam rail to be fixed on the
vertical post with a spacer of channel section 150 x 75 x 5 mm, 330 mm
long complete as per clause 810)
Refer 810. METAL BEAM CRASH BARRIER As per MoRTH Specifications

Nalanda Non Residential Specifications Part II Services

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Nalanda Non Residential Specifications Part II Services

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Nalanda Non Residential Specifications Part II Services

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

DEVELOPMENT OF PERMENENT CAMPUS OF NU, RAJGIR

TENDER FOR CONSTRUCTION AND DEVELOPMENT WORKS OF NON

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS PART- II

ARCHITECT AND PLANNERS

Client: NU TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Page 1 of 325

SR. No. Name of Sub-Head

14 SANITARY FIXTURES & FITTINGS

16 EXTERNAL PLUMBING WORKS

17 PUMPS TREATMENT SYSTEMS & EQUIPMENTS

18 FIRE FIGHTING WORKS

Client: NU TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Page 2 of 325

14 SANITARY FIXTURES & FITTINGS

Client: NU TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Page 3 of 325

GENERAL NOTES PLUMBING WORKS

Client: NU TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Page 4 of 325

Architects may instruct the contractor to provide chromium plated or other

Client: NU TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Page 5 of 325

 CONNECTION TO MECHANICAL EQUIPMENTS BY OTHER

 MISCELLANEOUS WORK : The contractor carrying out the construction

 CLEARANCE FOR ROADS AND FOOT PATHS : The contractor shall

Client: NU TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Page 6 of 325

 FORMALITIES WITH STATUTORY BODIES: The work shall be carried

Client: NU TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Page 7 of 325

Client: NU TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Page 8 of 325

Client: NU TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Page 9 of 325

1.0 APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS

IS: 325 Three phase induction Motors

IS: 779 Specification for water meters (domestic type).

Code of Basic requirements for water supply drainage

IS: 1742 Code of practice for building drainage.

Code of practice selection, installation and maintenance

IS: 2065 Code of practice for water supply in buildings.

IS: 2373 Specification for water meter (bulk type)

IS: 2379 Color code for identification of pipelines

Code of practice for fixing rainwater gutters and down

IS: 3114 Code of practice for laying of cast iron pipes

Code of Practice for ancillary structures in sewerage

IS: 4127 Code practice for laying glazed stoneware pipes.

Code of practice for sanitary pipe work above ground

Client: NU TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Page 10 of 325

IS: 8321 Glossary of terms applicable to plumbing work.

Requirements for water filtration equipment: Part 1

Requirements for water filtration equipment: part 2

Code of practice for provision and maintenance of water

IS: 12251 Code of practice of drainage of building basements.

IS: 5572 Code of practice for sanitary pipe work.

BS:8301 Code of practice for building drainage.

Sanitary tap ware, waste fittings for basins, bidets and

ii. PIPES AND FITTINGS:

Specification for pre cast concrete pipes (with and without

Client: NU TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Page 11 of 325

BIS: 3468 Pipe nuts.

IS: 13592 UPVC Pipes & Fittings - Internal Drainage

IS: 4985 UPVC Pipes and Fittings for Rainwater

IS: 15328 External Sewer Drainage

Client: NU TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Page 12 of 325

IS: 2692 Specification for ferrule for water services.

Client: NU TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Page 13 of 325

Client: NU TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Page 14 of 325